You are on page 1of 1027

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500

V200R011C03
Configuration Guide (Packet
Transport Domain)
Issue 03
Date 2013-02-20
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2013. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.






Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
i
About This Document
Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Product Name Version
OptiX OSN 7500 II V200R011C03
OptiX OSN 7500 V200R011C03
OptiX OSN 3500 V200R011C03
OptiX OSN 1500 V200R011C03
iManager U2000 V100R006C00 and later

Intended Audience
This document describes the configuration of different types of Ethernet services of the OptiX
OSN equipments with regard to configuration flow, networking diagram, service planning, and
configuration process.
This document describes the methods of configuring different types of Ethernet services on the
U2000.
The intended audience of this document is:
l Installation and commissioning engineer
l Data configuration engineer
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) About This Document
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ii
Symbol Description
DANGER
DANGER indicates a hazard with a high level or medium
level of risk which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
WARNING
WARNING indicates a hazard with a low level of risk which,
if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation that,
if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance deterioration, or unanticipated results.
TIP
Provides a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time.
NOTE
Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement
important points in the main text.

GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles
are in boldface. For example, click OK.
> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"
signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Change History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains
all updates made in previous issues.
Updates in Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Based on Product Version
V200R011C03
This document of the V200R011C03 version is of the third release. Compared with Issue 02,
Issue 03 includes the following updates in V200R011C03SPC200:
l "E-Line Service Parameters (Configuration on a Per-NE Basis)" is optimized in section
"Parameter Description: E-Line Service."
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) About This Document
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iii
Updates in Issue 02 (2012-03-15) Based on Product Version
V200R011C03
This document of the V200R011C03 version is of the second release. Compared with the
previous release, this version has the following new or optimized contents:
l Updated the document based on its supporting NMS.
Updates in Issue 01 (2012-01-30) Based on Product Version
V200R011C03
This document of the V200R011C03 version is of the first release. Compared with the previous
release, this version has the following new or optimized contents:
l In topic "Configuring E-Line Services", the description of "Configuration Example: E-Line
Services Carried by PWs (Network Adjustment Based on VLAN Priorities)" is added.
l In topic "Configuring E-Line Services", the description of "Configuration Example: E-Line
Services Carried by PWs (Network Adjustment Based on VLAN Switching)" is added.
l "Configuring UNI-NNI E-Line Services Carried by PWs on a Per-NE Basis" is optimized.
l "Configuring E-Line Services Carried by PWs in End-to-End Mode" is optimized.
l "E-Line Service Parameters (Configuration on a Per-NE Basis)" is optimized.
l "E-Line Service Parameters (Configuration in End-to-End Mode)" is optimized.
Updates in Issue 02 (2011-10-26) Based on Product Version
V200R011C02
This document of the V200R011C02 version is of the second release. Compared with the
previous release, this version has the following new or optimized contents:
l In topic "Configuration Example: E-AGGR Services Carried by PWs", the description of
"Configuration Process (in End-to-End Mode)" is added.
l In topic "Configuration Task Collection", the description of "Creating E-AGGR Services
Carried by PWs in End-to-End Mode" is added.
l In topic "Configuration Task Collection", the description of "Configuring an ATM Policy
Profile" is added.
l In topic "Configuration Task Collection", the description of "Configuring an ATM CoS
Mapping Profile" is added.
l In topic "Parameter Description", the description of "Parameters for Configuring E-AGGR
Services (End-to-End Mode)" is added.
l "Split Horizon Group" is optimized.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) About This Document
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iv
Updates in Issue 01 (2011-07-15) Based on Product Version
V200R011C02
This document of the V200R011C02 version is of the first release. Compared with the previous
release, this version has the following new or optimized contents:
l "Configuring ATM Services" is added.
l In topic "Configuration Task Collection", the description of "Configuring ATM PWE3
Services" is added.
l In topic "Configuration Task Collection", the description of "Managing the Blacklist" is
added.
l In topic "Parameter Description", the description of "Parameter Description: ATM/IMA
Services" is added.
l In topic "Parameter Description", the description of "Parameter Description: Address
Parse" is added.
l "Creating the Network" is optimized.
l "Configuration Example: E-Line Services Carried by PWs" is optimized.
Updates in Issue 02 (2011-04-15) Based on Product Version
V200R011C01
This document of the V200R011C01 version is of the second release. Compared with the
previous release, this version has the following new or optimized contents:
l In topic "Managing PWE3 Services", the description of "Searching for PWE3 Services" is
added.
l In topic "Configuration Task Collection", the description of "Configuring the NE-Level
TPID" is added.
l In topic "Parameter Description", the description of "Parameter Description: CES Port" is
added.
l In topic "Parameter Description", the description of "Parameter Description: MPLS OAM"
is added.
l In topic "Parameter Description", the description of "Parameter Description: MPLS Tunnel
APS" is added.
l "Creating Optical Fibers by Searching for the Optical Fibers on the NMS" is optimized.
l "Verifying the Correctness of E-Line Service Configuration" is optimized.
l "Configuring an MPLS Tunnel" is optimized.
Updates in Issue 01 (2011-01-25) Based on Product Version
V200R011C01
This document of the V200R011C01 version is of the first release. Compared with the previous
release, this version has the following new or optimized contents:
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) About This Document
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
v
l In topic "Configuration Task Collection", the description of "Managing MPLS Tunnels"
is added.
l In topic "Configuration Task Collection", the description of "Managing MPLS Tunnel APS
Protection Groups" is added.
l In topic "Parameter Description", the description of "Parameter Description: CES Services"
is added.
Updates in Issue 02 (2010-11-01) Based on Product Version
V200R011C00
This document of the V200R011C00 version is of the second release. Compared with the first
release, the contents of this document are modified or optimized as follows:
l In topic "Operation Task for Configuring E-LAN Services", the description of "Configuring
E-LAN Services Carried by PWs in End-to-End Mode" is added.
l In topic "Configuration Example: E-LAN Services Carried by PWs", the description of
"Configuration Process (in End-to-End Mode)" is added.
l "Configuring Cross-Domain Services" is optimized.
Updates in Issue 01 (2010-07-20) Based on Product Version
V200R011C00
This document of the V200R011C00 version is of the first release. Compared with
V100R009C03, this version has the following new or optimized contents:
l OptiX OSN 7500 is added.
l "Starting the T2000" is deleted.
l "Getting Started" is added.
l "Creating the Network" is added.
l "Configuring E-Line Services Carried by PWs in End-to-End Mode" is added.
l "Configuring Cross-Plane Services" is added.
l "Configuring CES Services" is added.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) About This Document
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vi
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii
1 Getting Started...............................................................................................................................1
1.1 Starting or Shutting Down the U2000................................................................................................................2
1.1.1 Starting the U2000 Server.........................................................................................................................2
1.1.2 Logging In to the U2000 Client.................................................................................................................2
1.1.3 Exiting a U2000 Client..............................................................................................................................3
1.1.4 Shutting Down the U2000 Server..............................................................................................................3
1.2 Main Windows and Common Operations of the U2000....................................................................................4
1.2.1 Components of the Client GUI..................................................................................................................4
1.2.2 Key GUI Components...............................................................................................................................6
1.2.3 Frequently Used Buttons...........................................................................................................................7
1.2.4 Shortcut Icon..............................................................................................................................................9
1.2.5 Common Shortcut Keys...........................................................................................................................11
1.2.6 Main Windows........................................................................................................................................12
1.2.6.1 Workbench......................................................................................................................................12
1.2.6.2 Main Topology...............................................................................................................................12
1.2.6.3 NE Explorer....................................................................................................................................14
1.2.6.4 Clock View.....................................................................................................................................15
1.2.6.5 NE Panel.........................................................................................................................................17
1.2.6.6 Browse Alarm.................................................................................................................................17
1.2.6.7 Browse Event..................................................................................................................................17
1.2.6.8 Browse Performance Window........................................................................................................18
2 Creating the Network.................................................................................................................19
2.1 Creating NEs, Fibers and Subnet......................................................................................................................20
3 Configuring E-Line Services.....................................................................................................21
3.1 Basic Concepts.................................................................................................................................................23
3.1.1 E-Line Services........................................................................................................................................23
3.1.2 UNI..........................................................................................................................................................27
3.1.3 NNI..........................................................................................................................................................28
3.2 Configuration Flow for the E-Line Services....................................................................................................28
3.2.1 Configuration Flow for the UNI-UNI E-Line Services ..........................................................................29
3.2.2 E-Line Services Carried by Ports ...........................................................................................................33
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) Contents
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vii
3.2.3 E-Line Services Carried by PWs ............................................................................................................35
3.2.4 E-Line Services Carried by QinQ Links .................................................................................................38
3.3 Configuration Example: UNI-UNI E-Line Services........................................................................................43
3.3.1 Networking Diagram...............................................................................................................................43
3.3.2 Service Planning......................................................................................................................................44
3.3.3 Configuration Process..............................................................................................................................45
3.4 Configuration Example: E-Line Services Carried by Ports..............................................................................48
3.4.1 Networking Diagram...............................................................................................................................48
3.4.2 Service Planning......................................................................................................................................49
3.4.3 Configuration Process..............................................................................................................................51
3.4.4 Verifying the Correctness of E-Line Service Configuration...................................................................53
3.5 Configuration Example: E-Line Services Carried by PWs (Newly Created)...................................................55
3.5.1 Networking Diagram...............................................................................................................................55
3.5.2 Service Planning......................................................................................................................................57
3.5.3 Configuration Process (in End-to-End Mode).........................................................................................60
3.5.4 Configuration Process (Configuration on a Per-NE Basis).....................................................................66
3.5.5 Verifying E-Line Services.......................................................................................................................74
3.6 Configuration Example: E-Line Services Carried by PWs (Network Adjustment Based on VLAN Priorities)
................................................................................................................................................................................75
3.6.1 Networking Diagram...............................................................................................................................75
3.6.2 Service Planning......................................................................................................................................77
3.6.3 Configuration Process (in End-to-End Mode).........................................................................................80
3.6.4 Configuration Process (Configuration on a Per-NE Basis).....................................................................87
3.6.5 Verifying E-Line Services.......................................................................................................................95
3.7 Configuration Example: E-Line Services Carried by PWs (Network Adjustment Based on VLAN Switching)
................................................................................................................................................................................97
3.7.1 Networking Diagram...............................................................................................................................97
3.7.2 Service Planning......................................................................................................................................99
3.7.3 Configuration Process (in End-to-End Mode).......................................................................................102
3.7.4 Configuration Process (Configuration on a Per-NE Basis)...................................................................108
3.7.5 Verifying the Correctness of E-Line Service Configuration.................................................................117
3.8 Configuration Example: E-Line Services Carried by QinQ links..................................................................118
3.8.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................118
3.8.2 Service Planning....................................................................................................................................120
3.8.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................121
3.8.4 Verifying the Correctness of E-Line Service Configuration.................................................................124
4 Configuring E-LAN Services...................................................................................................127
4.1 Basic Concepts...............................................................................................................................................128
4.1.1 E-LAN Services.....................................................................................................................................128
4.1.2 UNI........................................................................................................................................................131
4.1.3 NNI........................................................................................................................................................132
4.1.4 Split Horizon Group..............................................................................................................................132
4.2 Configuration Flow for the E-LAN Services.................................................................................................133
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) Contents
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
viii
4.2.1 E-LAN Services Carried by Ports ........................................................................................................133
4.2.2 E-LAN Services Carried by PWs .........................................................................................................138
4.2.3 E-LAN Services Carried by QinQ Links ..............................................................................................142
4.3 Configuration Example: E-LAN Services Carried by Ports...........................................................................146
4.3.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................146
4.3.2 Service Planning....................................................................................................................................147
4.3.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................149
4.3.4 Verifying the Correctness of E-LAN Service Configuration................................................................153
4.4 Configuration Example: E-LAN Services Carried by PWs...........................................................................155
4.4.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................156
4.4.2 Service Planning....................................................................................................................................157
4.4.3 Configuration Process (in End-to-End Mode).......................................................................................161
4.4.4 Configuration Process (Configuration on a Per-NE Basis)...................................................................163
4.4.5 Verifying the E-LAN Service Configuration........................................................................................169
4.5 Configuration Example: E-LAN Services Carried by QinQ links.................................................................170
4.5.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................170
4.5.2 Service Planning....................................................................................................................................171
4.5.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................173
4.5.4 Verifying the Correctness of E-LAN Service Configuration................................................................177
5 Configuring E-AGGR Services...............................................................................................180
5.1 Basic Concepts...............................................................................................................................................181
5.1.1 E-AGGR Services..................................................................................................................................181
5.1.2 UNI........................................................................................................................................................183
5.1.3 NNI........................................................................................................................................................184
5.2 Configuration Flow for the E-AGGR Services..............................................................................................184
5.2.1 E-AGGR Services Carried by Ports .....................................................................................................185
5.2.2 E-AGGR Services Carried by PWs ......................................................................................................189
5.3 Configuration Example: E-AGGR Services Carried by Ports........................................................................195
5.3.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................195
5.3.2 Service Planning....................................................................................................................................197
5.3.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................198
5.4 Configuration Example: E-AGGR Services Carried by PWs........................................................................203
5.4.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................203
5.4.2 Service Planning....................................................................................................................................205
5.4.3 Configuration Process (in End-to-End Mode).......................................................................................208
5.4.4 Configuration Process (Configuration on a Per-NE Basis)...................................................................211
5.5 Verifying the Correctness of E-AGGR Service Configuration......................................................................217
6 Configuring Cross-Domain Services.....................................................................................221
6.1 Introduction to the Cross-Connect Board.......................................................................................................222
6.2 Configuration Flow for the Cross-Domain Services......................................................................................223
6.3 Configuration Example (Application Scenario 1)..........................................................................................226
6.3.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................226
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) Contents
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ix
6.3.2 Service Planning....................................................................................................................................227
6.3.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................231
6.4 Configuration Example (Application Scenario 2)..........................................................................................235
6.4.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................235
6.4.2 Service Planning....................................................................................................................................236
6.4.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................240
6.5 Configuration Example (Application Scenario 3)..........................................................................................244
6.5.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................244
6.5.2 Service Planning....................................................................................................................................245
6.5.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................251
6.6 Testing Cross-domain Services......................................................................................................................255
6.6.1 Using the Ping Commands to Test Cross-domain Services..................................................................256
6.6.2 Using Loopbacks to Test Cross-domain Services.................................................................................258
7 Configuring CES Services........................................................................................................260
7.1 Introduction to CES........................................................................................................................................261
7.2 Configuration Flow for the CES Services......................................................................................................263
7.2.1 Configuration Flow for UNI-UNI CES Services..................................................................................263
7.2.2 Configuration Flow for the UNI-NNI CES Services.............................................................................264
7.3 Configuration Example (UNI-UNI CES Services)........................................................................................266
7.3.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................266
7.3.2 Service Planning....................................................................................................................................266
7.3.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................267
7.4 Configuration Example (UNI-NNI CES Services)........................................................................................270
7.4.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................270
7.4.2 Service Planning....................................................................................................................................271
7.4.3 Configuration Process (Configuration on a Per-NE Basis)...................................................................275
7.4.4 Configuration Process (in End-to-End Mode).......................................................................................281
7.5 Verifying CES Service Configuration............................................................................................................289
8 Configuring ATM Services......................................................................................................292
8.1 Introduction to ATM......................................................................................................................................293
8.2 Configuration Flow for the ATM Services.....................................................................................................294
8.2.1 Configuration Flow for UNI-UNI ATM Services.................................................................................294
8.2.2 Configuration Flow for UNIs-NNI ATM Services...............................................................................295
8.3 Configuration Example (UNI-UNI ATM Services).......................................................................................297
8.3.1 Network Diagram..................................................................................................................................297
8.3.2 Service Planning....................................................................................................................................298
8.3.3 Configuring an ATM Service on a Per-NE Basis..................................................................................300
8.4 Configuration Example (UNIs-NNI ATM Services).....................................................................................304
8.4.1 Network Diagram..................................................................................................................................304
8.4.2 Service Planning....................................................................................................................................306
8.4.3 Configuration Process (in End-to-End Mode).......................................................................................310
8.4.4 Configuration Process (Configuration on a Per-NE Basis)...................................................................335
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) Contents
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
x
8.5 Verifying ATM Service Configuration..........................................................................................................355
9 Configuration Task Collection............................................................................................... 357
9.1 Configuring an Ethernet Port..........................................................................................................................360
9.1.1 Setting the General Attributes of Ethernet Interfaces............................................................................361
9.1.2 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of Ethernet Ports....................................................................................362
9.1.3 Setting the Layer 3 Attributes of Ethernet Ports....................................................................................362
9.1.4 Setting the Advanced Attributes of Ethernet Ports................................................................................363
9.1.5 Configuring the Flow Control...............................................................................................................363
9.2 Configuring CES Ports...................................................................................................................................364
9.2.1 Configuring Channelized STM-1 Ports.................................................................................................364
9.2.2 Configuring E1 Ports.............................................................................................................................365
9.3 Configuring the NNIs.....................................................................................................................................366
9.3.1 Configuring the NNIs for Ethernet Services Carried by Ports..............................................................366
9.3.2 Configuring the NNIs for Ethernet Services Carried by Static MPLS Tunnels....................................367
9.3.3 Configuring the NNIs for Ethernet Services Carried by QinQ Links...................................................368
9.4 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel........................................................................................................................369
9.4.1 Configuring LSR ID..............................................................................................................................369
9.4.2 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel on a Per-NE Basis.................................................................................370
9.4.2.1 Configuring a Unidirectional Static MPLS Tunnel on a Per-NE Basis.......................................370
9.4.2.2 Configuring a Bidirectional Static MPLS Tunnel on a Per-NE Basis..........................................372
9.4.3 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel in an End-to-End Mode........................................................................373
9.4.3.1 Configuring a Static and Unidirectional MPLS Tunnel in End-to-End Mode.............................374
9.4.3.2 Configuring a Static and Bidirectional MPLS Tunnel in End-to-End Mode...............................376
9.5 Managing MPLS Tunnels...............................................................................................................................378
9.5.1 Searching for MPLS Tunnels................................................................................................................379
9.5.2 Checking the MPLS Tunnel Topology..................................................................................................379
9.5.3 Duplicating MPLS Tunnels...................................................................................................................380
9.5.4 Deploying MPLS Tunnels.....................................................................................................................381
9.5.5 Deleting MPLS Tunnels........................................................................................................................382
9.5.6 Managing Discrete MPLS Tunnels.......................................................................................................383
9.6 Configuring MPLS OAM...............................................................................................................................383
9.6.1 Configuring the MPLS OAM on a Per-NE Basis..................................................................................383
9.6.2 Configuring MPLS OAM in End-to-End Mode....................................................................................386
9.7 Configuring MPLS Tunnel APS.....................................................................................................................388
9.7.1 Configuring MPLS Tunnel APS on a Per-NE Basis.............................................................................389
9.7.2 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel APS in End-to-End Mode.....................................................................390
9.8 Managing MPLS Tunnel APS Protection Groups..........................................................................................392
9.8.1 Automatically Discovering Protection Groups......................................................................................392
9.8.2 Deploying MPLS Tunnel APS Protection Groups................................................................................393
9.8.3 Ranaming an MPLS Tunnel APS Protection Group.............................................................................393
9.8.4 Deleting MPLS Tunnel APS Protection Groups...................................................................................394
9.9 Operation Tasks for Configuring E-Line Services.........................................................................................395
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) Contents
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xi
9.9.1 Configuring UNI-UNI E-Line Services................................................................................................395
9.9.2 Configuring UNI-NNI E-Line Services Carried by Ports.....................................................................397
9.9.3 Configuring UNI-NNI E-Line Services Carried by PWs on a Per-NE Basis........................................398
9.9.4 Configuring E-Line Services Carried by PWs in End-to-End Mode....................................................400
9.9.5 Creating UNI-NNI E-Line Services Carried by QinQ Links................................................................402
9.10 Operation Task for Configuring E-LAN Services........................................................................................403
9.10.1 Configuring E-LAN Services Carried by Ports...................................................................................404
9.10.2 Creating E-LAN Services Carried by PWs on a Per-NE Basis...........................................................406
9.10.3 Configuring E-LAN Services Carried by PWs in End-to-End Mode.................................................408
9.10.4 Configuring E-LAN Services Carried by QinQ Links........................................................................410
9.11 Configuring E-AGGR Services....................................................................................................................413
9.11.1 Configuring E-AGGR Services Carried by Ports................................................................................413
9.11.2 Creating E-AGGR Services Carried by PWs on a Per-NE Basis........................................................414
9.11.3 Creating E-AGGR Services Carried by PWs in End-to-End Mode....................................................416
9.12 Configuring Transit Nodes for Ethernet Services........................................................................................418
9.12.1 Configuring Transit NEs for Ethernet Services Carried by Ports........................................................418
9.12.2 Configuring Transit NEs for Ethernet Services Carried by PWs........................................................419
9.12.3 Configuring Transit NEs for Ethernet Services Carried by QinQ Links.............................................420
9.13 Operation Tasks for Configuring CES Services...........................................................................................421
9.13.1 Creating UNI-UNI CES Services on a Per-NE Basis..........................................................................421
9.13.2 Creating UNI-NNI CES Services on a Per-NE Basis..........................................................................422
9.13.3 Creating a CES Service in End-to-End Mode.....................................................................................424
9.14 Configuring Transit NEs for CES Services..................................................................................................428
9.15 Configuring ATM PWE3 Services...............................................................................................................428
9.15.1 Configuring ATM Interfaces...............................................................................................................428
9.15.2 Configuring an ATM Policy Profile....................................................................................................433
9.15.3 Configuring an ATM CoS Mapping Profile........................................................................................434
9.15.4 Creating an ATM Service by Using the Trail Function......................................................................436
9.15.5 Creating ATM Services on a Per-NE Basis.........................................................................................438
9.16 Managing PWE3 Services............................................................................................................................441
9.16.1 Searching for PWE3 Services..............................................................................................................442
9.16.2 Checking the PWE3 Service Status.....................................................................................................442
9.16.3 Deploying PWE3 Services..................................................................................................................443
9.16.4 Modifying PWE3 Services..................................................................................................................444
9.16.5 Deleting PWE3 Services.....................................................................................................................445
9.16.6 Managing Discrete PWE3 Services.....................................................................................................445
9.17 Managing Composite Services.....................................................................................................................446
9.17.1 Automatically Discovering Composite Services.................................................................................446
9.17.2 Deploying Composite Services...........................................................................................................447
9.18 Configuring Address Resolution..................................................................................................................448
9.19 Configuring the NE-Level TPID..................................................................................................................449
9.20 Creating a QinQ Link...................................................................................................................................449
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) Contents
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xii
9.21 Creating a V-UNI Group..............................................................................................................................450
9.22 Managing the Blacklist.................................................................................................................................451
10 Parameter Description............................................................................................................453
10.1 Parameter Description: Attributes of Ethernet Interface .............................................................................455
10.1.1 General Attributes................................................................................................................................455
10.1.2 Flow Control........................................................................................................................................456
10.1.3 Layer 2 Attributes................................................................................................................................459
10.1.4 Layer 3 Attributes................................................................................................................................461
10.1.5 Advanced Attributes............................................................................................................................462
10.2 Parameter Description: MPLS......................................................................................................................464
10.2.1 Basic Configuration.............................................................................................................................464
10.2.2 Parameters for Configuring a Static Tunnel (on a Per-NE Basis).......................................................464
10.2.3 Parameters for Configuring a Static Tunnel (End-to-End Mode).......................................................469
10.3 Parameter Description: E-Line Service........................................................................................................476
10.3.1 E-Line Service Parameters (Configuration on a Per-NE Basis)..........................................................476
10.3.2 E-Line Service Parameters (Configuration in End-to-End Mode)......................................................478
10.3.3 UNI Parameters...................................................................................................................................489
10.3.4 NNI Parameters...................................................................................................................................490
10.3.5 Maintenance Association.....................................................................................................................493
10.3.6 MEP Point............................................................................................................................................494
10.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service.......................................................................................................495
10.4.1 E-LAN Service Parameters (Configuration on a Per-NE Basis).........................................................495
10.4.2 E-LAN Service Parameters (Configuration in End-to-End Mode).....................................................496
10.4.3 UNI Parameters...................................................................................................................................507
10.4.4 NNI Parameters...................................................................................................................................508
10.4.5 Split Horizon Group............................................................................................................................512
10.4.6 MAC Address Learning Parameters....................................................................................................512
10.4.7 Unknown Frame Processing................................................................................................................513
10.4.8 Static MAC Address............................................................................................................................514
10.4.9 Maintenance Association.....................................................................................................................514
10.4.10 MEP Point..........................................................................................................................................515
10.4.11 V-UNI Group.....................................................................................................................................516
10.5 Parameter Description: E-AGGR Service....................................................................................................517
10.5.1 E-AGGR Service Parameters (on a Per-NE Basis).............................................................................517
10.5.2 Parameters for Configuring E-AGGR Services (End-to-End Mode)..................................................517
10.5.3 UNI Parameters...................................................................................................................................522
10.5.4 NNI Parameters...................................................................................................................................523
10.5.5 VLAN Forwarding Table Item............................................................................................................526
10.5.6 Maintenance Association.....................................................................................................................527
10.5.7 MEP Point............................................................................................................................................528
10.6 Parameter Description: CES Port.................................................................................................................528
10.6.1 Channelized STM-1 Port.....................................................................................................................528
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) Contents
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xiii
10.6.2 E1 Port.................................................................................................................................................532
10.7 Parameter Description: CES Services..........................................................................................................535
10.7.1 Basic Configuration Parameters (UNI-UNI).......................................................................................535
10.7.2 Basic Configuration Parameters (UNI-NNI).......................................................................................536
10.7.3 QoS (UNI-NNI)...................................................................................................................................539
10.7.4 Advanced Attributes (UNI-NNI).........................................................................................................540
10.7.5 Parameters for Configuring CES Services (End-to-End Mode)..........................................................544
10.8 Parameter Description: ATM/IMA Services................................................................................................547
10.8.1 Creating an ATM Service....................................................................................................................547
10.8.2 Connection...........................................................................................................................................549
10.8.3 CoS Mapping.......................................................................................................................................552
10.8.4 Configuring an ATM Service Class Mapping Table...........................................................................552
10.8.5 ATM Policies.......................................................................................................................................553
10.8.6 SDH Interface......................................................................................................................................559
10.8.7 IMA Group Management....................................................................................................................562
10.9 Parameter Description: MPLS OAM...........................................................................................................567
10.9.1 Tunnel OAM Parameters.....................................................................................................................567
10.9.2 Ping Test..............................................................................................................................................570
10.9.3 Traceroute Test....................................................................................................................................570
10.10 Parameter Description: MPLS Tunnel APS...............................................................................................571
10.10.1 Parameters for Configuring MPLS Tunnel APS (on a Per-NE Basis)..............................................571
10.10.2 Parameters for Configuring MPLS Tunnel APS (in End-to-End Mode)..........................................572
10.11 Parameter Description: Inband DCN..........................................................................................................575
10.11.1 Port Settings.......................................................................................................................................575
10.11.2 Access Control...................................................................................................................................576
10.11.3 Bandwidth Management....................................................................................................................577
10.12 Parameter Description: QinQ Link Configuration Parameters...................................................................577
10.13 Parameter Description: Address Parse.......................................................................................................579
A List of Parameters.....................................................................................................................580
A.1 Ethernet Port Associated Parameters (Packet Mode)....................................................................................582
A.1.1 MAC Loopback(Ethernet Interface).....................................................................................................582
A.1.2 PHY Loopback(Ethernet Interface)......................................................................................................583
A.1.3 Enable Port(Ethernet Interface)............................................................................................................584
A.1.4 Encapsulation Type(Ethernet Interface)...............................................................................................585
A.1.5 Working Mode(Ethernet Interface)......................................................................................................586
A.1.6 Max Frame Length(byte) for an Ethernet Port.....................................................................................587
A.1.7 Enable Tunnel(Ethernet Interface)........................................................................................................588
A.1.8 Specify IP(Ethernet Interface)..............................................................................................................589
A.2 Ethernet Port Associated Parameters (TDM Mode)......................................................................................590
A.2.1 Port Attribute (Ethernet Port)...............................................................................................................590
A.2.2 Enable Port (Ethernet Port Attribute)...................................................................................................592
A.2.3 Max. Frame Length (Ethernet Port Attribute)......................................................................................592
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) Contents
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xiv
A.2.4 Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode (Ethernet Port Attribute)...................................................593
A.2.5 Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode (Ethernet Port Attribute)...........................................................594
A.2.6 MAC Loopback (Ethernet Port Attribute)............................................................................................595
A.2.7 PHY Loopback (Ethernet Port Attribute).............................................................................................596
A.2.8 QinQ Type Area...................................................................................................................................597
A.2.9 Loop Detection (Ethernet Port Attribute).............................................................................................598
A.2.10 Loop Port Shutdown (Ethernet Port Attribute)...................................................................................598
A.2.11 Traffic Threshold(Mpbs)(External Ethernet Port Attribute)..............................................................599
A.2.12 Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold (Ethernet Interface Attributes)..........................................599
A.2.13 Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression (Ethernet Interface Attributes)...........................................600
A.2.14 Zero-Flow Monitor (Ethernet Interface Attributes)............................................................................601
A.2.15 Port Traffic Threshold Time Window(Min).......................................................................................601
A.2.16 Jumbo Frame Type.............................................................................................................................602
A.2.17 Default VLAN ID (Ethernet Port Attribute).......................................................................................603
A.2.18 VLAN Priority (Ethernet Port Attribute)............................................................................................603
A.2.19 Entry Detection (Ethernet Port Attribute)...........................................................................................604
A.2.20 Tag Identifier......................................................................................................................................605
A.2.21 Mapping Protocol...............................................................................................................................606
A.2.22 Scramble.............................................................................................................................................608
A.2.23 Set Inverse Value for CRC.................................................................................................................609
A.2.24 Check Field Length.............................................................................................................................609
A.2.25 FCS Calculated Bit Sequence.............................................................................................................610
A.2.26 Extension Header Option....................................................................................................................612
A.3 Ethernet Service Associated Parameters (Packet Mode)...............................................................................613
A.3.1 PW Signaling Type(PW Management)................................................................................................613
A.3.2 Bearer Type (E-Line Service)...............................................................................................................614
A.3.3 PW ID(E-Line Service)........................................................................................................................614
A.3.4 BPDU....................................................................................................................................................615
A.3.5 MTU(bytes)(E-Line Service)................................................................................................................616
A.3.6 Static MAC Address (E-LAN Service)................................................................................................617
A.3.7 Self-Learning MAC Address (E-LAN Service)...................................................................................618
A.3.8 Aging Time (min)(E-LAN Service).....................................................................................................619
A.3.9 Default Forwarding Priority.................................................................................................................620
A.3.10 Default Packet Relabeling Color(E-LAN Service).............................................................................621
A.3.11 Split Horizon Group ID(E-LAN Service)...........................................................................................622
A.3.12 Split Horizon Group Member (E-LAN Service)................................................................................623
A.3.13 Source Interface Type(E-AGGR Service)..........................................................................................623
A.3.14 Sink Interface Type(E-AGGR Service)..............................................................................................624
A.4 CES Service Associated Parameters..............................................................................................................625
A.4.1 Packet Loading Time (us).....................................................................................................................625
A.4.2 RTP Header..........................................................................................................................................626
A.4.3 Jitter Compensation Buffering Time (us).............................................................................................627
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) Contents
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xv
A.4.4 Clock Mode..........................................................................................................................................629
A.5 Data Service Associated Parameters (TDM Mode).......................................................................................630
A.5.1 Operation Type (EPL Service).............................................................................................................630
A.5.2 Service Type (EPL Service).................................................................................................................632
A.5.3 Encapsulation Format of P Port (Network Attributes).........................................................................633
A.5.4 C-VLAN and S-VLAN.........................................................................................................................634
A.5.5 VLAN ID (For Creation of Ethernet Virtual Private Lines).................................................................635
A.5.6 MAC Address Aging Time / Aging Time Unit....................................................................................636
A.5.7 Hub/Spoke (Ethernet LAN Service).....................................................................................................637
A.5.8 Actual MAC Address Table Capacity (Ethernet LAN Service)...........................................................637
A.5.9 Specified MAC Address Table Capacity (Ethernet LAN Service)......................................................638
A.5.10 Bridge Learning Mode (Ethernet LAN Service)................................................................................640
A.5.11 Self-learning MAC Address (Ethernet LAN Service)........................................................................641
A.5.12 Tunnel.................................................................................................................................................641
A.5.13 VC.......................................................................................................................................................642
A.5.14 Operation Type(IEEE 802.1ad Bridge)..............................................................................................643
A.5.15 Bridge Type........................................................................................................................................644
A.5.16 SAN Service Type..............................................................................................................................645
A.5.17 Concatenation Level (SAN)...............................................................................................................646
A.5.18 Enabled Flow Control of FC Port.......................................................................................................646
A.5.19 Initial Value of CREDIT at the Client Side........................................................................................647
A.5.20 Initial Value of CREDIT at the WAN Side........................................................................................648
A.6 ETH OAM Associated Parameters (Packet Mode).......................................................................................649
A.6.1 CC Test Transmit Period(Ethernet Service OAM Management).........................................................649
A.6.2 Maintenance Domain Level(Ethernet Service OAM Management)....................................................650
A.6.3 CC Status(Ethernet Service OAM Management).................................................................................651
A.6.4 Service Name(Ethernet Service OAM Management)..........................................................................651
A.6.5 Service Type(Ethernet Service OAM Management)............................................................................652
A.6.6 Activation Status(Ethernet Service OAM Management).....................................................................653
A.6.7 Transmitted Packet Count(Ethernet Service OAM Management).......................................................654
A.6.8 Transmitted Packet Length(Ethernet Service OAM Management)......................................................655
A.6.9 Transmitted Packet Priority (Ethernet Service OAM Management)....................................................655
A.6.10 Destination Maintenance Point MAC Address(Ethernet Service OAM Management).....................656
A.6.11 Response Maintenance Point ID(Ethernet Service OAM Management)...........................................656
A.6.12 Hop Count(Ethernet Service OAM Management).............................................................................657
A.6.13 Test Result(Ethernet Service OAM Management).............................................................................658
A.7 ETH-OAM Associated Parameters (TDM Mode).........................................................................................658
A.7.1 MP ID (Ethernet OAM)........................................................................................................................658
A.7.2 Maintenance Point Type (Ethernet OAM)...........................................................................................659
A.7.3 CC Status (Ethernet OAM)...................................................................................................................660
A.7.4 CC Activate Flag..................................................................................................................................660
A.7.5 Test Result (LB and LT Test)...............................................................................................................661
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) Contents
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xvi
A.7.6 Responding MP Type (Ethernet LT Test)............................................................................................662
A.7.7 Hop Count (Ethernet LT Test)..............................................................................................................662
A.7.8 Send Mode (Ping Test).........................................................................................................................663
A.7.9 Packet Length (Ping Test)....................................................................................................................664
A.7.10 Timeout (Ping Test)............................................................................................................................664
A.7.11 Time To Live......................................................................................................................................665
A.7.12 Delay...................................................................................................................................................665
A.7.13 Average Delay....................................................................................................................................666
A.7.14 Max. Delay.........................................................................................................................................666
A.7.15 Min. Delay..........................................................................................................................................667
A.7.16 Detect Attempts..................................................................................................................................667
A.7.17 Send Direction (Ethernet Test)...........................................................................................................668
A.7.18 Error Frame Monitor Window(ms)....................................................................................................669
A.7.19 Error Frame Monitor Threshold (Entries)..........................................................................................669
A.7.20 Error Frame Period Window (Frame).................................................................................................670
A.7.21 Error Frame Monitor Threshold (Frame)...........................................................................................671
A.7.22 Error Frame Second Window(s).........................................................................................................671
A.7.23 Error Frame Second Threshold(s)......................................................................................................672
A.7.24 Enable OAM Protocol........................................................................................................................673
A.7.25 OAM Working Mode.........................................................................................................................673
A.7.26 Remote Alarm Support for Link Event..............................................................................................674
A.7.27 Unidirectional Operation....................................................................................................................674
A.7.28 Loopback Status (OAM Parameter)...................................................................................................675
A.8 PW Associated Parameters............................................................................................................................676
A.8.1 Control Word........................................................................................................................................676
A.8.2 Control Channel Type...........................................................................................................................677
A.8.3 VCCV Verification Mode.....................................................................................................................678
A.8.4 Request VLAN.....................................................................................................................................679
A.8.5 Competitive Working Status.................................................................................................................680
A.8.6 Associate AC State...............................................................................................................................681
A.8.7 Max.Concatenated Cell Count..............................................................................................................681
A.9 PW APS Protection Associated Parameters (Packet Mode)..........................................................................682
A.9.1 Protection Mode....................................................................................................................................682
A.9.2 Protection Mode....................................................................................................................................683
A.9.3 Switchover Status.................................................................................................................................684
A.9.4 Protocol Status......................................................................................................................................687
A.9.5 PW Type...............................................................................................................................................688
A.10 HQoS Associated Parameters......................................................................................................................689
A.10.1 Traffic Classification Rule(Policy Management)...............................................................................689
A.10.2 Match Type(Policy Management)......................................................................................................690
A.10.3 Match Value(Policy Management).....................................................................................................693
A.10.4 Wildcard(Policy Management)...........................................................................................................695
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) Contents
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xvii
A.10.5 PW Direction(PW Policy)..................................................................................................................698
A.10.6 Direction (PW Policy)........................................................................................................................698
A.10.7 Duplicated Policy Name(PW Policy).................................................................................................699
A.10.8 Policy ID(Policy Management)..........................................................................................................699
A.10.9 Policy Name (Policy Management)....................................................................................................700
A.10.10 QinQ Link ID(QinQ Policy).............................................................................................................701
A.10.11 Physical Port ID(QinQ Policy).........................................................................................................701
A.10.12 S-VLAN ID(QinQ Policy)................................................................................................................701
A.10.13 Traffic Classification Bandwidth Sharing(Policy Management)......................................................702
A.10.14 Coloring Mode (V-UNI Ingress Policy)...........................................................................................703
A.10.15 Logical Relation Between Matched Rules(V-UNI Ingress Policy)..................................................704
A.10.16 Processing Mode(V-UNI Ingress Policy).........................................................................................705
A.10.17 AF1 Schedule Weight(%)(WFQ Schedule Policy)..........................................................................706
A.10.18 AF2 Schedule Weight(%)(WFQ Schedule Policy)..........................................................................706
A.10.19 AF3 Schedule Weight(%)(WFQ Schedule Policy)..........................................................................707
A.10.20 AF4 Schedule Weight(%)(WFQ Schedule Policy)..........................................................................708
A.10.21 Discard Lower Threshold (256 bytes) (Service WRED Policy).......................................................708
A.10.22 Discard Upper Threshold (256 bytes) (Service WRED Policy).......................................................709
A.10.23 Discard Probability (%) (Service WRED Policy)............................................................................710
A.10.24 PHB (Diffserv domain Management)...............................................................................................710
A.10.25 Packet Type (Diffserv domain Management)...................................................................................711
A.10.26 Committed Information Rate (Kbit/s)..............................................................................................712
A.10.27 Committed Burst Size (byte)............................................................................................................713
A.10.28 Peak Information Rate (kbit/s)..........................................................................................................713
A.10.29 Peak Burst Size (byte)......................................................................................................................714
A.10.30 EXP...................................................................................................................................................715
A.10.31 LSP Mode.........................................................................................................................................716
A.11 QoS Associated Parameters.........................................................................................................................717
A.11.1 Flow Type (Flow Configuration)........................................................................................................717
A.11.2 Bound CAR (Flow Configuration).....................................................................................................718
A.11.3 Bound CoS (Flow Configuration)......................................................................................................719
A.11.4 CAR ID (CAR Configuration)............................................................................................................719
A.11.5 CAR Enabled/Disabled (CAR Configuration)...................................................................................720
A.11.6 Committed Information Rate (CAR Configuration)...........................................................................721
A.11.7 Committed Burst Size (CAR Configuration).....................................................................................722
A.11.8 Peak Information Rate (CAR Configuration).....................................................................................722
A.11.9 Maximum Burst Size (CAR Configuration).......................................................................................723
A.11.10 CoS ID (CoS Configuration)............................................................................................................724
A.11.11 CoS Type (CoS Configuration)........................................................................................................725
A.11.12 CoS Priority (CoS Configuration)....................................................................................................726
A.11.13 Shaping.............................................................................................................................................729
A.12 ATM Interface Associated Parameters (Packet Mode)...............................................................................730
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) Contents
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xviii
A.12.1 ATM Cell Payload Scrambling(ATM Interface Management)..........................................................730
A.12.2 Min.VPI(ATM Interface Management)..............................................................................................731
A.12.3 Min.VCI(ATM Interface Management).............................................................................................732
A.12.4 VCC-Supported VPI Count(ATM Interface Management)................................................................733
A.13 ATM/IMA Services Associated Parameters (Packet Mode).......................................................................734
A.13.1 IMA Transit Frame Length.................................................................................................................734
A.13.2 IMA Symmetry Mode.........................................................................................................................735
A.13.3 Maximum Delay Between Links(ms)(IMA Group Management).....................................................736
A.13.4 Minimum Number of Active Transmitting Links(IMA Group Management)...................................737
A.13.5 Minimum Number of Active Receiving Links(IMA Group Management).......................................738
A.13.6 Clock Mode(IMA Group Management).............................................................................................739
A.13.7 Near-End Group Status(IMA Group Status)......................................................................................740
A.13.8 Differential Delay Check Status(IMA Link States)............................................................................741
A.13.9 Connection Type(Per-NE ATM Service Management).....................................................................742
A.13.10 Uplink Policy(Per-NE Configuration for ATM Connections).........................................................743
A.13.11 Downlink Policy(Per-NE Configuration for ATM Connections)....................................................744
A.13.12 CoS Mapping(Per-NE Configuration for CoS Mapping).................................................................745
A.13.13 Traffic Service(ATM Policy)...........................................................................................................745
A.13.14 Clp01Pcr(cell/s)(ATM Policy).........................................................................................................749
A.13.15 Clp01Scr(cell/s)(ATM Policy).........................................................................................................751
A.13.16 Clp0Pcr(cell/s)(ATM Policy)...........................................................................................................753
A.13.17 Clp0Scr(cell/s)(ATM Policy)...........................................................................................................755
A.13.18 Clp01Mcr(cell/s)(ATM Policy)........................................................................................................757
A.13.19 Max.Cell Burst Size(cell)(ATM Policy)...........................................................................................759
A.13.20 Cell Delay Variation Tolerance(0.1us)(ATM Policy)......................................................................760
A.13.21 UPC/NPC(ATM Policy)...................................................................................................................762
A.14 ATM OAM Associated Parameters (Packet Mode)....................................................................................763
A.14.1 Connection Direction..........................................................................................................................763
A.14.2 Segment and End Attribute.................................................................................................................764
A.14.3 Country Code(Hexadecimal Code).....................................................................................................766
A.14.4 Network Code(Hexadecimal Code)....................................................................................................767
A.14.5 NE Code(Hexadecimal Code)............................................................................................................768
A.15 ATM/IMA Associated Parameters (TDM Mode).......................................................................................769
A.15.1 VCTRUNK Port (ATM Bound Path Management)...........................................................................769
A.15.2 Level (ATM Bound Path Management).............................................................................................772
A.15.3 Direction (ATM Bound Path Management).......................................................................................773
A.15.4 Port (ATM Port Management)............................................................................................................774
A.15.5 Port Type (ATM Port Management)..................................................................................................777
A.15.6 Max. VPI Bits.....................................................................................................................................777
A.15.7 Max. VCI Bits.....................................................................................................................................778
A.15.8 Max. VPC...........................................................................................................................................779
A.15.9 Max. VCC...........................................................................................................................................779
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) Contents
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xix
A.15.10 VPC Configured...............................................................................................................................780
A.15.11 VCC Configured...............................................................................................................................781
A.15.12 Number of VPI that Supports VCC..................................................................................................781
A.15.13 UPC/NPC Enabled/Disabled............................................................................................................782
A.15.14 Positive UPC/NPC(ATM Service Management).............................................................................783
A.15.15 ID (ATM Traffic Management)........................................................................................................784
A.15.16 Traffic Type (ATM Traffic Management)........................................................................................785
A.15.17 Service Type (ATM Traffic Management).......................................................................................789
A.15.18 PCR (ATM Traffic Management)....................................................................................................792
A.15.19 SCR (ATM Traffic Management)....................................................................................................793
A.15.20 MBS..................................................................................................................................................794
A.15.21 CDVT...............................................................................................................................................795
A.15.22 Open Flow Frame Discarding Flag...................................................................................................795
A.15.23 Positive Traffic Descriptor...............................................................................................................796
A.15.24 Connection ID (ATM Service Management)...................................................................................797
A.15.25 Connection Type (ATM Service Management)...............................................................................798
A.15.26 Spread Type (ATM Service Management).......................................................................................799
A.15.27 VPI and VCI (ATM Service Management)......................................................................................801
A.15.28 Positive Service Status(ATM Service Management).......................................................................803
A.15.29 Positive Service Failure Reason(ATM Service Management).........................................................804
A.15.30 Source/Sink Switching Cause...........................................................................................................805
A.15.31 Protection Type (ATM Service Management).................................................................................806
A.15.32 Switching Direction (ATM Service Management)...........................................................................808
A.15.33 Switching Status (ATM Service Management)................................................................................808
A.15.34 Switching Type (ATM Service Management).................................................................................809
A.15.35 Revertive Mode (ATM Service Management).................................................................................811
A.15.36 Pause Time(0-100) *100 ms (ATM Service Management)..............................................................811
A.15.37 WTR Time(0-30min) (ATM Service Management)........................................................................812
A.15.38 External Command (ATM Protection Group)..................................................................................812
A.15.39 IMA Group Number.........................................................................................................................813
A.15.40 IMA Protocol Version......................................................................................................................814
A.15.41 IMA Transmit Frame Length............................................................................................................815
A.15.42 IMA Group Configuration Mode......................................................................................................815
A.15.43 Minimum Number of Active Links..................................................................................................818
A.15.44 IMA Group Status.............................................................................................................................819
A.15.45 Protocol Mode (IMA1.0 Mode)........................................................................................................820
A.15.46 Enable/Disable Cell Payload Scramble............................................................................................821
A.15.47 Link Frame Format...........................................................................................................................821
A.15.48 Connection Direction (ATM Segment End Attribute).....................................................................822
A.15.49 Segment and End Attribute (ATM Segment End Attribute)............................................................823
A.15.50 LLID.................................................................................................................................................825
A.15.51 Maximum Ingress Bandwidth...........................................................................................................826
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) Contents
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xx
A.15.52 Maximum Egress Bandwidth...........................................................................................................826
A.16 RPR Associated Parameters........................................................................................................................827
A.16.1 RPR Node ID......................................................................................................................................827
A.16.2 RPR Protocol......................................................................................................................................828
A.16.3 RPR Node Protection Slow Timer Value(ms)....................................................................................829
A.16.4 RPR ATD Timer Value(s)..................................................................................................................830
A.16.5 RPR Protection Mode.........................................................................................................................830
A.16.6 RPR Hold-off Time(ms).....................................................................................................................833
A.16.7 RPR Protection Restoration Mode......................................................................................................834
A.16.8 RPR Protection Wait-to-restore(s)......................................................................................................835
A.16.9 RPR Send link weight.........................................................................................................................836
A.16.10 RPR Used and Reserved bandwidth of priority A............................................................................837
A.16.11 RPR Used bandwidth of priority B-CIR(Mbps)...............................................................................838
A.16.12 RPR Circle Name.............................................................................................................................839
A.16.13 RPR Node Reachability....................................................................................................................840
A.16.14 RPR Node Hop.................................................................................................................................841
A.16.15 RPR Adjacent node ID.....................................................................................................................841
A.16.16 RPR Node Direction.........................................................................................................................842
A.16.17 ECHO Path ID (RPR Node Information).........................................................................................843
A.16.18 ECHO Working Mode (RPR Node Information).............................................................................843
A.16.19 ECHO Request Loop (RPR Node Information)...............................................................................845
A.16.20 ECHO Response Loop (RPR Node Information).............................................................................845
A.16.21 ECHO Frame Service Type (RPR Node Information).....................................................................846
A.16.22 Is ECHO Path Protected (RPR Node Information)..........................................................................847
A.16.23 ECHO T1 Transmit Period (RPR Node Information)......................................................................848
A.16.24 ECHO T2 Response Time (RPR Node Information).......................................................................849
A.16.25 Number of Echo Messages Received (RPR Node Information)......................................................849
A.16.26 Successfully Processed (RPR Node Information)............................................................................850
A.16.27 Unsuccessfully Processed (RPR Node Information)........................................................................850
A.16.28 dLoc Detected (RPR Node Information)..........................................................................................851
A.16.29 Loc Detected (RPR Node Information)............................................................................................852
A.16.30 RPR Node Protection Status.............................................................................................................852
A.16.31 RPR Node Switching Status.............................................................................................................854
A.16.32 RPR Node Accumulated Protection Times......................................................................................854
A.16.33 RPR Node Accumulated Protection Time........................................................................................855
A.16.34 RPR Node Last Switch Request.......................................................................................................855
A.16.35 RPR Switch Request.........................................................................................................................856
A.17 LAG Associated Parameters (TDM Mode).................................................................................................857
A.17.1 LAG Type(Link Aggregation Group Management)...........................................................................857
A.17.2 Revertive Mode(Link Aggregation Group Management)..................................................................858
A.17.3 Load Sharing(Link Aggregation Group Management)......................................................................859
A.17.4 Load Sharing Hash Algorithm(Link Aggregation Group Management)............................................860
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) Contents
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xxi
A.17.5 System Priority(Link Aggregation Group Management)...................................................................861
A.17.6 Main Port(Link Aggregation Group Management)............................................................................862
A.17.7 Main Port Status(Link Aggregation Group Management).................................................................863
A.17.8 Port Priority(Link Aggregation Group Management)........................................................................864
A.18 MC-LAG Associated Parameters................................................................................................................865
A.18.1 Protocol Channel ID...........................................................................................................................865
A.18.2 Hello Packet Sending Interval (s).......................................................................................................866
A.18.3 Timeout Time (s)................................................................................................................................866
A.19 LAG/DLAG Associated Parameters (TDM Mode).....................................................................................867
A.19.1 Port Priority (Link Aggregation)........................................................................................................867
A.19.2 System Priority (Link Aggregation)...................................................................................................868
A.19.3 Slave Port (Link Aggregation)............................................................................................................868
A.19.4 Status (Link Aggregation)..................................................................................................................869
A.19.5 Branch Port.........................................................................................................................................870
A.19.6 Load Sharing(Ethernet Link Aggregation).........................................................................................871
A.19.7 Revertive Mode (DLAG)....................................................................................................................872
A.19.8 Main Port Priority (DLAG)................................................................................................................873
A.19.9 Slave Port Priority (DLAG)................................................................................................................874
A.20 STP/RSTP Associated Parameters..............................................................................................................874
A.20.1 Protocol Enabled (Spanning Tree)......................................................................................................874
A.20.2 Protocol Type (Spanning Tree Protocol)............................................................................................875
A.20.3 VB Priority (Bridge Parameters)........................................................................................................876
A.20.4 Max Age(s).........................................................................................................................................876
A.20.5 Hello Time(s) (Spanning Tree)...........................................................................................................877
A.20.6 Forward Delay(s) (Spanning Tree).....................................................................................................878
A.20.7 TxHoldCount(per second) (Spanning Tree).......................................................................................878
A.20.8 Root Path Cost....................................................................................................................................879
A.20.9 Hold Count (Spanning Tree)..............................................................................................................879
A.20.10 Port ID..............................................................................................................................................880
A.20.11 Port Path Cost...................................................................................................................................880
A.20.12 Designated Path Cost........................................................................................................................882
A.20.13 Designated Root Bridge Priority......................................................................................................883
A.20.14 Designated Bridge Priority(Spanning Tree).....................................................................................883
A.20.15 Designated Bridge MAC Address (Spanning Tree).........................................................................884
A.20.16 Protocol Enabled (Port Parameter of Spanning Tree)......................................................................884
A.20.17 Admin Edge Attribute.......................................................................................................................885
A.20.18 Edge Port Status (Spanning Tree).....................................................................................................886
A.20.19 VB Port Priority................................................................................................................................887
A.20.20 VB Port Status..................................................................................................................................887
A.20.21 Point to Point Attributes(External Ethernet Port Attributes)............................................................888
A.21 LCAS Associated Parameters......................................................................................................................889
A.21.1 Enabling LCAS...................................................................................................................................889
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) Contents
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xxii
A.21.2 LCAS Mode........................................................................................................................................890
A.21.3 Hold off Time(ms) (LCAS)................................................................................................................891
A.21.4 WTR Time(s) (LCAS)........................................................................................................................891
A.21.5 TSD (LCAS).......................................................................................................................................892
A.21.6 Minimum Number of Members in the Transmit Direction................................................................892
A.22 Packet LPT Associated Parameters.............................................................................................................893
A.22.1 Binding Status.....................................................................................................................................893
A.22.2 Primary Function Point.......................................................................................................................894
A.22.3 Secondary Function Point Type..........................................................................................................895
A.22.4 Secondary Function Point...................................................................................................................895
A.22.5 Fault Detection Mode.........................................................................................................................896
A.22.6 User-Side Port Status..........................................................................................................................897
A.23 LPT Associated Parameters (TDM Mode)..................................................................................................898
A.23.1 LPT.....................................................................................................................................................898
A.23.2 Bearer Mode.......................................................................................................................................899
A.23.3 Port-Type Port Hold-Off Time(ms)....................................................................................................899
A.23.4 VCTRUNK Port Hold-off Time(ms)..................................................................................................900
A.24 IGMP Snooping Associated Parameters......................................................................................................900
A.24.1 Protocol Enable (IGMP Snooping Protocol)......................................................................................900
A.24.2 Multicast Aging Time.........................................................................................................................901
A.25 Test Frame Associated Parameters..............................................................................................................902
A.25.1 Frames to Send...................................................................................................................................902
A.25.2 Status...................................................................................................................................................903
A.25.3 Counter of Frames Sent......................................................................................................................903
A.25.4 Counter of Received Response Test Frame........................................................................................904
A.25.5 Counter of Test Frames to Receive....................................................................................................904
A.25.6 Bearer Mode (Ethernet Test)..............................................................................................................905
A.25.7 Send Mode (Ethernet Test).................................................................................................................906
A.26 Orderwire Associated Parameters................................................................................................................906
A.26.1 Call Waiting Time(s)..........................................................................................................................907
A.26.2 Conference Call..................................................................................................................................907
A.26.3 Phone..................................................................................................................................................908
A.26.4 Available Orderwire Port....................................................................................................................909
A.26.5 Available Conference Call Port..........................................................................................................909
A.26.6 Subnet No. Length..............................................................................................................................910
A.26.7 Subnet (Subnet No. for the Optical Interface)....................................................................................911
A.26.8 No.(F1 Data Port)...............................................................................................................................912
A.26.9 Data Channel (F1 Data Port)..............................................................................................................912
A.26.10 Overhead Byte (Broadcast Data Port)..............................................................................................913
A.26.11 Working Mode (Broadcast Data Port)..............................................................................................914
A.26.12 Broadcast Data Source (Broadcast Data Port)..................................................................................915
A.26.13 Broadcast Data Sink (Broadcast Data Port)......................................................................................916
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) Contents
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xxiii
A.27 Clock Associated Parameters......................................................................................................................916
A.27.1 External Clock Output Mode..............................................................................................................917
A.27.2 External Clock Output Timeslot.........................................................................................................917
A.27.3 External Source Output Threshold.....................................................................................................919
A.27.4 2M Phase-Locked Source Fail Condition...........................................................................................920
A.27.5 2M Phase-Locked Source Fail Action................................................................................................921
A.27.6 Clock Source Priority Sequence (1 Is the Highest)............................................................................922
A.27.7 Clock Source Threshold.....................................................................................................................923
A.27.8 Protection Status.................................................................................................................................924
A.27.9 AIS Alarm Generated.........................................................................................................................925
A.27.10 B1 BER Threshold-Crossing Generated...........................................................................................926
A.27.11 B2-EXC Alarm Generated................................................................................................................927
A.27.12 Higher Priority Clock Source Reversion Mode................................................................................928
A.27.13 Clock Source WTR Time.................................................................................................................929
A.27.14 Switching Status (Clock)..................................................................................................................929
A.27.15 Lock Status (Clock)..........................................................................................................................930
A.27.16 Clock Source ID...............................................................................................................................931
A.27.17 Synchronous Source.........................................................................................................................932
A.27.18 Synchronous Status Byte..................................................................................................................933
A.27.19 S1 Byte Synchronization Quality Information.................................................................................934
A.27.20 NE Clock Working Mode.................................................................................................................935
A.27.21 Clock Source Quality........................................................................................................................936
A.27.22 S1 Byte Received..............................................................................................................................938
A.27.23 Line Port (Clock)..............................................................................................................................939
A.27.24 Control Status (Clock)......................................................................................................................940
A.27.25 Line Port (Clock ID).........................................................................................................................941
A.27.26 Enabled Status (Clock ID)................................................................................................................942
A.27.27 Data Output Method in Holdover Mode...........................................................................................943
A.27.28 Manual Setting of 0 Quality Level...................................................................................................944
A.27.29 Retiming Mode.................................................................................................................................945
A.28 Protection Associated Parameters................................................................................................................946
A.28.1 Switching Mode (MSP)......................................................................................................................946
A.28.2 Initiation Condition (SNCP)...............................................................................................................947
A.28.3 Group Type (SNCP)...........................................................................................................................948
A.28.4 Configure SNCP Tangent Ring..........................................................................................................949
A.28.5 Source(Sink)Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6).............................................................................................949
A.28.6 Switching Status (BPS).......................................................................................................................950
A.28.7 Switching Status (PPS).......................................................................................................................951
A.28.8 External Switching Command Type (BPS)........................................................................................952
A.28.9 External Switching Command Type (PPS)........................................................................................953
A.29 Other Parameters.........................................................................................................................................954
A.29.1 E1/T1 Interconnection........................................................................................................................954
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) Contents
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xxiv
A.29.2 T1 Frame Structure.............................................................................................................................955
A.29.3 E1 Frame Structure.............................................................................................................................956
A.29.4 Service Mode......................................................................................................................................957
A.29.5 Service Type.......................................................................................................................................958
A.29.6 Service Frame Format.........................................................................................................................959
A.29.7 Connection Mode (NE Attribute).......................................................................................................960
A.29.8 Enable Tandem Connection at the Source..........................................................................................961
A.29.9 APId to be Sent at the Source.............................................................................................................962
A.29.10 Optimize Higher Order Pass-Through..............................................................................................962
B Glossary......................................................................................................................................964
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) Contents
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xxv
1 Getting Started
About This Chapter
The following topices introduce some preparation operations that will ensure a smooth, trouble-
free launch of the U2000.
1.1 Starting or Shutting Down the U2000
The U2000 uses the standard client/server architecture and multiple-user mode. So, you are
recommended to start or shut down the U2000 by strictly observing the following procedure, in
order not to affect other users that are operating the U2000.
1.2 Main Windows and Common Operations of the U2000
This topic describes the main windows of the U2000 client. Learning the main windows helps
you to locate the entrances to operations quickly, which increased your operation efficiency.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 1 Getting Started
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1
1.1 Starting or Shutting Down the U2000
The U2000 uses the standard client/server architecture and multiple-user mode. So, you are
recommended to start or shut down the U2000 by strictly observing the following procedure, in
order not to affect other users that are operating the U2000.
Context
l You are recommended to start the computer and the U2000 application in the following
sequence: Start the computer, start the U2000 server, and then start the U2000 client.
l You are recommended to shut down the U2000 application and the computer in the
following sequence: Exit the U2000 client, stop the U2000 server, and then shut down the
computer.
1.1.1 Starting the U2000 Server
For network management first start the U2000 server, and then start the U2000 application.
Prerequisites
l The computer time must be set correctly.
l The computer where the U2000 is installed must be started correctly.
l The operating system of the U2000 server must be running correctly and the database must
be started normally.
l The instance must be deployed.
Procedure
Step 1 Double-click the U2000 Server shortcut icon to start System Monitor Client.
Step 2 In the Login dialog box, set the username (admin, by default) and the password (null, by default).
You need to change the password when logging in for the first time. Then click Login.
NOTE
Periodically change the password and memorize it.
You can login to the U2000 client, checking whether the status of each process is Running.
----End
1.1.2 Logging In to the U2000 Client
To manage networks through the U2000 client graphical user interface, you need to use the
U2000 client to log in to the U2000 server.
Prerequisites
The U2000 server must be started correctly.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 1 Getting Started
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2
Procedure
Step 1 Double-click the U2000 Client shortcut icon.
Step 2 In the Login dialog box, set the username (admin, by default) and the password (null, by default).
You need to change the password when logging in for the first time. Then click Login.
Step 3 Optional: For the first login, you need to configure the access control list of the system.
----End
1.1.3 Exiting a U2000 Client
Before shutting down the U2000 server, you must exit the U2000 client.
Prerequisites
The U2000 client must be started normally.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > Exit from the main menu.
Step 2 Click OK in the confirmation dialog box.
NOTE
If the layout of the view is changed and not saved, the Confirm dialog box appears asking you whether to
save the changes. After you confirm the dialog box, automatically exit the client.
----End
1.1.4 Shutting Down the U2000 Server
When the U2000 server is managing the system normally, do not perform this operation. In
special circumstances, for example, when modifying the system time of the computer where the
U2000 resides, or when upgrading the version, you can use the System Monitor Client to shut
down the U2000 server.
Prerequisites
All the U2000 clients connected to the U2000 server must be shut down.
Procedure
Step 1 From the Main Menu of System Monitor Client, choose System > Stop All NMS Services to
close all processes of the U2000 server.
Step 2 Click OK in the confirmation dialog box. Wait until the U2000 core process, and the processes
that are optional according to the actual situation are in the Stopped state. Now the U2000 server
is shut down successfully.
Now you cannot shut down the MDP process or initialize the database.
----End
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 1 Getting Started
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3
1.2 Main Windows and Common Operations of the U2000
This topic describes the main windows of the U2000 client. Learning the main windows helps
you to locate the entrances to operations quickly, which increased your operation efficiency.
1.2.1 Components of the Client GUI
This topic describes the components of the client GUI.
Figure 1-1 shows the client GUI.
Figure 1-1 Client GUI
1: Menu bar 2: Toolbar 3: Workbench list
4: Output pane 5: Status bar 6: Workbench

Menu Bar
The menu bar provides the entries to all the functions of the U2000 client. It consists of the
following menus: File, Fault, Performance,Configuration, Service, Inventory,
Administration, Window, and Help. In the topology window, the menu bar also provides the
Edit and View menu items.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 1 Getting Started
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4
Toolbar
The toolbar provides the shortcut icons for major operation tasks. The shortcut icons are as
follows:
l : Workbench.
l : Exit.
l : Lock Terminal.
l : Log Out.
l : Full Screen.
l : Browse Current Alarm.
l : Create Fiber.
l : NE Explorer.
l : Main Topology.
l : Browse SDH performance.
l : Browse WDM performance.
l : SDH Protection Subnet Maintenance.
l : WDM Trail Management.
l : SDH Trail Creation.
l : SDH Trail Management.
Workbench list
You can create or modify a workbench through the shortcut icons.
Output Pane
The output pane displays the returned information and other relevant information.
Status Bar
The status bar displays the information such as the system status, the login users, and the IP
address of the connected server. The information displayed from left to right is as follows:
l Connection information: Displays the name and IP address of the server.
l Login user: Displays the name of the login user.
l Connection duration: Displays the duration of the connection between the client and the
server.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 1 Getting Started
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5
l Login mode: Displays the login mode. It can be single-user mode and multi-user mode.
l Operation prompt: Displays the result of the operation.
l Logo: Displays the logo of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Workbench
The shortcut icons on the workbench help you perform operations.
1.2.2 Key GUI Components
The key U2000 GUI components are as follows:
Component Example
Button
Shortcut icon
Radio button
Check box
Tab
Field
Drop-down
menu
Menu
Function Tree
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 1 Getting Started
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6
Component Example
Dialog box

1.2.3 Frequently Used Buttons
The frequently used buttons on the U2000 GUI are as follows:
Button Functionality
Selects the objects.
Expands all available options.
Collapses all available options.
Displays or hides a dialog box.
Selects the objects.
Selects the objects as a batch.
Increases the priority of the selected object.
Decreases the priority of the selected object.
Displays a dialog box.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 1 Getting Started
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7
Button Functionality
Queries results from the NE.
Imposes the current settings.
Displays the latest result(s).
Exports the selected scheduled tasks to the
browser of the operating system for printing.
Saves selected data to the specified file.
Makes the current setting effective and closes
the dialog box.
Cancels the current setting and closes the
dialog box.
Closes the operation wizard.
Allows the user to view and select the board
ports.
Deletes the selected data or icon.
Creates a new service, protection or physical
inventory information etc.
Proceeds to the next step.
Returns to the previous step.
Closes the dialog box.
Expands the Object Tree.
Collapses the Object Tree.
Makes the current setting effective and closes
the dialog box.
Cancels the current setting and closes the
dialog box.
Search the correlative information.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 1 Getting Started
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8
Button Functionality
Sets the correlative condition.

1.2.4 Shortcut Icon
This topic describes the shortcut icons on the Main Topology.
You can customize the toolbar so that only the frequently-used buttons are displayed on the
toolbar. To customize the toolbar, right-click the toolbar and choose a menu item from the
shortcut menu.
Button Name Description
Workbench Adds the commonly used functions to
the favorites folder.
Exit Exits from the client.
Lock Terminal Locks the current client.
Main Topology Switches to the Main Topology.
Log Out Logs out of the current session.
Full Screen. Views the current window in full
screen.
Browse Current
Alarm
Displays the Current Alarms
window.
SDH Protection
Subnet
Maintenance
Accesses the SDH Protection Subnet
Common Attributes window.
SDH Trail
Management
Accesses the SDH Trail
Management window.
SDH Trail Creation Accesses the SDH Trail Creation
window.
WDM Trail
Management
Accesses the WDM Trail
Management window.
NE Explorer Accesses the NE Explorer window of
the selected NE.
Create Link Creates fiber and radio links.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 1 Getting Started
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9
Button Name Description
Browse SDH
Performance
Accesses the Browse SDH
Performance window.
Browse WDM
Performance
Accesses the Browse WDM
Performance window.
New Selects Custom View, NESubnet, or
Link from the drop-down list box.
Up Returns to the previous level.
Zoom out Zooms out the Main Topology.
Zoom in Zooms in the Main Topology.
Zoom in Partially Zooms in an area selected in the Main
Topology.
View Move Moves the Main Topology. When you
click this icon, the Main Topology can
be moved. When you click the icon
again, the Main Topology cannot be
moved.
Alarm List Area Views the alarm list area in the lower
part of the Main Topology.
Search NE Searches for an NE in the view.
Select Selects the NE in the Main Topology.
Topology
Navigator
Views the navigation tree in the
Topology.
Filter Tree and
Legend
Opens the setting area of the view to
display the filter plane and legends.
Device Statistics Views the quantity of the equipment on
the network.
Save the Location
of the Current
Submap Icons
Saves the location of the current
submap icons.
Refresh View Refreshes the current view.
Lock View
Unlock View
Locks out the position of an NE icon in
the active view.
Unlocks the position of an NE icon in
the active view.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 1 Getting Started
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10
Button Name Description
NE Time
Sychronization
Synchronizes the NE time and NMS
time.
Synchronize
Current Alarms
Synchronizes the current alarms of an
NE.
Browse Current
ALarms
Browses the current alarms of an NE.
Clear ALarm
Indication
Clears the current alarm indications of
an NE.
Refresh NE Panel
Status
Refreshes the NE panel status to make
the NE panel display the latest data.
Back Up NE
Database To SCC
Backs up the NE data to the SCC.
Display/Hide
Extended Slot
Displays or hides the extended slot on
the Extended Slot tab page.
Legend Displays a legend and its description.

1.2.5 Common Shortcut Keys
This topic describes the common shortcut keys. Using shortcut keys, you can increase the
operation efficiency. The shortcut keys include Enter, Ctrl, Esc, and Tab.
Shortcut Key Description
F1 Opens the Help.
Enter Confirms the operation or moves downward to the next line. If the
cursor is on a button, pressing Enter means to confirm the operation.
If the cursor is in the list box, press Enter once and the cursor then
moves downward to the next line.
Esc Closes a dialog box.
Tab Switches between buttons if the cursor is on a button. Switch between
text boxes if the cursor is in the list box.
Ctrl+F Searches resources such as the NEs, subnets, cards, frames, interfaces,
and VLANs in basic and rapid modes by pressing Ctrl+F in all views.
Ctrl+A Selects all NEs or selects all contents in the list. If the cursor is in the
view, press Ctrl+A to select all NEs. If the cursor is in the list box,
press Ctrl+A to select all contents in the list.
Ctrl+C Quickly copies the table texts.
Ctrl+V Pastes the copied data to another text area.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 1 Getting Started
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11
Shortcut Key Description
Alt+F Opens the File menu from the Main Menu.
Alt+E Opens the Edit menu from the Main Menu.
Alt+V Opens the View menu from the Main Menu.
Alt+U Opens the Fault menu from the Main Menu.
Alt+P Opens the Performance menu from the Main Menu.
Alt+C Opens the Configuration menu from the Main Menu.
Alt+R Opens the Service menu from the Main Menu.
Alt+I Opens the Inventory menu from the Main Menu.
Alt+S Opens the Administration menu from the Main Menu.
Alt+W Opens the Window menu from the Main Menu.
Alt+H Opens the Help menu from the Main Menu.

1.2.6 Main Windows
This topic describes the main windows of the U2000 client. And tells you what you can do in
the windows.
1.2.6.1 Workbench
This topic describes the workbench. After a client is started, the system automatically accesses
the default workbench. The default shortcut icons are displayed on the workbench.
l In the main window of the U2000, click the drop-down button to the right of the icon
and then select Workbench to access the workbench.
l You can do as follows to modify a workbench: Right-click the icon of the workbench and
choose Modify Workbench from the shortcut menu to modify the name or description of
a workbench.
l You can expand and order workbenches to separate the customized workbenches from the
default workbench.
l You can view the description about the function of the workbench in the background picture
of the workbench and press F1 to view the Help. Alternatively, you can choose Help >
Workbench from the shortcut menu to view the Help.
1.2.6.2 Main Topology
This topic describes the items in the Main Topology. All topology management functions can
be accessed through the Main Topology in . These functions include creating topological objects,
subnets, searching for the existing equipment in the network. You can search, view, create, set,
and manage subnets; and search, create, configure, and maintain management functions on trails.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 1 Getting Started
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12
GUI
To open the Main Topology, log in to the U2000. If the preceding operation closes the Main
Topology, you can choose Window > Main Topology from the main menu to open the Main
Topology. Figure 1-2 shows the Main Topology of the U2000.
Figure 1-2 Main Topology
1 2
3
4 5
6 7
8 9
10
11
12

1: Network management
system name
2: Menu bar
You can operate the NM and
the NE with submenu bar,
include configure tasks,
manage tasks and so on.
3: Shortcut button
Click the button, you can
perform a simple task
quickly. For example: exit
NM, lock terminal, log out,
NMS user management, stop
the current alarm sound,
browse alarm, NE explorer,
creating connections,,
browse performance
window.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 1 Getting Started
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13
4: Shortcut button
Click the button, you can
perform a simple task quickly
on the Main Topology. For
example: zoom in or zoom
out or refresh or save the
view, show or hide the
navigators, search objects,
see object attributes, lock or
unlock the view.
5: Alarm button bar
The Alarm buttons for
alarms at different severity
levels are in different colors.
You can click the button to
view the number of the
alarms generated on the
current U2000. You can click
the button to view current
alarms. For example:
browsing the alarm list, show
alarm panel.
When the U2000 has
abnormal events, the
Abnormal event indicator
turn to red from green. You
can click the indicator to
view current abnormal
events.
6: NMS status bar
Views the running
information of the NMS. For
example, NMS login, and
loading of each module.
7: Views the current location
of the cursor in the Main
Topology.
8: Physical Map
Views the managed
equipment.
On the Physics Map, you can
perform operations, such as
creating NEs, deleting
topology objects, NE
explorer, creating
connections, browsing
fibers/cables, configuring the
NE data, browse
performance window, and so
on.
9: Views the name which is
set by the current U2000
client, and views the IP
address of the current U2000
server.
10: Views user name of the
logged-in U2000 user
currently.
11: Filter Tree and Legend
In this area, you can set the
display types of the objects in
a view, and view the
descriptions of legends in the
view. To locate an operation
object quickly.
12: Total elapsed time after
the current user is logged in
to the U2000.

1.2.6.3 NE Explorer
The NE Explorer is the main user interface used to manage equipment. In the NE Explorer, a
user can configure, manage and maintain the NE, boards, and ports on a per-NE basis. The NE
Explorer is the main user interface for commissioning and configuration on a per-NE basis. The
NE Explorer contains a Function Tree that makes the operations easy. To display the
configuration window for an object, the user can just select the object and then choose a desired
function in the Function Tree.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 1 Getting Started
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14
NOTE
You can open a maximum of five NE Explorer windows at the same time.
GUI
l Right-click an NE on the Main Topology and choose NE Explorer from the shortcut menu.
l In the left-hand pane of the Main Topology, right-click an NE and choose NE Explorer
from the shortcut menu.
Correlation operation
l Click the in NE Explorer window, display the NE Panel.
l Click the in NE Explorer window, switch to other NE.
1.2.6.4 Clock View
The Clock View provides a visible platform to enable NE clock settings, networkwide clock
synchronization status query, and clock tracing and search functions.
GUI
Access the clock view. In the Main Topology window, select Clock View from the Current
View drop-down list. Select the NE to be queried or configured from the object tree. Figure
1-3 shows the clock view.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 1 Getting Started
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
15
Figure 1-3 Clock View

Legends
l By choosing View > Display Setting > Legend from the main menu, you can learn
meanings of various legends in different colors in the Clock View.
l By choosing View > Display Setting > Filter from the main menu, you can display the
required elements in the Clock View based on the filter function.
l The Clock View uses continuous lines to represent the trace relations between NEs. Smaller
number indicates higher priority. The number displayed on the continuous line indicates
the priority of the traceable clock. The Clock View displays the line clock source numbers
only. Internal and tributary clock sources are also numbered, but they are not displayed in
the Clock View.
l The arrow direction in the Clock View indicates the clock tracing direction. For example,
if NE2 points to NE3, it indicates that NE3 traces the clock information transmitted from
NE2, and that NE3 traces the primary PRC NE1-External 1.
l The arrow direction in the Clock View indicates the clock tracing direction.
l An internal clock source is the clock provided by an NE, and has no trace relations with
other NEs. Therefore, internal clock sources are not displayed on the Clock View.
l Tributary clock sources have no relation with the clock sources that are not provided by
the U2000. Therefore, the clock trace relations are not displayed on the Clock View.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 1 Getting Started
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
16
l In the Clock View, you can select multiple NEs, right-click, and query the clock
synchronization status or search for clock trace relations.
NOTE
The rule of verifying an invalid clock tracing relation is as follows: First, verify whether a clock source is in the
SSM protocol mode. In the non-SSM protocol mode, verify the status of a clock source. The status directly
determines whether a clock tracing relation is invalid. In the SSM protocol mode, verify the status of a clock
source. If the status is unavailable, it indicates that the clock tracing relation is invalid. If the status is available,
you also need to verify the S1 byte (clock quality). When you manually cancel settings of the quality of the S1
byte and the quality of the S1 byte is unknown, the clock tracing relation is invalid.
1.2.6.5 NE Panel
The NE Panel displays boards and ports in different colors depending on their current status. In
the U2000, most operations such as equipment configuration, monitoring, and maintenance are
performed in the NE Panel window.
GUI
Double-click an NE on the Main Topology to display the NE Panel.
To add a new board, right-click an idle slot and choose a board type.
NOTE
l Choose the Always On Top for the Slot Layout window to always remain on top.
l When a board occupies multiple slots, the slot ID of the main slot is displayed in boldface, and the slot
ID of the slave slot is grayed out.
l In the NE panel, when you click the processing board that is accompanied by an interface board, the
slot ID of this interface board is displayed in orange.
Click the icon on the toolbar, to view the legends of the boards and ports on the right of the
Slot Layout.
To select an operation related to an installed board, right-click the installed board and choose it
from the shortcut menu. For example, right-click an AUX board and choose Path View to display
the detailed path information.
1.2.6.6 Browse Alarm
This topic describes the user interface for viewing the current and history alarms, Alarm Logs.
In this user interface, buttons are provided, such as Filter, Synchronize, Refresh, and
Acknowledge, to help you quickly locate the alarm cause.
GUI
l Choose Fault > Browse Current Alarm from the main menu.
l Choose Fault > Browse History Alarm from the main menu.
l Choose Fault > Query Alarm Logs from the main menu.
1.2.6.7 Browse Event
In the Browse Event window, you can view events at different levels. This window provides
buttons, such as Filter by Template, Filter and Refresh, to help you to quickly locate the alarm
cause.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 1 Getting Started
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
17
GUI
Choose Fault > Browse Event Logs from the main menu.
1.2.6.8 Browse Performance Window
You can view the current and history performance data, UAT events and performance threshold
crossings.
GUI
Choose Performance > Browse SDH Performance from the main menu.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 1 Getting Started
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
18
2 Creating the Network
About This Chapter
NEs and fibers/cables can be managed on the NMS only after their topologies are created.
2.1 Creating NEs, Fibers and Subnet
Network services and protection schemes can be configured only after NEs, optical fibers, and
topology subnets are created.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 2 Creating the Network
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
19
2.1 Creating NEs, Fibers and Subnet
Network services and protection schemes can be configured only after NEs, optical fibers, and
topology subnets are created.
Item Procedure
Creating NEs Creating a Single NE
Creating NEs in Batches
Configuring the NE Data Manually
Replicating the NE Data
Uploading the NE Data
Creating optical fibers Creating Fibers in the TDM Domain Automatically
Creating Fibers Manually
Creating Virtual Fibers
Creating DCN Communication Cable
Creating topology
subnets
Creating a Topology Subnet

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 2 Creating the Network
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
20
3 Configuring E-Line Services
About This Chapter
You can configure the E-Line services to realize the point-to-point transmission of Ethernet
services.
3.1 Basic Concepts
Learning about the basic concepts helps to further understand E-Line services.
3.2 Configuration Flow for the E-Line Services
The flowchart for configuring an E-Line service differs according to the type of the E-Line
service.
3.3 Configuration Example: UNI-UNI E-Line Services
This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the engineering information and how to
configure the UNI-UNI E-Line services for each NE according to the networking diagram.
3.4 Configuration Example: E-Line Services Carried by Ports
This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the engineering information and how to
configure the E-Line services carried by ports for each NE according to the networking diagram.
3.5 Configuration Example: E-Line Services Carried by PWs (Newly Created)
This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the engineering information and how to
configure the E-Line services carried by PWs for each NE according to the networking diagram.
3.6 Configuration Example: E-Line Services Carried by PWs (Network Adjustment Based on
VLAN Priorities)
This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the engineering information and how to
configure the E-Line services carried by PWs for each NE according to the networking diagram.
In this example, services with a same VLAN ID but different VLAN priorities need to be mapped
to different PWs.
3.7 Configuration Example: E-Line Services Carried by PWs (Network Adjustment Based on
VLAN Switching)
This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the engineering information and how to
configure the E-Line services carried by PWs (network adjustment based on VLAN switching)
for each NE according to the networking diagram.
3.8 Configuration Example: E-Line Services Carried by QinQ links
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
21
This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the engineering information and how to
configure the E-Line services carried by QinQ links for each NE according to the networking
diagram.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
22
3.1 Basic Concepts
Learning about the basic concepts helps to further understand E-Line services.
3.1.1 E-Line Services
In the topology, the E-Line services are point-to-point services. The E-Line services realize the
point-to-point transmission of Ethernet services.
According to the service transmission mode, the E-Line services can be classified into the
following types:
l UNI-UNI E-Line services
l E-Line services carried by ports
l E-Line services carried by pseudo wires (PWs) (newly created)
l E-Line services carried by PWs (network adjustment based on VLAN priorities)
l E-Line services carried by PWs (network adjustment based on VLAN switching)
l E-Line services carried by QinQ links
UNI-UNI E-Line Services
Figure 3-1 shows the networking diagram of the UNI-UNI E-Line service.
Company A and Company B are located in City 1 and need to communicate with each other.
Company A and Company B are connected to the same NE. Hence, you can configure the
Ethernet services from the UNI to the UNI to realize the communication between Company A
and Company B.
In this case, the equipment equals a Layer 2 switch, which only exchanges the data of Company
A and Company B. In the uplink direction of the UNI at the two ends, complex traffic
classification can be performed for data packets, and different QoS policies can be used
according to the traffic types.
Figure 3-1 UNI-UNI E-Line services
PSN
Company B
NE2
UNI
UNI
Company A
City 1
NE1
NE4
NE3
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
23

E-Line Services Carried by Ports
Figure 3-2 shows the networking diagram of the E-Line services carried by ports.
Branches of Company A are located in City 1 and City 2, and need to communicate with each
other. Hence, you can configure the E-Line services that are carried by ports and from the UNI
to the NNI, to realize the communication between the branches of Company A.
In this case, each branch of Company A can use the UNI exclusively. An E-Line service
exclusively occupies all the physical ports on the network across which the E-Line travels. If
the services of the departments of Company A in City 1 need to be isolated from each other, you
can distinguish different services on the same UNI by using the "port+VLANs" mode. On a
single station, in the uplink direction of the UNI at the two ends, complex traffic classification
can be performed for data packets, and different QoS policies can be used according to the traffic
types.
Figure 3-2 E-Line services carried by ports
PSN
Company A
City 1
Company A
City 2
UNI NNI NNI UNI
NE1
NE2

E-Line Services Carried by PWs (Newly Created)
Figure 3-3 shows the networking diagram of the E-Line services carried by PWs.
The branches of Company A and Company B are located in City 1 and City 2, and need to
communicate with each other. The services of Company A and Company B need to be isolated
from each other. In this case, you can configure the E-Line services that are carried by PWs and
from the UNI to the NNI, to realize the communication between the branches of Company A or
Company B. In addition, different services are carried by different PWs, realizing the isolation
of the services of Company A from the services of Company B.
The services that are accessed from the UNI are encapsulated and transmitted to the PWs. Then,
the services are transmitted through the tunnel.
The E-Line services of different companies are carried by different PWs and then to the same
port on the NNI. In this manner, the port resources on the NNI are saved and the bandwidth
utilization is increased. In the uplink direction of the UNI, layered QoS configuration can be
performed for data packets.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
24
Figure 3-3 E-Line services carried by PWs (newly created)
Company A
City2
Tunnel
PW
Company B
Company A
City 1
Company B
PSN
NNI UNI
NE1
NE2
NNI UNI

E-Line Services Carried by PWs (Network Adjustment Based on VLAN Priorities)
Figure 3-4 shows the networking diagram of the E-Line services carried by PWs (network
adjustment based on VLAN priorities). This type of E-Line maps packets with a same VLAN
ID but different VLAN priorities to different PWs.
Services from NodeB 1 and services from NodeB 2 have a same VLAN ID of 100 but different
VLAN priorities, and need to be transported to a same RNC. Services from NodeB 1 have a
VLAN priority of 3, and services from NodeB 2 have a VLAN priority of 2. To isolate services
from NodeB 1 and services from NodeB 2, the services are mapped to different PWs based on
Port+VLAN+VLAN PRI before being transported to the RNC.
The services that are received from the UNI are encapsulated into PWs and then carried on
tunnels. In the uplink direction of the UNI, hierarchical QoS configuration can be performed for
data packets.
Figure 3-4 E-Line services carried by PWs (network adjustment based on VLAN priorities)
NodeB 1
VLAN: 100
PRI: 3
RNC
UNI
MPLS tunnel
PW
PSN
NNI
UNI
NE1 NE3 NE2
NNI NNI
NNI
NNI
NNI
NodeB 2
VLAN: 100
PRI: 2
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
25
E-Line Services Carried by PWs (Network Adjustment Based on VLAN Switching)
Figure 3-5 shows the networking diagram of the E-Line services carried by PWs (network
adjustment based on VLAN switching). To transport different NodeBs' services that have a same
VLAN ID but are previously transported to different RNCs to a same RNC, this type of E-Line
enables VLAN switching to isolate the services before they are transported to the RNC.
Services from NodeB 1 and services from NodeB 2 have a same VLAN ID of 100, and need to
be transported to a same RNC. To isolate services from NodeB 1 and services from NodeB 2,
VLAN switching is required. After VLAN switching, the VLAN ID of services from NodeB 1
remains unchanged, whereas the VLAN ID of services from NodeB 2 is changed to 200.
The services that are received from the UNI are encapsulated into PWs and then carried on
tunnels. In the uplink direction of the UNI, hierarchical QoS configuration can be performed for
data packets.
Figure 3-5 E-Line services carried by PWs (network adjustment based on VLAN switching)
NodeB 1
RNC
UNI
MPLS tunnel
PW
PSN
NNI
UNI
NE1 NE3 NE2
NNI NNI
NNI
NNI
NNI
NodeB 2
NodeB 1 VLAN: 100
NodeB 2 VLAN: 100
NodeB 1 VLAN: 100
NodeB 2 VLAN: 200
E-Line Services Carried by QinQ Links
During the transmission on QinQ links, the packets that carry C-VLAN tags on the user-side
network are added with S-VLAN tags. Then the packets are sent across the network when
carrying two layers of VLAN tags. In this manner, the L2-VPN tunnel which is simple is provided
to the user. Figure 3-6 shows the networking diagram of the E-Line services carried by QinQ
links.
The branches of Company A and Company B are located in City 1 and City 2, and need to
communicate with each other. The services of Company A and Company B need to be isolated
from each other. The internal VLANs of Company A range from 1 to 100. The internal VLANs
of Company B range from 1 to 200. In this case, you can configure the E-Line services that are
carried by QinQ links and from the UNI to the NNI, to realize the communication between the
branches of Company A or Company B. Different services are carried by QinQ links with
different VLAN IDs, realizing the isolation of the services of Company A from the services of
Company B and saving the VLAN resources on the packet switching network.
The packets of different companies that are accessed from the UNI are added with different
VLAN IDs and then transmitted on the same link on the NNI.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
26
The E-Line services of different companies are added with a layer of VLAN tags each and then
transmitted to the same port. In this manner, the port resources on the NNI are saved and the
bandwidth utilization is increased. In addition, the E-Line services carried by QinQ links occupy
few VLANs on the packet switching network, saving the VLAN resources on the packet
switching network. You can configure the QinQ policy to realize the QoS for the services carried
by QinQ links.
Figure 3-6 E-Line services carried by QinQ links
Company A
Company B
Company A
City 1
Company B
PSN
An outer tag (VLAN = 40) is
added to the packets of
Company B
NE1
NE2
Intranet of Company A
VLAN = 1-100
Intranet of Company A
VLAN = 1-100
Intranet of Company B
VLAN = 1-200
Intranet of Company B
VLAN = 1-200
An outer tag (VLAN = 30) is
added to the packets of
Company A
City 2
QinQ link

3.1.2 UNI
A UNI refers to the Ethernet port that is connected to the user equipment. A UNI is used for the
user-side configuration of an Ethernet service.
V-UNI
A V-UNI is a virtual user-network interface. Each service on a UNI corresponds to a logical V-
UNI.
A UNI can receive multiple services. That is, a UNI may correspond to multiple V-UNIs.
V-UNI Group
A V-UNI group contains multiple V-UNIs, and limits the total bandwidth of the Ethernet services
received on the member V-UNIs.
For a user or an Ethernet service that has multiple access points, you can add the access points
to a V-UNI group and set a total bandwidth for the V-UNI group. Bandwidth parameters include
committed information rate (CIR), maximum burst size, peak bandwidth, and committed burst
size.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
27
V-UNIs in a V-UNI group share the total bandwidth but their bandwidths are limited by the total
bandwidth. To be specific, when the bandwidth of member A does not reach the CIR, member
B can use the remaining bandwidth; when the bandwidths of member A and member B do not
reach the CIR but their sum exceeds the total bandwidth of the V-UNI group, member A and
member B pre-empt the bandwidth based on service priorities.
Multiple V-UNIs on a board can be added to a V-UNI group.
V-UNIs in a V-UNI group can be changed/deleted at any time, and values of bandwidth
parameters can also be modified at any time.
3.1.3 NNI
An NNI refers to the Ethernet port that is connected to the packet transport network. An NNI is
used for the network-side configuration of an Ethernet service.
Based on the modes of carrying services, NNIs can be classified into three types, namely, NNIs
carrying services by ports, NNIs carrying services by PWs, and NNIs carrying services by QinQ
links.
Ethernet Services Carried by Ports
In the case of the NNIs that carry Ethernet services by ports, the encapsulation type can be 802.1Q
or QinQ. In this case, the NNIs that an Ethernet service traverses are exclusively occupied. The
other physical ports that the Ethernet service traverses may be shared.
Ethernet Services Carried by PWs
In the case of the NNIs that carry Ethernet services by PWs, you need to create static MPLS
tunnels for the NNIs. To create the Ethernet services carried by PWs, you need to create the PWs
first. In this case, different Ethernet services can be encapsulated into different PWs and
transmitted in a tunnel to the same NNI. Therefore, the occupied NNIs are reduced and the
bandwidth utilization is improved.
Ethernet Services Carried by QinQ Links
In the case of the NNIs that carry Ethernet services by QinQ links, you need to create QinQ links
for the NNIs. The port attribute and the encapsulation mode of the NNIs corresponding to the
QinQ links are Layer 2 and QinQ, respectively. On a QinQ link, the packets that are accessed
are encapsulated with one layer of VLAN tags in QinQ encapsulation mode at the access ports.
In this manner, multiple packets with different VLAN tags from the user-side network can be
encapsulated into the same VLAN for transport. Therefore, the occupied VLAN resources on
the transport network are reduced. E-Line services and E-LAN services can be carried by the
QinQ link on the network side. In this case, the packets of different companies that are accessed
on the user side are added with different VLAN tags and then are transmitted by the same QinQ
link on the network side.
3.2 Configuration Flow for the E-Line Services
The flowchart for configuring an E-Line service differs according to the type of the E-Line
service.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
28
3.2.1 Configuration Flow for the UNI-UNI E-Line Services
You need not configure the NNIs when configuring the UNI-UNI E-Line services.
Table 3-1 provides the process for configuring the UNI-UNI E-Line services.
Figure 3-7 Configuration flow for the UNI-UNI E-Line services
Configure the UNI
Configure the QoS
Create the UNI-UNI
E-Line services
Configuring the DCN
Function of a Port
Start
Required
Optional
End
Create the V-UNI
group

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
29
Table 3-1 Configuration flow for the UNI-UNI E-Line services
Step Operation Remarks
1 Configuring the UNI
(when the UNI is an
Ethernet port)
9.1.1 Setting the
General Attributes
of Ethernet
Interfaces
(Required) The
parameters are set as
follows:
l Enable Port is
set to Enabled.
l Port Mode is set
to Layer 2.
l Generally,
Encapsulation
Type is set to
802.1Q. When
the packets do not
need to be
distinguished
according to the
VLAN tags,
Encapsulation
Type is set to
Null.
l Working Mode
of the UNI needs
to be the same as
the working
mode of the
Ethernet
equipment on the
opposite end.
Generally, this
parameter takes
the default value
Auto-
Negotiation.
l When JUMBO
frames need not
be transmitted,
Max Frame
Length(byte)
takes the default
value 1620. In
other cases, Max
Frame Length
(byte) is set to the
maximum length
of the transmitted
JUMBO frames.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
30
Step Operation Remarks
9.1.2 Setting the
Layer 2 Attributes
of Ethernet Ports
(Optional) The
parameters are set as
follows:
l Tag needs to be
set according to
the type of the
packets that are
transmitted from
the equipment on
the opposite end.
If all the
packets are
untagged
frames, Tag is
set to Access.
If all the
packets are
tagged
frames, Tag is
set to Tag
Aware.
If the packets
contain
untagged
frames and
tagged
frames, Tag is
set to Hybrid.
l When Tag is set
to Access or
Hybrid, the
Default VLAN
ID and VLAN
Priority
parameters need
to be set for the
untagged frames.
VLAN Priority
needs to be set
according to the
planned QoS.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
31
Step Operation Remarks
9.1.5 Configuring
the Flow Control
(Optional) The
parameters are set as
follows:
l Generally, the
packet switched
network (PSN)
adopts the QoS
scheme to prevent
link congestion.
Hence, Auto-
Negotiation
Flow Control
Mode and Non-
Autonegotiation
Flow Control
Mode need to be
set to the default
value Disabled,
unless otherwise
specified.
2 Configuring the DCN Function of a Port (Optional) This
operation is
applicable only when
the UNI is an
Ethernet port. The
parameters are set as
follows:
l The UNI is used
for connecting the
external
equipment and
need not transmit
in-band DCN
information.
Hence, DCN
Enabled State
needs to be set to
Disabled for the
UNI.
3 Configuring the HQoS (Optional) The
parameters need to
be set according to
the service QoS
planning.
4 9.9.1 Configuring UNI-UNI E-Line
Services
(Required) The
parameters need to
be set according to
the service planning.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
32
Step Operation Remarks
5 9.21 Creating a V-UNI Group (Optional) The
parameters need to
be set according to
the service planning.

3.2.2 E-Line Services Carried by Ports
You need not configure the MPLS tunnel or QinQ link when configuring the E-Line services
carried by ports.
Table 3-2 provides the process for configuring the E-Line services carried by ports.
Figure 3-8 Configuration flow for the E-Line services carried by ports
Configure the UNI
Configure the QoS
Start
Required
Optional
End
Create the V-UNI
group
Configure the NNI for
the services carried
by ports
Create the E-Line
services carried by
ports
Configuring the DCN
Function of a Port

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
33
Table 3-2 Configuration flow for the E-Line services carried by ports
St
e
p
Operation Remarks
1 Config
uring
the
UNI
(when
the
UNI is
an
Ethern
et port)
9.1.1 Setting the
General
Attributes of
Ethernet
Interfaces
(Required) The parameters are set as follows:
l Enable Port is set to Enabled.
l Port Mode is set to Layer 2.
l Generally, Encapsulation Type is set to 802.1Q.
When the packets do not need to be distinguished
according to the VLAN tags, Encapsulation Type
is set to Null.
l Working Mode of the UNI needs to be the same as
the working mode of the Ethernet equipment on the
opposite end. Generally, this parameter takes the
default value Auto-Negotiation.
l When JUMBO frames need not be transmitted, Max
Frame Length(byte) takes the default value 1620.
In other cases, Max Frame Length(byte) is set to
the maximum length of the transmitted JUMBO
frames.
9.1.2 Setting the
Layer 2 Attributes
of Ethernet Ports
(Optional) The parameters are set as follows:
l Tag needs to be set according to the type of the
packets that are transmitted from the equipment on
the opposite end.
If all the packets are untagged packets, Tag is set
to Access.
If all the packets are tagged packets, Tag is set
to Tag Aware.
If the packets contain untagged packets and
tagged packets, Tag is set to Hybrid.
l When Tag is set to Access or Hybrid, the Default
VLAN ID and VLAN Priority parameters need to
be set for the untagged frames. VLAN Priority
needs to be set according to the planned QoS.
9.1.5 Configuring
the Flow Control
(Optional) The parameters are set as follows:
l Generally, the PSN adopts the QoS scheme to
prevent link congestion. Hence, Auto-Negotiation
Flow Control Mode and Non-Autonegotiation
Flow Control Mode need to be set to the default
value Disabled, unless otherwise specified.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
34
St
e
p
Operation Remarks
2 Configuring the DCN
Function of a Port
(Required) The E-Line services carried by ports occupy
the NNIs exclusively. Hence, you need to set DCN
Enabled State of the NNIs to Disabled.
(Optional) This operation is valid only when the UNI is
an Ethernet port. The UNI is connected to the external
equipment and thus does not need to transmit the in-
band DCN information. Hence, set DCN Enabled
State of the UNIs to Disabled.
3 9.3.1 Configuring the NNIs
for Ethernet Services
Carried by Ports
(Required) The parameters need to be set according to
the service planning.
4 Configuring the HQoS (Optional) The parameters need to be set according to
the service QoS planning.
5 9.9.2 Configuring UNI-NNI
E-Line Services Carried by
Ports
(Required) The parameters need to be set according to
the service planning.
6 9.21 Creating a V-UNI
Group
(Optional) The parameters need to be set according to
the service planning.

3.2.3 E-Line Services Carried by PWs
You need to configure the MPLS tunnel before configuring the E-Line services carried by PWs.
Table 3-3 provides the process for configuring the E-Line services carried by PWs.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
35
Figure 3-9 Configuration flow for the E-Line services carried by PWs
Configure the UNI
Configuring the DCN
Function of a Port
Start
Required
Optional
End
Create the V-UNI
group
Configure the NNI for
the services carried by
the static MPLS tunnel
Configure the MPLS
tunnel
Create the E-Line
services carried by
PWs

Table 3-3 Configuration flow for the E-Line services carried by PWs
Step Operation Remarks
1 Configur
ing the
UNI
(when
the UNI
is an
Ethernet
port)
9.1.1 Setting the
General Attributes
of Ethernet
Interfaces
(Required) The parameters are set as follows:
l Enable Port is set to Enabled.
l Port Mode is set to Layer 2.
l Generally, Encapsulation Type is set to
802.1Q. When the packets do not need to
be distinguished according to the VLAN
tags, Encapsulation Type is set to Null.
l Working Mode of the UNI needs to be
the same as the working mode of the
Ethernet equipment on the opposite end.
Generally, this parameter takes the default
value Auto-Negotiation.
l When JUMBO frames need not be
transmitted, Max Frame Length(byte)
takes the default value 1620. In other
cases, Max Frame Length(byte) is set to
the maximum length of the transmitted
JUMBO frames.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
36
Step Operation Remarks
9.1.2 Setting the
Layer 2 Attributes
of Ethernet Ports
(Optional) The parameters are set as follows:
l Tag needs to be set according to the type
of the packets that are transmitted from
the equipment on the opposite end.
If all the packets are untagged packets,
Tag is set to Access.
If all the packets are tagged packets,
Tag is set to Tag Aware.
If the packets contain untagged
packets and tagged packets, Tag is set
to Hybrid.
l When Tag is set to Access or Hybrid, the
Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority
parameters need to be set for the untagged
frames. VLAN Priority needs to be set
according to the planned QoS.
9.1.5 Configuring
the Flow Control
(Optional) The parameters are set as follows:
l Generally, the PSN adopts the QoS
scheme to prevent link congestion. Hence,
Auto-Negotiation Flow Control Mode
and Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control
Mode need to be set to the default value
Disabled, unless otherwise specified.
2 Configuring the DCN Function
of a Port
(Optional) This operation is applicable only
when the UNI is an Ethernet port. The
parameters are set as follows:
l The UNI is used for connecting the
external equipment and need not transmit
in-band DCN information. Hence,
Enable Port needs to be set to Disabled
for the UNI.
3 9.3.2 Configuring the NNIs for
Ethernet Services Carried by
Static MPLS Tunnels
(Required) Set the parameters as follows:
l Set Port Mode to Layer 3.
l Set Enable Tunnel to Enabled.
l Set Specify IP Address to Manually, and
set IP Address and IP Mask according to
the service plan.
4 Configur
ing the
MPLS
tunnel
9.4 Configuring an
MPLS Tunnel
(Required) The parameters need to be set
according to the service planning
information. For details on how to manage
MPLS tunnels, see 9.5 Managing MPLS
Tunnels.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
37
Step Operation Remarks
9.6 Configuring
MPLS OAM
(Optional) The parameters are set as follows:
l OAM Status is set to Enabled.
l Detection Mode is set to Manual.
l Detection Packet Type is set to FFD.
l Detection Packet Period(ms) is set to
3.3.
9.7 Configuring
MPLS Tunnel APS
(Optional) Set the MPLS tunnel APS
parameters according to the service planning
information. For details on how to manage
MPLS tunnel APS protection groups, see 9.8
Managing MPLS Tunnel APS Protection
Groups.
5 l 9.9.3 Configuring UNI-NNI
E-Line Services Carried by
PWs on a Per-NE Basis
l 9.9.4 Configuring E-Line
Services Carried by PWs in
End-to-End Mode
(Required) The parameters need to be set
according to the service planning
information. For details on how to manage
Ethernet services carried by PWs, see 9.16
Managing PWE3 Services.
6 9.21 Creating a V-UNI Group (Optional) The parameters need to be set
according to the service planning.

3.2.4 E-Line Services Carried by QinQ Links
You need to configure the QinQ links before configuring the E-Line services carried by QinQ
links.
Table 3-4 provides the process for configuring the E-Line services carried by QinQ links.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
38
Figure 3-10 Configuration flow for the E-Line services carried by QinQ links
Configure the UNI
Configure the QoS
Configuring the DCN
Function of a Port
Start
Required
Optional
End
Create the V-UNI
group
Configure the NNI
for the services
carried by QinQ
links
Configure the QinQ
links
Create the E-Line
services carried by
QinQ links

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
39
Table 3-4 Configuration flow for the E-Line services carried by QinQ links
Step Operation Remarks
1 Configuring the UNI
(when the UNI is an
Ethernet port)
9.1.1 Setting the
General Attributes
of Ethernet
Interfaces
(Required) The
parameters are set as
follows:
l Enable Port is
set to Enabled.
l Port Mode is set
to Layer 2.
l Generally,
Encapsulation
Type is set to
802.1Q.
l Working Mode
of the UNI needs
to be the same as
the working
mode of the
Ethernet
equipment on the
opposite end.
Generally, this
parameter takes
the default value
Auto-
Negotiation.
l When JUMBO
frames need not
be transmitted,
Max Frame
Length(byte)
takes the default
value 1620. In
other cases, Max
Frame Length
(byte) is set to the
maximum length
of the transmitted
JUMBO frames.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
40
Step Operation Remarks
9.1.2 Setting the
Layer 2 Attributes
of Ethernet Ports
(Optional) The
parameters are set as
follows:
l Tag needs to be
set according to
the type of the
packets that are
transmitted from
the equipment on
the opposite end.
If all the
packets are
untagged
packets, Tag
is set to
Access.
If all the
packets are
tagged
packets, Tag
is set to Tag
Aware.
If the packets
contain
untagged
packets and
tagged
packets, Tag
is set to
Hybrid.
l When Tag is set
to Access or
Hybrid, the
Default VLAN
ID and VLAN
Priority
parameters need
to be set for the
untagged frames.
VLAN Priority
needs to be set
according to the
planned QoS.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
41
Step Operation Remarks
9.1.5 Configuring
the Flow Control
(Optional) The
parameters are set as
follows:
l Generally, the
PSN adopts the
QoS scheme to
prevent link
congestion.
Hence, Auto-
Negotiation
Flow Control
Mode and Non-
Autonegotiation
Flow Control
Mode need to be
set to the default
value Disabled,
unless otherwise
specified.
2 Configuring the DCN Function of a Port (Optional) This
operation is
applicable only when
the UNI is an
Ethernet port. The
parameters are set as
follows:
l The UNI is used
for connecting the
external
equipment and
need not transmit
in-band DCN
information.
Hence, DCN
Enabled State
needs to be set to
Disabled for the
UNI.
3 9.3.3 Configuring the NNIs for Ethernet
Services Carried by QinQ Links
(Required) The
parameters need to
be set according to
the service planning.
4 9.20 Creating a QinQ Link (Required) The
parameters need to
be set according to
the service planning.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
42
Step Operation Remarks
5 Configuring the HQoS (Optional) The
parameters need to
be set according to
the service QoS
planning.
6 9.9.5 Creating UNI-NNI E-Line Services
Carried by QinQ Links
(Required) The
parameters need to
be set according to
the service planning.
7 9.21 Creating a V-UNI Group (Optional) The
parameters need to
be set according to
the service planning.

3.3 Configuration Example: UNI-UNI E-Line Services
This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the engineering information and how to
configure the UNI-UNI E-Line services for each NE according to the networking diagram.
3.3.1 Networking Diagram
The networking diagram shows the requirements for the UNI-UNI E-Line services.
On the network shown in Figure 3-11, the service requirements of User A are as follows:
l User A1 and User A2 need to communicate with each other. The services of User A1 are
accessed onto the PSN through the 21-PETF8-1 port. The services of User A2 are accessed
onto the PSN through the 21-PETF8-2 port.
l The services between User A1 and User A2 contain the voice service, video service, and
common Internet access service. The voice service and video service use the fixed
bandwidth whereas the common Internet access service can use all the bandwidth at a burst.
Table 3-5 lists the service requirements.
Figure 3-11 Networking diagram of the UNI-UNI E-Line services
User A1
User A2
NE1
UNI: 21-PETF8-1
UNI: 21-PETF8-2
PSN
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
43
NOTE
This topic considers the OptiX OSN 3500 as an example to describe the board layout. The methods of
configuring other products are the same as the method of configuring the OptiX OSN 3500, except that
the board layout may be different. For the slot information, see the Hardware Description of the specific
product.

Table 3-5 Requirements for the E-Line services
Service Type Requirement
Voice service (VLAN ID=100) Fixed bandwidth, CIR=PIR, 10 Mbit/s
Video service (VLAN ID=200) Fixed bandwidth, CIR=PIR, 40 Mbit/s
Common Internet access service (VLAN
ID=300)
CIR=10 Mbit/s, PIR=50 Mbit/s

3.3.2 Service Planning
To configure the UNI-UNI E-Line services, you only need to configure the data of the UNIs.
The voice service, video service, and common Internet access service between User A1 and User
A2 need to be separated from each other through VLAN tags. In addition, the voice service and
video service use the fixed bandwidths whereas the common Internet access service can use all
the bandwidths at a burst. Hence, different QoS processing operations need to be performed for
different services. Table 3-6 provides the service planning information.
Table 3-6 Planning information of the UNI-UNI E-Line services
Parameter Value Description
Service ID 1, 2, 3 The service ID can be entered
manually.
Service
Direction
UNI-UNI In this example, the UNI-UNI E-
Line services are created.
UNI 21-PETF8-1(Port-1), 21-PETF8-2
(Port-2)
The 21-PETF8-1 port (Port 1)
accesses the E-Line service of User
A1 and the 21-PETF8-2 port (Port
2) accesses the E-Line service of
User A2.
VLANs 100, 200, 300 l The VLAN ID of the voice
service is 100.
l The VLAN ID of the video
service is 200.
l The VLAN ID of the common
Internet access service is 300.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
44
Parameter Value Description
BPDU Not Transparently Transmitted BPDU packets are processed as
service packets, which are
processed differently according to
port attributes. When the port
attribute is Tag Aware, BPDU
packets are discarded because they
do not carry any VLAN IDs.
QoS Policy for
Voice Service
Fixed bandwidth, CIR=PIR, 10000
kbit/s
-
QoS Policy for
Video Service
Fixed bandwidth, CIR=PIR, 40000
kbit/s
-
QoS Policy for
Common
Internet Access
Service
CIR=10000 kbit/s, PIR=50000
kbit/s
-

3.3.3 Configuration Process
To configure the UNI-UNI E-Line services is to configure the E-Line services on an NE. This
topic describes how to configure the UNI-UNI E-Line services.
Prerequisites
l You must be familiar with the networking requirements and service planning for the UNI-
UNI E-Line service.
l The port attributes must be set correctly.
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l If the UNI-UNI E-Line service needs to occupy a port exclusively, disable the DCN
function of the port. For the operations for disabling the DCN function of the port, see
Configuring the DCN Function of a Port.
Procedure
Step 1 Configure the voice service between User A1 and User A2.
1. In the NE Explorer, select NE1, and then choose Configuration > Packet
Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function
Tree.
2. Click New. Then, the New E-Line Service dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters of
the voice service between User A1 and User A2.
Table 3-7 Parameters of the voice service between User A1 and User A2
Parameter Value in This Example
Service ID 1
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
45
Parameter Value in This Example
Service Name E-Line-1
Direction UNI-UNI
Port 21-PETF8-1 (Port-1)
VLANs 100
Port 21-PETF8-2 (Port-2)
VLANs 100
BPDU Not Transparently Transmitted
MTU (bytes) 1526

3. Click Configure QoS. Then, the Configure QoS dialog box is displayed.
4. Click the UNI tab. Set the QoS parameters for the voice service between User A1 and User
A2.
Table 3-8 QoS parameters of the voice service between User A1 and User A2
Parameter Value in This Example
Interface 21-PETF8-1 (Port-1) 21-PETF8-2 (Port-2)
Direction Ingress Ingress
Bandwidth Limit Enabled Enabled
CIR(kbit/s) 10000 10000
PIR(kbit/s) 10000 10000
Other parameters Default values Default values

Step 2 Configure the video service between User A1 and User A2.
Refer to Step 1 and configure the video service between User A1 and User A2.
Table 3-9 Parameters of the video service between User A1 and User A2
Parameter Value in This Example
Service ID 2
Service Name E-Line-2
Direction UNI-UNI
Port 21-PETF8-1 (Port-1)
VLANs 200
Port 21-PETF8-2 (Port-2)
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
46
Parameter Value in This Example
VLANs 200
BPDU Not Transparently Transmitted
MTU (bytes) 1526

Table 3-10 QoS parameters of the video service between User A1 and User A2
Parameter Value in This Example
Interface 21-PETF8-1 (Port-1) 21-PETF8-2 (Port-2)
Direction Ingress Ingress
Bandwidth Limit Enabled Enabled
CIR(kbit/s) 40000 40000
PIR(kbit/s) 40000 40000
Other parameters Default values Default values

Step 3 Configure the common Internet access service between User A1 and User A2.
Refer to Step 1 and configure the common Internet access service between User A1 and User
A2.
Table 3-11 Parameters of the common Internet access service between User A1 and User A2
Parameter Value in This Example
Service ID 3
Service Name E-Line-3
Direction UNI-UNI
Port 21-PETF8-1 (Port-1)
VLANs 300
Port 21-PETF8-2 (Port-2)
VLANs 300
BPDU Not Transparently Transmitted
MTU (bytes) 1526

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
47
Table 3-12 QoS parameters of the common Internet access service between User A1 and User
A2
Parameter Value in This Example
Interface 21-PETF8-1 (Port-1) 21-PETF8-2 (Port-2)
Direction Ingress Ingress
Bandwidth Limit Enabled Enabled
CIR(kbit/s) 10000 10000
PIR(kbit/s) 50000 50000
Other parameters Default values Default values

----End
3.4 Configuration Example: E-Line Services Carried by Ports
This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the engineering information and how to
configure the E-Line services carried by ports for each NE according to the networking diagram.
3.4.1 Networking Diagram
The networking diagram shows the requirements for the E-Line services carried by ports.
On the network shown in Figure 3-12, the service requirements of User A are as follows:
l User A1 and User A2 need to communicate with each other. The services of User A1 are
accessed onto NE1 through the 21-PETF8-1 port. The services of User A2 are accessed
onto NE2 through the 21-PETF8-1 port.
l The E-Line services of User A exclusively occupy all the UNIs and physical ports that the
E-Line services traverse on the network.
l The services between User A1 and User A2 contain the voice service, video service, and
common Internet service. The voice service and video service use the fixed bandwidths
whereas the common Internet access service can use all the bandwidths at a burst. Table
3-13 lists the service requirements.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
48
Figure 3-12 Networking diagram of the E-Line services carried by ports
UNI: 21-PETF8-1
Voice service
(VLAN=100)
Video service
(VLAN=200)
Common Internet
access service
(VLAN=300)
User A2
User A1
PSN
NNI: 3-PEG16-1
UNI: 21-PETF8-1
NNI: 3-PEG16-1
NE1
NE2
NOTE
l This section uses the OptiX OSN 3500 as an example to describe the board layout. The methods of
configuring other products are the same as the method of configuring the OptiX OSN 3500, except that
the board layout may be different. For the slot information, see the Hardware Description of the specific
product.
l On a live data network, an Ethernet service is added to its source NE, passed through on its transit NEs,
and dropped from its sink NE. For details on how to configure transit NEs for an Ethernet service
carried by ports, see 9.12.1 Configuring Transit NEs for Ethernet Services Carried by Ports.

Table 3-13 Requirements for the E-Line services
Service Type Requirement
Voice service (VLAN ID=100) Fixed bandwidth, CIR=PIR, 10 Mbit/s
Video service (VLAN ID=200) Fixed bandwidth, CIR=PIR, 40 Mbit/s
Common Internet access service (VLAN
ID=300)
CIR=0 Mbit/s, PIR=50 Mbit/s
Total bandwidth 100 Mbit/s

3.4.2 Service Planning
To configure the E-Line services carried by ports, you need to configure the data of the UNI and
the data of the NNI.
The voice service, video service, and common Internet access service between User A1 and User
A2 need to be separated from each other through VLAN tags. In addition, the voice service and
video service use the fixed bandwidths whereas the common Internet access service can use all
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
49
the bandwidths at a burst. Hence, different QoS processing operations need to be performed for
different services. Table 3-14 provides the service planning information.
Table 3-14 Planning information of the E-Line services carried by ports
Parameter NE1 NE2 Description
Service ID 1, 2, 3 1, 2, 3 The service ID can be
entered manually.
Service
Direction
UNI-NNI UNI-NNI In this example, the
UNI-NNI E-Line
services are created.
UNI 21-PETF8-1(Port-1) 21-PETF8-1(Port-1) The 21-PETF8-1 port
(Port 1) of NE1 accesses
the E-Line service of
User A1 and the 21-
PETF8-1 port (Port 2) of
NE2 accessed the E-
Line service of User A2.
VLANs 100, 200, 300 100, 200, 300 l The VLAN ID of the
voice service is 100.
l The VLAN ID of the
video service is 200.
l The VLAN ID of the
common Internet
access service is 300.
BPDU Not Transparently
Transmitted
Not Transparently
Transmitted
BPDU packets are
processed as service
packets, which are
processed differently
according to port
attributes. When the
port attribute is Tag
Aware, BPDU packets
are discarded because
they do not carry any
VLAN IDs.
Bearer
Type
Port Port In this example, the E-
Line services are
configured to be carried
by ports from the user
side to the network side.
NNI 3-PEG16-1(Port-1) 3-PEG16-1(Port-1) -
QoS Policy
for Voice
Service
Fixed bandwidth,
CIR=PIR, 10000 kbit/s
Fixed bandwidth,
CIR=PIR, 10000 kbit/s
-
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
50
Parameter NE1 NE2 Description
QoS Policy
for Video
Service
Fixed bandwidth,
CIR=PIR, 40000 kbit/s
Fixed bandwidth,
CIR=PIR, 40000 kbit/s
-
QoS Policy
for
Common
Internet
Access
Service
CIR=0 kbit/s,
PIR=50000 kbit/s
CIR=0 kbit/s,
PIR=50000 kbit/s
-
Total
bandwidth
CIR=50000 kbit/s,
PIR=100000 kbit/s
CIR=50000 kbit/s,
PIR=100000 kbit/s
-

3.4.3 Configuration Process
The E-Line services carried by ports need to occupy the NNI ports exclusively. Hence, you need
to disable the DCN function of the NNI ports before configuring the E-Line services.
Prerequisites
l You must be familiar with the networking requirements and service planning for the UNI-
NNI E-Line services carried by the ports.
l The port attributes must be set correctly.
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l The QoS policy must be configured according to the E-Line service planning. For the
configuration method, see Creating the V-UNI Ingress Policy (OptiX OSN 3500/7500/7500
II).
l The E-Line services carried by ports need to occupy the NNI ports exclusively. Hence, you
need to disable the DCN function of the NNI ports. If the E-Line services carried by ports
need to occupy the UNI ports, you also need to disable the DCN function of the UNI ports.
For the method of disabling the DCN function of a port, see Configuring the DCN Function
of a Port.
Procedure
Step 1 On NE1, configure the voice service, video service, and common Internet access service between
User A1 and User A2.
1. In the NE Explorer, select NE1, and then choose Configuration > Packet
Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function
Tree.
2. Click New. Then, the New E-Line Service dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters of
the E-Line services between User A1 and User A2.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
51
Table 3-15 Parameters of the E-Line services between User A1 and User A2
Parameter Value in This Example
Service ID 1
Service Name E-Line-1
Direction UNI-NNI
Port 21-PETF8-1 (Port-1)
VLANs 100, 200, 300
Bearer Type Port
Sink Port 3-PEG16-1 (Port-1)
BPDU Not Transparently Transmitted
MTU (bytes) 1526

3. Click Configure QoS. Then, the Configure QoS dialog box is displayed.
4. Click the UNI tab. Set the QoS parameters for the E-Line services between User A1 and
User A2.
Table 3-16 QoS parameters of the E-Line services between User A1 and User A2
Parameter Value in This Example
Interface 21-PETF8-1 (Port-1)
Direction Ingress
Bandwidth Limit Enabled
Policy Note: The QoS policy that is configured
correctly is selected.
CIR(kbit/s) 50000
PIR(kbit/s) 100000
Other parameters Default values

Step 2 On NE2, configure the voice service, video service, and common Internet access service between
User A1 and User A2.
Refer to Step 1 and configure the E-Line services between User A1 and User A2.
----End
Relevant Task
See 3.4.4 Verifying the Correctness of E-Line Service Configuration to check whether the
E-Line services carried by ports are configured correctly.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
52
3.4.4 Verifying the Correctness of E-Line Service Configuration
After the E-Line services are configured, the correctness of service configuration should be
verified. The Ethernet OAM function is used to verify the correctness of E-Line service
configuration.
Prerequisites
The E-Line services must be already created.
Context
In the case of UNI-UNI E-Line services, you need not perform the connectivity check by using
the 802.1ag OAM function. By default, the UNI-UNI E-Line services are normal. The
connectivity check method (by using the 802.1ag OAM function) of the UNI-NNI E-Line
services carried by ports and QinQ links is the same as the connectivity check method (by using
the 802.1ag OAM function) of the UNI-NNI E-Line services carried by PWs.
This topic considers the E-Line services carried by PWs as the example to describe how to check
whether the E-Line services are configured correctly. Before you perform the check, you need
to configure the Ethernet OAM function. See Figure 3-13.
Figure 3-13 OAM of the E-Line services
Unicast tunnel
PW
MEP
MEP
MA: maintenance association
MEP
MEP
M A
MD
MD: maintenance domain
M A
MEP: maintenance end point
NE1 NE2
User A1
User B1
User A2
User B2

As shown in the figure, two E-Line services are configured between User A1 and User A2 and
between User B1 and User B2. The two E-Line services are carried and isolated by PWs. To
check whether the two E-Line services are configured correctly, you need to configure the
Ethernet OAM function. This topic considers the E-Line service between User A1 and User A2
as the example.
Procedure
Step 1 At NE1 and NE2, create the maintenance domain for the E-Line service between User A1 and
User A2. For the creation method, see Creating an MD.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
53
Set the parameters of the maintenance domain.
Parameter NE1 NE2
Maintenance
Domain Name
MD MD
Maintenance
Domain Level
4 4

NOTE
The maintenance domain names and levels of NE1 and NE2 need to be the same so that NE1 and NE2
belong to the same maintenance domain.
Step 2 At NE1 and NE2, create the maintenance association for the E-Line service between User A1
and User A2. For the creation method, see Creating an MA.
Set the parameters of the maintenance association.
Parameter NE1 NE2
Maintenance Domain Name MD MD
Maintenance Association
Name
MA MA
Relevant Service 1-E-Line-1 1-E-Line-1
CC Test Transmit Period
(ms)
3.33 ms 3.33 ms

Step 3 At NE1 and NE2, create the maintenance end points (MEPs). For the creation method, see
Creating an MEP.
Set the parameters of the MEPs.
Parameter NE1 NE2
Maintenance Domain Name MD MD
Maintenance Association
Name
MA MA
Board 21-PETF8 21-PETF8
Port 1(Port-1) 1(Port-1)
VLAN 100 100
MP ID 1 2
Direction Ingress Ingress
CC Status Active Active
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
54

Step 4 At NE1 and NE2, create the remote MEPs. Perform the CC test. For the test method, see
Performing a Continuity Check.
NOTE
l If the MEP of NE2 does not receive the CC packets from NE1 in a period of time (for example, 3.25
times of the transmission period), the MEP automatically reports the ETH_CFM_LOC alarm. If the
ETH_CFM_LOC alarm is not reported, the connectivity of the service from NE1 to NE2 is normal.
l If the MEP of NE1 does not receive the CC packets from NE2 in a period of time (for example, 3.25
times of the transmission period), the MEP automatically reports the ETH_CFM_LOC alarm. If the
ETH_CFM_LOC alarm is not reported, the connectivity of the service from NE2 to NE1 is normal.
----End
3.5 Configuration Example: E-Line Services Carried by PWs
(Newly Created)
This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the engineering information and how to
configure the E-Line services carried by PWs for each NE according to the networking diagram.
3.5.1 Networking Diagram
The networking diagram shows the requirements for the E-Line services carried by PWs.
On the network shown in Figure 3-14, the service requirements of User A and User B are as
follows:
l User A1 and User B1 are connected to NE1 through the 21-PETF8-1 and 21-PETF8-2 ports
respectively.
l User A2 and User B2 are connected to NE2 through the 21-PETF8-1 and 21-PETF8-2 ports
respectively.
l The service between User A1 and User A2 is the common Internet access service of which
the CIR is 10 Mbit/s and the PIR is 30 Mbit/s.
l The service between User B1 and User B2 is the data service of which the CIR is 30 Mbit/
s and the PIR is 50 Mbit/s.
l The services of User A and User B each are carried on different PW links.
l The two PW links that carry the services of User A and User B share the bandwidth of one
tunnel.
l The services of User A and User B are protected.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
55
Figure 3-14 Networking diagram of the E-Line services carried by PWs
User A2 User A1
User B1
User B2
UNI for A1:21-PETF8-1
UNI for B1:21-PETF8-2
MPLS Tunnel
PW
PSN
NNI:3-PEG16-2
UNI for A2:21-PETF8-1
UNI for B2:21-PETF8-2
NE 1 NE3 NE2
NNI:3-PEG16-4
NNI:3-PEG16-2
NNI:3-PEG16-1
NNI:3-PEG16-3
NNI:3-PEG16-1
NOTE
l This section uses the OptiX OSN 3500 as an example to describe the board layout. The methods of
configuring other products are the same as the method of configuring the OptiX OSN 3500, except that
the board layout may be different. For the slot information, see the Hardware Description of the specific
product.
l On a live data network, an Ethernet service is added to its source NE, passed through on its transit NEs,
and dropped from its sink NE. For details on how to configure transit NEs for an Ethernet service
carried by PWs, see 9.12.2 Configuring Transit NEs for Ethernet Services Carried by PWs.
NE IP Address IP Mask LSR ID
NE1 3-
PEG16-1
18.1.1.1 255.255.255.252 130.0.0.1
3-
PEG16-2
18.1.2.1 255.255.255.252
NE2 3-
PEG16-1
18.1.1.2 255.255.255.252 130.0.0.2
3-
PEG16-2
18.1.2.2 255.255.255.252
3-
PEG16-3
18.1.1.5 255.255.255.252
3-
PEG16-4
18.1.2.5 255.255.255.252
NE3 3-
PEG16-1
18.1.1.6 255.255.255.252 130.0.0.3
3-
PEG16-2
18.1.2.6 255.255.255.252

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
56
NOTE
l The IP addresses of the Ethernet ports on an NE cannot be in the same network segment.
l The IP addresses of the ports at both ends of a link must be in the same network segment.

3.5.2 Service Planning
The engineering information for configuring the E-Line services carried by PWs contains the
engineering information for configuring the tunnel carrying the PWs, the engineering
information for configuring the PWs, and the engineering information for configuring the UNI-
NNI E-Line services carried by the PWs.
The PWs that carry the E-Line services are carried by a tunnel. Hence, you need to plan the
tunnel during the service planning. Therefore, planning the E-Line services carried by PWs
involves the following:
l Plan the tunnel that carries the PWs. Refer to Table 3-17 and Table 3-18.
l Plan the MPLS Tunnel OAM. Refer to Table 3-19.
l Plan the MPLS Tunnel APS. Refer to Table 3-20.
l Plan the PWs. Refer to Table 3-21.
l Plan the UNI-NNI E-Line services carried by PWs. Refer to Table 3-22.
Table 3-17 Basic attributes of a tunnel
Param
eter
MPLS
Tunnel
name
MPLS
Tunnel
ID
Protocol
Type
Signalin
g Type
Direction Protected
Type
Paramet
er
Plannin
g
NE1_NE3_w
orking
10 MPLS Static CR Bidirectio
nal
Unprotect
ed
NE1_NE3_pr
otection
20 MPLS Static CR Bidirectio
nal
Unprotect
ed

Table 3-18 Planning information of the tunnels
MPL
S
Tun
nel
ID
N
o
d
e
No
de
Ty
pe
In
Inte
rfac
e
In
Lab
el
Rev
erse
In
Lab
el
Out
Inte
rfac
e
Out
Lab
el
Rev
ers
e
Out
Lab
el
Ne
xt
Ho
p
Rev
ers
e
Ne
xt
Ho
p
Sour
ce
Nod
e
Sink
Nod
e
Wor
king
Tunn
el
N
E
1
Ing
res
s
- - 103 3-
PEG
16-1
100 - 18.1
.1.2
- - 130.0
.0.3
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
57
MPL
S
Tun
nel
ID
N
o
d
e
No
de
Ty
pe
In
Inte
rfac
e
In
Lab
el
Rev
erse
In
Lab
el
Out
Inte
rfac
e
Out
Lab
el
Rev
ers
e
Out
Lab
el
Ne
xt
Ho
p
Rev
ers
e
Ne
xt
Ho
p
Sour
ce
Nod
e
Sink
Nod
e
N
E
2
Tra
nsit
3-
PEG
16-1
100 102 3-
PEG
16-3
101 103 18.1
.1.6
18.1
.1.1
130.0
.0.1
130.0
.0.3
N
E
3
Egr
ess
3-
PEG
16-1
101 - - 102 - 18.1
.1.5
130.0
.0.1
-
Prote
ction
Tunn
el
N
E
1
Ing
res
s
- - 203 3-
PEG
16-2
200 - 18.1
.2.2
- - 130.0
.0.3
N
E
2
Tra
nsit
3-
PEG
16-2
200 202 3-
PEG
16-4
201 203 18.1
.2.6
18.1
.2.1
130.0
.0.1
130.0
.0.3
N
E
3
Egr
ess
3-
PEG
16-2
201 - - 202 - 18.1
.2.5
130.0
.0.1
-

Table 3-19 Parameter planning for MPLS tunnel OAM
Parameter Parameter Planning
MPLS Tunnel ID 10 20
OAM Status Enabled Enabled
Detection Mode Manual Manual
Detection Packet
Type
FFD
NOTE
Detection Packet Period can be set only
when Detection Packet Type is FFD.
FFD
Detection Packet
Period (ms)
3.3
NOTE
Generally, the OAM packet is reported after
three periods. When Detection Packet
Period (ms) is set to 3.3, the switching time
can meet the requirement (less than 50 ms)
after a fault occurs.
3.3

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
58
Table 3-20 Parameter planning for MPLS tunnel APS
Parameter Parameter Planning
Protection Type 1+1
Switching Mode Single-Ended
Workin
g
Tunnel ID 10
Tunnel
Name
NE1_NE3_working
Protect
ion
Tunnel ID 20
Tunnel
Name
NE1_NE3_protection
Revertive Mode Revertive
WTR Time(min) 5
Hold-off Time
(100ms)
0
NOTE
Services are not protected with multiple protection schemes. Therefore, the
setting of Hold-off Time(100ms) is unnecessary.
Protocol State Enabled

Table 3-21 Planning information of the PWs
Parameter PW of User A PW of User B
PW Signaling Type Static Static
PW Type Ethernet Tagged Mode Ethernet Tagged Mode
PW Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional
PW Incoming Label/Source
Port
20 30
PW Outgoing Label/Sink Port 20 30
Peer LSR ID NE1 130.0.0.3 130.0.0.3
NE3 130.0.0.1 130.0.0.1
MPLS Tunnel name NE1_NE3_working NE1_NE3_working
Bandwidth Limit Enabled Enabled
CIR (kbit/s) 10000 30000
PIR (kbit/s) 30000 50000
Request VLAN 10 20

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
59
Table 3-22 Planning information of the E-Line services carried by the PWs from the user side
to the network side
Parameter User A User B
Service ID 1 2
Name E-Line-1 E-Line-2
Direction UNI-NNI UNI-NNI
UNI 21-PETF8-1 21-PETF8-2
VLANs 100 100
Bearer Type PW PW
PW ID 35 45
BPDU Not Transparently
Transmitted
Not Transparently
Transmitted
MTU (bytes) 1500 1500

3.5.3 Configuration Process (in End-to-End Mode)
Before configuring E-Line services carried by PWs, you need to configure the tunnels that carry
the PWs.
Prerequisites
l You must be familiar with the networking requirements and service planning information
of the UNI-NNI E-Line services carried by the PWs.
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l If the E-Line services carried by PWs need to occupy the UNI ports exclusively, disable
the DCN function of the UNI ports. For the method of disabling the DCN function of a
port, see Configuring the DCN Function of a Port.
Procedure
Step 1 Follow the instructions in 9.4.3 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel in an End-to-End Mode and
configure tunnels for carrying PWs.
Table 3-23 Basic attributes of a tunnel
Param
eter
MPLS
Tunnel
name
MPLS
Tunnel
ID
Protocol
Type
Signalin
g Type
Direction Protected
Type
Paramet
er
Plannin
g
NE1_NE3_w
orking
10 MPLS Static CR Bidirectio
nal
Unprotect
ed
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
60
Param
eter
MPLS
Tunnel
name
MPLS
Tunnel
ID
Protocol
Type
Signalin
g Type
Direction Protected
Type
NE1_NE3_pr
otection
20 MPLS Static CR Bidirectio
nal
Unprotect
ed

Table 3-24 Planning information of the tunnels
MPL
S
Tun
nel
ID
N
o
d
e
No
de
Ty
pe
In
Inte
rfac
e
In
Lab
el
Rev
erse
In
Lab
el
Out
Inte
rfac
e
Out
Lab
el
Rev
ers
e
Out
Lab
el
Ne
xt
Ho
p
Rev
ers
e
Ne
xt
Ho
p
Sour
ce
Nod
e
Sink
Nod
e
Wor
king
Tunn
el
N
E
1
Ing
res
s
- - 103 3-
PEG
16-1
100 - 18.1
.1.2
- - 130.0
.0.3
N
E
2
Tra
nsit
3-
PEG
16-1
100 102 3-
PEG
16-3
101 103 18.1
.1.6
18.1
.1.1
130.0
.0.1
130.0
.0.3
N
E
3
Egr
ess
3-
PEG
16-1
101 - - 102 - 18.1
.1.5
130.0
.0.1
-
Prote
ction
Tunn
el
N
E
1
Ing
res
s
- - 203 3-
PEG
16-2
200 - 18.1
.2.2
- - 130.0
.0.3
N
E
2
Tra
nsit
3-
PEG
16-2
200 202 3-
PEG
16-4
201 203 18.1
.2.6
18.1
.2.1
130.0
.0.1
130.0
.0.3
N
E
3
Egr
ess
3-
PEG
16-2
201 - - 202 - 18.1
.2.5
130.0
.0.1
-

Step 2 Follow the instructions in 9.6 Configuring MPLS OAM and configure MPLS tunnel OAM.
Table 3-25 Parameter planning for MPLS tunnel OAM
Parameter Parameter Planning
MPLS Tunnel ID 10 20
OAM Status Enabled Enabled
Detection Mode Manual Manual
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
61
Parameter Parameter Planning
Detection Packet
Type
FFD
NOTE
Detection Packet Period can be set only
when Detection Packet Type is FFD.
FFD
Detection Packet
Period (ms)
3.3
NOTE
Generally, the OAM packet is reported after
three periods. When Detection Packet
Period (ms) is set to 3.3, the switching time
can meet the requirement (less than 50 ms)
after a fault occurs.
3.3

Step 3 Follow the instructions in 9.7 Configuring MPLS Tunnel APS and configure MPLS tunnel
APS.
Table 3-26 Parameter planning for MPLS tunnel APS
Parameter Parameter Planning
Protection Type 1+1
Switching Mode Single-Ended
Workin
g
Tunnel ID 10
Tunnel
Name
NE1_NE3_working
Protect
ion
Tunnel ID 20
Tunnel
Name
NE1_NE3_protection
Revertive Mode Revertive
WTR Time(min) 5
Hold-off Time
(100ms)
0
NOTE
Services are not protected with multiple protection schemes. Therefore, the
setting of Hold-off Time(100ms) is unnecessary.
Protocol State Enabled

Step 4 Configure the common Internet access service between User A1 and User A2 in end-to-end
mode.
1. Choose Service > PWE3 Service > Create PWE3 Service from the Main Menu.
2. Set the basic attributes of the common Internet access service between User A1 and User
A2.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
62
Table 3-27 Parameters of the E-Line services between User A1 and User A2
Parameter Value in This Example
Service Type ETH
Service ID 1
Service Name E-Line-1
Protection Type Unprotected

3. Configure the source NE and sink NE of the PWE3 service.
a. Under Node List, click Configure Source And Sink. Then, a dialog box is displayed.
b. Select the source NE from Physical Topology on the left.
c. Set the SAI attributes of the E-Line service in SAI Configuration. Then, click Add
Node.
Table 3-28 Parameters of the service ports between User A1 and User A2
Parameter Value in This Example
Source ID 1
VLAN ID 100
Sink ID 1
VLAN ID 100

4. Click the PW tab and set the basic attributes of the PW.
Table 3-29 Parameters of the PW between User A1 and User A2
Parameter Value in This Example
PW ID 35
Signaling Type Static
Forward Label 20
Reverse Label 20
Forward Type Static Binding
Forward Tunnel NE1_NE3_working
Reverse Type Static Binding
Reverse Tunnel NE1_NE3_working
Encapsulation Type MPLS

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
63
5. Click Detail, set the Advanced attributes of the PW.
a. Click the PW QoS tab and set the parameters of the PW QoS.
Table 3-30 Parameters of the service bandwidth between User A1 and User A2
Parameter Value in This Example
Forward Bandwidth Limit Enabled
CIR(kbit/s) 10000
PIR(kbit/s) 30000
Reverse Bandwidth Limit Enabled
CIR(kbit/s) 10000
PIR(kbit/s) 30000

b. Click the Advanced PW Attribute tab and set the advanced attributes of the PW.
Table 3-31 Parameters of the advanced attributes of the PW between User A1 and User
A2
Parameter Value in This Example
PW Type Ethernet Tagged Mode
Request VLAN 10
Other parameters Default values
NOTE
For details on how to configure the TPID, see 9.19
Configuring the NE-Level TPID.

6. Click OK.
Step 5 Configure the data service between User A1 and User A2 in end-to-end mode.
Configure the data service between User B1 and User B2 according to Step 4.
Table 3-32 Parameters of the E-Line services between User B1 and User B2
Parameter Value in This Example
Service Type ETH
Service ID 2
Service Name E-Line-2
Protection Type Unprotected

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
64
Table 3-33 Parameters of the service ports between User B1 and User B2
Parameter Value in This Example
Source ID 2
VLAN ID 100
Sink ID 2
VLAN ID 100

Table 3-34 Parameters of the PW between User B1 and User B2
Parameter Value in This Example
PW ID 45
Signaling Type Static
Forward Label 30
Reverse Label 30
Forward Type Static Binding
Forward Tunnel NE1_NE3_working
Reverse Type Static Binding
Reverse Tunnel NE1_NE3_working
Encapsulation Type MPLS

Table 3-35 Parameters of the service bandwidth between User B1 and User B2
Parameter Value in This Example
Forward Bandwidth Limit Enabled
CIR(kbit/s) 30000
PIR(kbit/s) 50000
Reverse Bandwidth Limit Enabled
CIR(kbit/s) 30000
PIR(kbit/s) 50000

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
65
Table 3-36 Parameters of the advanced attributes of the PW between User B1 and User B2
Parameter Value in This Example
PW Type Ethernet Tagged Mode
Request VLAN 20
Other parameters Default values
NOTE
For details on how to configure the TPID, see 9.19 Configuring the
NE-Level TPID.

----End
Relevant Task
See 3.5.5 Verifying E-Line Services to check whether the E-Line services carried by PWs are
configured correctly.
3.5.4 Configuration Process (Configuration on a Per-NE Basis)
Before configuring the E-Line services carried by PWs, you need to configure the tunnels that
carry the PWs.
Prerequisites
l You must be familiar with the networking requirements and service planning for the UNI-
NNI E-Line services carried by the PWs.
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l If the UNI-NNI E-Line services need to occupy the UNI ports exclusively, disable the DCN
function of the UNI ports. For the method of disabling the DCN function of a port, see
Configuring the DCN Function of a Port.
Procedure
Step 1 On NE1, NE2, and NE3, configure tunnels that carry PWs. For the configuration procedures,
see 9.4 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel.
Table 3-37 Basic attributes of a tunnel
Param
eter
MPLS
Tunnel
name
MPLS
Tunnel
ID
Protocol
Type
Signalin
g Type
Direction Protected
Type
Paramet
er
Plannin
g
NE1_NE3_w
orking
10 MPLS Static CR Bidirectio
nal
Unprotect
ed
NE1_NE3_pr
otection
20 MPLS Static CR Bidirectio
nal
Unprotect
ed

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
66
Table 3-38 Planning information of the tunnels
MPL
S
Tun
nel
ID
N
o
d
e
No
de
Ty
pe
In
Inte
rfac
e
In
Lab
el
Rev
erse
In
Lab
el
Out
Inte
rfac
e
Out
Lab
el
Rev
ers
e
Out
Lab
el
Ne
xt
Ho
p
Rev
ers
e
Ne
xt
Ho
p
Sour
ce
Nod
e
Sink
Nod
e
Wor
king
Tunn
el
N
E
1
Ing
res
s
- - 103 3-
PEG
16-1
100 - 18.1
.1.2
- - 130.0
.0.3
N
E
2
Tra
nsit
3-
PEG
16-1
100 102 3-
PEG
16-3
101 103 18.1
.1.6
18.1
.1.1
130.0
.0.1
130.0
.0.3
N
E
3
Egr
ess
3-
PEG
16-1
101 - - 102 - 18.1
.1.5
130.0
.0.1
-
Prote
ction
Tunn
el
N
E
1
Ing
res
s
- - 203 3-
PEG
16-2
200 - 18.1
.2.2
- - 130.0
.0.3
N
E
2
Tra
nsit
3-
PEG
16-2
200 202 3-
PEG
16-4
201 203 18.1
.2.6
18.1
.2.1
130.0
.0.1
130.0
.0.3
N
E
3
Egr
ess
3-
PEG
16-2
201 - - 202 - 18.1
.2.5
130.0
.0.1
-

Step 2 On NE1, NE2, and NE3, configure MPLS tunnel OAM. For the configuration procedures, see
9.6 Configuring MPLS OAM.
Table 3-39 Parameter planning for MPLS tunnel OAM
Parameter Parameter Planning
MPLS Tunnel ID 10 20
OAM Status Enabled Enabled
Detection Mode Manual Manual
Detection Packet
Type
FFD
NOTE
Detection Packet Period can be set only
when Detection Packet Type is FFD.
FFD
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
67
Parameter Parameter Planning
Detection Packet
Period (ms)
3.3
NOTE
Generally, the OAM packet is reported after
three periods. When Detection Packet
Period (ms) is set to 3.3, the switching time
can meet the requirement (less than 50 ms)
after a fault occurs.
3.3

Step 3 On NE1 and NE3, configure MPLS tunnel APS. For the configuration procedures, see 9.7
Configuring MPLS Tunnel APS.
Table 3-40 Parameter planning for MPLS tunnel APS
Parameter Parameter Planning
Protection Type 1+1
Switching Mode Single-Ended
Workin
g
Tunnel ID 10
Tunnel
Name
NE1_NE3_working
Protect
ion
Tunnel ID 20
Tunnel
Name
NE1_NE3_protection
Revertive Mode Revertive
WTR Time(min) 5
Hold-off Time
(100ms)
0
NOTE
Services are not protected with multiple protection schemes. Therefore, the
setting of Hold-off Time(100ms) is unnecessary.
Protocol State Enabled

Step 4 On NE1, configure the E-Line services of User A1.
1. In the NE Explorer, select NE1, and then choose Configuration > Packet
Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function
Tree.
2. Click New. Then, the New E-Line Service dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters of
the E-Line services of User A1.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
68
Table 3-41 Parameters of the E-Line services carried by PWs of User A1
Parameter Value in This Example
Service ID 1
Service Name E-Line-1
Direction UNI-NNI
BPDU Not Transparently Transmitted
MTU (bytes) 1500
Port 21-PETF8-1
VLANs 100
Bearer Type PW
Protection Type Unprotected

3. Click Configure PW. Then, the Configure PW dialog box is displayed. Set the PW
parameters.
Table 3-42 PW parameters of the E-Line services of User A1
Parameter Value in This Example
General Attributes PW ID 35
PW Signaling Type Static
PW Type Ethernet Tagged Mode
PW Direction Bidirectional
PW Incoming Label/
Source Port
20
PW Outgoing Label/Sink
Port
20
Tunnel Type MPLS
Tunnel No. NE1_NE3_working
Peer LSR ID 130.0.0.3
Advanced Attributes Request VLAN 10
Other parameters Default values
NOTE
For details on how to configure the TPID, see 9.19 Configuring
the NE-Level TPID.

4. Click Configure QoS. Then, the Configure QoS dialog box is displayed.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
69
5. Click the PW tab. Set the QoS parameters of the E-Line services of User A1.
Table 3-43 QoS parameters of the E-Line services of User A1
Parameter Value in This Example
PW ID 35
Direction Ingress
Bandwidth Limit Enabled
CIR(kbit/s) 10000
PIR(kbit/s) 30000
Other parameters Default values

Step 5 On NE1, configure the E-Line services of User B1.
Refer to Step 4 and configure the E-Line services of User B1.
Table 3-44 Parameters of the E-Line services carried by PWs of User B1
Parameter Value in This Example
Service ID 2
Service Name E-Line-2
Direction UNI-NNI
BPDU Not Transparently Transmitted
MTU(bytes) 1500
Port 21-PETF8-2
VLANs 100
Bearer Type PW
Protection Type Unprotected

Table 3-45 PW parameters of the E-Line services of User B1
Parameter Value in This Example
General Attributes PW ID 45
PW Signaling Type Static
PW Type Ethernet Tagged Mode
PW Direction Bidirectional
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
70
Parameter Value in This Example
PW Incoming Label/Source
Port
30
PW Outgoing Label/Sink
Port
30
Tunnel Type MPLS
Tunnel No. NE1_NE3_working
Peer LSR ID 130.0.0.3
Advanced Attributes Request VLAN 20
Other parameters Default values
NOTE
For details on how to configure the TPID, see 9.19 Configuring the
NE-Level TPID.

Table 3-46 QoS parameters of the E-Line services of User B1
Parameter Value in This Example
PW ID 45
Direction Ingress
Bandwidth Limit Enabled
CIR(kbit/s) 30000
PIR(kbit/s) 50000
Other parameters Default values

Step 6 On NE3, configure the E-Line services of User A2 and User B2.
Refer to Step 4 and configure the E-Line services of User A2 and User B2.
Table 3-47 Parameters of the E-Line services carried by PWs of User A2
Parameter Value in This Example
Service ID 1
Service Name E-Line-1
Direction UNI-NNI
BPDU Not Transparently Transmitted
MTU(bytes) 1500
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
71
Parameter Value in This Example
Port 21-PETF8-1
VLANs 100
Bearer Type PW
Protection Type Unprotected

Table 3-48 PW parameters of the E-Line services of User A2
Parameter Value in This Example
General Attributes PW ID 35
PW Signaling Type Static
PW Type Ethernet Tagged Mode
PW Direction Bidirectional
PW Incoming Label/Source
Port
20
PW Outgoing Label/Sink
Port
20
Tunnel Type MPLS
Tunnel No. NE1_NE3_working
Peer LSR ID 130.0.0.1
Advanced Attributes Request VLAN 10
Other parameters Default values
NOTE
For details on how to configure the TPID, see 9.19 Configuring the
NE-Level TPID.

Table 3-49 QoS parameters of the E-Line services of User A2
Parameter Value in This Example
PW ID 35
Direction Ingress
Bandwidth Limit Enabled
CIR(kbit/s) 10000
PIR(kbit/s) 30000
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
72
Parameter Value in This Example
Other parameters Default values

Table 3-50 Parameters of the E-Line services carried by PWs of User B2
Parameter Value in This Example
Service ID 2
Service Name E-Line-2
Direction UNI-NNI
BPDU Not Transparently Transmitted
MTU(bytes) 1500
Port 21-PETF8-2
VLANs 100
Bearer Type PW
Protection Type Unprotected

Table 3-51 PW parameters of the E-Line services of User B2
Parameter Value in This Example
General Attributes PW ID 45
PW Signaling Type Static
PW Type Ethernet Tagged Mode
Direction Bidirectional
PW Ingress Label 30
PW Egress Label 30
Tunnel Type MPLS
Tunnel NE1_NE3_working
Peer LSR ID 130.0.0.1
Advanced Attributes Request VLAN 20
Other parameters Default values
NOTE
For details on how to configure the TPID, see 9.19 Configuring the
NE-Level TPID.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
73
Table 3-52 QoS parameters of the E-Line services of User B2
Parameter Value in This Example
PW ID 45
Direction Ingress
Bandwidth Limit Enabled
CIR(kbit/s) 30000
PIR(kbit/s) 50000
Other parameters Default values

----End
Relevant Task
If you configure PW-carried E-Line services on a per-NE basis, see 9.16.1 Searching for PWE3
Services and convert discrete PWE3 services to complete PWE3 services.
See 3.5.5 Verifying E-Line Services to check whether the E-Line services carried by PWs are
configured correctly.
3.5.5 Verifying E-Line Services
After the data configuration is complete, you need to check whether data configuration is correct
by verifying the configured services.
Prerequisites
l End-to-end PW-carried E-Line services have been configured.
l If you configure PW-carried E-Line services on a per-NE basis, see 9.16.1 Searching for
PWE3 Services and convert discrete PWE3 services to complete PWE3 services.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > PWE3 Service > Manage PWE3 Service from the main menu.
Step 2 In the dialog box that is displayed, set filter conditions; for example, set Protocol Type to PW
APS. Then, click Filter. Query all PWE3 services that meet the filter conditions.
Step 3 Right-click the required PW-carried E-Line service and choose Ethernet OAM > LB Test from
the shortcut menu.
Step 4 In the dialog box that is displayed, select the source NE and sink NE, and click Run.
Step 5 After the test is complete, click the LB Statistic Information tab to check whether the service
is available.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
74
NOTE
If the number of received packets and the number of transmitted packets are the same, the service is
available. If testing packet loss fails, troubleshoot it by referring to Troubleshooting Service Packet Loss.
----End
3.6 Configuration Example: E-Line Services Carried by PWs
(Network Adjustment Based on VLAN Priorities)
This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the engineering information and how to
configure the E-Line services carried by PWs for each NE according to the networking diagram.
In this example, services with a same VLAN ID but different VLAN priorities need to be mapped
to different PWs.
3.6.1 Networking Diagram
The networking diagram shows the requirements for the E-Line services carried by PWs
(network adjustment based on VLAN priorities).
On the network shown in Figure 3-15, services from NodeB 1 and services from NodeB 2 have
a same VLAN ID, and need to be mapped to different PWs based on Port+VLAN+VLAN
PRI before being transported to the RNC. Service requirements are as follows:
l Services from NodeB 1 and services from NodeB 2 are transported to NE1 through the 21-
PEFF8-1 and 21-PEFF8-2 ports respectively.
l NE3 converges services from NodeB 1 and NodeB 2, and transports the services to the
RNC.
l Services from NodeB 1 are common Internet access services of which the CIR is 10 Mbit/
s and the PIR is 30 Mbit/s.
l Services from NodeB 2 are data services of which the CIR is 30 Mbit/s and the PIR is 50
Mbit/s.
l Services from NodeB 1 have a VLAN ID of 100 and VLAN priorities of 3, 4, and 5; services
from NodeB 2 have a VLAN ID of 100 and a VLAN priority of 2. Services from NodeB
1 and NodeB 2 are mapped to two PWs based on Port+VLAN+VLAN PRI.
l Services from NodeB 1 and NodeB 2 are protected by tunnel APS.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
75
Figure 3-15 Networking diagram of the E-Line services carried by PWs (network adjustment
based on VLAN priorities)
NodeB 1
VLAN ID: 100
PRI: 3, 4, 5
RNC
UNI for NodeB 1: 21-PEFF8-1
UNI for NodeB 2: 21-PEFF8-2
MPLS tunnel
PW
PSN
NNI: 3-PEG8-2
UNI for RNC: 3-PEG8-3
NE1 NE3 NE2
NNI: 3-PEG8-4
NNI: 3-PEG8-2
NNI: 3-PEG8-1
NNI: 3-PEG8-3
NNI: 3-PEG8-1
NodeB 2
VLAN ID: 100
PRI: 2
NOTE
l This section uses the OptiX OSN 3500 as an example to describe the board layout. The methods of
configuring other products are the same as the method of configuring the OptiX OSN 3500, except that
the board layout may be different. For the slot information, see the Hardware Description of the specific
product.
l On a live data network, an Ethernet service is added to its source NE, passed through on its transit NEs,
and dropped from its sink NE. For details on how to configure transit NEs for the Ethernet services
carried by PWs, see 9.12.2 Configuring Transit NEs for Ethernet Services Carried by PWs.
NE IP Address IP Mask LSR ID
NE1 3-
PEG8-1
18.1.1.1 255.255.255.252 130.0.0.1
3-
PEG8-2
18.1.2.1 255.255.255.252
NE2 3-
PEG8-1
18.1.1.2 255.255.255.252 130.0.0.2
3-
PEG8-2
18.1.2.2 255.255.255.252
3-
PEG8-3
18.1.1.5 255.255.255.252
3-
PEG8-4
18.1.2.5 255.255.255.252
NE3 3-
PEG8-1
18.1.1.6 255.255.255.252 130.0.0.3
3-
PEG8-2
18.1.2.6 255.255.255.252

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
76
NOTE
l The IP addresses of the Ethernet ports on an NE must not be in the same network segment.
l The IP addresses of the ports at both ends of a link must be in the same network segment.

3.6.2 Service Planning
The engineering information for configuring the E-Line services carried by PWs (network
adjustment based on VLAN priorities) contains the engineering information for configuring the
tunnels carrying the PWs, the engineering information for configuring the PWs, and the
engineering information for configuring the UNI-NNI E-Line services carried by the PWs.
The PWs that carry the E-Line services are carried by tunnels. Therefore, you need to plan the
tunnels during the service planning. Planning the E-Line services carried by PWs involves the
following:
l Plan the tunnels that carry the PWs. Refer to Table 3-53 and Table 3-54.
l Plan MPLS tunnel OAM. Refer to Table 3-55.
l Plan MPLS tunnel APS. Refer to Table 3-56.
l Plan the PWs. Refer to Table 3-57.
l Plan the UNI-NNI E-Line services carried by PWs. Refer to Table 3-58.
NOTE
The E-Line services carried by PWs (network adjustment based on VLAN priorities) do not apply to the
following scenarios:
l Service Tag Role is User; the service that a UNI receives contains an S-TAG.
l PWs are in Ethernet tagged mode; Service Tag Role is Service. In addition:
l The service that a UNI receives contains a C-TAG, and the TPID of the request VLAN is 0x88A8.
l The service that a UNI receives contains an S-TAG, the TPID of the S-TAG is 0x8100, and the
TPID of the request VLAN is 0x88A8.
l The service that a UNI receives contains an S-TAG, the TPID of the S-TAG is 0x88A8, and the
TPID of the request VLAN is 0x8100.
Table 3-53 Basic attributes of the MPLS tunnels
Par
am
ete
r
MPLS
Tunnel
Name
MPLS
Tunnel ID
Protocol Type Signaling
Type
Direct
ion
Protec
ted
Type
Par
ame
ter
Pla
nni
ng
NE1_NE3_w
orking
10 MPLS Static CR Bidirec
tional
Unprot
ected
NE1_NE3_pr
otection
20 MPLS Static CR Bidirec
tional
Unprot
ected

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
77
Table 3-54 Parameter planning for the MPLS tunnels
MP
LS
Tu
nn
el
ID
N
o
d
e
No
de
Ty
pe
In
Inte
rfac
e
In
L
a
b
el
Rev
erse
In
Lab
el
Out
Inte
rfac
e
Ou
t
La
bel
Reve
rse
Out
Labe
l
Next
Hop
Reve
rse
Next
Hop
Sour
ce
Nod
e
Sink
Nod
e
10 N
E
1
Ingr
ess
- - 103 3-
PEG
8-1
100 - 18.1.
1.2
- - 130.0
.0.3
N
E
2
Tra
nsit
3-
PEG
8-1
10
0
102 3-
PEG
8-3
101 103 18.1.
1.6
18.1.
1.1
130.0
.0.1
130.0
.0.3
N
E
3
Egr
ess
3-
PEG
8-1
10
1
- - 102 - 18.1.
1.5
130.0
.0.1
-
20 N
E
1
Ingr
ess
- - 203 3-
PEG
8-2
200 - 18.1.
2.2
- - 130.0
.0.3
N
E
2
Tra
nsit
3-
PEG
8-2
20
0
202 3-
PEG
8-4
201 203 18.1.
2.6
18.1.
2.1
130.0
.0.1
130.0
.0.3
N
E
3
Egr
ess
3-
PEG
8-2
20
1
- - 202 - 18.1.
2.5
130.0
.0.1
-

Table 3-55 Parameter planning for MPLS tunnel OAM
Parameter Parameter Planning
MPLS Tunnel ID 10 20
OAM Status Enabled Enabled
Detection Mode Manual Manual
Detection Packet
Type
FFD
NOTE
Detection Packet Period can be set only
when Detection Packet Type is FFD.
FFD
Detection Packet
Period (ms)
3.3
NOTE
Generally, an OAM alarm is reported after
three periods. When Detection Packet
Period (ms) is set to 3.3, the switching time
can meet the requirement (less than 50 ms)
after a fault occurs.
3.3

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
78
Table 3-56 Parameter planning for MPLS tunnel APS
Parameter Parameter Planning
Protection Type 1+1
Switching Mode Single-Ended
Working Tunnel ID 10
Tunnel
Name
NE1_NE3_working
Protecti
on
Tunnel ID 20
Tunnel
Name
NE1_NE3_protection
Revertive Mode Revertive
WTR Time (min) 5
Hold-off Time (100
ms)
0
NOTE
The services are not protected by multiple protection schemes. Therefore, the
setting of Hold-off Time (100 ms) is unnecessary.
Protocol State Enabled

Table 3-57 Parameter planning for the PWs
Parameter NodeB 1 PW NodeB 2 PW
PW ID 35 45
PW Signaling Type Static Static
PW Type Ethernet Tagged Mode Ethernet Tagged Mode
PW Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional
PW Incoming Label/Source
Port
20 30
PW Outgoing Label/Sink
Port
20 30
Peer LSR ID NE1 130.0.0.3 130.0.0.3
NE3 130.0.0.1 130.0.0.1
MPLS Tunnel name NE1_NE3_working NE1_NE3_working
Bandwidth Limit Enabled Enabled
CIR (kbit/s) 10000 30000
PIR (kbit/s) 30000 50000
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
79
Parameter NodeB 1 PW NodeB 2 PW
Request VLAN 10 20
TPID 0x88A8 0x88A8

Table 3-58 Parameter planning for the UNI-NNI E-Line services carried by PWs
Parameter NodeB 1 NodeB 2 RNC
Service ID 1 2 1 2
Name E-Line-1 E-Line-2 E-Line-1 E-Line-2
Direction UNI-NNI UNI-NNI UNI-NNI UNI-NNI
Service Tag
Role
User User User User
UNI 21-PEFF8-1 21-PEFF8-2 3-PEG8-3 3-PEG8-3
VLANs 100 100 100 100
PRI 3, 4, 5 2 3, 4, 5 2
Bearer Type PW PW PW PW
PW ID 35 45 35 45
BPDU Not
Transparently
Transmitted
Not
Transparently
Transmitted
Not
Transparently
Transmitted
Not
Transparently
Transmitted
MTU (bytes) 1500 1500 1500 1500

3.6.3 Configuration Process (in End-to-End Mode)
This section describes how to configure E-Line services carried by PWs in end-to-end mode.
Prerequisites
l You must be familiar with the networking requirements and service plan of the E-Line
services carried by PWs (in the scenario of network adjustment based on VLAN priorities).
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 See 9.4.3 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel in an End-to-End Mode to configure a tunnel for
carrying PWs.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
80
Table 3-59 Basic attributes of the MPLS tunnels
Par
am
ete
r
MPLS
Tunnel
Name
MPLS
Tunnel ID
Protocol Type Signaling
Type
Direct
ion
Protec
ted
Type
Par
ame
ter
Pla
nni
ng
NE1_NE3_w
orking
10 MPLS Static CR Bidirec
tional
Unprot
ected
NE1_NE3_pr
otection
20 MPLS Static CR Bidirec
tional
Unprot
ected

Table 3-60 Parameter planning for the MPLS tunnels
MP
LS
Tu
nn
el
ID
N
o
d
e
No
de
Ty
pe
In
Inte
rfac
e
In
L
a
b
el
Rev
erse
In
Lab
el
Out
Inte
rfac
e
Ou
t
La
bel
Reve
rse
Out
Labe
l
Next
Hop
Reve
rse
Next
Hop
Sour
ce
Nod
e
Sink
Nod
e
10 N
E
1
Ingr
ess
- - 103 3-
PEG
8-1
100 - 18.1.
1.2
- - 130.0
.0.3
N
E
2
Tra
nsit
3-
PEG
8-1
10
0
102 3-
PEG
8-3
101 103 18.1.
1.6
18.1.
1.1
130.0
.0.1
130.0
.0.3
N
E
3
Egr
ess
3-
PEG
8-1
10
1
- - 102 - 18.1.
1.5
130.0
.0.1
-
20 N
E
1
Ingr
ess
- - 203 3-
PEG
8-2
200 - 18.1.
2.2
- - 130.0
.0.3
N
E
2
Tra
nsit
3-
PEG
8-2
20
0
202 3-
PEG
8-4
201 203 18.1.
2.6
18.1.
2.1
130.0
.0.1
130.0
.0.3
N
E
3
Egr
ess
3-
PEG
8-2
20
1
- - 202 - 18.1.
2.5
130.0
.0.1
-

Step 2 See 9.6 Configuring MPLS OAM to configure MPLS tunnel OAM.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
81
Table 3-61 Parameter planning for MPLS tunnel OAM
Parameter Parameter Planning
MPLS Tunnel ID 10 20
OAM Status Enabled Enabled
Detection Mode Manual Manual
Detection Packet
Type
FFD
NOTE
Detection Packet Period can be set only
when Detection Packet Type is FFD.
FFD
Detection Packet
Period (ms)
3.3
NOTE
Generally, an OAM alarm is reported after
three periods. When Detection Packet
Period (ms) is set to 3.3, the switching time
can meet the requirement (less than 50 ms)
after a fault occurs.
3.3

Step 3 See 9.7 Configuring MPLS Tunnel APS to configure MPLS tunnel APS.
Table 3-62 Parameter planning for MPLS tunnel APS
Parameter Parameter Planning
Protection Type 1+1
Switching Mode Single-Ended
Working Tunnel ID 10
Tunnel
Name
NE1_NE3_working
Protecti
on
Tunnel ID 20
Tunnel
Name
NE1_NE3_protection
Revertive Mode Revertive
WTR Time (min) 5
Hold-off Time (100
ms)
0
NOTE
The services are not protected by multiple protection schemes. Therefore, the
setting of Hold-off Time (100 ms) is unnecessary.
Protocol State Enabled

Step 4 Configure common Internet access services on NodeB 1 in end-to-end mode.
1. Choose Service > PWE3 Service > Create PWE3 Service from the main menu.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
82
2. Set general attributes for the common Internet access services on NodeB 1.
Table 3-63 General attributes for the common Internet access services on NodeB 1
Parameter Value in This Example
Service Type ETH
Service ID 1
Service Name E-Line-1
Protection Type Unprotected

3. Configure the source and sink NEs of the PWE3 service.
a. On the Node List tag page, click Configure Source And Sink. A dialog box is
displayed.
b. Select source and sink NEs in Physical Topology on the left.
c. In SAI Configuration, set the parameters for the service port on NodeB 1 and click
Add Node.
Table 3-64 Parameters for the service port on NodeB 1
Parameter Value in This Example
Source ID 1
VLAN ID 100
Priority Type 802.1p
Priority Field 3,4,5
Sink ID 1
VLAN ID 100
Priority Type 802.1p
Priority Field 3,4,5

4. Click the PW tab, and set the general attributes for the PW on NodeB 1.
Table 3-65 General attributes for the PW on NodeB 1
Parameter Value in This Example
PW ID 35
Signaling Type Static
Forward Label 20
Reverse Label 20
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
83
Parameter Value in This Example
Forward Type Static Binding
Forward Tunnel NE1_NE3_working
Reverse Type Static Binding
Reverse Tunnel NE1_NE3_working
Encapsulation Type MPLS

5. Click Detail and set the advanced attributes for the PW on NodeB 1.
a. Click the PW QoS tab and set the QoS parameters for the PW on NodeB 1.
Table 3-66 QoS parameters for the PW on NodeB 1
Parameter Value in This Example
Forward Bandwidth Limit Enabled
CIR (kbit/s) 10000
PIR (kbit/s) 30000
Reverse Bandwidth Limit Enabled
CIR (kbit/s) 10000
PIR (kbit/s) 30000

b. Click the Advanced PW Attribute tab and set the advanced attributes for the PW on
NodeB 1.
Table 3-67 Advanced attributes for the PW on NodeB 1
Parameter Value in This Example
PW Type Ethernet Tagged Mode
Request VLAN 10
TPID 0x88A8
NOTE
For details on how to configure the TPID, see 9.19
Configuring the NE-Level TPID.
Other parameters Default values

c. Click the Service Parameter tab and set the service tags for NodeB 1.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
84
Table 3-68 Service tags for NodeB 1
Parameter Value in This Example
Source Service Tag User
Sink Service Tag User

6. Click OK.
Step 5 Configure data services on NodeB 2 in end-to-end mode.
See Step 4 to configure data services on NodeB 2.
Table 3-69 General attributes for the data services on NodeB 2
Parameter Value in This Example
Service Type ETH
Service ID 2
Service Name E-Line-2
Protection Type Unprotected

Table 3-70 Parameters for the service port on NodeB 2
Parameter Value in This Example
Source ID 2
VLAN ID 100
Priority Type 802.1p
Priority Field 2
Sink ID 2
VLAN ID 100
Priority Type 802.1p
Priority Field 2

Table 3-71 General attributes for the PW on NodeB 2
Parameter Value in This Example
PW ID 45
Signaling Type Static
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
85
Parameter Value in This Example
Forward Label 30
Reverse Label 30
Forward Type Static Binding
Forward Tunnel NE1_NE3_working
Reverse Type Static Binding
Reverse Tunnel NE1_NE3_working
Encapsulation Type MPLS

Table 3-72 QoS parameters for the PW on NodeB 2
Parameter Value in This Example
Forward Bandwidth Limit Enabled
CIR (kbit/s) 30000
PIR (kbit/s) 50000
Reverse Bandwidth Limit Enabled
CIR (kbit/s) 30000
PIR (kbit/s) 50000

Table 3-73 Advanced attributes for the PW on NodeB 2
Parameter Value in This Example
PW Type Ethernet Tagged Mode
Request VLAN 20
TPID 0x88A8
NOTE
For details on how to configure the TPID, see 9.19 Configuring the
NE-Level TPID.
Other parameters Default values

Table 3-74 Service tags for NodeB 2
Parameter Value in This Example
Source Service Tag User
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
86
Parameter Value in This Example
Sink Service Tag User

----End
Related Task
See 3.6.5 Verifying E-Line Services to check whether the E-Line services carried by PWs are
configured correctly.
3.6.4 Configuration Process (Configuration on a Per-NE Basis)
This topic describes the process for configuring the E-Line services carried by PWs.
Prerequisites
l You must be familiar with the networking requirements and service planning information
of the E-Line services carried by PWs (network adjustment based on VLAN priorities).
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 On NE1, NE2, and NE3, configure the tunnels that carry the PWs. For the configuration
procedures, see 9.4 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel.
Table 3-75 Basic attributes of the MPLS tunnels
Par
am
ete
r
MPLS
Tunnel
Name
MPLS
Tunnel ID
Protocol Type Signaling
Type
Direct
ion
Protec
ted
Type
Par
ame
ter
Pla
nni
ng
NE1_NE3_w
orking
10 MPLS Static CR Bidirec
tional
Unprot
ected
NE1_NE3_pr
otection
20 MPLS Static CR Bidirec
tional
Unprot
ected

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
87
Table 3-76 Parameter planning for the MPLS tunnels
MP
LS
Tu
nn
el
ID
N
o
d
e
No
de
Ty
pe
In
Inte
rfac
e
In
L
a
b
el
Rev
erse
In
Lab
el
Out
Inte
rfac
e
Ou
t
La
bel
Reve
rse
Out
Labe
l
Next
Hop
Reve
rse
Next
Hop
Sour
ce
Nod
e
Sink
Nod
e
10 N
E
1
Ingr
ess
- - 103 3-
PEG
8-1
100 - 18.1.
1.2
- - 130.0
.0.3
N
E
2
Tra
nsit
3-
PEG
8-1
10
0
102 3-
PEG
8-3
101 103 18.1.
1.6
18.1.
1.1
130.0
.0.1
130.0
.0.3
N
E
3
Egr
ess
3-
PEG
8-1
10
1
- - 102 - 18.1.
1.5
130.0
.0.1
-
20 N
E
1
Ingr
ess
- - 203 3-
PEG
8-2
200 - 18.1.
2.2
- - 130.0
.0.3
N
E
2
Tra
nsit
3-
PEG
8-2
20
0
202 3-
PEG
8-4
201 203 18.1.
2.6
18.1.
2.1
130.0
.0.1
130.0
.0.3
N
E
3
Egr
ess
3-
PEG
8-2
20
1
- - 202 - 18.1.
2.5
130.0
.0.1
-

Step 2 On NE1, NE2, and NE3, configure MPLS tunnel OAM. For the configuration procedures, see
9.6 Configuring MPLS OAM.
Table 3-77 Parameter planning for MPLS tunnel OAM
Parameter Parameter Planning
MPLS Tunnel ID 10 20
OAM Status Enabled Enabled
Detection Mode Manual Manual
Detection Packet
Type
FFD
NOTE
Detection Packet Period can be set only
when Detection Packet Type is FFD.
FFD
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
88
Parameter Parameter Planning
Detection Packet
Period (ms)
3.3
NOTE
Generally, an OAM alarm is reported after
three periods. When Detection Packet
Period (ms) is set to 3.3, the switching time
can meet the requirement (less than 50 ms)
after a fault occurs.
3.3

Step 3 On NE1 and NE3, configure MPLS tunnel APS. For the configuration procedures, see 9.7
Configuring MPLS Tunnel APS.
Table 3-78 Parameter planning for MPLS tunnel APS
Parameter Parameter Planning
Protection Type 1+1
Switching Mode Single-Ended
Working Tunnel ID 10
Tunnel
Name
NE1_NE3_working
Protecti
on
Tunnel ID 20
Tunnel
Name
NE1_NE3_protection
Revertive Mode Revertive
WTR Time (min) 5
Hold-off Time (100
ms)
0
NOTE
The services are not protected by multiple protection schemes. Therefore, the
setting of Hold-off Time (100 ms) is unnecessary.
Protocol State Enabled

Step 4 On NE1, configure an E-Line service for NodeB 1.
1. In the NE Explorer, select NE1, and then choose Configuration > Packet
Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function
Tree.
2. Click New. Then, the New E-Line Service dialog box is displayed. Set the displayed
parameters.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
89
Table 3-79 Parameters of the E-Line service carried by PWs of NodeB 1
Parameter Value in This Example
Service ID 1
Service Name E-Line-1
Direction UNI-NNI
BPDU (STP Packet) Not Transparently Transmitted
MTU (bytes) 1500
Service Tag Role User
Source Port 21-PEFF8-1
Source VLANs 100
PRI 3, 4, 5
Bearer Type PW
Protection Type Unprotected

3. Click Configure PW. Then, the Configure PW dialog box is displayed. Set the PW
parameters.
Table 3-80 PW parameters of the E-Line service of NodeB 1
Parameter Value in This Example
General
Attributes
PW ID 35
PW Signaling Type Static
PW Type Ethernet Tagged Mode
PW Direction Bidirectional
PW Incoming Label/Source Port 20
PW Outgoing Label/Sink Port 20
Tunnel Type MPLS
Tunnel NE1_NE3_working
Peer LSR ID 130.0.0.3
Advance
d
Attributes
Request VLAN 10
TPID 0x88A8
NOTE
For details on how to configure the
TPID, see 9.19 Configuring the NE-
Level TPID.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
90
Parameter Value in This Example
Other parameters Default Values

4. Click Configure QoS. Then, the Configure QoS dialog box is displayed.
5. Click the PW tab. Set the QoS parameters of the E-Line service of NodeB 1.
Table 3-81 QoS parameters of the E-Line service of NodeB 1
Parameter Value in This Example
PW ID 35
Direction Ingress
Bandwidth Limit Enabled
CIR (kbit/s) 10000
PIR (kbit/s) 30000
Other parameters Default values

Step 5 On NE1, configure an E-Line service for NodeB 2.
Refer to Step 4 and configure an E-Line service for NodeB 2.
Table 3-82 Parameters of the E-Line service carried by PWs of NodeB 2
Parameter Value in This Example
Service ID 2
Service Name E-Line-2
Direction UNI-NNI
BPDU (STP Packet) Not Transparently Transmitted
MTU (bytes) 1500
Service Tag Role User
Source Port 21-PEFF8-2
Source VLANs 100
PRI 2
Bearer Type PW
Protection Type Unprotected

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
91
Table 3-83 PW parameters of the E-Line service of NodeB 2
Parameter Value in This Example
General Attributes PW ID 45
PW Signaling Type Static
PW Type Ethernet Tagged Mode
PW Direction Bidirectional
PW Incoming Label/Source Port 30
PW Outgoing Label/Sink Port 30
Tunnel Type MPLS
Tunnel NE1_NE3_working
Peer LSR ID 130.0.0.3
Advanced
Attributes
Request VLAN 20
TPID 0x88A8
NOTE
For details on how to configure the
TPID, see 9.19 Configuring the
NE-Level TPID.
Other parameters Default values

Table 3-84 QoS parameters of the E-Line service of NodeB 2
Parameter Value in This Example
PW ID 45
Direction Ingress
Bandwidth Limit Enabled
CIR (kbit/s) 30000
PIR (kbit/s) 50000
Other parameters Default values

Step 6 On NE3, configure an E-Line service between NodeB 1 and the RNC, and an E-Line service
between NodeB 2 and the RNC.
Refer to Step 4 and configure the E-Line services.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
92
Table 3-85 Parameters of the E-Line service carried by PWs between NodeB 1 and the RNC
Parameter Value in This Example
Service ID 1
Service Name E-Line-1
Direction UNI-NNI
BPDU (STP Packet) Not Transparently Transmitted
MTU (bytes) 1500
Service Tag Role User
Source Port 3-PEG8-3
Source VLANs 100
PRI 3, 4, 5
Bearer Type PW
Protection Type Unprotected

Table 3-86 PW parameters of the E-Line service between NodeB 1 and the RNC
Parameter Value in This Example
General Attributes PW ID 35
PW Signaling Type Static
PW Type Ethernet Tagged Mode
PW Direction Bidirectional
PW Incoming Label/
Source Port
20
PW Outgoing Label/
Sink Port
20
Tunnel Type MPLS
Tunnel NE1_NE3_working
Peer LSR ID 130.0.0.1
Advanced
Attributes
Request VLAN 10
TPID 0x88A8
NOTE
For details on how to configure the TPID, see
9.19 Configuring the NE-Level TPID.
Other parameters Default values

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
93
Table 3-87 QoS parameters of the E-Line service between NodeB 1 and the RNC
Parameter Value in This Example
PW ID 35
Direction Ingress
Bandwidth Limit Enabled
CIR (kbit/s) 10000
PIR (kbit/s) 30000
Other parameters Default values

Table 3-88 Parameters of the E-Line service carried by PWs between NodeB 2 and the RNC
Parameter Value in This Example
Service ID 2
Service Name E-Line-2
Direction UNI-NNI
BPDU (STP Packet) Not Transparently Transmitted
Service Tag Role User
MTU (bytes) 1500
Source Port 3-PEG8-3
Source VLANs 100
PRI 2
Bearer Type PW
Protection Type Unprotected

Table 3-89 PW parameters of the E-Line service between NodeB 2 and the RNC
Parameter Value in This Example
General Attributes PW ID 45
PW Signaling Type Static
PW Type Ethernet Tagged Mode
PW Direction Bidirectional
PW Incoming Label/Source
Port
30
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
94
Parameter Value in This Example
PW Outgoing Label/Sink
Port
30
Tunnel Type MPLS
Tunnel NE1_NE3_working
Peer LSR ID 130.0.0.1
Advanced Attributes Request VLAN 20
TPID 0x88A8
NOTE
For details on how to configure the
TPID, see 9.19 Configuring the NE-
Level TPID.
Other parameters Default values

Table 3-90 QoS parameters of the E-Line service between NodeB 2 and the RNC
Parameter Value in This Example
PW ID 45
Direction Ingress
Bandwidth Limit Enabled
CIR (kbit/s) 30000
PIR (kbit/s) 50000
Other parameters Default values

----End
Relevant Task
If you configure PW-carried E-Line services on a per-NE basis, see 9.16.1 Searching for PWE3
Services and convert discrete PWE3 services to complete PWE3 services.
See 3.6.5 Verifying E-Line Services to check whether the E-Line services carried by PWs are
configured correctly.
3.6.5 Verifying E-Line Services
After configuring E-Line services, verify the E-Line services by using the SmartBits.
Prerequisites
l E-Line services carried by PWs are configured.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
95
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
SmartBits and U2000
Test Connection Diagram
Figure 3-16 shows the connections for testing E-Line services carried by PWs.
Figure 3-16 Connections for testing E-Line services carried by PWs
21-PEFF8-1
MPLS tunnel
PW
PSN
3-PEG8-3
NE1 NE3 NE2
SmartBits SmartBits
NOTE
In this example, the SmartBits devices are connected to 21-PEFF8-1 on NE1 (source) and 3-PEG8-3 on
NE3 (sink). In actual situations, determine the source and sink as required, and follow the same testing
procedure.

Context
CAUTION
l During a test, only test personnel are allowed in the testing environment.
l Exercise caution when touching cables and optical fibers.
Procedure
Step 1 Connect the SmartBits devices to 21-PEFF8-1 on NE1 and 3-PEG8-3 on NE3.
Step 2 Log in to the U2000. See Enabling, Disabling and Setting Performance Monitoring of the NE
to start the 15-minute and 24-hour performance monitoring on NE1 and NE3.
NOTE
The performance monitoring tasks help analyze and locate a problem during the test.
Step 3 Use the SmartBits devices to perform a packet transmitting and receiving test.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
96
NOTE
l Packets whose bytes are all 0s are considered as special packets. Do not use those packets for a packet
transmitting and receiving test.
l In the first packet transmitting and receiving period, learning the MAC addresses of the packets may
cause packet loss.
l If the service is normal, the number of received packets is equal to the number of transmitted packets.
If it is a VLAN-based service that involves VLAN switching, check whether VLAN switching functions
properly for transmitted and received packets.
l If packet loss occurred, rectify the fault. Then, perform 24-hour tests until no packet loss occurs.
----End
3.7 Configuration Example: E-Line Services Carried by PWs
(Network Adjustment Based on VLAN Switching)
This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the engineering information and how to
configure the E-Line services carried by PWs (network adjustment based on VLAN switching)
for each NE according to the networking diagram.
3.7.1 Networking Diagram
The networking diagram shows the requirements for the E-Line services carried by PWs
(network adjustment based on VLAN switching).
On the network shown in Figure 3-17, services from NodeB 1 and services from NodeB 2 have
a same VLAN ID, and need VLAN switching before being transported to the RNC. Service
requirements are as follows:
l Services from NodeB 1 and services from NodeB 2 are transported to NE1 through the 21-
PEFF8-1 and 21-PEFF8-2 ports respectively.
l NE3 converges services from NodeB 1 and NodeB 2, and transports the services to the
RNC.
l Services from NodeB 1 are common Internet access services of which the CIR is 10 Mbit/
s and the PIR is 30 Mbit/s.
l Services from NodeB 2 are data services of which the CIR is 30 Mbit/s and the PIR is 50
Mbit/s.
l Services from NodeB 1 and services from NodeB 2 have a same VLAN ID of 100, and are
mapped to two PWs. After VLAN switching, the VLAN ID of services from NodeB 1
remains unchanged, whereas the VLAN ID of services from NodeB 2 is changed to 200.
l Services from NodeB 1 and NodeB 2 are protected by tunnel APS.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
97
Figure 3-17 Networking diagram of the E-Line services carried by PWs (network adjustment
based on VLAN switching)
NodeB 1
RNC
UNI for NodeB 1: 21-PEFF8-1
UNI for NodeB 2: 21-PEFF8-2
MPLS tunnel
PW
PSN
NNI: 3-PEG8-2
UNI for RNC: 3-PEG8-3
NE1 NE3 NE2
NNI: 3-PEG8-4
NNI: 3-PEG8-2
NNI: 3-PEG8-1
NNI: 3-PEG8-3
NNI: 3-PEG8-1
NodeB 2
NodeB 1 VLAN: 100
NodeB 2 VLAN: 100
NodeB 1 VLAN: 100
NodeB 2 VLAN: 200
NOTE
l This section uses the OptiX OSN 3500 as an example to describe the board layout. The methods of
configuring other products are the same as the method of configuring the OptiX OSN 3500, except that
the board layout may be different. For the slot information, see the Hardware Description of the specific
product.
l On a live data network, an Ethernet service is added to its source NE, passed through on its transit NEs,
and dropped from its sink NE. For details on how to configure transit NEs for the Ethernet services
carried by PWs, see 9.12.2 Configuring Transit NEs for Ethernet Services Carried by PWs.
NE IP Address IP Mask LSR ID
NE1 3-
PEG8-1
18.1.1.1 255.255.255.252 130.0.0.1
3-
PEG8-2
18.1.2.1 255.255.255.252
NE2 3-
PEG8-1
18.1.1.2 255.255.255.252 130.0.0.2
3-
PEG8-2
18.1.2.2 255.255.255.252
3-
PEG8-3
18.1.1.5 255.255.255.252
3-
PEG8-4
18.1.2.5 255.255.255.252
NE3 3-
PEG8-1
18.1.1.6 255.255.255.252 130.0.0.3
3-
PEG8-2
18.1.2.6 255.255.255.252
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
98

NOTE
l The IP addresses of the Ethernet ports on an NE must not be in the same network segment.
l The IP addresses of the ports at both ends of a link must be in the same network segment.

3.7.2 Service Planning
The engineering information for configuring the E-Line services carried by PWs (network
adjustment based on VLAN switching) contains the engineering information for configuring the
tunnels carrying the PWs, the engineering information for configuring the PWs, and the
engineering information for configuring the UNI-NNI E-Line services carried by the PWs.
The PWs that carry the E-Line services are carried by tunnels. Therefore, you need to plan the
tunnels during the service planning. Planning the E-Line services carried by PWs involves the
following:
l Plan the tunnels that carry the PWs. Refer to Table 3-91 and Table 3-92.
l Plan MPLS tunnel OAM. Refer to Table 3-93.
l Plan MPLS tunnel APS. Refer to Table 3-94.
l Plan the PWs. Refer to Table 3-95.
l Plan the UNI-NNI E-Line services carried by PWs. Refer to Table 3-96.
NOTE
The E-Line services carried by PWs (network adjustment based on VLAN switching) do not apply to the
following scenarios:
l Service Tag Role is User; the service that a UNI receives contains an S-TAG.
l PWs are in Ethernet tagged mode; Service Tag Role is ServiceIn addition:
l The service that a UNI receives contains a C-TAG, and the TPID of the request VLAN is 0x88A8.
l The service that a UNI receives contains an S-TAG, the TPID of the S-TAG is 0x8100, and the
TPID of the request VLAN is 0x88A8.
l The service that a UNI receives contains an S-TAG, the TPID of the S-TAG is 0x88A8, and the
TPID of the request VLAN is 0x8100.
Table 3-91 Basic attributes of the MPLS tunnels
Par
am
ete
r
MPLS
Tunnel
Name
MPLS
Tunnel ID
Protocol Type Signaling
Type
Direct
ion
Protec
ted
Type
Par
ame
ter
Pla
nni
ng
NE1_NE3_w
orking
10 MPLS Static CR Bidirec
tional
Unprot
ected
NE1_NE3_pr
otection
20 MPLS Static CR Bidirec
tional
Unprot
ected

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
99
Table 3-92 Parameter planning for the MPLS tunnels
MP
LS
Tu
nn
el
ID
N
o
d
e
No
de
Ty
pe
In
Inte
rfac
e
In
L
a
b
el
Rev
erse
In
Lab
el
Out
Inte
rfac
e
Ou
t
La
bel
Reve
rse
Out
Labe
l
Next
Hop
Reve
rse
Next
Hop
Sour
ce
Nod
e
Sink
Nod
e
10 N
E
1
Ingr
ess
- - 103 3-
PEG
8-1
100 - 18.1.
1.2
- - 130.0
.0.3
N
E
2
Tra
nsit
3-
PEG
8-1
10
0
102 3-
PEG
8-3
101 103 18.1.
1.6
18.1.
1.1
130.0
.0.1
130.0
.0.3
N
E
3
Egr
ess
3-
PEG
8-1
10
1
- - 102 - 18.1.
1.5
130.0
.0.1
-
20 N
E
1
Ingr
ess
- - 203 3-
PEG
8-2
200 - 18.1.
2.2
- - 130.0
.0.3
N
E
2
Tra
nsit
3-
PEG
8-2
20
0
202 3-
PEG
8-4
201 203 18.1.
2.6
18.1.
2.1
130.0
.0.1
130.0
.0.3
N
E
3
Egr
ess
3-
PEG
8-2
20
1
- - 202 - 18.1.
2.5
130.0
.0.1
-

Table 3-93 Parameter planning for MPLS tunnel OAM
Parameter Parameter Planning
MPLS Tunnel ID 10 20
OAM Status Enabled Enabled
Detection Mode Manual Manual
Detection Packet
Type
FFD
NOTE
Detection Packet Period can be set only
when Detection Packet Type is FFD.
FFD
Detection Packet
Period (ms)
3.3
NOTE
Generally, an OAM alarm is reported after
three periods. When Detection Packet
Period (ms) is set to 3.3, the switching time
can meet the requirement (less than 50 ms)
after a fault occurs.
3.3

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
100
Table 3-94 Parameter planning for MPLS tunnel APS
Parameter Parameter Planning
Protection Type 1+1
Switching Mode Single-Ended
Working Tunnel ID 10
Tunnel
Name
NE1_NE3_working
Protecti
on
Tunnel ID 20
Tunnel
Name
NE1_NE3_protection
Revertive Mode Revertive
WTR Time (min) 5
Hold-off Time (100
ms)
0
NOTE
The services are not protected by multiple protection schemes. Therefore, the
setting of Hold-off Time (100 ms) is unnecessary.
Protocol State Enabled

Table 3-95 Parameter planning for the PWs
Parameter NodeB 1 PW NodeB 2 PW
PW ID 35 45
PW Signaling Type Static Static
PW Type Ethernet Tagged Mode Ethernet Tagged Mode
PW Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional
PW Incoming Label/Source
Port
20 30
PW Outgoing Label/Sink
Port
20 30
Peer LSR ID NE1 130.0.0.3 130.0.0.3
NE3 130.0.0.1 130.0.0.1
MPLS Tunnel name NE1_NE3_working NE1_NE3_working
Bandwidth Limit Enabled Enabled
CIR (kbit/s) 10000 30000
PIR (kbit/s) 30000 50000
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
101
Parameter NodeB 1 PW NodeB 2 PW
Request VLAN 10 20
TPID 0x8100 0x8100

Table 3-96 Parameter planning for the UNI-NNI E-Line services carried by PWs
Paramete
r
NodeB 1 NodeB 2 RNC
Service ID 1 2 1 2
Name E-Line-1 E-Line-2 E-Line-1 E-Line-2
Direction UNI-NNI UNI-NNI UNI-NNI UNI-NNI
Service
Tag Role
User Service User Service
UNI 21-PEFF8-1 21-PEFF8-2 3-PEG8-3 3-PEG8-3
VLANs 100 100 100 200
Bearer
Type
PW PW PW PW
PW ID 35 45 35 45
BPDU Not
Transparently
Transmitted
Not
Transparently
Transmitted
Not
Transparently
Transmitted
Not
Transparently
Transmitted
MTU
(bytes)
1500 1500 1500 1500

3.7.3 Configuration Process (in End-to-End Mode)
This section describes how to configure E-Line services carried by PWs in end-to-end mode.
Prerequisites
l You must be familiar with the networking requirements and service plan of the E-Line
services carried by PWs (in the scenario of network adjustment based on VLAN switching).
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 See 9.4.3 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel in an End-to-End Mode to configure a tunnel for
carrying PWs.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
102
Table 3-97 Basic attributes of the MPLS tunnels
Par
am
ete
r
MPLS
Tunnel
Name
MPLS
Tunnel ID
Protocol Type Signaling
Type
Direct
ion
Protec
ted
Type
Par
ame
ter
Pla
nni
ng
NE1_NE3_w
orking
10 MPLS Static CR Bidirec
tional
Unprot
ected
NE1_NE3_pr
otection
20 MPLS Static CR Bidirec
tional
Unprot
ected

Table 3-98 Parameter planning for the MPLS tunnels
MP
LS
Tu
nn
el
ID
N
o
d
e
No
de
Ty
pe
In
Inte
rfac
e
In
L
a
b
el
Rev
erse
In
Lab
el
Out
Inte
rfac
e
Ou
t
La
bel
Reve
rse
Out
Labe
l
Next
Hop
Reve
rse
Next
Hop
Sour
ce
Nod
e
Sink
Nod
e
10 N
E
1
Ingr
ess
- - 103 3-
PEG
8-1
100 - 18.1.
1.2
- - 130.0
.0.3
N
E
2
Tra
nsit
3-
PEG
8-1
10
0
102 3-
PEG
8-3
101 103 18.1.
1.6
18.1.
1.1
130.0
.0.1
130.0
.0.3
N
E
3
Egr
ess
3-
PEG
8-1
10
1
- - 102 - 18.1.
1.5
130.0
.0.1
-
20 N
E
1
Ingr
ess
- - 203 3-
PEG
8-2
200 - 18.1.
2.2
- - 130.0
.0.3
N
E
2
Tra
nsit
3-
PEG
8-2
20
0
202 3-
PEG
8-4
201 203 18.1.
2.6
18.1.
2.1
130.0
.0.1
130.0
.0.3
N
E
3
Egr
ess
3-
PEG
8-2
20
1
- - 202 - 18.1.
2.5
130.0
.0.1
-

Step 2 See 9.6 Configuring MPLS OAM to configure MPLS tunnel OAM.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
103
Table 3-99 Parameter planning for MPLS tunnel OAM
Parameter Parameter Planning
MPLS Tunnel ID 10 20
OAM Status Enabled Enabled
Detection Mode Manual Manual
Detection Packet
Type
FFD
NOTE
Detection Packet Period can be set only
when Detection Packet Type is FFD.
FFD
Detection Packet
Period (ms)
3.3
NOTE
Generally, an OAM alarm is reported after
three periods. When Detection Packet
Period (ms) is set to 3.3, the switching time
can meet the requirement (less than 50 ms)
after a fault occurs.
3.3

Step 3 See 9.7 Configuring MPLS Tunnel APS to configure MPLS tunnel APS.
Table 3-100 Parameter planning for MPLS tunnel APS
Parameter Parameter Planning
Protection Type 1+1
Switching Mode Single-Ended
Working Tunnel ID 10
Tunnel
Name
NE1_NE3_working
Protecti
on
Tunnel ID 20
Tunnel
Name
NE1_NE3_protection
Revertive Mode Revertive
WTR Time (min) 5
Hold-off Time (100
ms)
0
NOTE
The services are not protected by multiple protection schemes. Therefore, the
setting of Hold-off Time (100 ms) is unnecessary.
Protocol State Enabled

Step 4 Configure common Internet access services on NodeB 1 in end-to-end mode.
1. Choose Service > PWE3 Service > Create PWE3 Service from the main menu.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
104
2. Set general attributes for the common Internet access services on NodeB 1.
Table 3-101 General attributes for the common Internet access services on NodeB 1
Parameter Value in This Example
Service Type ETH
Service ID 1
Service Name E-Line-1
Protection Type Unprotected

3. Configure the source and sink NEs of the PWE3 service.
a. On the Node List tag page, click Configure Source And Sink. A dialog box is
displayed.
b. Select source and sink NEs in Physical Topology on the left.
c. In SAI Configuration, set the parameters for the service port on NodeB 1 and click
Add Node.
Table 3-102 Parameters for the service port on NodeB 1
Parameter Value in This Example
Source ID 1
VLAN ID 100
Sink ID 1
VLAN ID 100

4. Click the PW tab, and set the general attributes for the PW on NodeB 1.
Table 3-103 General attributes for the PW on NodeB 1
Parameter Value in This Example
PW ID 35
Signaling Type Static
Forward Label 20
Reverse Label 20
Forward Type Static Binding
Forward Tunnel NE1_NE3_working
Reverse Type Static Binding
Reverse Tunnel NE1_NE3_working
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
105
Parameter Value in This Example
Encapsulation Type MPLS

5. Click Detail and set the advanced attributes for the PW on NodeB 1.
a. Click the PW QoS tab and set the QoS parameters for the PW on NodeB1.
Table 3-104 QoS parameters for the PW on NodeB 1
Parameter Value in This Example
Forward Bandwidth Limit Enabled
CIR (kbit/s) 10000
PIR (kbit/s) 30000
Reverse Bandwidth Limit Enabled
CIR (kbit/s) 10000
PIR (kbit/s) 30000

b. Click the Advanced PW Attribute tab and set the advanced attributes for the PW on
NodeB 1.
Table 3-105 Advanced attributes for the PW on NodeB 1
Parameter Value in This Example
PW Type Ethernet Tagged Mode
Request VLAN 10
TPID 0x8100
NOTE
For details on how to configure the TPID, see 9.19
Configuring the NE-Level TPID.
Other parameters Default values

c. Click the Service Parameter tab and set the service tags for NodeB 1.
Table 3-106 Service tags for NodeB 1
Parameter Value in This Example
Source Service Tag User
Sink Service Tag User

6. Click OK.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
106
Step 5 Configure data services on NodeB 2 in end-to-end mode.
See Step 4 to configure data services on NodeB 2.
Table 3-107 General attributes for the data services on NodeB 2
Parameter Value in This Example
Service Type ETH
Service ID 2
Service Name E-Line-2
Protection Type Unprotected

Table 3-108 Parameters for the service port on NodeB 2
Parameter Value in This Example
Source ID 2
VLAN ID 100
Sink ID 2
VLAN ID 200

Table 3-109 General attributes for the PW on NodeB 2
Parameter Value in This Example
PW ID 45
Signaling Type Static
Forward Label 30
Reverse Label 30
Forward Type Static Binding
Forward Tunnel NE1_NE3_working
Reverse Type Static Binding
Reverse Tunnel NE1_NE3_working
Encapsulation Type MPLS

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
107
Table 3-110 QoS parameters for the PW on NodeB 2
Parameter Value in This Example
Forward Bandwidth Limit Enabled
CIR (kbit/s) 30000
PIR (kbit/s) 50000
Reverse CIR (kbit/s) Enabled
CIR (kbit/s) 30000
PIR (kbit/s) 50000

Table 3-111 Advanced attributes for the PW on NodeB 2
Parameter Value in This Example
PW Type Ethernet Tagged Mode
Request VLAN 20
TPID 0x8100
NOTE
For details on how to configure the TPID, see 9.19 Configuring the
NE-Level TPID.
Other parameters Default values

Table 3-112 Service tags for NodeB 2
Parameter Value in This Example
Source Service Tag Service
Sink Service Tag Service

----End
Related Task
See 3.7.5 Verifying the Correctness of E-Line Service Configuration to check whether the
E-Line services carried by PWs are configured correctly.
3.7.4 Configuration Process (Configuration on a Per-NE Basis)
This topic describes the process for configuring the E-Line services carried by PWs.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
108
Prerequisites
l You must be familiar with the networking requirements and service planning information
of the E-Line services carried by PWs (network adjustment based on VLAN switching).
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 On NE1, NE2, and NE3, configure the tunnels that carry the PWs. For the configuration
procedures, see 9.4 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel.
Table 3-113 Basic attributes of the MPLS tunnels
Par
am
ete
r
MPLS
Tunnel
Name
MPLS
Tunnel ID
Protocol Type Signaling
Type
Direct
ion
Protec
ted
Type
Par
ame
ter
Pla
nni
ng
NE1_NE3_w
orking
10 MPLS Static CR Bidirec
tional
Unprot
ected
NE1_NE3_pr
otection
20 MPLS Static CR Bidirec
tional
Unprot
ected

Table 3-114 Parameter planning for the MPLS tunnels
MP
LS
Tu
nn
el
ID
N
o
d
e
No
de
Ty
pe
In
Inte
rfac
e
In
L
a
b
el
Rev
erse
In
Lab
el
Out
Inte
rfac
e
Ou
t
La
bel
Reve
rse
Out
Labe
l
Next
Hop
Reve
rse
Next
Hop
Sour
ce
Nod
e
Sink
Nod
e
10 N
E
1
Ingr
ess
- - 103 3-
PEG
8-1
100 - 18.1.
1.2
- - 130.0
.0.3
N
E
2
Tra
nsit
3-
PEG
8-1
10
0
102 3-
PEG
8-3
101 103 18.1.
1.6
18.1.
1.1
130.0
.0.1
130.0
.0.3
N
E
3
Egr
ess
3-
PEG
8-1
10
1
- - 102 - 18.1.
1.5
130.0
.0.1
-
20 N
E
1
Ingr
ess
- - 203 3-
PEG
8-2
200 - 18.1.
2.2
- - 130.0
.0.3
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
109
MP
LS
Tu
nn
el
ID
N
o
d
e
No
de
Ty
pe
In
Inte
rfac
e
In
L
a
b
el
Rev
erse
In
Lab
el
Out
Inte
rfac
e
Ou
t
La
bel
Reve
rse
Out
Labe
l
Next
Hop
Reve
rse
Next
Hop
Sour
ce
Nod
e
Sink
Nod
e
N
E
2
Tra
nsit
3-
PEG
8-2
20
0
202 3-
PEG
8-4
201 203 18.1.
2.6
18.1.
2.1
130.0
.0.1
130.0
.0.3
N
E
3
Egr
ess
3-
PEG
8-2
20
1
- - 202 - 18.1.
2.5
130.0
.0.1
-

Step 2 On NE1, NE2, and NE3, configure MPLS tunnel OAM. For the configuration procedures, see
9.6 Configuring MPLS OAM.
Table 3-115 Parameter planning for MPLS tunnel OAM
Parameter Parameter Planning
MPLS Tunnel ID 10 20
OAM Status Enabled Enabled
Detection Mode Manual Manual
Detection Packet
Type
FFD
NOTE
Detection Packet Period can be set only
when Detection Packet Type is FFD.
FFD
Detection Packet
Period (ms)
3.3
NOTE
Generally, an OAM alarm is reported after
three periods. When Detection Packet
Period (ms) is set to 3.3, the switching time
can meet the requirement (less than 50 ms)
after a fault occurs.
3.3

Step 3 On NE1 and NE3, configure MPLS tunnel APS. For the configuration procedures, see 9.7
Configuring MPLS Tunnel APS.
Table 3-116 Parameter planning for MPLS tunnel APS
Parameter Parameter Planning
Protection Type 1+1
Switching Mode Single-Ended
Working Tunnel ID 10
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
110
Parameter Parameter Planning
Tunnel
Name
NE1_NE3_working
Protecti
on
Tunnel ID 20
Tunnel
Name
NE1_NE3_protection
Revertive Mode Revertive
WTR Time (min) 5
Hold-off Time (100
ms)
0
NOTE
The services are not protected by multiple protection schemes. Therefore, the
setting of Hold-off Time (100 ms) is unnecessary.
Protocol State Enabled

Step 4 On NE1, configure an E-Line service for NodeB 1.
1. In the NE Explorer, select NE1, and then choose Configuration > Packet
Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function
Tree.
2. Click New. Then, the New E-Line Service dialog box is displayed. Set the displayed
parameters.
Table 3-117 Parameters of the E-Line service carried by PWs of NodeB 1
Parameter Value in This Example
Service ID 1
Service Name E-Line-1
Direction UNI-NNI
BPDU (STP Packet) Not Transparently Transmitted
MTU (bytes) 1500
Service Tag Role User
Source Port 21-PEFF8-1
Source VLANs 100
Bearer Type PW
Protection Type Unprotected
Other parameters Default values

3. Click Configure PW. Then, the Configure PW dialog box is displayed. Set the PW
parameters.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
111
Table 3-118 PW parameters of the E-Line service of NodeB 1
Parameter Value in This Example
General
Attributes
PW ID 35
PW Signaling Type Static
PW Type Ethernet Tagged Mode
PW Direction Bidirectional
PW Incoming Label/Source Port 20
PW Outgoing Label/Sink Port 20
Tunnel Type MPLS
Tunnel NE1_NE3_working
Peer LSR ID 130.0.0.3
Advance
d
Attributes
Request VLAN 10
TPID 0x8100
NOTE
For details on how to configure the
TPID, see 9.19 Configuring the NE-
Level TPID.
Other parameters Default values

4. Click Configure QoS. Then, the Configure QoS dialog box is displayed.
5. Click the PW tab. Set the QoS parameters of the E-Line service of NodeB 1.
Table 3-119 QoS parameters of the E-Line service of NodeB 1
Parameter Value in This Example
PW ID 35
Direction Ingress
Bandwidth Limit Enabled
CIR (kbit/s) 10000
PIR (kbit/s) 30000
Other parameters Default values

Step 5 On NE1, configure an E-Line service for NodeB 2.
Refer to Step 4 and configure an E-Line service for NodeB 2.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
112
Table 3-120 Parameters of the E-Line service carried by PWs of NodeB 2
Parameter Value in This Example
Service ID 2
Service Name E-Line-2
Direction UNI-NNI
BPDU (STP Packet) Not Transparently Transmitted
MTU (bytes) 1500
Service Tag Role Service
Source Port 21-PEFF8-2
Source VLANs 100
Bearer Type PW
Protection Type Unprotected
Other parameters Default values

Table 3-121 PW parameters of the E-Line service of NodeB 2
Parameter Value in This Example
General Attributes PW ID 45
PW Signaling Type Static
PW Type Ethernet Tagged Mode
PW Direction Bidirectional
PW Incoming Label/Source Port 30
PW Outgoing Label/Sink Port 30
Tunnel Type MPLS
Tunnel NE1_NE3_working
Peer LSR ID 130.0.0.3
Advanced
Attributes
Request VLAN 20
TPID 0x8100
NOTE
For details on how to configure the
TPID, see 9.19 Configuring the
NE-Level TPID.
Other parameters Default values

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
113
Table 3-122 QoS parameters of the E-Line service of NodeB 2
Parameter Value in This Example
PW ID 45
Direction Ingress
Bandwidth Limit Enabled
CIR (kbit/s) 30000
PIR (kbit/s) 50000
Other parameters Default values

Step 6 On NE3, configure an E-Line service between NodeB 1 and the RNC, and an E-Line service
between NodeB 2 and the RNC.
Refer to Step 4 and configure the E-Line services.
Table 3-123 Parameters of the E-Line service carried by PWs between NodeB 1 and the RNC
Parameter Value in This Example
Service ID 1
Service Name E-Line-1
Direction UNI-NNI
BPDU (STP Packet) Not Transparently Transmitted
MTU (bytes) 1500
Service Tag Role User
Source Port 3-PEG8-3
Source VLANs 100
Bearer Type PW
Protection Type Unprotected
Other parameters Default values

Table 3-124 PW parameters of the E-Line service between NodeB 1 and the RNC
Parameter Value in This Example
General Attributes PW ID 35
PW Signaling Type Static
PW Type Ethernet Tagged Mode
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
114
Parameter Value in This Example
PW Direction Bidirectional
PW Incoming Label/
Source Port
20
PW Outgoing Label/
Sink Port
20
Tunnel Type MPLS
Tunnel NE1_NE3_working
Peer LSR ID 130.0.0.1
Advanced
Attributes
Request VLAN 10
TPID 0x8100
NOTE
For details on how to configure the TPID, see
9.19 Configuring the NE-Level TPID.
Other parameters Default values

Table 3-125 QoS parameters of the E-Line service between NodeB 1 and the RNC
Parameter Value in This Example
PW ID 35
Direction Ingress
Bandwidth Limit Enabled
CIR (kbit/s) 10000
PIR (kbit/s) 30000
Other parameters Default values

Table 3-126 Parameters of the E-Line service carried by PWs between NodeB 2 and the RNC
Parameter Value in This Example
Service ID 2
Service Name E-Line-2
Direction UNI-NNI
BPDU (STP Packet) Not Transparently Transmitted
Service Tag Role Service
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
115
Parameter Value in This Example
MTU (bytes) 1500
Source Port 3-PEG8-3
Source VLANs 200
Bearer Type PW
Protection Type Unprotected
Other parameters Default values

Table 3-127 PW parameters of the E-Line service between NodeB 2 and the RNC
Parameter Value in This Example
General Attributes PW ID 45
PW Signaling Type Static
PW Type Ethernet Tagged Mode
PW Direction Bidirectional
PW Incoming Label/Source
Port
30
PW Outgoing Label/Sink
Port
30
Tunnel Type MPLS
Tunnel NE1_NE3_working
Peer LSR ID 130.0.0.1
Advanced Attributes Request VLAN 20
TPID 0x8100
NOTE
For details on how to configure the
TPID, see 9.19 Configuring the NE-
Level TPID.
Other parameters Default values

Table 3-128 QoS parameters of the E-Line service between NodeB 2 and the RNC
Parameter Value in This Example
PW ID 45
Direction Ingress
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
116
Parameter Value in This Example
Bandwidth Limit Enabled
CIR (kbit/s) 30000
PIR (kbit/s) 50000
Other parameters Default values

----End
Relevant Task
If you configure PW-carried E-Line services on a per-NE basis, see 9.16.1 Searching for PWE3
Services and convert discrete PWE3 services to complete PWE3 services.
See 3.7.5 Verifying the Correctness of E-Line Service Configuration to check whether the
E-Line services carried by PWs are configured correctly.
3.7.5 Verifying the Correctness of E-Line Service Configuration
After configuring E-Line services, verify the E-Line services by using the SmartBits.
Prerequisites
l E-Line services carried by PWs are configured.
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
SmartBits and U2000
Test Connection Diagram
Figure 3-18 shows the connections for testing E-Line services carried by PWs.
Figure 3-18 Connections for testing E-Line services carried by PWs
21-PEFF8-1
MPLS tunnel
PW
PSN
3-PEG8-3
NE1 NE3 NE2
SmartBits SmartBits
NOTE
In this example, the SmartBits devices are connected to 21-PEFF8-1 on NE1 (source) and 3-PEG8-3 on
NE3 (sink). In actual situations, determine the source and sink as required, and follow the same testing
procedure.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
117
Context
CAUTION
l During a test, only test personnel are allowed in the testing environment.
l Exercise caution when touching cables and optical fibers.
Procedure
Step 1 Connect the SmartBits devices to 21-PEFF8-1 on NE1 and 3-PEG8-3 on NE3.
Step 2 Log in to the U2000. See Enabling, Disabling and Setting Performance Monitoring of the NE
to start the 15-minute and 24-hour performance monitoring on NE1 and NE3.
NOTE
The performance monitoring tasks help analyze and locate a problem during the test.
Step 3 Use the SmartBits devices to perform a packet transmitting and receiving test.
NOTE
l Packets whose bytes are all 0s are considered as special packets. Do not use those packets for a packet
transmitting and receiving test.
l In the first packet transmitting and receiving period, learning the MAC addresses of the packets may
cause packet loss.
l If the service is normal, the number of received packets is equal to the number of transmitted packets.
If it is a VLAN-based service that involves VLAN switching, check whether VLAN switching functions
properly for transmitted and received packets.
l If packet loss occurred, rectify the fault. Then, perform 24-hour tests until no packet loss occurs.
----End
3.8 Configuration Example: E-Line Services Carried by
QinQ links
This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the engineering information and how to
configure the E-Line services carried by QinQ links for each NE according to the networking
diagram.
3.8.1 Networking Diagram
The networking diagram shows the requirements for the E-Line services carried by QinQ links.
On the network shown in Figure 3-19, the service requirements of User A and User B are as
follows:
l User A1 and User B1 are connected to NE1 through the 21-PETF8-1 and 21-PETF8-2 ports
respectively.
l User A2 and User B2 are connected to NE2 through the 21-PETF8-1 and 21-PETF8-2 ports
respectively.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
118
l The services of user A and User B must be isolated from each other. The internal VLAN
IDs of the services of User A range from 1 to 100. The internal VLAN IDs of the services
of User B range from 1 to 200.
l Different S-VLAN IDs need to be added to the services of User A and User B on the network
side, thus realizing the service isolation. The S-VLAN of 30 is added to the services of User
A and the S-VLAN of 40 is added to the services of User B.
l The service between User A1 and User A2 is the common Internet access service of which
the CIR is 10 Mbit/s and the PIR is 50 Mbit/s.
l The service between User B1 and User B2 is the data service of which the CIR is 30 Mbit/
s and the PIR is 50 Mbit/s.
Figure 3-19 Networking diagram of the E-Line services carried by QinQ links
User A2
User A1
User B1
User B2
PSN
NE 1
NE2
Intranet of User A
C-VLAN =1 to 100
Intranet of User A
C-VLAN =1 to 100
Intranet of User B
C-VLAN =1 to 200
Intranet o User B
C-VLAN =1 to 200
The S-VLAN ID of 30 is added
to the packets of User A.
V-UNI for User A1: 21-PETF8-1
V-UNI for User B1: 21-PETF8-2
NNI : 3-PEG16-1
V-UNI for User A2: 21-PETF8-1
V-UNI for User B2: 21-PETF8-2
NNI: 3-PEG16-1
The S-VLAN ID of 40 is added
to the packets of User B.
NOTE
l This section uses the OptiX OSN 3500 as an example to describe the board layout. The methods of
configuring other products are the same as the method of configuring the OptiX OSN 3500, except that
the board layout may be different. For the slot information, see the Hardware Description of the specific
product.
l On a live data network, an Ethernet service is added to its source NE, passed through on its transit NEs,
and dropped from its sink NE. For details on how to configure transit NEs for an Ethernet service
carried by QinQ links, see 9.12.3 Configuring Transit NEs for Ethernet Services Carried by QinQ
Links.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
119
3.8.2 Service Planning
The engineering information for configuring the E-Line services carried by QinQ links contains
the engineering information for configuring the QinQ links carrying the E-Line services and the
engineering information for configuring the UNI-NNI E-Line services carried by the QinQ links.
The E-Line services need to be carried by QinQ links. Hence, the service planning includes the
planning of the QinQ links. Planning the E-Line services carried by QinQ links involves the
following:
l Plan the QinQ links that carry the E-Line services. Refer to Table 3-129.
l Plan the UNI-NNI E-Line services carried by the QinQ links. Refer to Table 3-130.
Table 3-129 Planning information of the E-Line services carried by the QinQ links
Parameter User A(NE1-NE2) User B(NE1-NE2)
QinQ Link ID 1 2
Board 3-PEG16 3-PEG16
Port 1 (NE1, NE2) 1 (NE1, NE2)
S-Vlan ID 30 40
Bandwidth Limit Enabled Enabled
Committed Information Rate
(kbit/s)
10000 30000
Peak Information Rate(kbit/
s)
50000 50000

Table 3-130 Planning information of the E-Line services carried by the QinQ links from the
user side to the network side
Parameter User A User B
Service ID 1 1
Name E-Line-1 E-Line-2
Direction UNI-NNI UNI-NNI
UNI 21-PETF8-1 21-PETF8-2
VLANs 1-100 1-200
Bearer Type QinQ Link QinQ Link
QinQ Link ID 1 2
BPDU Not Transparently
Transmitted
Not Transparently
Transmitted
MTU (bytes) 1526 1526
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
120

3.8.3 Configuration Process
Before configuring the E-Line services carried by QinQ links, you need to configure the QinQ
links.
Prerequisites
l You must be familiar with the networking requirements and service planning for the UNI-
NNI E-Line services carried by the QinQ links.
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l The QinQ links must be configured on NE1 and NE2. For the configuration method, see
9.20 Creating a QinQ Link.
Procedure
Step 1 On NE1, configure the E-Line services carried by QinQ links of User A1.
1. In the NE Explorer, select NE1, and then choose Configuration > Packet
Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function
Tree.
2. Click New. Then, the New E-Line Service dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters of
the E-Line services carried by QinQ links of User A1.
Table 3-131 Parameters of the E-Line services carried by QinQ links of User A1
Parameter Value in This Example
Service ID 1
Service Name E-Line-1
Direction UNI-NNI
BPDU Not Transparently Transmitted
MTU(bytes) 1526
Port 21-PETF8-1
VLANs 1-100
Bearer Type QinQ Link
QinQ Link ID 1

3. Click Configure QoS. Then, the Configure QoS dialog box is displayed.
4. Click the UNI tab. Set the QoS parameters of the E-Line services carried by QinQ links of
User A1.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
121
Table 3-132 QoS parameters of the E-Line services carried by QinQ links of User A1
Parameter Value in This Example
Interface 21-PETF8-1 (Port-1)
Direction Ingress
Bandwidth Limit Enabled
CIR(kbit/s) 10000
PIR(kbit/s) 50000
Other parameters Default values

Step 2 On NE1, configure the E-Line services carried by QinQ links of User B1.
Refer to Step 1 and configure the E-Line services carried by QinQ links of User B1.
Table 3-133 Parameters of the E-Line services carried by QinQ links of User B1
Parameter Value in This Example
Service ID 2
Service Name E-Line-2
Direction UNI-NNI
BPDU Not Transparently Transmitted
MTU(bytes) 1526
Port 21-PETF8-2
VLANs 1-200
Bearer Type QinQ Link
QinQ Link ID 2

Table 3-134 QoS parameters of the E-Line services carried by QinQ links of User B1
Parameter Value in This Example
Interface 21-PETF8-1 (Port-1)
Direction Ingress
Bandwidth Limit Enabled
CIR(kbit/s) 30000
PIR(kbit/s) 50000
Other parameters Default values
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
122

Step 3 On NE2, configure the E-Line services carried by QinQ links of User A2 and User B2.
Refer to Step 1 and configure the E-Line services carried by QinQ links of User A2 and User
B2.
Table 3-135 Parameters of the E-Line services carried by QinQ links of User A2
Parameter Value in This Example
Service ID 1
Service Name E-Line-1
Direction UNI-NNI
BPDU Not Transparently Transmitted
MTU(bytes) 1526
Port 21-PETF8-1
VLANs 1-100
Bearer Type QinQ Link
QinQ Link ID 1

Table 3-136 QoS parameters of the E-Line services carried by QinQ links of User A2
Parameter Value in This Example
Interface 21-PETF8-1 (Port-1)
Direction Ingress
Bandwidth Limit Enabled
CIR(kbit/s) 10000
PIR(kbit/s) 50000
Other parameters Default values

Table 3-137 Parameters of the E-Line services carried by QinQ links of User B2
Parameter Value in This Example
Service ID 2
Service Name E-Line-2
Direction UNI-NNI
BPDU Not Transparently Transmitted
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
123
Parameter Value in This Example
MTU(bytes) 1526
Port 21-PETF8-2
VLANs 1-200
Bearer Type QinQ Link
QinQ Link ID 2

Table 3-138 QoS parameters of the E-Line services carried by QinQ links of User B2
Parameter Value in This Example
Interface 21-PETF8-1 (Port-1)
Direction Ingress
Bandwidth Limit Enabled
CIR(kbit/s) 30000
PIR(kbit/s) 50000
Other parameters Default values

----End
Relevant Task
See 3.8.4 Verifying the Correctness of E-Line Service Configuration to check whether the
E-Line services carried by QinQ links are configured correctly.
3.8.4 Verifying the Correctness of E-Line Service Configuration
After the E-Line services are configured, the correctness of service configuration should be
verified. The Ethernet OAM function is used to verify the correctness of E-Line service
configuration.
Prerequisites
The E-Line services must be already created.
Context
In the case of UNI-UNI E-Line services, you need not perform the connectivity check by using
the 802.1ag OAM function. By default, the UNI-UNI E-Line services are normal. The
connectivity check method (by using the 802.1ag OAM function) of the UNI-NNI E-Line
services carried by ports and QinQ links is the same as the connectivity check method (by using
the 802.1ag OAM function) of the UNI-NNI E-Line services carried by PWs.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
124
This topic considers the E-Line services carried by PWs as the example to describe how to check
whether the E-Line services are configured correctly. Before you perform the check, you need
to configure the Ethernet OAM function. See Figure 3-20.
Figure 3-20 OAM of the E-Line services
Unicast tunnel
PW
MEP
MEP
MA: maintenance association
MEP
MEP
M A
MD
MD: maintenance domain
M A
MEP: maintenance end point
NE1 NE2
User A1
User B1
User A2
User B2

As shown in the figure, two E-Line services are configured between User A1 and User A2 and
between User B1 and User B2. The two E-Line services are carried and isolated by PWs. To
check whether the two E-Line services are configured correctly, you need to configure the
Ethernet OAM function. This topic considers the E-Line service between User A1 and User A2
as the example.
Procedure
Step 1 At NE1 and NE2, create the maintenance domain for the E-Line service between User A1 and
User A2. For the creation method, see Creating an MD.
Set the parameters of the maintenance domain.
Parameter NE1 NE2
Maintenance
Domain Name
MD MD
Maintenance
Domain Level
4 4

NOTE
The maintenance domain names and levels of NE1 and NE2 need to be the same so that NE1 and NE2
belong to the same maintenance domain.
Step 2 At NE1 and NE2, create the maintenance association for the E-Line service between User A1
and User A2. For the creation method, see Creating an MA.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
125
Set the parameters of the maintenance association.
Parameter NE1 NE2
Maintenance Domain Name MD MD
Maintenance Association
Name
MA MA
Relevant Service 1-E-Line-1 1-E-Line-1
CC Test Transmit Period
(ms)
3.33 ms 3.33 ms

Step 3 At NE1 and NE2, create the maintenance end points (MEPs). For the creation method, see
Creating an MEP.
Set the parameters of the MEPs.
Parameter NE1 NE2
Maintenance Domain Name MD MD
Maintenance Association
Name
MA MA
Board 21-PETF8 21-PETF8
Port 1(Port-1) 1(Port-1)
VLAN 100 100
MP ID 1 2
Direction Ingress Ingress
CC Status Active Active

Step 4 At NE1 and NE2, create the remote MEPs. Perform the CC test. For the test method, see
Performing a Continuity Check.
NOTE
l If the MEP of NE2 does not receive the CC packets from NE1 in a period of time (for example, 3.25
times of the transmission period), the MEP automatically reports the ETH_CFM_LOC alarm. If the
ETH_CFM_LOC alarm is not reported, the connectivity of the service from NE1 to NE2 is normal.
l If the MEP of NE1 does not receive the CC packets from NE2 in a period of time (for example, 3.25
times of the transmission period), the MEP automatically reports the ETH_CFM_LOC alarm. If the
ETH_CFM_LOC alarm is not reported, the connectivity of the service from NE2 to NE1 is normal.
----End
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 3 Configuring E-Line Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
126
4 Configuring E-LAN Services
About This Chapter
You can configure the E-LAN services to realize the multipoint-to-multipoint transmission of
Ethernet services.
4.1 Basic Concepts
Learning about the basic concepts helps to further understand E-LAN services.
4.2 Configuration Flow for the E-LAN Services
The flowchart for configuring an E-LAN service differs according to the type of the E-LAN
service.
4.3 Configuration Example: E-LAN Services Carried by Ports
This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the engineering information and how to
configure the E-LAN services carried by ports for each NE according to the networking diagram.
4.4 Configuration Example: E-LAN Services Carried by PWs
This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the engineering information and how to
configure the E-LAN services carried by PWs for each NE according to the networking diagram.
4.5 Configuration Example: E-LAN Services Carried by QinQ links
This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the engineering information and how to
configure the E-LAN services carried by QinQ links for each NE according to the networking
diagram.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
127
4.1 Basic Concepts
Learning about the basic concepts helps to further understand E-LAN services.
4.1.1 E-LAN Services
As shown in the networking topology, the E-LAN services are multipoint-to-multipoint services.
The equipment realizes the multipoint-to-multipoint transmission of Ethernet services through
the E-LAN.
According to the service transmission mode on the network side, the E-LAN services can be
classified into the following types:
l E-LAN services carried by ports
l E-LAN services carried by PWs
l E-LAN services carried by QinQ links
E-LAN Services Carried by Ports
Figure 4-1 shows the networking diagram of the E-LAN services carried by ports.
Three user-side networks, namely, CE1, CE2, and CE3 access the operator network through the
FE ports. CE1, CE2, and CE3 have their own VLAN tags and must be able to visit each other.
You can configure the E-LAN services to realize the communication between different user-
side networks.
You need to configure the services to be carried by ports on the network side to realize the
transmission of the Ethernet services from the user side. In the uplink direction of the user side
on each NE node, complex traffic classification can be performed for data packets and different
QoS policies can be used according to the traffic types.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
128
Figure 4-1 E-LAN services carried by ports
NE1
FE
NE2
NE3
CE2
FE
FE
CE1
CE3
PSN
UNI
NNI
NNI

E-LAN Services Carried by PWs
Figure 4-2 shows the networking diagram of the E-LAN services carried by PWs.
Three network-side networks, namely, CE1, CE2, and CE3 access the operator network through
the FE ports. CE1, CE2, and CE3 have their own VLAN tags and must be able to visit each
other. You can configure the E-LAN services to realize the communication between different
users.
On the network side, the accessed user services are carried by PWs after PW encapsulation, and
then are transmitted through the tunnel. In this manner, the transmission of Ethernet services is
realized. In the uplink direction of the user side on each NE node, complex traffic classification
can be performed for data packets and different QoS policies can be used according to the traffic
types.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
129
Figure 4-2 E-LAN services carried by PWs
NE1
FE
NE2
NE3
CE2
FE
FE
CE1
CE3
PSN
Tunnel
PW

E-LAN Services Carried by QinQ Links
Figure 4-3 shows the networking diagram of the E-LAN services carried by QinQ links.
Three network-side networks, namely, CE1, CE2, and CE3 access the supplier network through
the FE ports. CE1, CE2, and CE3 have their own VLAN tags and must be able to visit each
other. You can configure the E-LAN services to realize the communication between different
user-side networks.
On the network side, the Ethernet services are transmitted over QinQ links. When the services
are carried by QinQ links, the packets that carry C-VLAN tags from the user-side network are
added with the S-VLAN header of the transport network. That is, the packets from the user-side
network traverse the transport network, carrying two layers of tags. In the uplink direction of
the user side on each NE node, complex traffic classification can be performed for data packets
and different QoS policies can be used according to the traffic types.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
130
Figure 4-3 E-LAN services carried by QinQ links
NE1
FE
NE2
NE3
CE2
FE
FE
CE1
CE3
PSN
C-VLAN
S-VLAN
S-VLAN
QinQ link

4.1.2 UNI
A UNI refers to the Ethernet port that is connected to the user equipment. A UNI is used for the
user-side configuration of an Ethernet service.
V-UNI
A V-UNI is a virtual user-network interface. Each service on a UNI corresponds to a logical V-
UNI.
A UNI can receive multiple services. That is, a UNI may correspond to multiple V-UNIs.
V-UNI Group
A V-UNI group contains multiple V-UNIs, and limits the total bandwidth of the Ethernet services
received on the member V-UNIs.
For a user or an Ethernet service that has multiple access points, you can add the access points
to a V-UNI group and set a total bandwidth for the V-UNI group. Bandwidth parameters include
committed information rate (CIR), maximum burst size, peak bandwidth, and committed burst
size.
V-UNIs in a V-UNI group share the total bandwidth but their bandwidths are limited by the total
bandwidth. To be specific, when the bandwidth of member A does not reach the CIR, member
B can use the remaining bandwidth; when the bandwidths of member A and member B do not
reach the CIR but their sum exceeds the total bandwidth of the V-UNI group, member A and
member B pre-empt the bandwidth based on service priorities.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
131
Multiple V-UNIs on a board can be added to a V-UNI group.
V-UNIs in a V-UNI group can be changed/deleted at any time, and values of bandwidth
parameters can also be modified at any time.
4.1.3 NNI
An NNI refers to the Ethernet port that is connected to the packet transport network. An NNI is
used for the network-side configuration of an Ethernet service.
Based on the modes of carrying services, NNIs can be classified into three types, namely, NNIs
carrying services by ports, NNIs carrying services by PWs, and NNIs carrying services by QinQ
links.
Ethernet Services Carried by Ports
In the case of the NNIs that carry Ethernet services by ports, the encapsulation type can be 802.1Q
or QinQ. In this case, the NNIs that an Ethernet service traverses are exclusively occupied. The
other physical ports that the Ethernet service traverses may be shared.
Ethernet Services Carried by PWs
In the case of the NNIs that carry Ethernet services by PWs, you need to create static MPLS
tunnels for the NNIs. To create the Ethernet services carried by PWs, you need to create the PWs
first. In this case, different Ethernet services can be encapsulated into different PWs and
transmitted in a tunnel to the same NNI. Therefore, the occupied NNIs are reduced and the
bandwidth utilization is improved.
Ethernet Services Carried by QinQ Links
In the case of the NNIs that carry Ethernet services by QinQ links, you need to create QinQ links
for the NNIs. The port attribute and the encapsulation mode of the NNIs corresponding to the
QinQ links are Layer 2 and QinQ, respectively. On a QinQ link, the packets that are accessed
are encapsulated with one layer of VLAN tags in QinQ encapsulation mode at the access ports.
In this manner, multiple packets with different VLAN tags from the user-side network can be
encapsulated into the same VLAN for transport. Therefore, the occupied VLAN resources on
the transport network are reduced. E-Line services and E-LAN services can be carried by the
QinQ link on the network side. In this case, the packets of different companies that are accessed
on the user side are added with different VLAN tags and then are transmitted by the same QinQ
link on the network side.
4.1.4 Split Horizon Group
A split horizon group consists of some specified ports. The ports in one split horizon group
cannot forward packets to each other.
To better isolate E-LAN services and to prevent a broadcast storm resulting from a service loop,
you can configure a split horizon group for the E-LAN services at the specified nodes.
Figure 4-4 shows a typical application of the split horizon group. NEs on the network are
configured with E-LAN services, and the east and west NNI ports and service access ports are
configured as mounted ports of a bridge. In this case, if a split horizon group is not configured
at NE1, a broadcast storm occurs due to a network loop as the east and west NNI ports can
forward packets to each other. If a split horizon group is configured at NE1 and the east and
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
132
west NNI ports are configured as members of the split horizon group, the east and west NNI
ports do not forward packets to each other. Therefore, a service loop is prevented.
Figure 4-4 Service model that applies a split horizon group
NE1
NE3
NE2
NE4
BSC
Split horizon group
NodeB
NodeB
NodeB
NodeB

4.2 Configuration Flow for the E-LAN Services
The flowchart for configuring an E-LAN service differs according to the type of the E-LAN
service.
4.2.1 E-LAN Services Carried by Ports
You need to configure the NNI to ensure the normal transmission of the E-LAN services carried
by ports.
Table 4-1 provides the process for configuring the E-LAN services carried by ports.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
133
Figure 4-5 Configuration flow for the E-LAN services carried by ports
Configure the UNI
Configure the QoS
Start
Required
Optional
End
Create the V-UNI
group
Configure the NNI for
the services carried
by ports
Create the E-LAN
services carried by
ports
Configuring the DCN
Function of a Port

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
134
Table 4-1 Configuration flow for the E-LAN services carried by ports
Step Operation Remarks
1 Configuring the UNI
(when the UNI is an
Ethernet port)
9.1.1 Setting the
General Attributes
of Ethernet
Interfaces
(Required) The
parameters are set as
follows:
l Enable Port is
set to Enabled.
l Port Mode is set
to Layer 2.
l Generally,
Encapsulation
Type is set to
802.1Q. When
the packets do not
need to be
distinguished
according to the
VLAN tags,
Encapsulation
Type is set to
Null.
l Working Mode
of the UNI needs
to be the same as
the working
mode of the
Ethernet
equipment on the
opposite end.
Generally, this
parameter takes
the default value
Auto-
Negotiation.
l When JUMBO
frames need not
be transmitted,
Max Frame
Length(byte)
takes the default
value 1620. In
other cases, Max
Frame Length
(byte) is set to the
maximum length
of the transmitted
JUMBO frames.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
135
Step Operation Remarks
9.1.2 Setting the
Layer 2 Attributes
of Ethernet Ports
(Optional) The
parameters are set as
follows:
l Tag needs to be
set according to
the type of the
packets that are
transmitted from
the equipment on
the opposite end.
If all the packets
are untagged
packets, Tag is
set to Access. If
all the packets are
tagged packets,
Tag is set to Tag
Aware. If the
packets contain
untagged packets
and tagged
packets, Tag is
set to Hybrid.
l When Tag is set
to Access or
Hybrid, the
Default VLAN
ID and VLAN
Priority
parameters need
to be set for the
untagged frames.
VLAN Priority
needs to be set
according to the
planned QoS.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
136
Step Operation Remarks
9.1.5 Configuring
the Flow Control
(Optional) The
parameters are set as
follows:
l Generally, the
PSN adopts the
QoS scheme to
prevent link
congestion.
Hence, Auto-
Negotiation
Flow Control
Mode and Non-
Autonegotiation
Flow Control
Mode need to be
set to the default
value Disabled,
unless otherwise
specified.
2 Configuring the DCN Function of a Port (Required) The E-
LAN services carried
by ports occupy the
NNIs exclusively.
Hence, you need to
set Enable State of
the NNIs to
Disabled.
(Optional) This
operation is valid
only when the UNI is
an Ethernet port. The
UNI is connected to
the external
equipment and thus
does not need to
transmit the in-band
DCN information.
Hence, set Enable
State of the UNIs to
Disabled.
3 9.3.1 Configuring the NNIs for Ethernet
Services Carried by Ports
(Required) The
parameters need to
be set according to
the service planning.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
137
Step Operation Remarks
4 Configuring the HQoS (Optional) The
parameters need to
be set according to
the service QoS
planning.
5 9.10.1 Configuring E-LAN Services
Carried by Ports
(Required) The
parameters need to
be set according to
the service planning.
6 9.21 Creating a V-UNI Group (Optional) The
parameters need to
be set according to
the service planning.

4.2.2 E-LAN Services Carried by PWs
You need to configure the MPLS tunnel before configuring the E-LAN services carried by PWs.
Table 4-2 provides the process for configuring the E-LAN services carried by PWs.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
138
Figure 4-6 Configuration flow for the E-LAN services carried by PWs
Configure the UNI
Configure the QoS
Configuring the DCN
Function of a Port
Start
Required
Optional
End
Create the V-UNI
group
Configure the NNI for
the services carried
by static MPLS
tunnel
Configure the MPLS
tunnel
Configure the E-LAN
services carried by
PWs

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
139
Table 4-2 Configuration flow for the E-LAN services carried by PWs
Step Operation Remarks
1 Configur
ing the
UNI
(when
the UNI
is an
Ethernet
port)
9.1.1 Setting the
General Attributes
of Ethernet
Interfaces
(Required) The parameters are set as follows:
l Enable Port is set to Enabled.
l Port Mode is set to Layer 2.
l Generally, Encapsulation Type is set to
802.1Q. When the packets do not need to
be distinguished according to the VLAN
tags, Encapsulation Type is set to Null.
l Working Mode of the UNI needs to be
the same as the working mode of the
Ethernet equipment on the opposite end.
Generally, this parameter takes the default
value Auto-Negotiation.
l When JUMBO frames need not be
transmitted, Max Frame Length(byte)
takes the default value 1620. In other
cases, Max Frame Length(byte) is set to
the maximum length of the transmitted
JUMBO frames.
9.1.2 Setting the
Layer 2 Attributes
of Ethernet Ports
(Optional) The parameters are set as follows:
l Tag needs to be set according to the type
of the packets that are transmitted from
the equipment on the opposite end. If all
the packets are untagged packets, Tag is
set to Access. If all the packets are tagged
packets, Tag is set to Tag Aware. If the
packets contain untagged packets and
tagged packets, Tag is set to Hybrid.
l When Tag is set to Access or Hybrid, the
Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority
parameters need to be set for the untagged
frames. VLAN Priority needs to be set
according to the planned QoS.
9.1.5 Configuring
the Flow Control
(Optional) The parameters are set as follows:
l Generally, the PSN adopts the QoS
scheme to prevent link congestion. Hence,
Auto-Negotiation Flow Control Mode
and Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control
Mode need to be set to the default value
Disabled, unless otherwise specified.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
140
Step Operation Remarks
2 Configuring the DCN Function
of a Port
(Optional) This operation is applicable only
when the UNI is an Ethernet port. The
parameters are set as follows:
l The UNI is used for connecting the
external equipment and need not transmit
in-band DCN information. Hence,
Enable Port needs to be set to Disabled
for the UNI.
3 9.3.2 Configuring the NNIs for
Ethernet Services Carried by
Static MPLS Tunnels
(Required) Set the parameters as follows:
l Set Port Mode to Layer 3.
l Set Enable Tunnel to Enabled.
4 Configur
ing the
MPLS
tunnel
9.4 Configuring an
MPLS Tunnel
(Required) The parameters need to be set
according to the service planning
information. For details on how to manage
MPLS tunnels, see 9.5 Managing MPLS
Tunnels.
9.6 Configuring
MPLS OAM
(Optional) The parameters are set as follows:
l OAM Status is set to Enabled.
l Detection Mode is set to Manual.
l Detection Packet Type is set to FFD.
l Detection Packet Period(ms) is set to
3.3.
9.7 Configuring
MPLS Tunnel APS
(Optional) Set the MPLS tunnel APS
parameters according to the service planning
information. For details on how to manage
MPLS tunnel APS protection groups, see 9.8
Managing MPLS Tunnel APS Protection
Groups.
5 Configuring the HQoS (Optional) The parameters need to be set
according to the service QoS planning.
6 l 9.10.2 Creating E-LAN
Services Carried by PWs on
a Per-NE Basis
l 9.10.3 Configuring E-LAN
Services Carried by PWs in
End-to-End Mode
(Required) The parameters need to be set
according to the service planning
information. For details on how to manage
Ethernet services carried by PWs, see 9.16
Managing PWE3 Services.
7 9.21 Creating a V-UNI Group (Optional) The parameters need to be set
according to the service planning.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
141
4.2.3 E-LAN Services Carried by QinQ Links
You need to configure the QinQ links before configuring the E-LAN services carried by QinQ
links.
Table 4-3 provides the process for configuring the E-LAN services carried by QinQ links.
Figure 4-7 Configuration flow for the E-LAN services carried by QinQ links
Configure the UNI
Configure the QoS
Configuring the DCN
Function of a Port
Start
Required
Optional
End
Create the V-UNI
group
Confiure the NNI for
the services carried
by QinQ links
Configure the QinQ
links
Create the E-LAN
services carried by
QinQ links

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
142
Table 4-3 Configuration flow for the E-LAN services carried by QinQ links
Step Operation Remarks
1 Configuring the UNI
(when the UNI is an
Ethernet port)
9.1.1 Setting the
General Attributes
of Ethernet
Interfaces
The parameters are
set as follows:
l Enable Port is
set to Enabled.
l Port Mode is set
to Layer 2.
l Generally,
Encapsulation
Type is set to
802.1Q.
l Working Mode
of the UNI needs
to be the same as
the working
mode of the
Ethernet
equipment on the
opposite end.
Generally, this
parameter takes
the default value
Auto-
Negotiation.
l When JUMBO
frames need not
be transmitted,
Max Frame
Length(byte)
takes the default
value 1620. In
other cases, Max
Frame Length
(byte) is set to the
maximum length
of the transmitted
JUMBO frames.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
143
Step Operation Remarks
9.1.2 Setting the
Layer 2 Attributes
of Ethernet Ports
(Optional) The
parameters are set as
follows:
l Tag needs to be
set according to
the type of the
packets that are
transmitted from
the equipment on
the opposite end.
If all the packets
are untagged
packets, Tag is
set to Access. If
all the packets are
tagged packets,
Tag is set to Tag
Aware. If the
packets contain
untagged packets
and tagged
packets, Tag is
set to Hybrid.
When
Encapsulation
Type is set to
QinQ, the Tag
parameter cannot
be set.
l When Tag is set
to Access or
Hybrid, the
Default VLAN
ID and VLAN
Priority
parameters need
to be set for the
untagged frames.
VLAN Priority
needs to be set
according to the
planned QoS.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
144
Step Operation Remarks
9.1.5 Configuring
the Flow Control
(Optional) The
parameters are set as
follows:
l Generally, the
PSN adopts the
QoS scheme to
prevent link
congestion.
Hence, Auto-
Negotiation
Flow Control
Mode and Non-
Autonegotiation
Flow Control
Mode need to be
set to the default
value Disabled,
unless otherwise
specified.
2 Configuring the DCN Function of a Port (Optional) This
operation is
applicable only when
the UNI is an
Ethernet port. The
parameters are set as
follows:
l The UNI is used
for connecting the
external
equipment and
need not transmit
in-band DCN
information.
Hence, Enable
Port needs to be
set to Disabled
for the UNI.
3 9.3.3 Configuring the NNIs for Ethernet
Services Carried by QinQ Links
(Required) The
parameters need to
be set according to
the service planning.
4 9.20 Creating a QinQ Link The parameters need
to be set according to
the service planning.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
145
Step Operation Remarks
5 Configuring the HQoS (Optional) The
parameters need to
be set according to
the service QoS
planning.
6 9.10.4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Carried by QinQ Links
The parameters need
to be set according to
the service planning.
7 9.21 Creating a V-UNI Group (Optional) The
parameters need to
be set according to
the service planning.

4.3 Configuration Example: E-LAN Services Carried by
Ports
This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the engineering information and how to
configure the E-LAN services carried by ports for each NE according to the networking diagram.
4.3.1 Networking Diagram
The networking diagram shows the requirement for the E-LAN services carried by ports.
On the network as shown in Figure 4-8, the service requirements of each customer edge (CE)
are as follows:
l CE1, CE2, and CE3 are connected to NE1, NE2, and NE3 through the 21-PETF8-1 ports
on NE1, NE2, and NE3 respectively.
l Three types of services, which are the voice service (VLAN=100), data service
(VLAN=200), and common Internet access service (VLAN=300) in the descending order
of priority, are configured between the three CE networks.
l The voice service requires a fixed bandwidth, of which the CIR and PIR are 10 Mbit/s.
l The data service requires a fixed bandwidth, of which the CIR and PIR are 40 Mbit/s.
l In the case of the normal Internet access service, the CIR is 0 Mbit/s and the PIR is 100
Mbit/s.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
146
Figure 4-8 Networking diagram of the E-LAN services carried by ports
NE 1
FE
NE 2
NE 3
CE 2
FE
FE
CE 1
CE 3
UNI for CE1: 21-PETF8-1
NNI for CE2: 3-PEG16-1
NNI for CE3: 3-PEG16-2
UNI for CE3: 21-PETF8-1
NNI for CE1: 3-PEG16-1
NNI for CE2: 3-PEG16-2
PSN
UNI for CE2: 21-PETF8-1
NNI for CE3: 3-PEG16-1
NNI for CE1: 3-PEG16-2
NOTE
l This section uses the OptiX OSN 3500 as an example to describe the board layout. The methods of
configuring other products are the same as the method of configuring the OptiX OSN 3500, except that
the board layout may be different. For the slot information, see the Hardware Description of the specific
product.
l On a live data network, an Ethernet service is added to its source NE, passed through on its transit NEs,
and dropped from its sink NE. For details on how to configure transit NEs for an Ethernet service
carried by ports, see 9.12.1 Configuring Transit NEs for Ethernet Services Carried by Ports.

4.3.2 Service Planning
The engineering information for configuring the E-LAN services carried by ports contains the
engineering information for configuring the UNIs and the engineering information for
configuring the NNIs.
On the network, the E-LAN services are carried by ports. Hence, you need to plan the parameters
related to the ports.
Planning the E-LAN services carried by ports involves the following:
l Plan the E-LAN services carried by ports. Refer to Table 4-4.
l Plan the UNI of each NE. Refer to Table 4-5.
l Plan the NNI of each NE. Refer to Table 4-6.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
147
l Plan the QoS of each NE. Refer to Table 4-7.
NOTE
You can set one split horizon group for each E-LAN service.
You need to configure the NNI of each node with a split horizon group to prevent the data from being
forwarded between the UNIs, which may result in a broadcast storm.
You can set the unknown frames to be broadcast.
Table 4-4 Planning information of the E-LAN services carried by ports
Parameter NE1 NE2 NE3
Service ID 1 2 3
Name E-LAN E-LAN E-LAN
Tag Type C-Awared C-Awared C-Awared
Self-Learning MAC
Address
Enabled Enabled Enabled
MAC Address
Learning Mode
IVL IVL IVL
MTU (bytes) 1526 1526 1526

Table 4-5 Planning information of the UNI
Parameter NE1 NE2 NE3
Port 21-PETF8-1 21-PETF8-1 21-PETF8-1
VLAN Value 100,200,300 100,200,300 100,200,300

Table 4-6 Planning information of the NNI
Parameter NE1 NE2 NE3
Port 3-PEG16-1
3-PEG16-2
3-PEG16-1
3-PEG16-2
3-PEG16-1
3-PEG16-2

Table 4-7 Planning information of the QoS
Parameter voice service data service common Internet
access service
CIR(kbit/s) 10000 40000 0
PIR(kbit/s) 10000 40000 100000

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
148
4.3.3 Configuration Process
You can configure the relevant information of the E-LAN services carried by ports according
to the engineering information.
Prerequisites
l You must be familiar with the networking requirements and service planning for the E-
LAN services carried by the ports.
l The port attributes must be set correctly.
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l The QoS policy must be configured according to the E-LAN service planning. For the
configuration method, see Creating the V-UNI Ingress Policy (OptiX OSN 3500/7500/7500
II).
l The E-LAN services carried by ports need to occupy the NNIs exclusively. Hence, you
need to disable the DCN function of the NNIs. If the E-LAN services carried by ports need
to occupy the UNIs exclusively, you also need to disable the DCN function of the UNIs.
For the method of disabling the DCN function of a port, see Configuring the DCN Function
of a Port.
Procedure
Step 1 On NE1, configure the E-LAN services carried by ports.
1. In the NE Explorer, select NE1, and then choose Configuration > Packet
Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function
Tree.
2. Click New. Then, the New E-LAN Service dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters of
the E-LAN services carried by ports.
Table 4-8 Parameters of the E-LAN services carried by ports
Parameter Value in This Example
Service ID 1
Service Name E-LAN
Tag Type C-Awared
Self-Learning MAC Address Enabled
MAC Address Learning Mode IVL
MTU (bytes) 1526

3. Click the UNI tab. Click Configuration. Then, the Configure Port dialog box is displayed.
Set the parameters of the UNIs. After setting the parameters, click OK.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
149
Table 4-9 Parameters of the UNIs
Parameter Value in This Example
Port 21-PETF8-1
VLANs 100,200,300

4. Choose NNI > Port. Click Configuration. Then, the Configure Port dialog box is
displayed. Set the parameters of the NNIs. After setting the parameters, click OK.
Table 4-10 Parameters of the NNIs
Parameter Value in This Example
Port 3-PEG16-1
3-PEG16-2

5. Click the Split Horizon Group tab. Click New. Then, the New Split Horizon Group
dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters of the split horizon group. After setting the
parameters, click OK.
Table 4-11 Parameters of the split horizon group
Parameter Value in This Example
Selected Interfaces 3-PEG16-1
3-PEG16-2

6. Click Configure QoS. Then, the Configure QoS dialog box is displayed.
7. Click the UNI tab. Set the QoS parameters of the E-LAN services carried by ports.
Table 4-12 QoS parameters of the E-LAN services carried by ports
Parameter Value in This Example
Interface 21-PETF8-1 (Port-1)
Direction Ingress
Bandwidth Limit Enabled
Policy Note: The QoS policy that is configured
correctly is selected.
CIR(kbit/s) 50000
PIR(kbit/s) 100000
Other parameters Default values

Step 2 On NE2, configure the E-LAN services carried by ports.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
150
Refer to Step 1 and configure the E-LAN services carried by ports.
Table 4-13 Parameters of the E-LAN services carried by ports
Parameter Value in This Example
Service ID 2
Service Name E-LAN
Tag Type C-Awared
Self-Learning MAC Address Enabled
MAC Address Learning Mode IVL
MTU (bytes) 1526

Table 4-14 Parameters of the UNIs
Parameter Value in This Example
Port 21-PETF8-1
VLANs 100,200,300

Table 4-15 Parameters of the NNIs
Parameter Value in This Example
Port 3-PEG16-1
3-PEG16-2

Table 4-16 Parameters of the split horizon group
Parameter Value in This Example
Selected Interfaces 3-PEG16-1
3-PEG16-2

Table 4-17 QoS parameters of the E-LAN services carried by ports
Parameter Value in This Example
Interface 21-PETF8-1 (Port-1)
Direction Ingress
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
151
Parameter Value in This Example
Bandwidth Limit Enabled
Policy Note: The QoS policy that is configured
correctly is selected.
CIR(kbit/s) 50000
PIR(kbit/s) 100000
Other parameters Default values

Step 3 On NE3, configure the E-LAN services carried by ports.
Refer to Step 1 and configure the E-LAN services carried by ports.
Table 4-18 Parameters of the E-LAN services carried by ports
Parameter Value in This Example
Service ID 3
Service Name E-LAN
Tag Type C-Awared
Self-Learning MAC Address Enabled
MAC Address Learning Mode IVL
MTU (bytes) 1526

Table 4-19 Parameters of the UNIs
Parameter Value in This Example
Port 21-PETF8-1
VLANs 100,200,300

Table 4-20 Parameters of the NNIs
Parameter Value in This Example
Port 3-PEG16-1
3-PEG16-2

Table 4-21 Parameters of the split horizon group
Parameter Value in This Example
Selected Interfaces 3-PEG16-1
3-PEG16-2
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
152

Table 4-22 QoS parameters of the E-LAN services carried by ports
Parameter Value in This Example
Interface 21-PETF8-1 (Port-1)
Direction Ingress
Bandwidth Limit Enabled
Policy Note: The QoS policy that is configured
correctly is selected.
CIR(kbit/s) 50000
PIR(kbit/s) 100000
Other parameters Default values

----End
Relevant Task
See 4.3.4 Verifying the Correctness of E-LAN Service Configuration to check whether the
E-LAN services carried by ports are configured correctly.
4.3.4 Verifying the Correctness of E-LAN Service Configuration
After the data configuration is complete, you need to check whether data configuration is correct
by verifying the configured services.
Prerequisites
The E-LAN services must be already created.
Context
The connectivity check method (by using the 802.1ag OAM function) of the UNI-NNI E-LAN
services carried by ports and QinQ links is the same as the connectivity check method (by using
the 802.1ag OAM function) of the UNI-NNI E-LAN services carried by PWs.
This topic considers the E-LAN services carried by PWs as the example to describe how to check
whether the E-LAN services are configured correctly. Before you perform the check, you need
configure the Ethernet OAM function. See Figure 4-9.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
153
Figure 4-9 OAM of the E-LAN services
NE1
FE
NE2
NE3
CE2
FE
FE
CE1
CE3
PSN
VLAN=100,
200,300
VLAN=100,
200,300
VLAN=100,
200,300
MD 1
MA 1
MEP
MEP
MA: maintenance association
MD: maintenance domain
MEP: maintenance end point
Tunnel
PW

As shown in the figure, the E-LAN services are configured between CE1, CE2, and CE3. The
services are carried and isolated by PWs. To check whether the E-LAN services are configured
correctly, you need to configure the Ethernet OAM function. This topic considers the E-LAN
service between CE1 and CE2 as the example.
Procedure
Step 1 At NE1 and NE2, create the maintenance domain for the E-LAN service between CE1 and CE2.
For the creation method, see Creating an MD.
Set the parameters of the maintenance domain.
Parameter NE1 NE2
Maintenance
Domain Name
MD 1 MD 1
Maintenance
Domain Level
4 4

NOTE
The maintenance domain names and levels of NE1 and NE2 need to be the same so that NE1 and NE2
belong to the same maintenance domain.
Step 2 At NE1 and NE2, create the maintenance association for the E-LAN service between CE1 and
CE2. For the creation method, see Creating an MA.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
154
Set the parameters of the maintenance association.
Parameter NE1 NE2
Maintenance Domain Name MD 1 MD 1
Maintenance Association
Name
MA 1 MA 1
Relevant Service 1-E-Lan-1 1-E-Lan-1
CC Test Transmit Period
(ms)
3.33 ms 3.33 ms

Step 3 At NE1 and NE2, create the MEPs. For the creation method, see Creating an MEP.
Set the parameters of the MEPs.
Parameter NE1 NE2
Maintenance Domain Name MD 1 MD 1
Maintenance Association
Name
MA 1 MA
Board 21-PETF8 21-PETF8
Port 1(Port-1) 1(Port-1)
VLAN 100 100
MP ID 1 2
Direction Ingress Ingress
CC Status Active Active

Step 4 At NE1 and NE2, create the remote MEPs. perform the CC test. For the test method, see
Performing a Continuity Check.
NOTE
l If the MEP of NE2 does not receive the CC packets from NE1 in a period of time (for example, 3.25
times of the transmission period), the MEP automatically reports the ETH_CFM_LOC alarm. If the
ETH_CFM_LOC alarm is not reported, the connectivity of the service from NE1 to NE2 is normal.
l If the MEP of NE1 does not receive the CC packets from NE2 in a period of time (for example, 3.25
times of the transmission period), the MEP automatically reports the ETH_CFM_LOC alarm. If the
ETH_CFM_LOC alarm is not reported, the connectivity of the service from NE2 to NE1 is normal.
----End
4.4 Configuration Example: E-LAN Services Carried by PWs
This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the engineering information and how to
configure the E-LAN services carried by PWs for each NE according to the networking diagram.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
155
4.4.1 Networking Diagram
The networking diagram shows the requirement for the E-LAN services carried by PWs.
On the network as shown in Figure 4-10, the service requirements of each CE are as follows:
l CE1, CE2, and CE3 are connected to NE1, NE2, and NE3 through the 21-PETF8-1 ports
on NE1, NE2, and NE3 respectively.
l Three types of services, which are the voice service (VLAN=100), data service
(VLAN=200), and common Internet access service (VLAN=300) in the descending order
of priority, are configured between the three CE networks.
l The voice service requires a fixed bandwidth, of which the CIR and PIR are 10 Mbit/s.
l The data service requires a fixed bandwidth, of which the CIR and PIR are 40 Mbit/s.
l In the case of the normal Internet access service, the CIR is 0 Mbit/s and the PIR is 100
Mbit/s.
Figure 4-10 Networking diagram of the E-LAN services carried by PWs
NE 1
FE
NE 2
NE 3
CE 2
FE
FE
CE 1
CE 3
PSN
Tunnel
PW
MPLS
Tunnel 1
MPLS Tunnel 3
MPLS Tunnel 2
UNI for CE1: 21-PETF8-1
NNI for CE2: 3-PEG16-1
NNI for CE3: 3-PEG16-2
UNI for CE2: 21-PETF8-1
NNI for CE3: 3-PEG16-1
NNI for CE1: 3-PEG16-2
UNI for CE3: 21-PETF8-1
NNI for CE1: 3-PEG16-1
NNI for CE2: 3-PEG16-2
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
156
NOTE
l This section uses the OptiX OSN 3500 as an example to describe the board layout. The methods of
configuring other products are the same as the method of configuring the OptiX OSN 3500, except that
the board layout may be different. For the slot information, see the Hardware Description of the specific
product.
l On a live data network, an Ethernet service is added to its source NE, passed through on its transit NEs,
and dropped from its sink NE. For details on how to configure transit NEs for an Ethernet service
carried by PWs, see 9.12.2 Configuring Transit NEs for Ethernet Services Carried by PWs.

NE IP Address IP Mask LSR ID
NE1 3-
PEG16-1
18.1.1.1 255.255.255.252 130.0.0.1
3-
PEG16-2
18.1.3.2 255.255.255.252
NE2 3-
PEG16-1
18.1.2.1 255.255.255.252 130.0.0.2
3-
PEG16-2
18.1.1.2 255.255.255.252
NE3 3-
PEG16-1
18.1.3.1 255.255.255.252 130.0.0.3
3-
PEG16-2
18.1.2.2 255.255.255.252

NOTE
l The IP addresses of the Ethernet ports on an NE cannot be in the same network segment.
l The IP addresses of the ports at both ends of a link must be in the same network segment.
4.4.2 Service Planning
The engineering information for configuring the E-LAN services carried by PWs contains the
engineering information for configuring the tunnel carrying the PWs, the engineering
information for configuring the UNIs, the engineering information for configuring the PWs, and
the engineering information for configuring the E-LAN services carried by the PWs.
On the network, the E-LAN services are carried by PWs. Hence, you need to plan the parameters
related to the PWs and the MPLS tunnel.
Planning the E-LAN services carried by PWs involves the following:
l Plan the tunnel that carries the PWs. Refer to Table 4-23.
l Plan the E-LAN services carried by PWs. Refer to Table 4-24.
l Plan the UNI of each NE. Refer to Table 4-25.
l Plan the PW on the NNI of each NE. Refer to Table 4-26.
l Plan the QoS of each NE. Refer to Table 4-27.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
157
NOTE
You can set one split horizon group for each E-LAN service.
You need to configure the NNI of each node with a split horizon group to prevent the data from being
forwarded between the UNIs, which may result in a broadcast storm.
You can set the unknown frames to be broadcast.
Table 4-23 Planning information of the tunnel carrying the PWs
Par
am
eter
NE1 NE2 NE3
Tun
nel
ID
1 2 3 4 2 1 5 6 6 5 4 3
Tun
nel
Na
me
NE1
-
NE2
#1
NE2
-
NE1
#1
NE1
-
NE3
#3
NE3
-
NE1
#3
NE2
-
NE1
#1
NE1
-
NE2
#1
NE2
-
NE3
#2
NE3
-
NE2
#2
NE3
-
NE2
#2
NE2
-
NE3
#2
NE3
-
NE1
#3
NE1
-
NE3
#3
Nod
e
Typ
e
Ingr
ess
Egr
ess
Ingr
ess
Egr
ess
Ingr
ess
Egre
ss
Ingr
ess
Egr
ess
Ingr
ess
Egr
ess
Ingr
ess
Egr
ess
Ban
dwi
dth
(kbi
t/s)
100
Mbi
t/s
- 100
Mbi
t/s
- 100
Mbi
t/s
- 100
Mbi
t/s
- 100
Mbi
t/s
- 100
Mbi
t/s
-
In
Boa
rd/
Log
ic
Inte
rfac
e
Typ
e
- 3-
PE
G16
- 3-
PE
G16
- 3-
PEG
16
- 3-
PE
G16
- 3-
PE
G16
- 3-
PE
G16
In
Port
- 1 - 2 - 2 - 1 - 2 - 1
In
Lab
el
- 17 - 19 - 16 - 21 - 20 - 18
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
158
Par
am
eter
NE1 NE2 NE3
Out
Boa
rd/
Log
ic
Inte
rfac
e
Typ
e
3-
PE
G16
- 3-
PE
G16
- 3-
PE
G16
- 3-
PE
G16
- 3-
PE
G16
- 3-
PE
G16
-
Out
Port
1 - 2 - 2 - 1 - 2 - 1 -
Out
Lab
el
16 - 18 - 17 - 20 - 21 - 19 -
Nex
t
Hop
Add
ress
18.1
.1.2
- 18.1
.3.1
- 18.1
.1.1
- 18.1
.2.2
- 18.1
.2.1
- 18.1
.3.2
-
Sou
rce
Nod
e
- 130.
0.0.
2
- 130.
0.0.
3
- 130.
0.0.
1
- 130.
0.0.
3
-130
.0.0.
18.1
.1.2
- 130.
0.0.
1
Sink
Nod
e
130.
0.0.
2
- 130.
0.0.
3
- 130.
0.0.
1
- 130.
0.0.
3
- 130.
0.0.
2
- 130.
0.0.
1
-

Table 4-24 Planning information of the E-LAN services carried by PWs
Parameter NE1 NE2 NE3
Service ID 1 2 3
Service Name E-LAN-1 E-LAN-2 E-LAN-3
Tag Type C-Awared C-Awared C-Awared
Self-Learning MAC
Address
Enabled Enabled Enabled
MAC Address
Learning Mode
SVL SVL SVL
MTU (bytes) 1526 1526 1526

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
159
Table 4-25 Planning information of the UNIs
Parameter NE1 NE2 NE3
Port 21-PETF8-1 21-PETF8-1 21-PETF8-1
VLAN Value 100,200,300 100,200,300 100,200,300

Table 4-26 Planning information of the PWs
Paramete
r
NE1 NE2 NE3
PW ID 10 11 20 21 30 31
PW
Signaling
Type
Static Static Static Static Static Static
PW Type Ethernet
Tagged
Mode
Ethernet
Tagged
Mode
Ethernet
Tagged
Mode
Ethernet
Tagged
Mode
Ethernet
Tagged
Mode
Ethernet
Tagged
Mode
PW
Direction
Bidirectio
nal
Bidirectio
nal
Bidirectio
nal
Bidirectio
nal
Bidirectio
nal
Bidirectio
nal
PW
Incoming
Label/
Source
Port
20 30 20 40 40 30
PW
Outgoing
Label/
Sink Port
21 31 21 41 41 31
Peer LSR
ID
130.0.0.2 130.0.0.3 130.0.0.1 130.0.0.3 130.0.0.2 130.0.0.1
Tunnel
No.
Tunnel 1 Tunnel 3 Tunnel 1 Tunnel 2 Tunnel 2 Tunnel 3
Request
VLAN
10 30 10 20 20 30

Table 4-27 Planning information of the QoS
Parameter voice service data service common Internet
access service
CIR(kbit/s) 10000 40000 0
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
160
Parameter voice service data service common Internet
access service
PIR(kbit/s) 10000 40000 100000

4.4.3 Configuration Process (in End-to-End Mode)
This section describes how to configure E-LAN services carried by PWs in end-to-end mode.
Prerequisites
l You must be familiar with the networking requirements and service planning for the E-
LAN services carried by the PWs.
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l The tunnels that carry the PWs must be configured on NE1, NE2, and NE3. For the
configuration method, see 9.4 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel.
l The QoS policy must be configured according to the E-LAN service planning. For the
configuration method, see Creating the V-UNI Ingress Policy(OptiX OSN 3500).
l If the E-LAN services carried by PWs need to occupy the UNIs exclusively, disable the
DCN function of the UNIs. For the method of disabling the DCN function of a port, see
Configuring the DCN Function of a Port.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > VPLS Service > Create VPLS Service from the Main Menu.
Step 2 In the Basic Attribute tab, set the parameters of the VPLS services.
Table 4-28 Basic attributes of the VPLS services
Parameter Value in This Example
Service Name E-LAN
Signal Type LDP
Networking Mode Full-Mesh VPLS
Service Type Service VPLS

Step 3 Select the VPLS service nodes.
1. On the right of "Node List", choose Add > NPE. Then, a dialog box is displayed.
2. In Physical Topology, select NE1, NE2, and NE3.
Step 4 Set the parameters of the VPLS service nodes.
1. In "Node List", select an NE. Then, click Detail.
2. Click the VSI Configuration tab and set the relevant parameters of the VPLS service nodes.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
161
Table 4-29 Parameters of the VPLS services
Parameter Value in This Example
MTU 1526
Tag Type C-Awared
MAC Address Learning Enable
Learning Mode Unqualify(SVL)
Enable BPDU Transparent Transmission Not Transparently Transmitted
Other parameters Default values

Step 5 Select the tunnel for carrying the VPLS services.
1. Click the PW Configuration tab and select the PW between NE1 and NE2.
2. Click Modify. In the dialog box that is displayed, set the PW parameters.
3. Refer to steps a and b and set the PW between NE2 and NE3 and the PW between NE1
and NE3.
Table 4-30 PW parameters
Parameter Value in This Example
NE1-NE2 NE2-NE3 NE1-NE3
Genera
l
PW ID 10 21 31
In Label 20 40 30
Out Label 20 40 30
Advanc
ed
In Tunnel Tunnel 1 Tunnel 2 Tunnel 3
Encapsulati
on Type
Ethernet Tagged
Mode
Ethernet Tagged
Mode
Ethernet Tagged
Mode
Request
VLAN ID
10 20 30
Other
parameters
Default values
NOTE
For details on how to configure the TPID, see 9.19 Configuring the NE-
Level TPID.

Step 6 Configure the service access ports.
1. Click the SAI Configuration tab and select NE1 in "Node List".
2. Click Create. In the dialog box that is displayed, set the parameters of the service ports.
3. Refer to steps a and b and set the service access ports on NE2 and NE3.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
162
Table 4-31 Parameters of the service ports
Parame
ter
Value in This Example
NE1 NE2 NE3
Interface 21-PETF8-1 21-PETF8-1 21-PETF8-1
VLAN
ID
100,200,300 100,200,300 100,200,300

Step 7 Configure QoS.
1. Click the SAI QoS tab.
2. Select the ports for which you need to configure QoS and then set the QoS parameters.
Table 4-32 Parameters of the service ports
Parameter Value in This Example
NE1 NE2 NE3
Interface 21-PETF8-1 21-PETF8-1 21-PETF8-1
Direction Ingress Ingress Ingress
Global QoS
Policy Template
Note: Select the global QoS policy template that is already configured.
Bandwidth Limit Enable Enable Enable
CIR(kbit/s) 50000 50000 50000
PIR(kbit/s) 100000 100000 100000

----End
Relevant Task
See 3.4.4 Verifying the Correctness of E-Line Service Configuration to check whether the
services are configured correctly.
4.4.4 Configuration Process (Configuration on a Per-NE Basis)
You can configure the relevant information of the E-LAN services carried by PWs according to
the engineering information.
Prerequisites
l You must be familiar with the networking requirements and service planning for the E-
LAN services carried by the PWs.
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
163
l The tunnels that carry the PWs must be configured on NE1, NE2, and NE3. For the
configuration method, see 9.4 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel.
l The QoS policy must be configured according to the E-LAN service planning. For the
configuration method, see Creating the V-UNI Ingress Policy(OptiX OSN 3500).
l If the E-LAN services carried by PWs need to occupy the UNIs exclusively, disable the
DCN function of the UNIs. For the method of disabling the DCN function of a port, see
Configuring the DCN Function of a Port.
Procedure
Step 1 On NE1, configure the E-LAN services carried by PWs.
1. In the NE Explorer, select NE1, and then choose Configuration > Packet
Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function
Tree.
2. Click New. Then, the New E-LAN Service dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters of
the E-LAN services carried by PWs.
Table 4-33 Parameters of the E-LAN services carried by PWs
Parameter Value in This Example
Service ID 1
Service Name E-LAN-1
Tag Type C-Awared
Self-Learning MAC Address Enabled
MAC Address Learning Mode SVL
MTU (bytes) 1526
Protection Type Unprotected
MAC Address Withdrawal Disabled

3. Click the UNI tab. Click Configuration. Then, the Configure Port dialog box is displayed.
Set the parameters of the UNIs. After setting the parameters, click OK.
Table 4-34 Parameters of the UNIs
Parameter Value in This Example
Port 21-PETF8-1
VLANs 100,200,300

4. Choose NNI > Port. Click New. Then, the Configure PW dialog box is displayed. Set the
parameters of the PWs. After setting the parameters, click OK.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
164
Table 4-35 Parameters of the PWs
Parameter Value in This Example
General Attributes PW ID 10 11
PW Signaling Type Static Static
PW Type Ethernet Tagged
Mode
Ethernet Tagged
Mode
PW Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional
PW Incoming
Label/Source Port
20 30
PW Outgoing
Label/Sink Port
20 30
Tunnel Type MPLS MPLS
Tunnel No. NE1-NE2#1 NE1-NE3#3
Peer LSR ID 130.0.0.2 130.0.0.3
Advanced
Attributes
Request VLAN 10 30
Other parameters Default values Default values
NOTE
For details on how to configure the TPID, see 9.19 Configuring the NE-
Level TPID.

5. Click the Split Horizon Group tab. Click New. Then, the New Split Horizon Group
dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters of the split horizon group. After setting the
parameters, click OK.
Table 4-36 Parameters of the split horizon group
Parameter Value in This Example
Selected Interfaces PW (Ethernet Tagged Mode, 10)
PW (Ethernet Tagged Mode, 11)

6. Click Configure QoS. Then, the Configure QoS dialog box is displayed.
7. Click the UNI tab. Set the QoS parameters of the E-LAN services carried by PWs.
Table 4-37 QoS parameters of the E-LAN services carried by PWs
Parameter Value in This Example
Interface 21-PETF8-1 (Port-1)
Direction Ingress
Bandwidth Limit Enabled
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
165
Parameter Value in This Example
Policy Note: The QoS policy that is configured
correctly is selected.
CIR(kbit/s) 50000
PIR(kbit/s) 100000
Other parameters Default values

Step 2 On NE2, configure the E-LAN services carried by PWs.
Refer to Step 1 and configure the E-LAN services carried by PWs.
Table 4-38 Parameters of the E-LAN services carried by PWs
Parameter Value in This Example
Service ID 2
Service Name E-LAN-2
Tag Type C-Awared
Self-Learning MAC Address Enabled
MAC Address Learning Mode SVL
MTU (bytes) 1526
Protection Type Unprotected
MAC Address Withdrawal Disabled

Table 4-39 Parameters of the UNIs
Parameter Value in This Example
Port 21-PETF8-1
VLANs 100,200,300

Table 4-40 Parameters of the PWs
Parameter Value in This Example
General Attributes PW ID 20 21
PW Signaling Type Static Static
PW Type Ethernet Tagged
Mode
Ethernet Tagged
Mode
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
166
Parameter Value in This Example
PW Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional
PW Incoming Label/
Source Port
20 40
PW Outgoing Label/
Sink Port
20 40
Tunnel Type MPLS MPLS
Tunnel No. NE2-NE1#1 NE2-NE3#2
Peer LSR ID 130.0.0.1 130.0.0.3
Advanced Attributes Request VLAN 10 20
Other parameters Default values Default values
NOTE
For details on how to configure the TPID, see 9.19 Configuring the NE-Level
TPID.

Table 4-41 Parameters of the split horizon group
Parameter Value in This Example
Selected Interfaces PW (Ethernet Tagged Mode, 20)
PW (Ethernet Tagged Mode, 21)

Table 4-42 QoS parameters of the E-LAN services carried by PWs
Parameter Value in This Example
Interface 21-PETF8-1 (Port-1)
Direction Ingress
Bandwidth Limit Enabled
Policy Note: The QoS policy that is configured
correctly is selected.
CIR(kbit/s) 50000
PIR(kbit/s) 100000
Other parameters Default values

Step 3 On NE3, configure the E-LAN services carried by PWs.
Refer to Step 1 and configure the E-LAN services carried by PWs.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
167
Table 4-43 Parameters of the E-LAN services carried by PWs
Parameter Value in This Example
Service ID 3
Service Name E-LAN-3
Tag Type C-Awared
Self-Learning MAC Address Enabled
MAC Address Learning Mode SVL
MTU (bytes) 1526

Table 4-44 Parameters of the UNIs
Parameter Value in This Example
Port 21-PETF8-1
VLANs 100,200,300

Table 4-45 Parameters of the PWs
Parameter Value in This Example
General Attributes PW ID 30 31
PW Signaling Type Static Static
PW Type Ethernet Tagged
Mode
Ethernet Tagged
Mode
PW Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional
PW Incoming Label/
Source Port
40 30
PW Outgoing Label/
Sink Port
40 30
Tunnel Type MPLS MPLS
Tunnel No. NE3-NE2#2 NE3-NE1#3
Peer LSR ID 130.0.0.2 130.0.0.1
Advanced Attributes Request VLAN 20 30
Other parameters Default values Default values
NOTE
For details on how to configure the TPID, see 9.19 Configuring the NE-Level
TPID.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
168

Table 4-46 Parameters of the split horizon group
Parameter Value in This Example
Selected Interfaces PW (Ethernet Tagged Mode, 30)
PW (Ethernet Tagged Mode, 31)

Table 4-47 QoS parameters of the E-LAN services carried by PWs
Parameter Value in This Example
Interface 21-PETF8-1 (Port-1)
Direction Ingress
Bandwidth Limit Enabled
Policy Note: The QoS policy that is configured
correctly is selected.
CIR(kbit/s) 50000
PIR(kbit/s) 100000
Other parameters Default values

----End
Relevant Task
If you configure PW-carried E-LAN services on a per-NE basis, see 9.16.1 Searching for PWE3
Services and convert discrete Ethernet services to complete Ethernet services.
See 4.4.5 Verifying the E-LAN Service Configuration to check whether the E-LAN services
carried by PWs are configured correctly.
4.4.5 Verifying the E-LAN Service Configuration
After the data configuration is complete, you need to check whether data configuration is correct
by verifying the configured services.
Prerequisites
l End-to-end PW-carried E-LAN services have been configured.
l If you configure PW-carried E-LAN services on a per-NE basis, see 9.16.1 Searching for
PWE3 Services and convert discrete Ethernet services to complete Ethernet services.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > VPLS Service > Manage VPLS Service from the Main Menu.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
169
Step 2 In the dialog box that is displayed, set filter conditions; for example, set Service Type to Service
VPLS. Then, click Filter. Query all E-LAN services that meet the filter conditions.
Step 3 Right-click the required PW-carried E-Line service and choose Ethernet OAM > LB Test from
the shortcut menu.
Step 4 In the dialog box that is displayed, set filter conditions and click Filter.
Step 5 In the dialog box that is displayed, select the source NE and sink NE, and click Run.
Step 6 After the test is complete, click the LB Statistic Information tab to check whether the service
is available.
NOTE
If the number of received packets and the number of transmitted packets are the same, the service is
available. If testing packet loss fails, troubleshoot it by referring to Troubleshooting Service Packet Loss.
----End
4.5 Configuration Example: E-LAN Services Carried by
QinQ links
This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the engineering information and how to
configure the E-LAN services carried by QinQ links for each NE according to the networking
diagram.
4.5.1 Networking Diagram
The networking diagram shows the requirement for the E-LAN services carried by QinQ links.
On the network as shown in Figure 4-11, the service requirements of each CE are as follows:
l CE1, CE2, and CE3 are connected to NE1, NE2, and NE3 through the 21-PETF8-1 ports
on NE1, NE2, and NE3 respectively.
l The three CE networks can communicate with each other. The VLAN ID of the three CE
networks is 100.
l Three types of services, which are the voice service (VLAN=100), data service
(VLAN=200), and common Internet access service (VLAN=300) in the descending order
of priority, are configured between the three CE networks.
l The voice service requires a fixed bandwidth, of which the CIR and PIR are 10 Mbit/s.
l The data service requires a fixed bandwidth, of which the CIR and PIR are 40 Mbit/s.
l In the case of the normal Internet access service, the CIR is 0 Mbit/s and the PIR is 100
Mbit/s.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
170
Figure 4-11 Networking diagram of the E-LAN services carried by QinQ links
NE1
FE
NE2
NE3
CE2
FE
FE
CE1
CE 3
PSN
PE
C-VLAN
S-VLAN
S-VLAN
QinQ link
UNI for CE1: 21-PETF8-1
NNI for CE2: 3-PEG16-1
NNI for CE3: 3-PEG16-2
UNI for CE2: 21-PETF8-1
NNI for CE3: 3-PEG16-1
NNI for CE1: 3-PEG16-2
UNI for CE3: 21-PETF8-1
NNI for CE1: 3-PEG16-1
NNI for CE2: 3-PEG16-2
NOTE
l This section uses the OptiX OSN 3500 as an example to describe the board layout. The methods of
configuring other products are the same as the method of configuring the OptiX OSN 3500, except that
the board layout may be different. For the slot information, see the Hardware Description of the specific
product.
l On a live data network, an Ethernet service is added to its source NE, passed through on its transit NEs,
and dropped from its sink NE. For details on how to configure transit NEs for an Ethernet service
carried by QinQ links, see 9.12.3 Configuring Transit NEs for Ethernet Services Carried by QinQ
Links.

4.5.2 Service Planning
The engineering information for configuring the E-LAN services carried by QinQ links contains
the engineering information for configuring the QinQ links carrying the E-LAN services, the
engineering information for configuring the UNIs, and the engineering information for
configuring the E-LAN services carried by the QinQ links.
On the network, the E-LAN services are carried by QinQ links. Hence, you need to plan the
parameters related to the ports.
Planning the E-LAN services carried by QinQ links involves the following:
l Plan the QinQ links that carry the E-LAN services. Refer to Table 4-48.
l Plan the E-LAN services carried by QinQ links. Refer to Table 4-49.
l Plan the UNI of each NE. Refer to Table 4-50.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
171
l Plan the NNI of each NE. Refer to Table 4-51.
l Plan the QoS of each NE. Refer to Table 4-52.
NOTE
You can set one split horizon group for each E-LAN service.
You need to configure the NNI of each node with a split horizon group to prevent the data from being
forwarded between the UNIs, which may result in a broadcast storm.
You can set the unknown frames to be broadcast.
Table 4-48 Planning information of the QinQ links carrying the services
Parameter NE1-NE2 NE2-NE3 NE3-NE1
QinQ Link ID 1 2 3
Board 3-PEG16 3-PEG16 3-PEG16
Port 1(NE1)
2(NE2)
1(NE2)
2(NE3)
1(NE3)
2(NE1)
S-Vlan ID 10 20 30

Table 4-49 Planning information of the E-LAN services carried by the QinQ links
Parameter NE1 NE2 NE3
Service ID 1 2 3
Service Name E-LAN-1 E-LAN-2 E-LAN-3
Tag Type C-Awared C-Awared C-Awared
Self-Learning MAC
Address
Enabled Enabled Enabled
MAC Address
Learning Mode
IVL IVL IVL
MTU (bytes) 1526 1526 1526

Table 4-50 Planning information of the UNIs
Parameter NE1 NE2 NE3
Port 21-PETF8-1 21-PETF8-1 21-PETF8-1
VLAN Value 100,200,300 100,200,300 100,200,300

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
172
Table 4-51 Planning information of the NNIs
Parameter NE 1 NE 2 NE 3
QinQ Link ID 1,3 1,2 2,3

Table 4-52 Planning information of the QoS
Parameter voice service data service common Internet
access service
CIR(kbit/s) 10000 40000 0
PIR(kbit/s) 10000 40000 100000

4.5.3 Configuration Process
You can configure the relevant information of the E-LAN services carried by QinQ links
according to the engineering information.
Prerequisites
l You must be familiar with the networking requirements and service planning for the E-
LAN services carried by the QinQ links.
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l The QoS policy must be configured according to the E-LAN service planning. For the
configuration method, see Creating the V-UNI Ingress Policy (OptiX OSN 3500/7500/7500
II).
l The QinQ links must be configured on NE1, NE2, and NE3. For the configuration method,
see 9.20 Creating a QinQ Link.
Procedure
Step 1 On NE1, configure the E-LAN services carried by QinQ links.
1. In the NE Explorer, select NE1, and then choose Configuration > Packet
Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function
Tree.
2. Click New. Then, the New E-LAN Service dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters of
the E-LAN services carried by QinQ links.
Table 4-53 Parameters of the E-LAN services carried by QinQ links
Parameter Value in This Example
Service ID 1
Service Name E-LAN-1
Tag Type C-Awared
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
173
Parameter Value in This Example
Self-Learning MAC Address Enabled
MAC Address Learning Mode IVL
MTU (bytes) 1526

3. Click the UNI tab. Click Configuration. Then, the Configure Port dialog box is displayed.
Set the parameters of the UNIs. After setting the parameters, click OK.
Table 4-54 Parameters of the UNIs
Parameter Value in This Example
Port 21-PETF8-1
VLANs 100,200,300

4. Choose NNI > QinQ Link. Click Add. Then, the QinQ Link Management dialog box is
displayed. Select the QinQ link according to the planning information. Then, click OK.
Table 4-55 Parameters of the QinQ link
Parameter Value in This Example
QinQ Link ID 1, 3

5. Click the Split Horizon Group tab. Click New. Then, the New Split Horizon Group
dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters of the split horizon group. After setting the
parameters, click OK.
Table 4-56 Parameters of the split horizon group
Parameter Value in This Example
Selected Interfaces QinQ Link-1
QinQ Link-3

6. Click Configure QoS. Then, the Configure QoS dialog box is displayed.
7. Click the UNI tab. Set the QoS parameters of the E-LAN services carried by QinQ links.
Table 4-57 QoS parameters of the E-LAN services carried by QinQ links
Parameter Value in This Example
Interface 21-PETF8-1 (Port-1)
Direction Ingress
Bandwidth Limit Enabled
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
174
Parameter Value in This Example
Policy Note: The QoS policy that is configured
correctly is selected.
CIR(kbit/s) 50000
PIR(kbit/s) 100000
Other parameters Default values

Step 2 On NE2, configure the E-LAN services carried by QinQ links.
Refer to Step 1 and configure the E-LAN services carried by QinQ links.
Table 4-58 Parameters of the E-LAN services carried by QinQ links
Parameter Value in This Example
Service ID 2
Service Name E-LAN-2
Tag Type C-Awared
Self-Learning MAC Address Enabled
MAC Address Learning Mode IVL
MTU (bytes) 1526

Table 4-59 Parameters of the UNIs
Parameter Value in This Example
Port 21-PETF8-1
VLANs 100,200,300

Table 4-60 Parameters of the QinQ link
Parameter Value in This Example
QinQ Link ID 1, 2

Table 4-61 Parameters of the split horizon group
Parameter Value in This Example
Selected Interfaces QinQ Link-1
QinQ Link-2
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
175

Table 4-62 QoS parameters of the E-LAN services carried by QinQ links
Parameter Value in This Example
Interface 21-PETF8-1 (Port-1)
Direction Ingress
Bandwidth Limit Enabled
Policy Note: The QoS policy that is configured
correctly is selected.
CIR(kbit/s) 50000
PIR(kbit/s) 100000
Other parameters Default values

Step 3 On NE3, configure the E-LAN services carried by PWs.
Refer to Step 1 and configure the E-LAN services carried by QinQ links.
Table 4-63 Parameters of the E-LAN services carried by QinQ links
Parameter Value in This Example
Service ID 3
Service Name E-LAN-3
Tag Type C-Awared
Self-Learning MAC Address Enabled
MAC Address Learning Mode IVL
MTU (bytes) 1526

Table 4-64 Parameters of the UNIs
Parameter Value in This Example
Port 21-PETF8-1
VLANs 100,200,300

Table 4-65 Parameters of the QinQ link
Parameter Value in This Example
QinQ Link ID 2, 3
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
176

Table 4-66 Parameters of the split horizon group
Parameter Value in This Example
Selected Interfaces QinQ Link-2
QinQ Link-3

Table 4-67 QoS parameters of the E-LAN services carried by QinQ links
Parameter Value in This Example
Interface 21-PETF8-1 (Port-1)
Direction Ingress
Bandwidth Limit Enabled
Policy Note: The QoS policy that is configured
correctly is selected.
CIR(kbit/s) 50000
PIR(kbit/s) 100000
Other parameters Default values

----End
Relevant Task
See 4.5.4 Verifying the Correctness of E-LAN Service Configuration to check whether the
E-LAN services carried by QinQ links are configured correctly.
4.5.4 Verifying the Correctness of E-LAN Service Configuration
After the data configuration is complete, you need to check whether data configuration is correct
by verifying the configured services.
Prerequisites
The E-LAN services must be already created.
Context
The connectivity check method (by using the 802.1ag OAM function) of the UNI-NNI E-LAN
services carried by ports and QinQ links is the same as the connectivity check method (by using
the 802.1ag OAM function) of the UNI-NNI E-LAN services carried by PWs.
This topic considers the E-LAN services carried by PWs as the example to describe how to check
whether the E-LAN services are configured correctly. Before you perform the check, you need
configure the Ethernet OAM function. See Figure 4-12.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
177
Figure 4-12 OAM of the E-LAN services
NE1
FE
NE2
NE3
CE2
FE
FE
CE1
CE3
PSN
VLAN=100,
200,300
VLAN=100,
200,300
VLAN=100,
200,300
MD 1
MA 1
MEP
MEP
MA: maintenance association
MD: maintenance domain
MEP: maintenance end point
Tunnel
PW

As shown in the figure, the E-LAN services are configured between CE1, CE2, and CE3. The
services are carried and isolated by PWs. To check whether the E-LAN services are configured
correctly, you need to configure the Ethernet OAM function. This topic considers the E-LAN
service between CE1 and CE2 as the example.
Procedure
Step 1 At NE1 and NE2, create the maintenance domain for the E-LAN service between CE1 and CE2.
For the creation method, see Creating an MD.
Set the parameters of the maintenance domain.
Parameter NE1 NE2
Maintenance
Domain Name
MD 1 MD 1
Maintenance
Domain Level
4 4

NOTE
The maintenance domain names and levels of NE1 and NE2 need to be the same so that NE1 and NE2
belong to the same maintenance domain.
Step 2 At NE1 and NE2, create the maintenance association for the E-LAN service between CE1 and
CE2. For the creation method, see Creating an MA.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
178
Set the parameters of the maintenance association.
Parameter NE1 NE2
Maintenance Domain Name MD 1 MD 1
Maintenance Association
Name
MA 1 MA 1
Relevant Service 1-E-Lan-1 1-E-Lan-1
CC Test Transmit Period
(ms)
3.33 ms 3.33 ms

Step 3 At NE1 and NE2, create the MEPs. For the creation method, see Creating an MEP.
Set the parameters of the MEPs.
Parameter NE1 NE2
Maintenance Domain Name MD 1 MD 1
Maintenance Association
Name
MA 1 MA
Board 21-PETF8 21-PETF8
Port 1(Port-1) 1(Port-1)
VLAN 100 100
MP ID 1 2
Direction Ingress Ingress
CC Status Active Active

Step 4 At NE1 and NE2, create the remote MEPs. perform the CC test. For the test method, see
Performing a Continuity Check.
NOTE
l If the MEP of NE2 does not receive the CC packets from NE1 in a period of time (for example, 3.25
times of the transmission period), the MEP automatically reports the ETH_CFM_LOC alarm. If the
ETH_CFM_LOC alarm is not reported, the connectivity of the service from NE1 to NE2 is normal.
l If the MEP of NE1 does not receive the CC packets from NE2 in a period of time (for example, 3.25
times of the transmission period), the MEP automatically reports the ETH_CFM_LOC alarm. If the
ETH_CFM_LOC alarm is not reported, the connectivity of the service from NE2 to NE1 is normal.
----End
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 4 Configuring E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
179
5 Configuring E-AGGR Services
About This Chapter
You can configure E-AGGR services to realize the multipoint-to-point service aggregation.
5.1 Basic Concepts
Learning about the basic concepts helps to further understand E-AGGR services.
5.2 Configuration Flow for the E-AGGR Services
The flowchart for configuring an E-AGGR service differs according to the type of the E-AGGR
service.
5.3 Configuration Example: E-AGGR Services Carried by Ports
This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the engineering information and how to
configure the E-AGGR services carried by ports for each NE according to the networking
diagram.
5.4 Configuration Example: E-AGGR Services Carried by PWs
This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the engineering information and how to
configure the E-AGGR services carried by PWs for each NE according to the networking
diagram.
5.5 Verifying the Correctness of E-AGGR Service Configuration
After the data configuration is complete, you need to check whether data configuration is correct
by verifying the configured services.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 5 Configuring E-AGGR Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
180
5.1 Basic Concepts
Learning about the basic concepts helps to further understand E-AGGR services.
5.1.1 E-AGGR Services
As shown in the networking topology, the E-AGGR services are multipoint-to-point services.
The equipment aggregates Ethernet services accessed by multiple UNIs to the same UNI or to
the same NNI of which the Ethernet services are carried by ports or PWs, or aggregates the
Ethernet services that are carried by ports or PWs of multiple NNIs to the same UNI.
According to the service transmission mode on the network side, the E-AGGR services can be
classified into the following types:
l E-AGGR services carried by ports
l E-AGGR services carried by PWs
E-AGGR Services Carried by Ports
Figure 5-1 shows the networking diagram of the E-AGGR services carried by ports.
An operator constructs a 3G network. On the 3G network, the services of each node need to be
aggregated and then transmitted to the RNC. The services that are transmitted from a NodeB
are accessed to any other node through the UNI. On the network side, you need to configure the
services to be carried by ports, thus realizing the aggregation and transmission of the Ethernet
services from the user side.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 5 Configuring E-AGGR Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
181
Figure 5-1 E-AGGR services carried by ports
RNC
NE1
FE
GE
FE
FE
FE
NodeB
NE2
NE3
UNI
NNI
UNI
UNI
PSN

E-AGGR Services Carried by PWs
Figure 5-2 shows the networking diagram of the E-AGGR services carried by PWs.
An operator constructs a 3G network. On the 3G network, the services of each node need to be
aggregated and then transmitted to the RNC. The services that are transmitted from a NodeB
are accessed to any other node through the UNI. On the network side, you need to configure the
services to be carried by PWs, thus aggregating the Ethernet services from the user side to the
PWs on the network side. On the node that is connected to the RNC, the tunnels that carry
different services are aggregated again and then transmitted to the RNC.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 5 Configuring E-AGGR Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
182
Figure 5-2 E-AGGR services carried by PWs
RNC
NE1
FE
GE
FE
FE
FE
NodeB
NE2
NE3
PSN
Tunnel
PW

5.1.2 UNI
A UNI refers to the Ethernet port that is connected to the user equipment. A UNI is used for the
user-side configuration of an Ethernet service.
V-UNI
A V-UNI is a virtual user-network interface. Each service on a UNI corresponds to a logical V-
UNI.
A UNI can receive multiple services. That is, a UNI may correspond to multiple V-UNIs.
V-UNI Group
A V-UNI group contains multiple V-UNIs, and limits the total bandwidth of the Ethernet services
received on the member V-UNIs.
For a user or an Ethernet service that has multiple access points, you can add the access points
to a V-UNI group and set a total bandwidth for the V-UNI group. Bandwidth parameters include
committed information rate (CIR), maximum burst size, peak bandwidth, and committed burst
size.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 5 Configuring E-AGGR Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
183
V-UNIs in a V-UNI group share the total bandwidth but their bandwidths are limited by the total
bandwidth. To be specific, when the bandwidth of member A does not reach the CIR, member
B can use the remaining bandwidth; when the bandwidths of member A and member B do not
reach the CIR but their sum exceeds the total bandwidth of the V-UNI group, member A and
member B pre-empt the bandwidth based on service priorities.
Multiple V-UNIs on a board can be added to a V-UNI group.
V-UNIs in a V-UNI group can be changed/deleted at any time, and values of bandwidth
parameters can also be modified at any time.
5.1.3 NNI
An NNI refers to the Ethernet port that is connected to the packet transport network. An NNI is
used for the network-side configuration of an Ethernet service.
Based on the modes of carrying services, NNIs can be classified into three types, namely, NNIs
carrying services by ports, NNIs carrying services by PWs, and NNIs carrying services by QinQ
links.
Ethernet Services Carried by Ports
In the case of the NNIs that carry Ethernet services by ports, the encapsulation type can be 802.1Q
or QinQ. In this case, the NNIs that an Ethernet service traverses are exclusively occupied. The
other physical ports that the Ethernet service traverses may be shared.
Ethernet Services Carried by PWs
In the case of the NNIs that carry Ethernet services by PWs, you need to create static MPLS
tunnels for the NNIs. To create the Ethernet services carried by PWs, you need to create the PWs
first. In this case, different Ethernet services can be encapsulated into different PWs and
transmitted in a tunnel to the same NNI. Therefore, the occupied NNIs are reduced and the
bandwidth utilization is improved.
Ethernet Services Carried by QinQ Links
In the case of the NNIs that carry Ethernet services by QinQ links, you need to create QinQ links
for the NNIs. The port attribute and the encapsulation mode of the NNIs corresponding to the
QinQ links are Layer 2 and QinQ, respectively. On a QinQ link, the packets that are accessed
are encapsulated with one layer of VLAN tags in QinQ encapsulation mode at the access ports.
In this manner, multiple packets with different VLAN tags from the user-side network can be
encapsulated into the same VLAN for transport. Therefore, the occupied VLAN resources on
the transport network are reduced. E-Line services and E-LAN services can be carried by the
QinQ link on the network side. In this case, the packets of different companies that are accessed
on the user side are added with different VLAN tags and then are transmitted by the same QinQ
link on the network side.
5.2 Configuration Flow for the E-AGGR Services
The flowchart for configuring an E-AGGR service differs according to the type of the E-AGGR
service.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 5 Configuring E-AGGR Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
184
5.2.1 E-AGGR Services Carried by Ports
You need to configure the NNI to ensure the normal transmission of the E-AGGR services carried
by ports.
Table 5-1 provides the process for configuring the E-AGGR services carried by ports.
Figure 5-3 Configuration flow for the E-AGGR services carried by ports
Configure the UNI
Configure the QoS
Configuring the DCN
Function of a Port
Start
Required
Optional
End
Create the V-UNI
group
Configure the NNI for
the services carried
by port
Create the E-AGGR
services carried by
ports

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 5 Configuring E-AGGR Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
185
Table 5-1 Configuration flow for the E-AGGR services carried by ports
Step Operation Remarks
1 Configuring the UNI
(when the UNI is an
Ethernet port)
9.1.1 Setting the
General Attributes
of Ethernet
Interfaces
The parameters are
set as follows:
l Enable Port is
set to Enabled.
l Port Mode is set
to Layer 2.
l Generally,
Encapsulation
Type is set to
802.1Q. When
the packets do not
need to be
distinguished
according to the
VLAN tags,
Encapsulation
Type is set to
Null.
l Working Mode
of the UNI needs
to be the same as
the working
mode of the
Ethernet
equipment on the
opposite end.
Generally, this
parameter takes
the default value
Auto-
Negotiation.
l When JUMBO
frames need not
be transmitted,
Max Frame
Length(byte)
takes the default
value 1620. In
other cases, Max
Frame Length
(byte) is set to the
maximum length
of the transmitted
JUMBO frames.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 5 Configuring E-AGGR Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
186
Step Operation Remarks
9.1.2 Setting the
Layer 2 Attributes
of Ethernet Ports
(Optional) The
parameters are set as
follows:
l Tag needs to be
set according to
the type of the
packets that are
transmitted from
the equipment on
the opposite end.
If all the packets
are untagged
packets, Tag is
set to Access. If
all the packets are
tagged packets,
Tag is set to Tag
Aware. If the
packets contain
untagged packets
and tagged
packets, Tag is
set to Hybrid.
l When Tag is set
to Access or
Hybrid, the
Default VLAN
ID and VLAN
Priority
parameters need
to be set for the
untagged frames.
VLAN Priority
needs to be set
according to the
planned QoS.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 5 Configuring E-AGGR Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
187
Step Operation Remarks
9.1.5 Configuring
the Flow Control
(Optional) The
parameters are set as
follows:
l Generally, the
PSN adopts the
QoS scheme to
prevent link
congestion.
Hence, Auto-
Negotiation
Flow Control
Mode and Non-
Autonegotiation
Flow Control
Mode need to be
set to the default
value Disabled,
unless otherwise
specified.
2 Configuring the DCN Function of a Port (Required) The E-
AGGR services
carried by ports
occupy the NNIs
exclusively. Hence,
you need to set
Enable State of the
NNIs to Disabled.
(Optional) This
operation is valid
only when the UNI is
an Ethernet port. The
UNI is connected to
the external
equipment and thus
does not need to
transmit the in-band
DCN information.
Hence, set Enable
State of the UNIs to
Disabled.
3 9.3.1 Configuring the NNIs for Ethernet
Services Carried by Ports
(Required) The
parameters need to
be set according to
the service planning.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 5 Configuring E-AGGR Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
188
Step Operation Remarks
4 Configuring the HQoS (Optional) The
parameters need to
be set according to
the service QoS
planning.
5 9.11.1 Configuring E-AGGR Services
Carried by Ports
The parameters need
to be set according to
the service planning.
7 9.21 Creating a V-UNI Group (Optional) The
parameters need to
be set according to
the service planning.

5.2.2 E-AGGR Services Carried by PWs
You need to configure the MPLS tunnel before configuring the E-AGGR services carried by
PWs.
Table 5-2 provides the process for configuring the E-AGGR services carried by PWs.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 5 Configuring E-AGGR Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
189
Figure 5-4 Configuration flow for the E-AGGR services carried by the MPLS tunnel
Configure the UNI
Configure the QoS
Configuring the DCN
Function of a Port
Start
Required
Optional
End
Create the V-UNI
group
Configure the MPLS
tunnel
Configure the NNI
for the services
carried by static
MPLS tunne
Create the E-AGGR
services carried by
PWs

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 5 Configuring E-AGGR Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
190
Table 5-2 Configuration flow for the E-AGGR services carried by the MPLS tunnel
Step Operation Remarks
1 Configuring the UNI
(when the UNI is an
Ethernet port)
9.1.1 Setting the
General Attributes
of Ethernet
Interfaces
The parameters are
set as follows:
l Enable Port is
set to Enabled.
l Port Mode is set
to Layer 2.
l Generally,
Encapsulation
Type is set to
802.1Q. When
the packets do not
need to be
distinguished
according to the
VLAN tags,
Encapsulation
Type is set to
Null.
l Working Mode
of the UNI needs
to be the same as
the working
mode of the
Ethernet
equipment on the
opposite end.
Generally, this
parameter takes
the default value
Auto-
Negotiation.
l When JUMBO
frames need not
be transmitted,
Max Frame
Length(byte)
takes the default
value 1620. In
other cases, Max
Frame Length
(byte) is set to the
maximum length
of the transmitted
JUMBO frames.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 5 Configuring E-AGGR Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
191
Step Operation Remarks
9.1.2 Setting the
Layer 2 Attributes
of Ethernet Ports
(Optional) The
parameters are set as
follows:
l Tag needs to be
set according to
the type of the
packets that are
transmitted from
the equipment on
the opposite end.
If all the packets
are untagged
packets, Tag is
set to Access. If
all the packets are
tagged packets,
Tag is set to Tag
Aware. If the
packets contain
untagged packets
and tagged
packets, Tag is
set to Hybrid.
l When Tag is set
to Access or
Hybrid, the
Default VLAN
ID and VLAN
Priority
parameters need
to be set for the
untagged frames.
VLAN Priority
needs to be set
according to the
planned QoS.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 5 Configuring E-AGGR Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
192
Step Operation Remarks
9.1.5 Configuring
the Flow Control
(Optional) The
parameters are set as
follows:
l Generally, the
PSN adopts the
QoS scheme to
prevent link
congestion.
Hence, Auto-
Negotiation
Flow Control
Mode and Non-
Autonegotiation
Flow Control
Mode need to be
set to the default
value Disabled,
unless otherwise
specified.
2 Configuring the DCN Function of a Port (Optional) This
operation is
applicable only when
the UNI is an
Ethernet port. The
parameters are set as
follows:
l The UNI is used
for connecting the
external
equipment and
need not transmit
in-band DCN
information.
Hence, Enable
Port needs to be
set to Disabled
for the UNI.
3 9.3.2 Configuring the NNIs for Ethernet
Services Carried by Static MPLS Tunnels
(Required) Set the
parameters as
follows:
l Set Port Mode to
Layer 3.
l Set Enable
Tunnel to
Enabled.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 5 Configuring E-AGGR Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
193
Step Operation Remarks
4 Configuring the
MPLS tunnel
9.4 Configuring an
MPLS Tunnel
(Required) The
parameters need to
be set according to
the service planning
information. For
details on how to
manage MPLS
tunnels, see 9.5
Managing MPLS
Tunnels.
9.6 Configuring
MPLS OAM
(Optional) The
parameters are set as
follows:
l OAM Status is
set to Enabled.
l Detection Mode
is set to Manual.
l Detection
Packet Type is
set to FFD.
l Detection
Packet Period
(ms) is set to 3.3.
9.7 Configuring
MPLS Tunnel APS
(Optional) Set the
MPLS tunnel APS
parameters
according to the
service planning
information. For
details on how to
manage MPLS
tunnel APS
protection groups,
see 9.8 Managing
MPLS Tunnel APS
Protection Groups.
5 Configuring the HQoS (Optional) The
parameters need to
be set according to
the service QoS
planning.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 5 Configuring E-AGGR Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
194
Step Operation Remarks
6 9.11.2 Creating E-AGGR Services Carried
by PWs on a Per-NE Basis
(Required) The
parameters need to
be set according to
the service planning
information. For
details on how to
manage Ethernet
services carried by
PWs, see 9.16
Managing PWE3
Services.
NOTE
You can selectively
configure MPLS PW
APS according to the
service planning
information. MPLS
tunnel APS and
MPLS PW APS
cannot be configured
for the same service.
Therefore, do not
configure MPLS PW
APS if you already
configure MPLS
tunnel APS.
7 9.21 Creating a V-UNI Group (Optional) The
parameters need to
be set according to
the service planning.

5.3 Configuration Example: E-AGGR Services Carried by
Ports
This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the engineering information and how to
configure the E-AGGR services carried by ports for each NE according to the networking
diagram.
5.3.1 Networking Diagram
The networking diagram shows the requirements for the E-AGGR services carried by ports.
On the network shown in Figure 5-5, the NodeBs that are connected to NE1 and NE2
respectively need to communicate with the RNC that is connected to NE3. The services are
transmitted from Node B to any other node through the UNIs. On the network side, you need to
configure the services to be carried by ports, thus realizing the aggregation and transmission of
the Ethernet services from the user side.
The services of all the NodeBs carry the VLAN ID of 100.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 5 Configuring E-AGGR Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
195
The service requirements are as follows:
l NodeB 1 and NodeB 2 are connected to NE1 through the 21-PETF8-1 and 21-PETF8-2
ports respectively.
l NodeB 3 and NodeB 4 are connected to NE2 through the 21-PETF8-1 and 21-PETF8-2
ports respectively.
l The RNC, NE1, and NE2 are connected to NE3 through the 3-PEG16-1, 3-PEG16-2, and
3-PEG16-3 ports respectively.
l The NodeBs and the equipment are interconnected through FE ports. The RNC and the
equipment are interconnected through GE ports.
l The services on NodeB 1 and NodeB 3 are the voice services that require the CIR of 15
Mbit/s and the PIR of 30 Mbit/s.
l The services on NodeB 2 and NodeB 4 are the data services that require the CIR of 30 Mbit/
s and the PIR of 50 Mbit/s.
Figure 5-5 Networking diagram of the E-AGGR services carried by ports
RNC
NE1
GE
NodeB
NE2
NE3
UNI for NodeB 3: 21-PETF8-1
NodeB 2
NodeB 4
NodeB 3
UNI for NodeB 4: 21-PETF8-2
UNI for NodeB 1: 21-PETF8-1
UNI for NodeB 2: 21-PETF8-2
NNI: 3-PEG16-1
NNI: 3-PEG16-1
UNI for RNC: 1-PEG16-1
NNI for NE1: 1-PEG16-2
NNI for NE2: 1-PEG16-3
NodeB 1
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 5 Configuring E-AGGR Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
196
NOTE
l This section uses the OptiX OSN 3500 as an example to describe the board layout. The methods of
configuring other products are the same as the method of configuring the OptiX OSN 3500, except that
the board layout may be different. For the slot information, see the Hardware Description of the specific
product.
l On a live data network, an Ethernet service is added to its source NE, passed through on its transit NEs,
and dropped from its sink NE. For details on how to configure transit NEs for an Ethernet service
carried by ports, see 9.12.1 Configuring Transit NEs for Ethernet Services Carried by Ports.

5.3.2 Service Planning
The engineering information for configuring the E-AGGR services carried by ports contains the
engineering information for configuring the UNIs, the engineering information for configuring
the E-AGGR services carried by the ports, and the engineering information for configuring the
VLAN forward tables.
On the network, the E-AGGR services are carried by ports. Hence, you need to plan the
parameters related to the ports.
Planning the E-AGGR services carried by ports involves the following:
l Plan the E-AGGR services carried by ports. Refer to Table 5-3.
l Plan the UNI of each NE. Refer to Table 5-4.
l Plan the NNI of each NE. Refer to Table 5-5.
l Plan the VLAN forward table entries of NE1 and NE2. Refer to Table 5-6.
l Plan the VLAN forward table entries of NE3. Refer to Table 5-7.
Table 5-3 Planning information of the E-AGGR services carried by ports
Parameter NE1 NE2 NE3
Service ID 1 2 3
Service Name E-Aggr-1 E-Aggr-2 E-Aggr-3
MTU (bytes) 1526 1526 1526

Table 5-4 Planning information of the UNIs
Parameter NE1 NE2 NE3
Port 21-PETF8-1
21-PETF8-2
21-PETF8-1
21-PETF8-2
1-PEG16-1
VLANs 100 100 100,200,300,400

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 5 Configuring E-AGGR Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
197
Table 5-5 Planning information of the NNIs
Parameter NE1 NE2 NE3
Port 3-PEG16-1 3-PEG16-1 1-PEG16-2
1-PEG16-3

Table 5-6 Planning information of the VLAN forward table entries of NE1 and NE2
Parameter NE1 NE2
Source Interface
Type
V-UNI V-UNI V-UNI V-UNI
Source Interface 21-PETF8-1 21-PETF8-2 21-PETF8-1 21-PETF8-2
Source VLAN
ID
100 100 100 100
Sink Interface
Type
V-NNI V-NNI V-NNI V-NNI
Sink Interface 3-PEG16-1 3-PEG16-1 3-PEG16-1 3-PEG16-1
Sink VLAN ID 1 2 3 4

Table 5-7 Planning information of the VLAN forward table entries of NE3
Parameter NE3:
NNI for NE1
NE3:
NNI for NE2
Source Interface
Type
V-NNI V-NNI V-NNI V-NNI
Source Interface 1-PEG16-2 1-PEG16-2 1-PEG16-3 1-PEG16-3
Source VLAN
ID
1 2 3 4
Sink Interface
Type
V-UNI V-UNI V-UNI V-UNI
Sink Interface 1-PEG16-1 1-PEG16-1 1-PEG16-1 1-PEG16-1
Sink VLAN ID 100 200 300 400

5.3.3 Configuration Process
You can configure the relevant information of the E-AGGR services carried by ports according
to the engineering information.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 5 Configuring E-AGGR Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
198
Prerequisites
l You must be familiar with the networking requirements and service planning for the E-
AGGR services carried by the ports.
l The port attributes must be set correctly.
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l The E-AGGR services carried by ports need to occupy the NNIs exclusively. Hence, you
need to disable the DCN function of the NNIs. If the E-AGGR services carried by ports
need to occupy the UNIs exclusively, you also need to disable the DCN function of the
UNIs. For the method of disabling the DCN function of a port, see Configuring the DCN
Function of a Port.
Procedure
Step 1 On NE1, configure the E-AGGR services carried by ports.
1. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > Packet Configuration
> Ethernet Service Management > E-AGGR Service from the Function Tree.
2. Click New. Then, the New E-AGGR Service dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters
of the E-AGGR services carried by ports.
Table 5-8 Parameters of the E-AGGR services carried by ports
Parameter Value in This Example
Service ID 1
Service Name E-Aggr-1
MTU (bytes) 1526

3. Click the UNI tab. Click Configuration. Then, the Configure Port dialog box is displayed.
Set the parameters of the UNIs. After setting the parameters, click OK.
Table 5-9 Parameters of the UNIs
Parameter Value in This Example
Location Source
Port 21-PETF8-1
21-PETF8-2
VLANs 100

4. Choose NNI > Port. Click Configuration. Then, the Configure Port dialog box is
displayed. Set the parameters of the NNIs. After setting the parameters, click OK.
Table 5-10 Parameters of the NNIs
Parameter Value in This Example
Location Sink
Port 3-PEG16-1
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 5 Configuring E-AGGR Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
199

5. Click the VLAN Forwarding Table Item tab. Click New. Then, the New VLAN
Forwarding Table Item dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters of the VLAN
forwarding table item. After setting the parameters, click OK.
Table 5-11 Parameters of the VLAN forwarding table item
Parameter Value in This Example
Source Interface Type V-UNI V-UNI
Source Interface 21-PETFF8-1 21-PETF8-2
Source VLAN ID 100 100
Sink Interface Type V-NNI V-NNI
Sink Interface 3-PEG16-1 3-PEG16-1
Sink VLAN ID 1 2

6. Click Configure QoS. Then, the Configure QoS dialog box is displayed.
7. Click the UNI tab. Set the QoS parameters of the E-AGGR services carried by ports.
Table 5-12 QoS parameters of the E-AGGR services carried by ports
Parameter Value in This Example
Interface 21-PETF8-1 (Port-1) 21-PETF8-2 (Port-2)
Direction Ingress Ingress
Bandwidth Limit Enabled Enabled
CIR(kbit/s) 15000 30000
PIR(kbit/s) 30000 50000
Other parameters Default values Default values

Step 2 On NE2, configure the E-AGGR services carried by ports.
Refer to Step 1 and configure the E-AGGR services carried by ports.
Table 5-13 Parameters of the E-AGGR services carried by ports
Parameter Value in This Example
Service ID 2
Service Name E-Aggr-2
MTU (bytes) 1526

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 5 Configuring E-AGGR Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
200
Table 5-14 Parameters of the UNIs
Parameter Value in This Example
Location Source
Port 21-PETF8-1
21-PETF8-2
VLANs 100

Table 5-15 Parameters of the NNIs
Parameter Value in This Example
Location Sink
Port 3-PEG16-1

Table 5-16 Parameters of the VLAN forwarding table item
Parameter Value in This Example
Source Interface Type V-UNI V-UNI
Source Interface 21-PETR8-1 21-PETR8-2
Source VLAN ID 100 100
Sink Interface Type V-NNI V-NNI
Sink Interface 3-PEG16-1 3-PEG16-1
Sink VLAN ID 3 4

Table 5-17 QoS parameters of the E-AGGR services carried by ports
Parameter Value in This Example
Interface 21-PETF8-1 (Port-1) 21-PETF8-2 (Port-2)
Direction Ingress Ingress
Bandwidth Limit Enabled Enabled
CIR(kbit/s) 15000 30000
PIR(kbit/s) 30000 50000
Other parameters Default values Default values

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 5 Configuring E-AGGR Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
201
Step 3 On NE3, configure the E-AGGR services carried by ports.
Refer to Step 1 and configure the E-AGGR services carried by ports.
Table 5-18 Parameters of the E-AGGR services carried by ports
Parameter Value in This Example
Service ID 3
Service Name E-Aggr-3
MTU (bytes) 1526

Table 5-19 Parameters of the UNIs
Parameter Value in This Example
Location Sink
Port 1-PEG16-1
VLANs 100,200,300,400

Table 5-20 Parameters of the NNIs
Parameter Value in This Example
Location Source
Port 1-PEG16-2
1-PEG16-3

Table 5-21 Parameters of the VLAN forwarding table item
Parameter Value in This Example
Source Interface
Type
V-NNI V-NNI V-NNI V-NNI
Source Interface 1-PEG16-2 1-PEG16-2 1-PEG16-3 1-PEG16-3
Source VLAN
ID
1 2 3 4
Sink Interface
Type
V-UNI V-UNI V-UNI V-UNI
Sink Interface 1-PEG16-1 1-PEG16-1 1-PEG16-1 1-PEG16-1
Sink VLAN ID 100 200 300 400
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 5 Configuring E-AGGR Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
202

----End
Relevant Task
See 5.5 Verifying the Correctness of E-AGGR Service Configuration to check whether the
E-AGGR services carried by ports are configured correctly.
5.4 Configuration Example: E-AGGR Services Carried by
PWs
This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the engineering information and how to
configure the E-AGGR services carried by PWs for each NE according to the networking
diagram.
5.4.1 Networking Diagram
The networking diagram shows the requirements for the E-AGGR services carried by PWs.
On the network shown in Figure 5-6, the NodeBs that are connected to NE1 and NE2 need to
communicate with the RNC that is connected to NE3. The services that are transmitted from a
NodeB are accessed to any other node through the UNI. On the network side, you need to
configure the services to be carried by PWs, thus aggregating the Ethernet services from the user
side to the PWs on the network side. On the node that is connected to the RNC, the tunnels that
carry different services are aggregated again and then transmitted to the RNC. The services of
all the NodeBs carry the VLAN ID of 100.
The service requirements are as follows:
l NodeB 1 and NodeB 2 are connected to NE1 through the 21-PETF8-1 and 21-PETF8-2
ports respectively.
l NodeB 3 and NodeB 4 are connected to NE2 through the 21-PETF8-1 and 21-PETF8-2
ports respectively.
l The RNC, NE1, and NE2 are connected to NE3 through the 1-PEG16-1, 1-PEG16-2, and
1-PEG16-3 ports respectively.
l The NodeBs and the equipment are interconnected through FE ports. The RNC and the
equipment are interconnected through GE ports.
l The services of NodeB 1 and NodeB 3 are the voice services that require the CIR of 15
Mbit/s and the PIR of 30 Mbit/s.
l The services of NodeB 2 and NodeB 4 are the data services that require the CIR of 30 Mbit/
s and the PIR of 50 Mbit/s.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 5 Configuring E-AGGR Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
203
Figure 5-6 Networking diagram of the E-AGGR services carried by PWs
RNC
NE1
FE
GE
FE
FE
FE
NodeB
NE2
NE3
PSN
Tunnel
PW
MPLS tunnel 1
MPLS tunnel 2
UNI for NodeB 1: 21-PETF8-1
UNI for NodeB 2: 21-PETF8-2
NNI: 3-PEG16-1
UNI for NodeB 3: 21-PETF8-1
UNI for NodeB 4: 21-PETF8-2
NNI: 3-PEG16-1
UNI for RNC: 1-PEG16-1
NNI for NE1: 1-PEG16-2
NNI for NE2: 1-PEG16-3
NodeB 4
NodeB 1
NodeB 2
NodeB 3
NOTE
l This section uses the OptiX OSN 3500 as an example to describe the board layout. The methods of
configuring other products are the same as the method of configuring the OptiX OSN 3500, except that
the board layout may be different. For the slot information, see the Hardware Description of the specific
product.
l On a live data network, an Ethernet service is added to its source NE, passed through on its transit NEs,
and dropped from its sink NE. For details on how to configure transit NEs for an Ethernet service
carried by PWs, see 9.12.2 Configuring Transit NEs for Ethernet Services Carried by PWs.

NE IP Address IP Mask LSR ID
NE1 3-
PEG16-1
18.1.1.1 255.255.255.252 130.0.0.1
NE2 3-
PEG16-1
18.1.2.1 255.255.255.252 130.0.0.2
NE3 3-
PEG16-2
18.1.1.2 255.255.255.252 130.0.0.3
3-
PEG16-3
18.1.2.2 255.255.255.252

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 5 Configuring E-AGGR Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
204
NOTE
l The IP addresses of the Ethernet ports on an NE cannot be in the same network segment.
l The IP addresses of the ports at both ends of a link must be in the same network segment.
5.4.2 Service Planning
The engineering information for configuring the E-AGGR services carried by PWs contains the
engineering information for configuring the tunnel carrying the PWs, the engineering
information for configuring the UNIs, the engineering information for configuring the PWs, the
engineering information for configuring the E-AGGR services carried by the PWs, and the
engineering information for configuring the VLAN forward table.
On the network, the E-AGGR services are carried by PWs. Hence, you need to plan the
parameters related to the PWs and the PLS tunnel.
Planning the E-AGGR services carried by PWs involves the following:
l Plan the tunnel that carries the PWs. Refer to Table 5-22.
l Plan the E-AGGR services carried by PWs. Refer to Table 5-23.
l Plan the UNI of each NE. Refer to Table 5-24.
l Plan the PWs. Refer to Table 5-25.
l Plan the VLAN forward table entries of NE1 and NE2. Refer to Table 5-26.
l Plan the VLAN forward table entries of NE3. Refer to Table 5-27.
Table 5-22 Planning information of the tunnel carrying the PWs
Param
eter
NE1 NE2 NE3
Tunnel
ID
1 2 3 4 2 1 4 3
Tunnel
Name
NE1-
NE3#1
NE3-
NE1#1
NE2-
NE3#2
NE3-
NE2#2
NE3-
NE1#1
NE1-
NE3#1
NE3-
NE2#2
NE2-
NE3#2
Node
Type
Ingress Egress Ingress Egress Ingress Egress Ingress Egress
Bandwi
dth
(kbit/s)
100
Mbit/s
- 100
Mbit/s
- 100
Mbit/s
- 100
Mbit/s
-
In
Board/
Logic
Interfac
e Type
- 3-
PEG16
- 3-
PEG16
- 1-
PEG16
- 1-
PEG16
In Port - 1 - 1 - 2 - 3
In
Label
- 17 - 19 - 16 - 18
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 5 Configuring E-AGGR Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
205
Param
eter
NE1 NE2 NE3
Out
Board/
Logic
Interfac
e Type
3-
PEG16
- 3-
PEG16
- 1-
PEG16
- 1-
PEG16
-
Out
Port
1 - 1 - 2 - 3 -
Out
Label
16 - 18 - 17 - 19 -
Next
Hop
Addres
s
18.1.1.
2
- 18.1.2.
2
- 18.1.1.
1
- 18.1.2.
1
-
Source
Node
- 130.0.0
.3
- 130.0.0
.3
- 130.0.0
.1
- 130.0.0
.2
Sink
Node
130.0.0
.3
- 130.0.0
.3
- 130.0.0
.1
- 130.0.0
.2
-

Table 5-23 Planning information of the E-AGGR services carried by PWs
Parameter NE1 NE2 NE3
Service ID 1 2 3
Service Name E-Aggr-1 E-Aggr-2 E-Aggr-3
MTU (bytes) 1526 1526 1526

Table 5-24 Planning information of the UNIs
Parameter NE1 NE2 NE3
Port 21-PETF8-1
21-PETF8-2
21-PETF8-1
21-PETF8-2
1-PEG16-1
VLANs 100 100 100

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 5 Configuring E-AGGR Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
206
Table 5-25 Planning information of the PWs
Parameter NE1 NE2 NE3:
NNI for NE1
NE3:
NNI for NE2
Location Sink Sink Source Source
PW ID 10 20 10 20
PW Signaling
Type
Static Static Static Static
PW Type Ethernet
Tagged Mode
Ethernet
Tagged Mode
Ethernet
Tagged Mode
Ethernet
Tagged Mode
PW Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional Bidirectional Bidirectional
PW Incoming
Label/Source
Port
20 30 20 30
PW Outgoing
Label/Sink Port
20 30 20 30
Peer LSR ID 130.0.0.3 130.0.0.3 130.0.0.1 130.0.0.2
Tunnel No. Tunnel 1 Tunnel 2 Tunnel 1 Tunnel 2
Bandwidth
Limit
Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
CIR(kbit/s) 45000 45000 45000 45000
PIR(kbit/s) 80000 80000 80000 80000
Request VLAN 10 20 10 20

Table 5-26 Planning information of the VLAN forward table entries of NE1 and NE2
Parameter NE1 NE2
Source
Interface
Type
V-UNI V-UNI V-UNI V-UNI
Source
Interface
21-PETF8-1 21-PETF8-2 21-PETF8-1 21-PETF8-2
Source VLAN
ID
100 100 100 100
Sink Interface
Type
V-NNI V-NNI V-NNI V-NNI
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 5 Configuring E-AGGR Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
207
Parameter NE1 NE2
Sink Interface PW( Ethernet
Tagged Mode,
10 )
PW( Ethernet
Tagged Mode,
10 )
PW( Ethernet
Tagged Mode,
20 )
PW( Ethernet
Tagged Mode,
20 )
Sink VLAN
ID
1 2 3 4

Table 5-27 Planning information of the VLAN forward table entries of NE3
Parameter NE3:
NNI for NE1
NE3:
NNI for NE2
Source Interface
Type
V-NNI V-NNI V-NNI V-NNI
Source Interface PW( Ethernet
Tagged Mode,
10 )
PW( Ethernet
Tagged Mode,
10 )
PW( Ethernet
Tagged Mode,
20 )
PW( Ethernet
Tagged Mode,
20 )
Source VLAN
ID
1 2 3 4
Sink Interface
Type
V-UNI V-UNI V-UNI V-UNI
Sink Interface 1-PEG16-1 1-PEG16-1 1-PEG16-1 1-PEG16-1
Sink VLAN ID 100 200 300 400

5.4.3 Configuration Process (in End-to-End Mode)
You can configure the relevant information of the E-AGGR services carried by PWs according
to the engineering information.
Prerequisites
l You must be familiar with the networking requirements and service planning for the E-
AGGR services carried by the PWs.
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l The tunnels that carry the PWs must be configured on NE1, NE2, and NE3. For the
configuration method, see 9.4 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel.
l If the E-AGGR services carried by PWs need to occupy the UNIs exclusively, disable the
DCN function of the UNIs. For the method of disabling the DCN function of a port, see
Configuring the DCN Function of a Port.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 5 Configuring E-AGGR Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
208
Procedure
Step 1 Configure an E-AGGR service from NodeB 1, NodeB 2, NodeB 3, and NodeB 4 to the RNC.
1. Choose Service > E-AGGR Service > Create E-AGGR Service from the Main Menu.
2. Set basic attributes for the E-AGGR service.
Table 5-28 Basic attributes for the E-AGGR service
Parameter Value in This Example
Service ID 1
Service Name E-Aggr-1
MTU (bytes) 1526

3. Configure source and sink NEs for the E-AGGR service.
a. Click the Node List tab, and choose Add > Source or Add > Sink. Then, a dialog
box is displayed.
b. Select source and sink NEs in Physical Topology on the left.
c. Configure boards and ports that receive services, and set attributes for the ports in
SAI Configuration. Then, click OK.
Table 5-29 Parameters for the ports that receive services
Parameter Value in This Example
NE NE1 NE2 NE3
Location Source Source Sink
Port 21-PETF8-1
21-PETF8-2
21-PETF8-1
21-PETF8-2
1-PEG16-1
VLAN ID 100 100 100, 200, 300, 400

4. Click the PW tab, and set basic attributes for the PWs.
Table 5-30 Basic attributes for the PWs
Sour
ce
NE
Sink
NE
PW
ID
Sign
alin
g
Typ
e
For
war
d
Labe
l
Rev
erse
Labe
l
For
war
d
Typ
e
For
war
d
Tun
nel
Rev
erse
Typ
e
Rev
erse
Tun
nel
Enca
psul
atio
n
Typ
e
NE1 NE3 10 Stati
c
20 20 Stati
c
bindi
ng
NE1-
NE3
#1
Stati
c
bindi
ng
NE3-
NE1
#1
MPL
S
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 5 Configuring E-AGGR Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
209
Sour
ce
NE
Sink
NE
PW
ID
Sign
alin
g
Typ
e
For
war
d
Labe
l
Rev
erse
Labe
l
For
war
d
Typ
e
For
war
d
Tun
nel
Rev
erse
Typ
e
Rev
erse
Tun
nel
Enca
psul
atio
n
Typ
e
NE2 NE3 20 Stati
c
30 30 Stati
c
bindi
ng
NE2-
NE3
#2
Stati
c
bindi
ng
NE3-
NE2
#2
MPL
S

5. Click the VLAN Forwarding Table tab, and click Add to set parameters.
Table 5-31 Parameters in the VLAN forwarding table
Source
SAI
Source
VLAN ID
PW ID Transit
VLAN ID
Sink SAI Sink
VLAN ID
NE1-21-
PETF8-1
(Port-1)
100 10 1 NE3-1-
PEG16-1
(Port-1)
100
NE1-21-
PETF8-2
(Port-2)
100 10 2 NE3-1-
PEG16-1
(Port-1)
200
NE2-21-
PETF8-1
(Port-1)
100 20 3 NE3-1-
PEG16-1
(Port-1)
300
NE2-21-
PETF8-2
(Port-2)
100 20 4 NE3-1-
PEG16-1
(Port-1)
400

6. Click Advanced to set advanced attributes for the E-AGGR service.
a. Click SAI QoS tab to set QoS parameters for the ingress direction.
Table 5-32 QoS parameters for the ingress direction
SAI Direction Bandwidt
h Enabled
CIR (kbit/
s)
PIR (kbit/
s)
Other
Paramete
rs
NE1-21-
PETF8-1
(Port-1)
Ingress Enabled 15000 30000 Default
values
NE1-21-
PETF8-2
(Port-2)
Ingress Enabled 30000 50000 Default
values
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 5 Configuring E-AGGR Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
210
SAI Direction Bandwidt
h Enabled
CIR (kbit/
s)
PIR (kbit/
s)
Other
Paramete
rs
NE2-21-
PETF8-1
(Port-1)
Ingress Enabled 15000 30000 Default
values
NE2-21-
PETF8-2
(Port-2)
Ingress Enabled 30000 50000 Default
values

b. Click the Advanced PW Attribute tab, and set advanced attributes for the PWs.
Table 5-33 Advanced attributes for the PWs
PW Trail PW Type Request VLAN Other
Parameters
(NE1<--->NE3) Ethernet Tagged
Mode
10 Default values
(NE2<--->NE3) Ethernet Tagged
Mode
20 Default values

----End
Relevant Task
See 5.5 Verifying the Correctness of E-AGGR Service Configuration to check whether the
E-AGGR service is configured correctly.
5.4.4 Configuration Process (Configuration on a Per-NE Basis)
You can configure the relevant information of the E-AGGR services carried by PWs according
to the engineering information.
Prerequisites
l You must be familiar with the networking requirements and service planning for the E-
AGGR services carried by the PWs.
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l The tunnels that carry the PWs must be configured on NE1, NE2, and NE3. For the
configuration method, see 9.4 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel.
l If the E-AGGR services carried by PWs need to occupy the UNIs exclusively, disable the
DCN function of the UNIs. For the method of disabling the DCN function of a port, see
Configuring the DCN Function of a Port.
Procedure
Step 1 On NE1, configure the E-AGGR services carried by ports.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 5 Configuring E-AGGR Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
211
1. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > Packet Configuration
> Ethernet Service Management > E-AGGR Service from the Function Tree.
2. Click New. Then, the New E-AGGR Service dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters
of the E-AGGR services carried by PWs.
Table 5-34 Parameters of the E-AGGR services carried by PWs
Parameter Value in This Example
Service ID 1
Service Name E-Aggr-1
MTU (bytes) 1526

3. Click the UNI tab. Click Configuration. Then, the Configure Port dialog box is displayed.
Set the parameters of the UNIs. After setting the parameters, click OK.
Table 5-35 Parameters of the UNIs
Parameter Value in This Example
Location Source
Port 21-PETF8-1
21-PETF8-2
VLANs 100

4. Choose NNI > PW. Click New. Then, the Configure PW dialog box is displayed. Set the
parameters of the PWs. After setting the parameters, click OK.
Table 5-36 Parameters of the PWs
Parameter Value in This Example
General Attributes Location Sink
PW ID 10
PW Signaling Type Static
PW Type Ethernet Tagged Mode
PW Direction Bidirectional
PW Incoming Label/
Source Port
20
PW Outgoing Label/Sink
Port
20
Tunnel No. NE1-NE3#1
Peer LSR ID 130.0.0.3
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 5 Configuring E-AGGR Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
212
Parameter Value in This Example
Advanced Attributes Request VLAN 10
Other parameters Default values
NOTE
For details on how to configure the TPID, see 9.19 Configuring
the NE-Level TPID.

5. Click the VLAN Forwarding Table Item tab. Click New. Then, the New VLAN
Forwarding Table Item dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters of the VLAN
forwarding table item. After setting the parameters, click OK.
Table 5-37 Parameters of the VLAN forwarding table item
Parameter Value in This Example
Source Interface Type V-UNI V-UNI
Source Interface 21-PETF8-1 21-PETF8-2
Source VLAN ID 100 100
Sink Interface Type V-NNI V-NNI
Sink Interface PW (Ethernet Tagged
Mode, 10)
PW (Ethernet Tagged
Mode, 10)
Sink VLAN ID 1 2

6. Click Configure QoS. Then, the Configure QoS dialog box is displayed.
7. Click the UNI tab. Set the QoS parameters of the E-AGGR services carried by PWs.
Table 5-38 QoS parameters of the E-AGGR services carried by PWs
Parameter Value in This Example
Interface 21-PETF8-1 (Port-1) 21-PETF8-2 (Port-2)
Direction Ingress Ingress
Bandwidth Limit Enabled Enabled
CIR(kbit/s) 15000 30000
PIR(kbit/s) 30000 50000
Other parameters Default values Default values

Step 2 On NE2, configure the E-AGGR services carried by PWs.
Refer to Step 1 and configure the E-AGGR services carried by PWs.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 5 Configuring E-AGGR Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
213
Table 5-39 Parameters of the E-AGGR services carried by PWs
Parameter Value in This Example
Service ID 2
Service Name E-Aggr-2
MTU (bytes) 1526

Table 5-40 Parameters of the UNIs
Parameter Value in This Example
Location Source
Port 21-PETF8-1
21-PETF8-2
VLANs 100

Table 5-41 Parameters of the PWs
Parameter Value in This Example
General Attributes Location Sink
PW ID 20
PW Signaling Type Static
PW Type Ethernet
PW Direction Bidirectional
PW Incoming Label/Source
Port
30
PW Outgoing Label/Sink
Port
30
Tunnel No. NE2-NE3#2
Peer LSR ID 130.0.0.3
Advanced Attributes Request VLAN 20
Other parameters Default values
NOTE
For details on how to configure the TPID, see 9.19 Configuring the
NE-Level TPID.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 5 Configuring E-AGGR Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
214
Table 5-42 Parameters of the VLAN forwarding table item
Parameter Value in This Example
Source Interface Type V-UNI V-UNI
Source Interface 21-PETF8-1 21-PETF8-2
Source VLAN ID 100 100
Sink Interface Type V-NNI V-NNI
Sink Interface PW (Ethernet Tagged Mode,
20)
PW (Ethernet Tagged Mode,
20)
Sink VLAN ID 3 4

Table 5-43 QoS parameters of the E-AGGR services carried by PWs
Parameter Value in This Example
Interface 21-PETF8-1 (Port-1) 21-PETF8-2 (Port-2)
Direction Ingress Ingress
Bandwidth Limit Enabled Enabled
CIR(kbit/s) 15000 30000
PIR(kbit/s) 30000 50000
Other parameters Default values Default values

Step 3 On NE3, configure the E-AGGR services carried by PWs.
Refer to Step 1 and configure the E-AGGR services carried by PWs.
Table 5-44 Parameters of the E-AGGR services carried by PWs
Parameter Value in This Example
Service ID 3
Service Name E-Aggr-3
MTU (bytes) 1526

Table 5-45 Parameters of the UNIs
Parameter Value in This Example
Location Sink
Port 1-PEG16-1
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 5 Configuring E-AGGR Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
215
Parameter Value in This Example
VLANs 100

Table 5-46 Parameters of the PWs
Parameter Value in This Example
General Attributes Location Source Source
PW ID 10 20
PW Signaling Type Static Static
PW Type Ethernet Tagged
Mode
Ethernet Tagged
Mode
PW Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional
PW Incoming Label/
Source Port
20 30
PW Outgoing Label/
Sink Port
20 30
Tunnel No. NE3-NE1#1 NE3-NE2#2
Peer LSR ID 130.0.0.1 130.0.0.2
Advanced Attributes Request VLAN 10 20
Other parameters Default values Default values
NOTE
For details on how to configure the TPID, see 9.19 Configuring the NE-Level
TPID.

Table 5-47 Parameters of the VLAN forwarding table item
Parameter Value in This Example
Source
Interface
Type
V-NNI V-NNI V-NNI V-NNI
Source
Interface
PW (Ethernet
Tagged Mode,
10)
PW (Ethernet
Tagged Mode,
10)
PW (Ethernet
Tagged Mode,
20)
PW (Ethernet
Tagged Mode,
20)
Source
VLAN ID
1 2 3 4
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 5 Configuring E-AGGR Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
216
Parameter Value in This Example
Sink
Interface
Type
V-UNI V-UNI V-UNI V-UNI
Sink
Interface
1-PEG16-1 1-PEG16-1 1-PEG16-1 1-PEG16-1
Sink VLAN
ID
100 200 300 400

Table 5-48 QoS parameters of the E-AGGR services carried by PWs
Parameter Value in This Example
Interface 21-PETF8-1 (Port-1) 21-PETF8-2 (Port-2)
Direction Ingress Ingress
Bandwidth Limit Enabled Enabled
CIR(kbit/s) 15000 30000
PIR(kbit/s) 30000 50000
Other parameters Default values Default values

----End
Relevant Task
See 5.5 Verifying the Correctness of E-AGGR Service Configuration to check whether the
E-AGGR services carried by PWs are configured correctly.
5.5 Verifying the Correctness of E-AGGR Service
Configuration
After the data configuration is complete, you need to check whether data configuration is correct
by verifying the configured services.
Prerequisites
The E-AGGR services must be already created.
Context
The connectivity check method (by using the 802.1ag OAM function) of the E-AGGR services
carried by ports is the same as the connectivity check method (by using the 802.1ag OAM
function) of the E-AGGR services carried by PWs.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 5 Configuring E-AGGR Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
217
This topic considers the E-AGGR services carried by PWs as the example to describe how to
check whether the E-AGGR services are configured correctly. Before you perform the check,
you need configure the Ethernet OAM function. See Figure 5-7.
Figure 5-7 OAM of the E-AGGR services
RNC
NE1
FE
GE
FE
FE
FE
NodeB
NE2
NE3
PSN
MD 1
MA 1
MA 2
MEP
MEP
MEP
MA: maintenance
association
MD: maintenance
domain
MEP: maintenance
end point
Tunnel
PW
NodeB2
NodeB1
NodeB3
NodeB4

As shown in the figure, the services of NodeB 1 and NodeB 2 are aggregated on NE1, the services
of NodeB 3 and NodeB 4 are aggregated on NE2, and then all the services are aggregated to the
RNC through NE3. The services are carried and isolated by PWs. To check whether the E-AGGR
services are configured correctly, you need to configure the Ethernet OAM function. This topic
considers the E-AGGR service between NodeB 1 and RNC as the example.
Procedure
Step 1 At NE1 and NE3, create the maintenance domain for the E-AGGR service between NodeB 1
and NodeB 2. For the creation method, see Creating an MD.
Set the parameters of the maintenance domain.
Parameter NE1 NE3
Maintenance
Domain Name
MD 1 MD 1
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 5 Configuring E-AGGR Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
218
Parameter NE1 NE3
Maintenance
Domain Level
4 4

NOTE
The maintenance domain names and levels of NE1 and NE2 need to be the same so that NE1 and NE2
belong to the same maintenance domain.
Step 2 At NE1 and NE3, create the maintenance association for the E-AGGR service between NodeB
1 and NodeB 2. For the creation method, see Creating an MA.
Set the parameters of the maintenance association.
Parameter NE1 NE3
Maintenance Domain Name MD 1 MD 1
Maintenance Association
Name
MA 1 MA 1
Relevant Service 1-E-Line-1 1-E-Line-1
CC Test Transmit Period
(ms)
3.33 ms 3.33 ms

Step 3 At NE1 and NE3, create the MEPs. For the creation method, see Creating an MEP.
Set the parameters of the MEPs.
Parameter NE1 NE3
Maintenance Domain Name MD 1 MD 1
Maintenance Association
Name
MA 1 MA 1
Board 21-PETF8 21-PETF8
Port 1(Port-1) 1(Port-1)
VLAN 100 100
MP ID 1 2
Direction Ingress Ingress
CC Status Active Active

Step 4 At NE1 and NE3, create the remote MEPs. perform the CC test. For the test method, see
Performing a Continuity Check.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 5 Configuring E-AGGR Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
219
NOTE
l If the MEP of NE2 does not receive the CC packets from NE1 in a period of time (for example, 3.25
times of the transmission period), the MEP automatically reports the ETH_CFM_LOC alarm. If the
ETH_CFM_LOC alarm is not reported, the connectivity of the service from NE1 to NE2 is normal.
l If the MEP of NE1 does not receive the CC packets from NE2 in a period of time (for example, 3.25
times of the transmission period), the MEP automatically reports the ETH_CFM_LOC alarm. If the
ETH_CFM_LOC alarm is not reported, the connectivity of the service from NE2 to NE1 is normal.
----End
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 5 Configuring E-AGGR Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
220
6 Configuring Cross-Domain Services
About This Chapter
You can configure cross-domain services to achieve the service transmission from the TDM
domain to the packet domain and vice versa.
6.1 Introduction to the Cross-Connect Board
The OptiX OSN equipment supports the EoD board, which enables service conversion between
the TDM domain and the packet domain.
6.2 Configuration Flow for the Cross-Domain Services
This topic describes the operation tasks of cross-domain service configuration and the flow
relationships between the operation tasks. The flows of configuring cross-domain services in
different scenarios are similar, and therefore This topic describes the general-purpose
configuration model only. For application scenario 3, This topic describes the configuration flow
for cross-domain service configuration only.
6.3 Configuration Example (Application Scenario 1)
The EoS services from the TDM domain are received and processed at the EoD board, and then
are transmitted to the packet domain.
6.4 Configuration Example (Application Scenario 2)
The EoS services from the TDM domain are received on the SDH line board, and then are
transmitted to the EoD board for processing before entering the packet domain.
6.5 Configuration Example (Application Scenario 3)
The SDH services (including the pure SDH service and EoS service) from the TDM domain are
processed on the EoD board. Then, pure SDH services are transmitted to the TDM domain, and
EoS services are transmitted to the packet domain.
6.6 Testing Cross-domain Services
Cross-domain services refer to the services that are transmitted from the TDM domain to the
packet domain by using the EoD board. After configuring cross-domain services, you need to
test whether the configuration is correct.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 6 Configuring Cross-Domain Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
221
6.1 Introduction to the Cross-Connect Board
The OptiX OSN equipment supports the EoD board, which enables service conversion between
the TDM domain and the packet domain.
Figure 6-1 shows the typical networking and application of the EDQ41.
Figure 6-1 Networking and application of the EDQ41
10GE ring
STM-16/STM-64 ring
STM-1/STM-4 ring
E1
FE
FE
BSC
RNC
GE ring
Networking in the
TDM domain
Networking in the
packet domain
TDM traffic direction Packet traffic direction

The EDQ41 is applicable in four typical networking scenarios. Figure 6-2 shows the service
signal flow in each application scenario.
l Application 1: The EDQ41 receives EoS services from other NEs and then converts the
EoS services to packet services, therefore implementing transition from the STM-1/STM-4
SDH network to the GE/10GE packet network.
l Application 2: The EDQ41 receives EoS services from line boards on the same NE and
then converts the EoS services to packet services, therefore implementing transition from
the SDH network to the GE/10GE packet network.
l Application 3: The EDQ41 board receives SDH services (including SDH services and EoS
services) from SDH line board, processes and then distributes the services to GE/10GE
packet networks and STM-1/STM-4 SDH networks.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 6 Configuring Cross-Domain Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
222
l Application 4: The EDQ41 board receives SDH services (including pure SDH services and
EoS services) from SDH line boards, processes and then sends the services directly to the
SDH network. In this case, the EDQ41 board functions like an SDH line board.
NOTE
The EDQ41 supports the maximum processing capacity of 2.5 Gbit/s. Therefore, only 2.5 Gbit/s services
of the services received from STM-N (1N64) line boards can be processed and sent to the packet
network.
Figure 6-2 Service signal flow on the EDQ41
Packet
core
TDM
core
Packet
board
EDQ41
borad
GE/10GE
ring
STM-1/STM-4
ring
STM-N
Packet
core
TDM
core
Packet
board
SDH
board
EDQ41
borad
GE/10GE
ring
STM-N
TDM
core
SDH
board
EDQ41
borad
GE/10GE
ring
Packet
core
TDM
core
Packet
board
SDH
board
EDQ41
borad
Application 1:
Application 2:
Application 4:
Application 3:
Packet
core
Packet
board
STM-1/STM-4
ring
STM-N
STM-1/STM-4
ring

6.2 Configuration Flow for the Cross-Domain Services
This topic describes the operation tasks of cross-domain service configuration and the flow
relationships between the operation tasks. The flows of configuring cross-domain services in
different scenarios are similar, and therefore This topic describes the general-purpose
configuration model only. For application scenario 3, This topic describes the configuration flow
for cross-domain service configuration only.
Table 6-1 provides the procedures for configuring cross-domain services.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 6 Configuring Cross-Domain Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
223
Figure 6-3 Configuration flow for cross-domain services
1. Configure network
ports
Start
Required
Optional
7. Configure E-Line
service on the packet
domain
6. Configure HQoS
4. Configure MPLS
tunnel
5. Configure protection
on the packet domain
2. Configure services
on the TDM domain
3. Configure protection
on the TDM domain
8. Configure Composite
Service
End
NOTE
The service configuration procedures on the TDM domain and the packet domain are not in sequence. In
the figure, the sequence numbers are presented to facilitate description.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 6 Configuring Cross-Domain Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
224
Table 6-1 Configuration flow for inter-NE service conversion
Ste
p
Ser
vic
e
Do
ma
in
Operation Remarks
1 - Configuring
network
ports
Required.
Including the following parameters:
l Configuring network ports on the TDM domain
Configuring Ethernet external ports
Configure Ethernet internal ports
l Configuring network ports on the packet domain
Configuring general attributes of Ethernet ports
Configuring Layer 3 attributes of Ethernet ports
2 TD
M
Configuring
services on
the TDM
domain
Required.
The services on the TDM domain generally are Ethernet private
line (EPL) services on the TDM domain, and you need to specify
such information as the service source and sink.
NOTE
In the case of cross-domain NEs, pure SDH services can be configured
on the TDM domain when the EDQ41 board accomplishes TDM-
domain and packet-domain service distribution.
3 Configuring
protection on
the TDM
domain
Optional. By configuring SNCP services on the TDM domain,
the services on the TDM domain can be transmitted through the
specified timeslots on the transmission lines, and are under 1+1
protection.
NOTE
Currently, only SNCP is supported.
4 Pac
ket
Configuring
an MPLS
tunnel
Required. An MPLS tunnel can be created in two manners: per-
NE and end-to-end. Set the tunnel ID, service name, tunnel
label, ingress node, egress node, and transit node according to
the network planning.
NOTE
MPLS tunnels are not configured on the EDQ41 board.
5 Configuring
protection on
the packet
domain
Optional.
MPLS tunnel APS can be used to protect packet services.
NOTE
l MPLS tunnel APS and MPLS PW APS are not configured on the
EDQ41 board.
l In the case of EDQ41 board, you can configure LAG of
VCTRUNKs between boards to protect cross-domain services.
6 Configuring
HQoS
Optional. The parameters need to be set according to the service
QoS planning.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 6 Configuring Cross-Domain Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
225
Ste
p
Ser
vic
e
Do
ma
in
Operation Remarks
7 Configuring
E-Line
services on
the packet
domain
Required. The parameters need to be set according to the service
planning.
8 TD
M/
Pac
ket
Configuring
composite
services
Optional.
If no protection is configured, you can configure the composite
service, implementing end-to-end management of services on
the TDM domain and packet domain. For details about
composite service management, see 9.17 Managing
Composite Services.

6.3 Configuration Example (Application Scenario 1)
The EoS services from the TDM domain are received and processed at the EoD board, and then
are transmitted to the packet domain.
6.3.1 Networking Diagram
By configuring services on the dual-domain bridging board, you can shift EoS services from a
non-local NE on the TDM domain to the packet domain and vice versa.
On a cross-domain network as shown in Figure 6-4, NE2 is the intersecting node between the
TDM domain and the packet domain. The EoS services are received on the EDQ41 boards on
NE2, and are then converted through the EDQ41 boards. In this manner, network communication
is achieved between the TDM domain and the packet domain.
l The NodeB receives 2 Mbit/s services, and transmits the services to the TDM domain.
l The EDQ41 board converges the services from the TDM domain, and transmits the services
to the packet domain.
l The service between the NodeB and the RNC uses the VLAN ID of 100.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 6 Configuring Cross-Domain Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
226
Figure 6-4 Networking diagram of cross-domain services
NE1
NE2
NE3
RNC
NodeB
TDM domain
Packet domain
2-EFS4
11-SL1
7-EDQ41-1
3-PEG8-1
3-PEG8-2 3-PEG8-2
3-PEG8-3
3-PEG8-1
8-SL1
12-EDQ41-1

NE IP Address IP Mask LSR ID
NE1 3-PEG8-1 18.1.1.1 255.255.255.252 130.0.0.1
3-PEG8-2 18.1.2.1 255.255.255.252
NE2 3-PEG8-1 18.1.1.2 255.255.255.252 130.0.0.2
3-PEG8-2 18.1.2.2 255.255.255.252

NOTE
l The IP addresses of the Ethernet ports on an NE cannot be in the same network segment.
l The IP addresses of the ports at both ends of a link must be in the same network segment.
6.3.2 Service Planning
The engineering information of application scenario 1 includes parameters of the services on
the TDM domain and the packet domain.
As shown in Figure 6-5, application scenario 1 mainly involves the following parameters on
the TDM domain:
l Parameter planning for EPL services
l Parameter planning for binding paths on the EDQ41 board
l Parameter planning for SDH service cross-connections
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 6 Configuring Cross-Domain Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
227
Figure 6-5 Planning information of TDM service parameters
EDQ41
bound paths
NodeB
NE3
NE2
TDM domain
EPL service
SDH service
cross-connections
EDQ41
(PORT5)

Table 6-2 Parameter planning for EPL services
Parameter Parameter Planning
Board 2-EFS4
External Port PORT1
Internal Port VCTRUNK1
Level VC12
Bound Path VC4-4-VC12(1)
Type of Service EPL
Service Direction Bidirectional
Source Port PORT1
Source VLAN 100
Sink Port VCTRUNK1
Sink VLAN 100

Table 6-3 Parameter planning for binding paths on the EDQ41 board
Parameter Parameter Planning
Board 7-EDQ41
Configurable Ports VCTRUNK1
Level VC12
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 6 Configuring Cross-Domain Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
228
Parameter Parameter Planning
Bound Path VC4-5-VC12(1)

Table 6-4 Parameter planning for SDH service cross-connections
Parameter NE3 NE2
Service Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional
Level VC-12 VC-12
Source Slot 8-SL1-1(SDH-1) 7-EDQ41-1(SDH-1)
Source VC4 1 1
Source Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)
1 1
Sink Slot 2-EFS4-1(SDH-1) 7-EDQ41-5(SDH-5)
NOTE
7-EDQ41-5 corresponds to
VCTRUNK1.
Sink VC4 1 5
Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)
1 1

As shown in Figure 6-6, application scenario 1 mainly involves the following parameters on
the packet domain:
l Parameter planning for tunnels carrying PWs
l Parameter planning for the UNI-NNI E-Line services carried by PWs
Figure 6-6 Service parameter planning on the packet domain
NE2
NE1
RNC
Packet domain
UNI-NNI E-Line services
carried by PWs
MPLS tunnel

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 6 Configuring Cross-Domain Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
229
Table 6-5 Basic attributes of a tunnel
Paramete
r
MPLS
Tunnel
name
MPLS
Tunnel
ID
Protocol
Type
Signalin
g Type
Direction Protected
Type
Parameter
Planning
NE2_NE1 10 MPLS Static CR Bidirectio
nal
Unprotect
ed

Table 6-6 Planning information of the tunnels
N
od
e
Nod
e
Type
In
Interf
ace
In
Label
Rever
se In
Label
Out
Interf
ace
Out
Label
Rever
se Out
Label
Next
Hop
Rever
se
Next
Hop
NE
2
Ingre
ss
- - 101 3-
PEG8-
1
100 - 18.1.1.
2
-
NE
1
Egres
s
3-
PEG8-
1
100 - - 101 - 18.1.1.
1

Table 6-7 Parameter planning for the UNI-NNI E-Line services carried by PWs
Parameter Parameter Planning
NE2 NE1
Service ID 1 1
Service Name E-Line-1 E-Line-1
Service Direction UNI-NNI UNI-NNI
BPDU Not Transparently Transmitted Not Transparently Transmitted
MTU (bytes) This parameter adopts the default
value.
This parameter adopts the default
value.
Source Port 7-EDQ41-1(PORT1)
NOTE
PORT1 corresponds to VCTRUNK1.
3-PEG8-1(PORT1)
NOTE
PORT1 corresponds to External Port
1.
Souce VLANs 100 100
Bearer Type PW PW
Protection Type Unprotected Unprotected

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 6 Configuring Cross-Domain Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
230
Table 6-8 Parameter planning for PWs
Parameter Parameter Planning
PW ID 1
PW Signaling Type Static
PW Type Ethernet Tagged Mode
Direction Bidirectional
PW Ingress Label 20
PW Egress Label 20
Tunnel Type MPLS
Tunnel NE2-NE1
Request VLAN 10

6.3.3 Configuration Process
Inter-domain services include EPL services in the TDM domain and PWE3 services in the packet
domain. It is easier to configure EPL services in the TDM domain and PWE3 services in the
packet domain in end-to-end mode than on a per-NE basis.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l Automatic Laser Shutdown of the optical port on the TDM domain is enabled.
Procedure
Step 1 Configure VC-4 server trails between NE2 and NE3.
1. Choose Service > SDH Trail > Create SDH Trail from the main menu. In the dialog box
that is displayed, set the following trail parameters:
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Level: VC4 Server Trail
l Other parameters: default settings
2. Click Browse and select NE3 as the source NE and select NE2 as the sink NE.
3. Click Calculate Route.
4. Click Apply.
5. Create the other VC-4 server trail by referring to Step 1.1-Step 1.4.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 6 Configuring Cross-Domain Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
231
NOTE
l If you select Calculate Route, the SDH trail is automatically computed after the source and sink NEs
are specified.
l After selecting Set Route Timeslot, you can specify timeslots for the SDH trail. Normally, the SDH
trail uses its default timeslots.
l If you select Activate the trail, the SDH trail is created on the NMS and deployed to the corresponding
NEs.
l If you select Copy after Creation, you can duplicate the created SDH trail to other timeslots.
Step 2 Create SDH cross-connections.
1. Choose Service > SDH Trail > Create SDH Trail from the main menu. In the dialog box
that is displayed, set the following trail parameters:
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Level: VC12
l Other parameters: default settings
2. Click Browse and select the source and sink timeslots.
l Source: NE3-2-EFS4-1(SDH-1)-VC4:4-VC12:1[1-1-1]
l Sink: NE2-7-EDQ41-5(SDH-5)-VC4:5-VC12:1[1-1-1]
3. Click Calculate Route.
4. Click Apply.
Step 3 Create trunk links between NE2 and NE3.
1. Choose Service > MSTP Trail > Create Trunk Link from the main menu. In the dialog
box that is displayed, set the following trunk link parameters:
l Bandwidth: 1
l Level: VC12
NOTE
The server trails have been created in Step 1. Therefore, you do not need to select Auto Create
Server Trail in this step.
2. Click Browse. In the dialog box that is displayed, select NE3 as the source NE; in the slot
layout view, select the 2-EFS4 board and then select VCTRUNK1.
3. Click Browse. In the dialog box that is displayed, select NE2 as the sink NE; in the slot
layout view, select the 7-EDQ41 board and then select VCTRUNK1.
4. Select Server Layer Trail.
5. Click Apply.
Step 4 Create an unterminated EPL service between NE2 and NE3.
1. Choose Service > MSTP Trail > Create Unterminated EPL from the main menu. Set
Port Usage Strategy of the EPL service to Port+VLAN.
2. Click Browse . Select NE3-2-EFS4-PORT1 as Port and select VLAN as 100.
3. Click Next and set parameters such as the port attribute and service name.
l Parameters for the EFS4 board external ports:
Port: PORT1
TAG: Tag Aware
Working Mode: Auto-Negotiating
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 6 Configuring Cross-Domain Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
232
l Parameters for the EFS4 board internal ports:
Port: VCTRUNK1
TAG: Tag Aware
l Name: EPL_01
Step 5 Follow the instructions in 9.4.3 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel in an End-to-End Mode and
configure a tunnel for carrying PWs.
Table 6-9 Basic attributes of a tunnel
Paramete
r
MPLS
Tunnel
name
MPLS
Tunnel
ID
Protocol
Type
Signalin
g Type
Direction Protected
Type
Parameter
Planning
NE2_NE1 10 MPLS Static CR Bidirectio
nal
Unprotect
ed

Table 6-10 Planning information of the tunnels
N
od
e
Nod
e
Type
In
Interf
ace
In
Label
Rever
se In
Label
Out
Interf
ace
Out
Label
Rever
se Out
Label
Next
Hop
Rever
se
Next
Hop
NE
2
Ingre
ss
- - 101 3-
PEG8-
1
100 - 18.1.1.
2
-
NE
1
Egres
s
3-
PEG8-
1
100 - - 101 - 18.1.1.
1

Step 6 Follow the instructions in 9.9.4 Configuring E-Line Services Carried by PWs in End-to-End
Mode and configure a PWE3 service.
Table 6-11 Basic attributes of a PWE3 service
Parameter Value in This Example
Service Type ETH
Service ID 1
Service Name E-Line-1
Protection Type UNprotected

Table 6-12 Parameters for PWE3 service ports
Parameter Value in This Example
Source Port 7-EDQ41-1
Sink Port 3-PEG8-3
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 6 Configuring Cross-Domain Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
233

Table 6-13 PW parameters
Parameter Value in This Example
PW ID 1
Signaling Type Static
Forward Label 20
Reverse Label 20
Forward Type Static Binding
Forward Tunnel NE2-NE1#1
Reverse Type Static Binding
Reverse Tunnel NE1-NE2#1
Encapsulation Type MPLS
Request VLAN 10

Step 7 Create a composite service.
1. Choose Service > Composite Service > Create Composite Service from the main menu.
Set Service Name of the composite service to EPL+PWE3_01.
2. In Service Component, click Select > EPL. In the Ethernet Trail Management dialog
box that is displayed, select the EPL service whose Name is EPL_01.
3. In Service Component, click Select > PWE3. In the Manage PWE3 Service dialog box
that is displayed, select the EPL service whose Service Name is E-Line-1.
4. In Connection Point, click Create > Interface. In the dialog box that is displayed, set
Type to PWE3+EPL.
5. In Interface Information List, select port information and click to add the port
information. Then, click OK.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 6 Configuring Cross-Domain Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
234
l EPL service:
Service Name: EPL_01
Service Type: EPL
l PWE3 service:
Service Name: E-Line-1
Service Type: PWE3
6. Click OK.
----End
Related Task
Follow the instructions in Testing Cross-domain Services to check whether services are
configured correctly.
6.4 Configuration Example (Application Scenario 2)
The EoS services from the TDM domain are received on the SDH line board, and then are
transmitted to the EoD board for processing before entering the packet domain.
6.4.1 Networking Diagram
By configuring services on the dual-domain bridging board, you can shift EoS services of the
line boards on the local NE to the packet domain and vice versa.
On a cross-domain network as shown in Figure 6-7, NE2 is the intersecting node of the TDM
domain and the packet domain. The EoS services are received on the SL1 board on NE2, and
are then converted through the EDQ41 board. In this manner, network communication is
achieved between the TDM domain and the packet domain.
l The NodeB receives 2 Mbit/s services, and transmits the services to the TDM domain.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 6 Configuring Cross-Domain Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
235
l The SL1 board receives the EoS services, and transmits the services to the EDQ41 board
for conversion.
l The EDQ41 board converges the services from the TDM domain, and transmits the services
to the packet domain.
Figure 6-7 Networking diagram of service conversion
NE1
NE2
NE3
RNC
NodeB
TDM domain
Packet domain
2-EFS4
11-SL1
7-EDQ41
(PORT5)
3-PEG8-1
3-PEG8-2 3-PEG8-2
3-PEG8-3
3-PEG8-1
8-SL1 11-SL1
8-SL1
12-EDQ41
(PORT5)

NE IP Address IP Mask LSR ID
NE1 3-PEG8-1 18.1.1.1 255.255.255.252 130.0.0.1
3-PEG8-2 18.1.2.1 255.255.255.252
NE2 3-PEG8-1 18.1.1.2 255.255.255.252 130.0.0.2
3-PEG8-2 18.1.2.2 255.255.255.252

NOTE
l The IP addresses of the Ethernet ports on an NE cannot be in the same network segment.
l The IP addresses of the ports at both ends of a link must be in the same network segment.
l PORT5 of the EDQ41 board in the figure corresponds to the internal port.
6.4.2 Service Planning
The engineering information of application scenario 2 includes parameters of the services on
the TDM domain and the packet domain.
As shown in Figure 6-8, application scenario 2 mainly involves the following parameters on
the TDM domain:
l Parameter planning for EPL services
l Parameter planning for binding paths on the EDQ41 board
l Parameter planning for SDH service cross-connections
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 6 Configuring Cross-Domain Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
236
Figure 6-8 Planning information of TDM service parameters
NodeB
NE3
NE2
TDM domain
EPL service
SNCP
EDQ41
(PORT5)
SDH service
cross-connection

Table 6-14 Parameter planning for EPL services
Parameter Parameter Planning
Board 2-EFS4
External Port PORT1
Internal Port VCTRUNK1
Level VC12
Bound Path VC4-4-VC12(1)
Type of Service EPL
Service Direction Bidirectional
Source Port PORT1
Source VLAN 100
Sink Port VCTRUNK1
Sink VLAN 100

Table 6-15 Parameter planning for SDH service cross-connections
Parameter NE3 NE2
Level VC12 VC12
Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional
Source Slot 8-SL1-1 (SDH-1) 11-SL1-1 (SDH-1)
Source VC4 1 1
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 6 Configuring Cross-Domain Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
237
Parameter NE3 NE2
Source Timeslot
Range(e.g. 1, 3-6)
1 1
Sink Slot 2-EFS4-1 (SDH-1) 7-EDQ41-5 (SDH-5)
NOTE
7-EDQ41-5 corresponds to
VCTRUNK1.
Sink VC4 1 1
Sink Timeslot Range
(e.g. 1, 3-6)
1 1

As shown in Figure 6-9, application scenario 2 mainly involves the following parameters on
the packet domain:
l Parameter planning for tunnels carrying PWs
l Parameter planning for the UNI-NNI E-Line services carried by PWs
Figure 6-9 Service parameter planning on the packet domain
NE2
NE1
RNC
Packet domain
UNI-NNI E-Line services
carried by PWs
MPLS tunnel

Table 6-16 Basic attributes of a tunnel
Paramete
r
MPLS
Tunnel
name
MPLS
Tunnel
ID
Protocol
Type
Signalin
g Type
Direction Protected
Type
Parameter
Planning
NE2_NE1 10 MPLS Static CR Bidirectio
nal
Unprotect
ed

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 6 Configuring Cross-Domain Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
238
Table 6-17 Planning information of the tunnels
N
od
e
Nod
e
Type
In
Interf
ace
In
Label
Rever
se In
Label
Out
Interf
ace
Out
Label
Rever
se Out
Label
Next
Hop
Rever
se
Next
Hop
NE
2
Ingre
ss
- - 101 3-
PEG8-
1
100 - 18.1.1.
2
-
NE
1
Egres
s
3-
PEG8-
1
100 - - 101 - 18.1.1.
1

Table 6-18 Parameter planning for the UNI-NNI E-Line services carried by PWs
Parameter Parameter Planning
NE2 NE1
Service ID 1 1
Service Name E-Line-1 E-Line-1
Service Direction UNI-NNI UNI-NNI
BPDU Not Transparently Transmitted Not Transparently Transmitted
MTU (bytes) This parameter adopts the default
value.
This parameter adopts the default
value.
Source Port 7-EDQ41-1(PORT1)
NOTE
PORT1 corresponds to VCTRUNK1.
3-PEG8-1(PORT1)
NOTE
PORT1 corresponds to External Port
1.
Souce VLANs 100 100
Bearer Type PW PW
Protection Type Unprotected Unprotected

Table 6-19 Parameter planning for PWs
Parameter Parameter Planning
PW ID 1
PW Signaling Type Static
PW Type Ethernet Tagged Mode
Direction Bidirectional
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 6 Configuring Cross-Domain Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
239
Parameter Parameter Planning
PW Ingress Label 20
PW Egress Label 20
Tunnel Type MPLS
Tunnel NE2-NE1
Request VLAN 10

6.4.3 Configuration Process
Inter-domain services include EPL services in the TDM domain and PWE3 services in the packet
domain. It is easier to configure EPL services in the TDM domain and PWE3 services in the
packet domain in end-to-end mode than on a per-NE basis.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l Automatic Laser Shutdown of the optical port on the TDM domain is enabled.
Procedure
Step 1 Configure VC-4 server trails between NE2 and NE3.
1. Choose Service > SDH Trail > Create SDH Trail from the main menu. In the dialog box
that is displayed, set the following trail parameters:
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Level: VC4 Server Trail
l Other parameters: default settings
2. Click Browse and select NE3 as the source NE and select NE2 as the sink NE.
3. Click Calculate Route.
4. Click Apply.
5. Create the other VC-4 server trail by referring to Step 1.1-Step 1.4.
NOTE
l If you select Calculate Route, the SDH trail is automatically computed after the source and sink NEs
are specified.
l After selecting Set Route Timeslot, you can specify timeslots for the SDH trail. Normally, the SDH
trail uses its default timeslots.
l If you select Activate the trail, the SDH trail is created on the NMS and deployed to the corresponding
NEs.
l If you select Copy after Creation, you can duplicate the created SDH trail to other timeslots.
Step 2 Create SDH cross-connections.
1. Choose Service > SDH Trail > Create SDH Trail from the main menu. In the dialog box
that is displayed, set the following trail parameters:
l Direction: Bidirectional
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 6 Configuring Cross-Domain Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
240
l Level: VC12
l Other parameters: default settings
2. Click Browse and select the source and sink timeslots.
l Source: NE3-2-EFS4-1(SDH-1)-VC4:4-VC12:1[1-1-1]
l Sink: NE2-7-EDQ41-5(SDH-5)-VC4:5-VC12:1[1-1-1]
3. Click Calculate Route.
4. Click Apply.
Step 3 Create trunk links between NE2 and NE3.
1. Choose Service > MSTP Trail > Create Trunk Link from the main menu. In the dialog
box that is displayed, set the following trunk link parameters:
l Bandwidth: 1
l Level: VC12
NOTE
The server trails have been created in Step 1. Therefore, you do not need to select Auto Create
Server Trail in this step.
2. Click Browse. In the dialog box that is displayed, select NE3 as the source NE; in the slot
layout view, select the 2-EFS4 board and then select VCTRUNK1.
3. Click Browse. In the dialog box that is displayed, select NE2 as the sink NE; in the slot
layout view, select the 7-EDQ41 board and then select VCTRUNK1.
4. Select Server Layer Trail.
5. Click Apply.
Step 4 Create an unterminated EPL service between NE2 and NE3.
1. Choose Service > MSTP Trail > Create Unterminated EPL from the main menu. Set
Port Usage Strategy of the EPL service to Port+VLAN.
2. Click Browse . Select NE3-2-EFS4-PORT1 as Port and select VLAN as 100.
3. Click Next and set parameters such as the port attribute and service name.
l Parameters for the EFS4 board external ports:
Port: PORT1
TAG: Tag Aware
Working Mode: Auto-Negotiating
l Parameters for the EFS4 board internal ports:
Port: VCTRUNK1
TAG: Tag Aware
l Name: EPL_01
Step 5 Follow the instructions in 9.4.3 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel in an End-to-End Mode and
configure a tunnel for carrying PWs.
Table 6-20 Basic attributes of a tunnel
Paramete
r
MPLS
Tunnel
name
MPLS
Tunnel
ID
Protocol
Type
Signalin
g Type
Direction Protected
Type
Parameter
Planning
NE2_NE1 10 MPLS Static CR Bidirectio
nal
Unprotect
ed
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 6 Configuring Cross-Domain Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
241

Table 6-21 Planning information of the tunnels
N
od
e
Nod
e
Type
In
Interf
ace
In
Label
Rever
se In
Label
Out
Interf
ace
Out
Label
Rever
se Out
Label
Next
Hop
Rever
se
Next
Hop
NE
2
Ingre
ss
- - 101 3-
PEG8-
1
100 - 18.1.1.
2
-
NE
1
Egres
s
3-
PEG8-
1
100 - - 101 - 18.1.1.
1

Step 6 Follow the instructions in 9.9.4 Configuring E-Line Services Carried by PWs in End-to-End
Mode and configure a PWE3 service.
Table 6-22 Basic attributes of a PWE3 service
Parameter Value in This Example
Service Type ETH
Service ID 1
Service Name E-Line-1
Protection Type UNprotected

Table 6-23 Parameters for PWE3 service ports
Parameter Value in This Example
Source Port 7-EDQ41-1
Sink Port 3-PEG8-3

Table 6-24 PW parameters
Parameter Value in This Example
PW ID 1
Signaling Type Static
Forward Label 20
Reverse Label 20
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 6 Configuring Cross-Domain Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
242
Parameter Value in This Example
Forward Type Static Binding
Forward Tunnel NE2-NE1#1
Reverse Type Static Binding
Reverse Tunnel NE1-NE2#1
Encapsulation Type MPLS
Request VLAN 10

Step 7 Create a composite service.
1. Choose Service > Composite Service > Create Composite Service from the main menu.
Set Service Name of the composite service to EPL+PWE3_01.
2. In Service Component, click Select > EPL. In the Ethernet Trail Management dialog
box that is displayed, select the EPL service whose Name is EPL_01.
3. In Service Component, click Select > PWE3. In the Manage PWE3 Service dialog box
that is displayed, select the EPL service whose Service Name is E-Line-1.
4. In Connection Point, click Create > Interface. In the dialog box that is displayed, set
Type to PWE3+EPL.
5. In Interface Information List, select port information and click to add the port
information. Then, click OK.
l EPL service:
Service Name: EPL_01
Service Type: EPL
l PWE3 service:
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 6 Configuring Cross-Domain Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
243
Service Name: E-Line-1
Service Type: PWE3
6. Click OK.
----End
Related Task
Follow the instructions in Testing Cross-domain Services to check whether services are
configured correctly.
6.5 Configuration Example (Application Scenario 3)
The SDH services (including the pure SDH service and EoS service) from the TDM domain are
processed on the EoD board. Then, pure SDH services are transmitted to the TDM domain, and
EoS services are transmitted to the packet domain.
6.5.1 Networking Diagram
By configuring services on the dual-domain bridging board EDQ41, the hybrid services from
the line boards (on the local NE or not) are distributed and transmitted to the packet domain and
TDM domain.
On a cross-domain network as shown in Figure 6-10, NE2 is the intersecting node of the TDM
domain and the packet domain. On NE2, the hybrid services from the SL4 board on NE1 are
distributed on the EDQ41 board, and are then transmitted to the packet domain and TDM domain.
l NodeB1 receives 2 Mbit/s data services, and NodeB2 receives 2 Mbit/s voice services.
Then, the services are transmitted to the TDM domain through NE3.
l The EDQ41 board distributes the hybrid services from the TDM domain.
The data services from NodeB1 are transmitted to the packet domain, and arrive at
RNC1.
The voice services from NodeB2 are transmitted to another TDM domain through the
line board, and arrive at RNC2.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 6 Configuring Cross-Domain Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
244
Figure 6-10 Networking diagram of cross-domain services
NE1
RNC2
Packet domain
3-PEG8-1
3-PEG8-2
3-PEG8-2
3-PEG8-3
3-PEG8-1
7-EDQ41-1
8-SL4
2-EFS4-1
NodeB1
3-PQ1
8-SL4
TDM domain
7-SL4
NE3
NE4
12-EDQ41-1
11-SL4
11-SL4
11-SL4
FE
E1
NodeB2
7-SL4
NE2
TDM domain
RNC1

NE IP Address IP Mask LSR ID
NE1 3-PEG8-1 18.1.1.1 255.255.255.252 130.0.0.1
3-PEG8-2 18.1.2.1 255.255.255.252
NE2 3-PEG8-1 18.1.1.2 255.255.255.252 130.0.0.2
3-PEG8-2 18.1.2.2 255.255.255.252

NOTE
l The IP addresses of the Ethernet ports on an NE cannot be in the same network segment.
l The IP addresses of the ports at both ends of a link must be in the same network segment.
6.5.2 Service Planning
The engineering information of application scenario 3 includes parameters of the services on
the TDM domain and the packet domain.
As shown in Figure 6-11, application scenario 3 mainly involves the following parameters
configure the services from NodeB1 on the TDM domain:
l Parameter planning for EPL services
l Parameter planning for binding paths on the EDQ41 board
l Parameter planning for SDH service cross-connections
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 6 Configuring Cross-Domain Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
245
Figure 6-11 Planning information of configure the services from NodeB1 on TDM domain
parameters
EDQ41
bound paths
NodeB1
NE3
NE2
TDM domain
EPL service
SDH service
cross-connections
EDQ41
(PORT5)

Table 6-25 Parameter planning for EPL services
Parameter Parameter Planning
Board 2-EFS4
External Port PORT1
Internal Port VCTRUNK1
Level VC12
Bound Path VC4-4-VC12(1)
Type of Service EPL
Service Direction Bidirectional
Source Port PORT1
Source VLAN 100
Sink Port VCTRUNK1
Sink VLAN 100

Table 6-26 Parameter planning for binding paths on the EDQ41 board
Parameter Parameter Planning
Board 7-EDQ41
Configurable Ports VCTRUNK1
Level VC12
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 6 Configuring Cross-Domain Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
246
Parameter Parameter Planning
Bound Path VC4-5-VC12(1)

Table 6-27 Parameter planning for SDH service cross-connections
Parameter Service Planning
Level VC-12 VC-12
Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional
Source Slot 7-SL4-1 (SDH-1) 7-EDQ41-1 (SDH-1)
Source VC4 1 1
Source Timeslot Range
(e.g. 1, 3-6)
1 1
Sink Slot 2-EFS4-1 (SDH-1) 7-EDQ41-5 (SDH-5)
NOTE
7-EDQ41-5 corresponds to
VCTRUNK1.
Sink VC4 1 1
Sink Timeslot Range
(e.g. 1, 3-6)
1 1

As shown in Figure 6-12, application scenario 3 mainly involves the following parameters on
the TDM domain:
l Parameter planning for SNCP services
l Parameter planning for SDH service cross-connections
Figure 6-12 Planning information of configure the services from NodeB2 on TDM domain
parameters
RNC2
NE3
NE2
TDM domain
SNCP
SDH service
cross-connections
NodeB2
SDH service
NE4
SNCP
SDH service
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 6 Configuring Cross-Domain Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
247

Table 6-28 Parameter planning for SNCP services (optional)
Parameter NE3 NE4
Parameter Value of the
Service from NodeB2
Parameter Value of the
Service from the RNC
Type of Service SNCP SNCP
Service Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional
Level VC-12 VC-12
Hold-off Time(100ms) 0 0
Revertive Mode Non-Revertive Non-Revertive
WTR Time (s) - -
Working
Service
Source Slot 7-SL4-1(SDH-1) 8-SL4-1(SDH-2)
Source VC4 1 1
Source Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)
2 1
Protectio
n Service
Source Slot 11-SL4-1(SDH-1) 11-SL4-1(SDH-2)
Source VC4 1 1
Source Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)
1 1
Sink Slot 3-PQ1(SDH-1) 7-SL4-1(SDH-1)
Sink VC4 1 1
Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) 1 1

Table 6-29 Parameter planning for SDH service cross-connections
Parameter Service Planning
Level VC-12 VC-12
Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional
Source Slot 7-EDQ41-1 (SDH-1) 12-EDQ41-1 (SDH-1)
Source VC4 1 1
Source Timeslot Range
(e.g. 1, 3-6)
2 1
Sink Slot 8-SL4-1 (SDH-1) 11-SL4-1 (SDH-1)
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 6 Configuring Cross-Domain Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
248
Parameter Service Planning
Sink VC4 1 1
Sink Timeslot Range
(e.g. 1, 3-6)
1 1

As shown in Figure 6-13, application scenario 3 mainly involves the following parameters on
the packet domain:
l Parameter planning for tunnels carrying PWs
l Parameter planning for the UNI-NNI E-Line services carried by PWs
Figure 6-13 Service parameter planning on the packet domain
NE2
NE1
RNC
Packet domain
UNI-NNI E-Line services
carried by PWs
MPLS tunnel

Table 6-30 Basic attributes of a tunnel
Paramete
r
MPLS
Tunnel
name
MPLS
Tunnel
ID
Protocol
Type
Signalin
g Type
Direction Protected
Type
Parameter
Planning
NE2_NE1 10 MPLS Static CR Bidirectio
nal
Unprotect
ed

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 6 Configuring Cross-Domain Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
249
Table 6-31 Planning information of the tunnels
N
od
e
Nod
e
Type
In
Interf
ace
In
Label
Rever
se In
Label
Out
Interf
ace
Out
Label
Rever
se Out
Label
Next
Hop
Rever
se
Next
Hop
NE
2
Ingre
ss
- - 101 3-
PEG8-
1
100 - 18.1.1.
2
-
NE
1
Egres
s
3-
PEG8-
1
100 - - 101 - 18.1.1.
1

Table 6-32 Parameter planning for the UNI-NNI E-Line services carried by PWs
Parameter Parameter Planning
NE2 NE1
Service ID 1 1
Service Name E-Line-1 E-Line-1
Service Direction UNI-NNI UNI-NNI
BPDU Not Transparently Transmitted Not Transparently Transmitted
MTU (bytes) This parameter adopts the default
value.
This parameter adopts the default
value.
Source Port 7-EDQ41-1(PORT1)
NOTE
PORT1 corresponds to VCTRUNK1.
3-PEG8-1(PORT1)
NOTE
PORT1 corresponds to External Port
1.
Souce VLANs 100 100
Bearer Type PW PW
Protection Type Unprotected Unprotected

Table 6-33 Parameter planning for PWs
Parameter Parameter Planning
PW ID 1
PW Signaling Type Static
PW Type Ethernet Tagged Mode
Direction Bidirectional
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 6 Configuring Cross-Domain Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
250
Parameter Parameter Planning
PW Ingress Label 20
PW Egress Label 20
Tunnel Type MPLS
Tunnel NE2-NE1
Request VLAN 10

6.5.3 Configuration Process
Inter-domain services include EPL services in the TDM domain and PWE3 services in the packet
domain. It is easier to configure EPL services in the TDM domain and PWE3 services in the
packet domain in end-to-end mode than on a per-NE basis.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l Automatic Laser Shutdown of the optical port on the TDM domain is enabled.
NOTE
This topic describes the end-to-end configuration process of cross-domain services. The configuration
process for E1 services from NodeB2 is simple and therefore not described here.
Procedure
Step 1 Configure VC-4 server trails between NE2 and NE3.
1. Choose Service > SDH Trail > Create SDH Trail from the main menu. In the dialog box
that is displayed, set the following trail parameters:
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Level: VC4 Server Trail
l Other parameters: default settings
2. Click Browse and select NE3 as the source NE and select NE2 as the sink NE.
3. Click Calculate Route.
4. Click Apply.
5. Create the other VC-4 server trail by referring to Step 1.1-Step 1.4.
NOTE
l If you select Calculate Route, the SDH trail is automatically computed after the source and sink NEs
are specified.
l After selecting Set Route Timeslot, you can specify timeslots for the SDH trail. Normally, the SDH
trail uses its default timeslots.
l If you select Activate the trail, the SDH trail is created on the NMS and deployed to the corresponding
NEs.
l If you select Copy after Creation, you can duplicate the created SDH trail to other timeslots.
Step 2 Create SDH cross-connections.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 6 Configuring Cross-Domain Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
251
1. Choose Service > SDH Trail > Create SDH Trail from the main menu. In the dialog box
that is displayed, set the following trail parameters:
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Level: VC12
l Other parameters: default settings
2. Click Browse and select the source and sink timeslots.
l Source: NE3-2-EFS4-1(SDH-1)-VC4:4-VC12:1[1-1-1]
l Sink: NE2-7-EDQ41-5(SDH-5)-VC4:5-VC12:1[1-1-1]
3. Click Calculate Route.
4. Click Apply.
Step 3 Create trunk links between NE2 and NE3.
1. Choose Service > MSTP Trail > Create Trunk Link from the main menu. In the dialog
box that is displayed, set the following trunk link parameters:
l Bandwidth: 1
l Level: VC12
NOTE
The server trails have been created in Step 1. Therefore, you do not need to select Auto Create
Server Trail in this step.
2. Click Browse. In the dialog box that is displayed, select NE3 as the source NE; in the slot
layout view, select the 2-EFS4 board and then select VCTRUNK1.
3. Click Browse. In the dialog box that is displayed, select NE2 as the sink NE; in the slot
layout view, select the 7-EDQ41 board and then select VCTRUNK1.
4. Select Server Layer Trail.
5. Click Apply.
Step 4 Create an unterminated EPL service between NE2 and NE3.
1. Choose Service > MSTP Trail > Create Unterminated EPL from the main menu. Set
Port Usage Strategy of the EPL service to Port+VLAN.
2. Click Browse . Select NE3-2-EFS4-PORT1 as Port and select VLAN as 100.
3. Click Next and set parameters such as the port attribute and service name.
l Parameters for the EFS4 board external ports:
Port: PORT1
TAG: Tag Aware
Working Mode: Auto-Negotiating
l Parameters for the EFS4 board internal ports:
Port: VCTRUNK1
TAG: Tag Aware
l Name: EPL_01
Step 5 Follow the instructions in 9.4.3 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel in an End-to-End Mode and
configure a tunnel for carrying PWs.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 6 Configuring Cross-Domain Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
252
Table 6-34 Basic attributes of a tunnel
Paramete
r
MPLS
Tunnel
name
MPLS
Tunnel
ID
Protocol
Type
Signalin
g Type
Direction Protected
Type
Parameter
Planning
NE2_NE1 10 MPLS Static CR Bidirectio
nal
Unprotect
ed

Table 6-35 Planning information of the tunnels
N
od
e
Nod
e
Type
In
Interf
ace
In
Label
Rever
se In
Label
Out
Interf
ace
Out
Label
Rever
se Out
Label
Next
Hop
Rever
se
Next
Hop
NE
2
Ingre
ss
- - 101 3-
PEG8-
1
100 - 18.1.1.
2
-
NE
1
Egres
s
3-
PEG8-
1
100 - - 101 - 18.1.1.
1

Step 6 Follow the instructions in 9.9.4 Configuring E-Line Services Carried by PWs in End-to-End
Mode and configure a PWE3 service.
Table 6-36 Basic attributes of a PWE3 service
Parameter Value in This Example
Service Type ETH
Service ID 1
Service Name E-Line-1
Protection Type UNprotected

Table 6-37 Parameters for PWE3 service ports
Parameter Value in This Example
Source Port 7-EDQ41-1
Sink Port 3-PEG8-3

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 6 Configuring Cross-Domain Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
253
Table 6-38 PW parameters
Parameter Value in This Example
PW ID 1
Signaling Type Static
Forward Label 20
Reverse Label 20
Forward Type Static Binding
Forward Tunnel NE2-NE1#1
Reverse Type Static Binding
Reverse Tunnel NE1-NE2#1
Encapsulation Type MPLS
Request VLAN 10

Step 7 Create a composite service.
1. Choose Service > Composite Service > Create Composite Service from the main menu.
Set Service Name of the composite service to EPL+PWE3_01.
2. In Service Component, click Select > EPL. In the Ethernet Trail Management dialog
box that is displayed, select the EPL service whose Name is EPL_01.
3. In Service Component, click Select > PWE3. In the Manage PWE3 Service dialog box
that is displayed, select the EPL service whose Service Name is E-Line-1.
4. In Connection Point, click Create > Interface. In the dialog box that is displayed, set
Type to PWE3+EPL.
5. In Interface Information List, select port information and click to add the port
information. Then, click OK.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 6 Configuring Cross-Domain Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
254
l EPL service:
Service Name: EPL_01
Service Type: EPL
l PWE3 service:
Service Name: E-Line-1
Service Type: PWE3
6. Click OK.
----End
Related Task
Follow the instructions in Testing Cross-domain Services to check whether services are
configured correctly.
6.6 Testing Cross-domain Services
Cross-domain services refer to the services that are transmitted from the TDM domain to the
packet domain by using the EoD board. After configuring cross-domain services, you need to
test whether the configuration is correct.
Based on the functions of the EoD board in cross-domain services, cross-domain services can
be applied in the following scenarios:
l Application 1
The EoD board receives and processes the EoS services from the TDM domain and then
transmits the services to the packet domain. For details, see 6.3 Configuration Example
(Application Scenario 1).
l Application 2
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 6 Configuring Cross-Domain Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
255
The SDH line board receives the EoS services from the TDM domain. Then, the EoD board
processes the EoS services and transmits them to the packet domain. For details, see 6.4
Configuration Example (Application Scenario 2).
l Application 3
The EoD board receives and processes the SDH services from the TDM domain (including
pure SDH services and EoS services) and then transmits the pure SDH services to the TDM
domain and the EoS services to the packet domain. For details, see 6.5 Configuration
Example (Application Scenario 3).
l Application 4
When functioning as a common line board, the EoD board receives and processes the SDH
services (including pure SDH services and EoS services) from the TDM domain, but does
not transmit the services to the packet domain.
You can test cross-domain services by using the following two methods.
Test Method Application Scope
Using the ping
commands to test cross-
domain service channels
This method is simple because it does not require any instrument
or meter. Use this method to check the status of cross-domain
service channels.
Using loopbacks to test
cross-domain service
channels
This method requires the Network Analyzer. Use this method to
measure the packet loss ratio on cross-domain service channels.

6.6.1 Using the Ping Commands to Test Cross-domain Services
For the cross-domain services, you can connect the test computers at both of the services and
use the ping commands to test the cross-domain service channels.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l The services are configured according to actual situations. For details, see 6 Configuring
Cross-Domain Services in the Configuration Guide.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
Two computers with Windows operating system installed
Test Connection Diagram
NOTE
The methods for testing various cross-domain services are the same. This section describes only a general-
purpose test model.
Figure 6-14 shows how to test the cross-domain service channels.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 6 Configuring Cross-Domain Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
256
Figure 6-14 Connection diagram for testing cross-domain service channels
NE1 NE2 NE3
TDM
domain
Packet
domain
PC 1
EDQ41
PC 2
OptiX OSN 7500
OptiX OSN 3500
OptiX OSN 1500 NE3
NE2
NE1

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the network port of the PC to the Ethernet service port of the equipment according to
the previous connection diagram.
Step 2 Set the IP addresses for PC 1 and PC 2. The two IP addresses must be set in the same network
section.
l Set the IP address for PC 1.
IP address: 192.168.0.100
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
l Set the IP address for PC 2.
IP address: 192.168.0.101
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Step 3 Choose Start > Run on PC 1 to display a dialog box. Enter the ping command: ping
192.168.0.101 -n 20000 -l 64 -t.
NOTE
Parameters for the Ping command:
l -n Num: transit Num packets to the PC at the opposite end
l -l Num: transmit buffer capacity is Num bytes
l -t: continuously transmit ping packets
Step 4 Click OK to run the ping command.
l A window is displayed to provide the feedback "Reply from 192.168.0.101: bytes=64
time=1ms TTL=255". This information indicates the Ethernet channel is normal.
l If the displayed window provides the feedback Request timed out, it indicates that the
Ethernet channel is abnormal. Check the network cable connection and the configuration of
the Ethernet service. Rectify the fault, and then continue the test.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 6 Configuring Cross-Domain Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
257
NOTE
The values of time and TTL are associated with the actual test environment. The value discrepancy is
normal.
----End
6.6.2 Using Loopbacks to Test Cross-domain Services
To test cross-domain service channels, you can perform a loopback on the access side of cross-
domain services and test whether packet loss occurs on the convergence side by using a Network
Analyzer.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l Cross-domain services are configured according to actual situations. For details, see 6
Configuring Cross-Domain Services in the Configuration Guide.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
Network Analyzer, U2000
Test Connection Diagram
Figure 6-15 shows how to test cross-domain service channels.
Figure 6-15 Connection diagram for testing cross-domain service channels
NE1 NE2 NE3
TDM
domain
Packet
domain
EDQ41
OptiX OSN 7500
OptiX OSN 3500
OptiX OSN 1500 NE3
NE2
NE1
MAC inloop
SmartBits
2-EFS4-1
3-PEG8-3
NOTE
An inloop at the MAC layer is performed at the 2-EFS4-1 port on NE3. A SmartBits is connected to the
3-PEG8-3 port on NE1. In actual situations, you can select different ports at the access node and the
convergence node and perform a test similarly.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 6 Configuring Cross-Domain Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
258
Context
CAUTION
l Ensure that only the commissioning engineers are present during the test.
l Do not touch optical fibers, wires, or cables without permission.
Procedure
Step 1 Connect a SmartBits to the 3-PEG8-3 port on NE1 according to the connection diagram.
Step 2 Log in to the U2000. Start the 15-minute and 24-hour performance monitoring for NE1 and
NE3. For details, see Enabling, Disabling and Setting Performance Monitoring of the NE.
NOTE
The performance monitoring is set to analyze and locate faults that occur during the test.
Step 3 Log in to the U2000. Perform an inloop at the MAC layer on the 2-EFS4-1 port of NE3. For
details, see Setting a Loopback on an Ethernet Port.
Step 4 Use the SmartBits to transmit and receive packets.
NOTE
l Packets with all 0s are regarded as special packets. Therefore, do not use packets of all 0s for testing
transmitted and received packets.
l When the SmartBits transmits and receives packets for the first time, packet loss occurs due to MAC
address learning. Therefore, it is normal that the number of transmitted packets is different from the
number of received packets.
l In the tests after the first time, if the number of transmitted packets is the same as the number of received
packets, the cross-domain service channels are normal.
l If packet loss occurs during the tests, troubleshoot the fault and then perform 24-hour tests until the
channels pass the tests.
----End
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 6 Configuring Cross-Domain Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
259
7 Configuring CES Services
About This Chapter
The circuit emulation service (CES) function supports direct access of TDM E1 services to the
packet domain. Therefore, the CES function helps achieve smooth evolution from the TDM
domain to the packet domain.
7.1 Introduction to CES
CES: By using the PWE3 technology, PWE3 packet headers are added to TDM traffic to create
circuit emulation services (CES). PWE3 packet headers carry the frame format information,
alarm information, signaling information, and synchronization and timing information of the
TDM traffic. The encapsulated PW packets are transmitted over the MPLS tunnel on the PSN.
After being decapsulated at the PW egress, the TDM circuit switched service traffic is re-created.
On a packet switching network, the transmit and receive ends of a CES service maintain clock
synchronization by means of adaptive clock recovery (ACR).
7.2 Configuration Flow for the CES Services
The configuration flow varies according to the types of the CES services.
7.3 Configuration Example (UNI-UNI CES Services)
This topic uses an example to describe how to configure UNI-UNI CES services.
7.4 Configuration Example (UNI-NNI CES Services)
This topic uses an example to describe how to configure UNI-NNI CES services.
7.5 Verifying CES Service Configuration
After configuring a CES service, you need to verify whether the service configuration is correct.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 7 Configuring CES Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
260
7.1 Introduction to CES
CES: By using the PWE3 technology, PWE3 packet headers are added to TDM traffic to create
circuit emulation services (CES). PWE3 packet headers carry the frame format information,
alarm information, signaling information, and synchronization and timing information of the
TDM traffic. The encapsulated PW packets are transmitted over the MPLS tunnel on the PSN.
After being decapsulated at the PW egress, the TDM circuit switched service traffic is re-created.
On a packet switching network, the transmit and receive ends of a CES service maintain clock
synchronization by means of adaptive clock recovery (ACR).
Emulation Mode
The OptiX NG-SDH series equipment supports two types of CES services: structure-aware TDM
circuit emulation service over packet switched network (CESoPSN) CES and structure-agnostic
TDM over packet (SAToP) CES.
In the case of CESoPSN CES:
l The equipment senses the frame format, frame alignment mode, and timeslot information
in the TDM circuit.
l The equipment processes the overheads and extracts the payloads in TDM frames. Then,
the equipment loads timeslots to the packet payload in a certain sequence. As a result, the
services in each timeslot are fixed and visible in packets.
In the case of SAToP CES:
l The equipment does not sense any format in the TDM signal. Instead, it considers TDM
signals as bit flows at a constant rate, and therefore the entire bandwidth of TDM signals
is emulated.
l The overheads and payloads in TDM signals are transparently transmitted.
Service Type
CES services are classified into UNI-UNI CES services and UNI-UNI CES services by service
implementation point.
l UNI-UNI CES services
As shown in Figure 7-1, a single OptiX OSN NE completes access of TDM services.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 7 Configuring CES Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
261
Figure 7-1 UNI-UNI CES services
BTS
BSC
TDM link
NE
PSN
Channelized STM link

l UNI-NNI CES services
As shown in Figure 7-2, the OptiX OSN NEs support UNI-NNI CES services. In the case
of a UNI-NNI CES service, the OptiX OSN NEs access customer TDM services through
E1 ports or STM-1 ports; CES PWs are created between the OptiX OSN NEs to emulate
end-to-end TDM services.
Figure 7-2 UNI-NNI CES services
BTS
BSC
BTS
TDM link
NE
NE
NE
PSN
Tunnel
PW

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 7 Configuring CES Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
262
7.2 Configuration Flow for the CES Services
The configuration flow varies according to the types of the CES services.
7.2.1 Configuration Flow for UNI-UNI CES Services
This topic describes the operation tasks for configuring UNI-UNI CES services and the
relationships between the operations tasks.
Table 7-1 provides the process for configuring UNI-UNI CES services.
Figure 7-3 Configuration flow for UNI-UNI CES services
2. Configure CES
service ports
3. Configure UNI-
UNI CES services
Required
End
1. Create the
network
Start

Table 7-1 Configuration flow for UNI-UNI CES services
Ste
p
Operation Remarks
1 Creating the
network
Create NEs, configure NE data, create optical fibers, and configure
clocks.
2 Configuring
CES service
ports
Required.
l 9.2.1 Configuring Channelized STM-1 Ports
l 9.2.2 Configuring E1 Ports
Use the CES board to support access of base station services.
3 Configuring
UNI-UNI CES
services
Required.
Set the service ID, service name, service source, and service sink.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 7 Configuring CES Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
263
7.2.2 Configuration Flow for the UNI-NNI CES Services
This topic describes the operation tasks for configuring UNI-NNI CES services and the
relationships between the operations tasks.
Table 7-2 provides the process for configuring UNI-NNI CES services.
Figure 7-4 Configuration flow for UNI-NNI CES services
2. Configure the LSR
IDs of NEs
6. Configure UNI-NNI
CES services
5. Configure CES
service ports
Start
Required
Optional
End
1. Create the network
3. Configure the NNIs
on the packet domain
4. Configure the MPLS
tunnels

Table 7-2 Configuration flow for UNI-NNI CES services
St
ep
Operation Remarks
1 Creating the network Create NEs, configure NE data, create optical fibers, and
configure clocks.
2 Configuring the LSR ID -
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 7 Configuring CES Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
264
St
ep
Operation Remarks
3 Configuring the NNI
ports on the packet
domain
Required.
l Set the general attributes of Ethernet ports.
l Set the Layer 3 attributes of Ethernet ports, including
tunnel enabled status and IP address.
This operation task is performed so that the NNI ports on
the packet domain can carry tunnels.
4 Configuri
ng MPLS
tunnels
Configurin
g an MPLS
Tunnel
(Required) The parameters need to be set according to the
service planning information. For details on how to manage
MPLS tunnels, see 9.5 Managing MPLS Tunnels.
Configurin
g MPLS
OAM
(Optional) The parameters are set as follows:
l OAM Status is set to Enabled.
l Detection Mode is set to Manual.
l Detection Packet Type is set to FFD.
l Detection Packet Period(ms) is set to 3.3.
Configurin
g MPLS
Tunnel APS
(Optional) Set the MPLS tunnel APS parameters according
to the service planning information. For details on how to
manage MPLS tunnel APS protection groups, see 9.8
Managing MPLS Tunnel APS Protection Groups.
5 Configuring CES service
ports
Required.
l 9.2.1 Configuring Channelized STM-1 Ports
l 9.2.2 Configuring E1 Ports
Use the CES board to support access of base station
services.
6 Configuring UNI-NNI
CES services
Required.
1. Create CES services, that is, set the service ID and
service name.
2. Set the source and sink information, that is, set the source
and sink boards and channels.
3. Configure PWs, that is, set information such as the PW
type, Protection Type, PW label, and tunnel type.
4. Set the advanced attributes, including the RTP head,
jitter buffer time and packet loading time.
NOTE
You can selectively configure MPLS PW APS according to the
service planning information. MPLS tunnel APS and MPLS PW
APS cannot be configured for the same service. Therefore, do not
configure MPLS PW APS if you already configure MPLS tunnel
APS.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 7 Configuring CES Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
265
7.3 Configuration Example (UNI-UNI CES Services)
This topic uses an example to describe how to configure UNI-UNI CES services.
7.3.1 Networking Diagram
This topic describes the networking diagram of UNI-UNI CES services.
As shown in Figure 7-5, an OptiX OSN 3500 is used to support access of CES services between
the two BTSs and the BSC. One CES service is configured between BTS1 and the BSC and one
CES service is configured between BTS2 and the BSC.
Figure 7-5 Networking diagram of UNI-UNI CES services
TDM link
BSC
BTS1
NE 1
BTS2
23-MD75
35-MD75
21-CQ1-1
21-CQ1-2
NOTE
This topic considers the OptiX OSN 3500 as an example to describe the board layout. The methods of
configuring other products are the same as the method of configuring the OptiX OSN 3500, except that
the board layout may be different. For the slot information, see the Hardware Description of the specific
product.

7.3.2 Service Planning
The service planning information contains all the parameters required for configuring the NE
data.
A UNI-UNI CES service is generally configured to implement access of base station services
and transmission of base station services to the BSC. As shown in Figure 7-5, two CES services
are configured between the two BTSs and the BSC in this example.
Table 7-3 lists the planned parameters of NE1 and their values.
Table 7-3 UNI-UNI CES parameters (NE1)
Parameter Value
NE NE1 NE1
Service ID 1 2
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 7 Configuring CES Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
266
Parameter Value
Service Name CES1 CES2
Level E1 E1
Mode UNI-UNI UNI-UNI
Source Board 23-MD75 35-MD75
Source High Channel - -
Source Low Channel 1 1
Source 64K Timeslot - -
Sink Board 21-CQ1-1 21-CQ1-2
Sink High Channel VC4-1 VC4-1
Sink Low Channel 1 1
Sink 64K Timeslot - -

7.3.3 Configuration Process
This topic describes how to configure UNI-UNI CES services on a per-NE basis.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l You must be familiar with the service requirements and service planning information of
the example network.
l The network must be created, the equipment must operate properly, and the equipment
must communicate with the NMS normally.
Procedure
Step 1 Configure the channelized STM-1 ports, including the BTS-side PDH port and BSC-side
channelized STM-1 port.
1. Configure the BTS-side PDH port.
a. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > Packet
Configuration > Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree.
Then, configure the BTS-side port.
b. Select 23-N1MD75-(E1-1) and 35-N1MD75-(E1-1), and set associated parameters
according to the actual requirements.
Table 7-4 BTS-side port
Parameter Value in This Example
Port 23-N1MD75-(E1-1) 35-N1MD75-(E1-1)
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 7 Configuring CES Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
267
Parameter Value in This Example
Name port1 port2
Port Mode Layer 1 Layer 1
Frame Format Unframe Unframe

c. Click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the
operation is successful. Click Close.
2. Configure the BSC-side channelized STM-1 port.
a. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > Packet
Configuration > Interface Management > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.
Then, configure the BSC-side port.
b. Select 21-CQ1-1(PORT-1) and 21-CQ1-2(PORT-2), and set associated parameters
according to the actual requirements.
Table 7-5 BSC-side port
Parameter Value in This Example
Port 21-CQ1-1(PORT-1) 21-CQ1-2(PORT-2)
Name port1 port2
Laser Interface Enabling
Status
Open Open
Frame Format Unframe Unframe

c. Click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the
operation is successful. Click Close.
Step 2 Create the CES1 service.
1. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > Packet Configuration
> CES Service Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click New. Set the parameters of CES1 according to the service planning information.
Table 7-6 CES1 service parameters
Parameter Value in This Example
Service ID 1
Service Name CES1
Level E1
Mode UNI-UNI
Source Board 23-N1MD75
Source High Channel -
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 7 Configuring CES Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
268
Parameter Value in This Example
Source Low Channel 1
Source 64K Timeslot -
Sink Board 21-CQ1-1(PORT1-1)
Sink High Channel VC4-1
Sink Low Channel 1
Sink 64K Timeslot -

3. Click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation
is successful. Click Close.
Step 3 Create the CES2 service.
1. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > Packet Configuration
> CES Service Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click New. Set the parameters of CES2 according to the service planning information.
Table 7-7 CES2 service parameters
Parameter Value in This Example
Service ID 2
Service Name CES2
Level E1
Mode UNI-UNI
Source Board 35-N1MD75
Source High Channel -
Source Low Channel 1
Source 64K Timeslot -
Sink Board 21-CQ1-2(PORT1-2)
Sink High Channel VC4-1
Sink Low Channel 1
Sink 64K Timeslot -

3. Click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation
is successful. Click Close.
----End
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 7 Configuring CES Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
269
7.4 Configuration Example (UNI-NNI CES Services)
This topic uses an example to describe how to configure UNI-NNI CES services.
7.4.1 Networking Diagram
This topic describes the networking diagram of UNI-NNI CES services.
As shown in Figure 7-6, the service requirements on the network are as follows:
l BTS1, BTS2, and the BSC need to access the PSN through CES boards.
l BTS1 and BTS2 need to communicate with the BSC. The services on BTS1 and BTS2 need
to be isolated from each other.
l One E1 service from BTS1 and one E1 service from BTS2 need to be transmitted through
the 19-MD75 on NE1 to the PSN.
l E1 services from the BSC need also be transmitted through the 21-CQ1 board on NE1 to
the PSN.
Figure 7-6 Networking diagram of UNI-NNI CES services
BTS2
BSC
BTS1
TDM link
NE1
NE 2
NE3
PSN
Tunnel
PW
3-PEG8-1
3-PEG8-1
19-MD75
19-MD75
3-PEG8-1
3-PEG8-2
21-CQ1-2
21-CQ1-1
NOTE
l This section uses the OptiX OSN 3500 as an example to describe the board layout. The methods of
configuring other products are the same as the method of configuring the OptiX OSN 3500, except that
the board layout may be different. For the slot information, see the Hardware Description of the specific
product.
l On a live data network, an Ethernet service is added to its source NE, passed through on its transit NEs,
and dropped from its sink NE. For details on how to configure transit NEs for CES services, see 9.14
Configuring Transit NEs for CES Services.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 7 Configuring CES Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
270
7.4.2 Service Planning
The service planning information contains all the parameter information required for configuring
the NE data, including the information for planning NNI ports, MPLS tunnels, and services.
The OptiX OSN NEs access customer TDM services through TDM ports or channelized STM-1
ports. CES PWs are created between the OptiX OSN NEs to emulate end-to-end TDM services,
therefore implementing service transmission between the BTSs and the BSC. Figure 7-6 shows
an example network.
Planning NE Parameters
Table 7-8 Planning information of NE parameters (NE1, NE2, and NE3)
NE LSR ID Port Port IP
Address
IP Mask
NE1 130.0.0.1 3-PEG8-1
(PORT-1)
18.0.2.2 255.255.255.25
2
NE2 130.0.0.2 3-PEG8-1
(PORT-1)
18.0.1.1 255.255.255.25
2
NE3 130.0.0.3 3-PEG8-1
(PORT-1)
18.0.2.1 255.255.255.25
2
3-PEG8-2
(PORT-2)
18.0.1.2 255.255.255.25
2

Planning the Tunnel Between NE1 and NE3
Table 7-9 Planning information of tunnel parameters (tunnel between NE1 and NE3)
Parameter NE1 NE3
Tunnel ID 1 2 2 1
Tunnel Name NE1-NE3#1 NE3-NE1#1 NE3-NE1#1 NE1-NE3#1
Node Type Ingress Egress Ingress Egress
Bandwidth
(kbit/s)
100 Mbit/s - 100 Mbit/s -
In Board/Logic
Interface Type
- 3-PEG8 - 3-PEG8
In Port - 1 - 1
In Label - 17 - 16
Out Board/
Logic Interface
Type
3-PEG8 - 3-PEG8 -
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 7 Configuring CES Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
271
Parameter NE1 NE3
Out Port 1 - 1 -
Out Label 16 - 17 -
Next Hop
Address
18.0.2.1 - 18.0.2.2 -
Source Node - 130.0.0.3 - 130.0.0.1
Sink Node 130.0.0.3 - 130.0.0.1 -

Planning the Tunnel Between NE2 and NE3
Table 7-10 Planning information of tunnel parameters (tunnel between NE2 and NE3)
Parameter NE2 NE3
Tunnel ID 3 4 4 3
Tunnel Name NE2-NE3#1 NE3-NE2#1 NE3-NE2#1 NE2-NE3#1
Node Type Ingress Egress Ingress Egress
Bandwidth
(kbit/s)
100 Mbit/s - 100 Mbit/s -
In Board/Logic
Interface Type
- 3-PEG8 - 3-PEG8
In Port - 1 - 2
In Label - 19 - 18
Out Board/
Logic Interface
Type
3-PEG8 - 3-PEG8 -
Out Port 1 - 2 -
Out Label 18 - 19 -
Next Hop
Address
18.0.1.2 - 18.0.1.1 -
Source Node - 130.0.0.3 - 130.0.0.2
Sink Node 130.0.0.3 - 130.0.0.2 -

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 7 Configuring CES Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
272
Planning the CES Service from BTS1 to the BSC
Table 7-11 Planning information of the service parameters (UNI-NNI CES service between
NE1 and NE3)
Parameter Value
NE NE1 NE3
Service ID 1 1
Service Name CES1 CES1
Level E1 E1
Mode UNI-NNI UNI-NNI
Source Board 19-MD75 21-CQ1-1
Source High Channel - VC4-1
Source Low Channel 1 1
Source 64K Timeslot 1-31 1-31
Priority EF EF
PW ID 1 1
PW Signaling Type Static Static
PW Type CESoPSN CESoPSN
PW Incoming Label/Source
Port
20 20
PW Outgoing Label/Sink
Port
20 20
Tunnel Type MPLS MPLS
Tunnel No. NE1-NE3#1 NE2-NE1#1
Peer LSR ID 130.0.0.3 130.0.0.1
RTP Head Disabled Disabled
Jitter Compensation
Buffering Time(us)
8000 8000
Packet Loading Time(us) 1000 1000
Ingress Clock Mode - -
Egress Clock Mode - -
Enable CES Service Alarm
Transparent Transmission
Enable Enable
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 7 Configuring CES Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
273
Parameter Value
Threshold of Entering R Bit
Inserting Status
100 100
Threshold of Exiting R Bit
Inserting Status
5 5
Sequence Number Mode Huawei Mode Huawei Mode

Planning the CES Service from BTS2 to the BSC
Table 7-12 Planning information of the service parameters (UNI-NNI CES service between
NE2 and NE3)
Parameter Value
NE NE2 NE3
Service ID 2 2
Service Name CES2 CES2
Level E1 E1
Mode UNI-NNI UNI-NNI
Source Board 19-MD75 21-CQ1-2
Source High Channel - VC4-1
Source Low Channel 1 1
Source 64K Timeslot 1-31 1-31
Priority EF EF
PW ID 2 2
PW Signaling Type Static Static
PW Type CESoPSN CESoPSN
PW Ingress Label 21 21
PW Egress Label 21 21
Tunnel Type MPLS MPLS
Tunnel NE2-NE3#1 NE3-NE2#1
Peer LSR ID 130.0.0.3 130.0.0.2
RTP Head Disabled Disabled
Jitter Compensation
Buffering Time(us)
8000 8000
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 7 Configuring CES Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
274
Parameter Value
Packet Loading Time(us) 1000 1000
Ingress Clock Mode - -
Egress Clock Mode - -
Enable CES Service Alarm
Transparent Transmission
Enable Enable
Threshold of Entering R Bit
Inserting Status
100 100
Threshold of Exiting R Bit
Inserting Status
5 5
Sequence Number Mode Huawei Mode Huawei Mode

7.4.3 Configuration Process (Configuration on a Per-NE Basis)
This topic describes how to configure UNI-NNI CES services on a per-NE basis.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l You must be familiar with the service requirements and service planning information of
the example network.
l The network must be created, the equipment must operate properly, and the equipment
must communicate with the NMS normally.
l The clocks must be configured for the NE that receives the CES service. For details on how
to configure clocks, see Configuring Clocks.
Procedure
Step 1 Configure the LSR IDs of NE1, NE2, and NE3. For details, see 9.4.1 Configuring LSR ID.
Table 7-13 Planning information of NE parameters (NE1, NE2, and NE3)
NE LSR ID
NE1 130.0.0.1
NE2 130.0.0.2
NE3 130.0.0.3

Step 2 Configure the NNI ports of NE1, NE2, and NE3 on the packet domain.
1. In the NE Explorer, select NE1, and then choose Configuration > Packet
Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
Configure the NNI ports.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 7 Configuring CES Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
275
2. In the General Attributes tab, select 3-PEG8-1(PORT-1). Right-click the Port Mode
filed, and select Layer 3. Set the parameters according to the actual requirements. Click
Apply.
Set the associated parameters as follows.
Parameter Value Remarks
Port Enabled Enabled -
Port Mode Layer 3 The port carries a tunnel.
Working Mode Auto-
Negotiation
Set the working modes of the local port and opposite
port to be the same.
Max Frame
Length (byte)
1620 Set this parameter according to the length of data
packets. All the received data packets that exceed the
maximum frame length are discarded.

3. Select 3-PEG8-1(PORT-1) in the Layer 3 Attributes tab. Right-click the Enable
Tunnel field and select Enabled. Right-click the Specify IP field and choose Manually.
Then, set the parameters such as IP Address and IP Mask. Click Apply.
Set the associated parameters as follows.
Parameter Value Remarks
Enable Tunnel Enabled -
Specify IP Manually Manually indicates that you can set the IP address
of the port.
IP Address 18.0.2.2 -
IP Mask 255.255.255.252 -

4. Navigate to the NE Explorer of NE2 and NE3 separately. Set the parameters associated
with each port according to Step a to Step c.
Set the basic attributes of each port to be the same as the basic attributes of NE1-3-PEG8-1
(PORT-1).
Set the Layer 3 attributes of each port as follows.
l NE2-3-PEG8-1(PORT-1)
Parameter Value
Enable Tunnel Enabled
Specify IP Manually
IP Address 18.0.1.1
IP Mask 255.255.255.252

l NE3-3-PEG8-2(PORT-2)
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 7 Configuring CES Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
276
Parameter Value
Enable Tunnel Enabled
Specify IP Manually
IP Address 18.0.1.2
IP Mask 255.255.255.252

l NE3-3-PEG8-1(PORT-1)
Parameter Value
Enable Tunnel Enabled
Specify IP Manually
IP Address 18.0.2.1
IP Mask 255.255.255.252

Step 3 Configure the MPLS tunnel between NE1 and NE3 and the MPLS tunnel between NE2 and
NE3. For details, see 9.4.3.1 Configuring a Static and Unidirectional MPLS Tunnel in End-
to-End Mode.
Set the associated parameters as follows.
Table 7-14 Planning information of tunnel parameters (tunnel between NE1 and NE3)
Parameter NE1 NE3
Tunnel ID 1 2 2 1
Tunnel Name NE1-NE3#1 NE3-NE1#1 NE3-NE1#1 NE1-NE3#1
Node Type Ingress Egress Ingress Egress
PIR(kbit/s) 100 Mbit/s - 100 Mbit/s -
In Board/Logic
Interface Type
- 3-PEG8 - 3-PEG8
In Port - 1 - 1
In Label - 17 - 16
Out Board/
Logic Interface
Type
3-PEG8 - 3-PEG8 -
Out Port 1 - 1 -
Out Label 16 - 17 -
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 7 Configuring CES Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
277
Parameter NE1 NE3
Next Hop
Address
18.0.2.1 - 18.0.2.2 -
Source Node - 130.0.0.3 - 130.0.0.1
Sink Node 130.0.0.3 - 130.0.0.1 -

Table 7-15 Planning information of tunnel parameters (tunnel between NE2 and NE3)
Parameter NE2 NE3
Tunnel ID 3 4 4 3
Tunnel Name NE2-NE3#1 NE3-NE2#1 NE3-NE2#1 NE2-NE3#1
Node Type Ingress Egress Ingress Egress
Bandwidth
(kbit/s)
100 Mbit/s - 100 Mbit/s -
In Board/Logic
Interface Type
- 3-PEG8 - 3-PEG8
In Port - 1 - 2
In Label - 19 - 18
Out Board/
Logic Interface
Type
3-PEG8 - 3-PEG8 -
Out Port 1 - 2 -
Out Label 18 - 19 -
Next Hop
Address
18.0.1.2 - 18.0.1.1 -
Source Node - 130.0.0.3 - 130.0.0.2
Sink Node 130.0.0.3 - 130.0.0.2 -

Step 4 Configure the CES service ports on NE1, NE2, and NE3. For details, see 9.2.1 Configuring
Channelized STM-1 Ports.
Step 5 Configure the UNI-NNI CES service between NE1 and NE3 and the UNI-NNI CES service
between NE2 and NE3. For details, see 9.13.2 Creating UNI-NNI CES Services on a Per-NE
Basis.
Set the associated parameters as follows.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 7 Configuring CES Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
278
Table 7-16 Planning information of the service parameters (UNI-NNI CES service between
NE1 and NE3)
Parameter Value
Station NE1 NE3
Service ID 1 1
Service Name CES1 CES1
Level E1 E1
Mode UNI-NNI UNI-NNI
Source Board 19-MD75 21-CQ1-1
Source High Channel - VC4-1
Source Low Channel 1 1
Source 64K Timeslot 1-31 1-31
Priority EF EF
PW ID 1 1
PW Signaling Type Static Static
PW Type CESoPSN CESoPSN
PW Ingress Label 20 20
PW Egress Label 20 20
Tunnel Type MPLS MPLS
RTP Header Disabled Disabled
Jitter Compensation
Buffering Time(us)
8000 8000
Packet Loading Time(us) 1000 1000
Ingress Clock Mode - -
Egress Clock Mode - -
Enable CES Service Alarm
Transparent Transmission
Enabled Enabled
Threshold of Entering R Bit
Inserting Status
100 100
Threshold of Exiting R Bit
Inserting Status
5 5
Sequence Number Mode Huawei Mode Huawei Mode

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 7 Configuring CES Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
279
Table 7-17 Planning information of the service parameters (UNI-NNI CES service between
NE2 and NE3)
Parameter Value
Station NE2 NE3
Service ID 2 2
Service Name CES2 CES2
Level E1 E1
Mode UNI-NNI UNI-NNI
Source Board 19-MD75 21-CQ1-2
Source High Channel - VC4-1
Source Low Channel 1 1
Source 64K Timeslot 1-31 1-31
Priority EF EF
PW ID 2 2
PW Signaling Type Static Static
PW Type CESoPSN CESoPSN
PW Incoming Label/Source
Port
21 21
PW Outgoing Label/Sink
Port
21 21
Tunnel Type MPLS MPLS
RTP Header Disabled Disabled
Jitter Compensation
Buffering Time(us)
8000 8000
Packet Loading Time(us) 1000 1000
Ingress Clock Mode - -
Egress Clock Mode - -
Enable CES Service Alarm
Transparent Transmission
Enabled Enabled
Threshold of Entering R Bit
Inserting Status
100 100
Threshold of Exiting R Bit
Inserting Status
5 5
Sequence Number Mode Huawei Mode Huawei Mode
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 7 Configuring CES Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
280

----End
7.4.4 Configuration Process (in End-to-End Mode)
This topic describes how to configure UNI-NNI CES services on a per-NE basis.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l You must be familiar with the service requirements and service planning information of
the example network.
l The network must be created, the equipment must operate properly, and the equipment
must communicate with the NMS normally.
l The clocks must be configured for the NE that receives the CES service. For details on how
to configure clocks, see Configuring Clocks.
Procedure
Step 1 Configure the LSR IDs of NE1, NE2, and NE3. For details, see 9.4.1 Configuring LSR ID.
Table 7-18 Planning information of NE parameters (NE1, NE2, and NE3)
NE LSR ID
NE1 130.0.0.1
NE2 130.0.0.2
NE3 130.0.0.3

Step 2 Configure the NNI ports of NE1, NE2, and NE3 on the packet domain.
1. In the NE Explorer, select NE1, and then choose Configuration > Packet
Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
Configure the NNI ports.
2. In the General Attributes tab, select 3-PEG8-1(PORT-1). Right-click the Port Mode
filed, and select Layer 3. Set the parameters according to the actual requirements. Click
Apply.
Set the associated parameters as follows.
Parameter Value Remarks
Port Enabled Enabled -
Port Mode Layer 3 The port carries a tunnel.
Working Mode Auto-
Negotiation
Set the working modes of the local port and opposite
port to be the same.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 7 Configuring CES Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
281
Parameter Value Remarks
Max Frame
Length (byte)
1620 Set this parameter according to the length of data
packets. All the received data packets that exceed the
maximum frame length are discarded.

3. Select 3-PEG8-1(PORT-1) in the Layer 3 Attributes tab. Right-click the Enable
Tunnel field and select Enabled. Right-click the Specify IP field and choose Manually.
Then, set the parameters such as IP Address and IP Mask. Click Apply.
Set the associated parameters as follows.
Parameter Value Remarks
Enable Tunnel Enabled -
Specify IP Manually Manually indicates that you can set the IP address
of the port.
IP Address 18.0.2.2 -
IP Mask 255.255.255.252 -

4. Navigate to the NE Explorer of NE2 and NE3 separately. Set the parameters associated
with each port according to Step a to Step c.
Set the basic attributes of each port to be the same as the basic attributes of NE1-3-PEG8-1
(PORT-1).
Set the Layer 3 attributes of each port as follows.
l NE2-3-PEG8-1(PORT-1)
Parameter Value
Enable Tunnel Enabled
Specify IP Manually
IP Address 18.0.1.1
IP Mask 255.255.255.252

l NE3-3-PEG8-2(PORT-2)
Parameter Value
Enable Tunnel Enabled
Specify IP Manually
IP Address 18.0.1.2
IP Mask 255.255.255.252

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 7 Configuring CES Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
282
l NE3-3-PEG8-1(PORT-1)
Parameter Value
Enable Tunnel Enabled
Specify IP Manually
IP Address 18.0.2.1
IP Mask 255.255.255.252

Step 3 Configure the MPLS tunnel between NE1 and NE3 and the MPLS tunnel between NE2 and
NE3. For details, see 9.4.3 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel in an End-to-End Mode.
NOTE
This topic considers the MPLS tunnel between the NE1 and NE3 as an example. The operations for configuring
the MPLS tunnel between NE2 and NE3 are similar to operations for configuring the MPLS tunnel between
NE1 and NE3.
1. Choose Service > Tunnel > Create Tunnel from the Main Menu.
2. Set the basic information about the MPLS tunnel between NE1 and NE3.
Parameter Value
Tunnel Name NE1-NE3
Protocol Type MPLS
Signaling Type Static CR
Create Reverse Tunnel Selected

3. On the physical topology, double-click NE1 and NE3 to add them and set the corresponding
NE roles.
Parameter Value
Auto-Calculate route Deselected
NE Role NE1: Ingress
NE3: Egress
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 7 Configuring CES Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
283
Parameter Value
Deploy Selected

4. Click Details and set the advanced parameters of the forward and reverse MPLS tunnels
between NE1 and NE3.
Parameter Value
Tunnel ID Forward Tunnel: 1
Reverse Tunnel: 2
CIR(kbit/s) Forward and Reverse Tunnels: 100000
LSP Type Forward and Reverse Tunnels: E-LSP
EXP Forward and Reverse Tunnels: None
Out Interface Forward Tunnel:
l NE1: 3-PEG8-1
l NE3: -
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE3:3-PEG8-1
l NE1: -
Out Label Forward Tunnel:
l NE1: 16
l NE3: -
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE3: 17
l NE1: -
In Interface Forward Tunnel:
l NE1: -
l NE3: 3-PEG8-1
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE3: -
l NE1: 3-PEG8-1
In Label Forward Tunnel:
l NE1: -
l NE3: 16
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE3: -
l NE1: 17
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 7 Configuring CES Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
284
Parameter Value
Next Hop Forward Tunnel:
l NE1: 18.0.2.1
l NE3: -
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE3: 18.0.2.2
l NE1: -

5. Refer to Steps Step 3.1 to Step 3.4 and configure the MPLS tunnel between NE2 and NE3.
Parameter Value
Tunnel Name NE2-NE3
Protocol Type MPLS
Signaling Type Static CR
Create Reverse Tunnel Selected
Auto-Calculate route Deselected
NE Role NE2: Ingress
NE3: Egress
Deploy Selected
Tunnel ID Forward Tunnel: 3
Reverse Tunnel: 4
CIR(kbit/s) Forward and Reverse Tunnels: 100000
LSP Type Forward and Reverse Tunnels: E-LSP
EXP Forward and Reverse Tunnels: None
Out Interface Forward Tunnel:
l NE2: 3-PEG8-1
l NE3: -
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE3: 3-PEG8-2
l NE2: -
Out Label Forward Tunnel:
l NE1: 18
l NE3: -
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE3: 18
l NE1: -
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 7 Configuring CES Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
285
Parameter Value
In Interface Forward Tunnel:
l NE1: -
l NE3: 3-PEG8-2
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE3: -
l NE1: 3-PEG8-1
In Label Positive Tunnel
l NE1: -
l NE3: 19
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE3: -
l NE1: 19
Next Hop Forward Tunnel:
l NE1: 18.0.1.2
l NE3: -
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE3: 18.0.1.1
l NE1: -

Step 4 Configure the CES service ports on NE1, NE2, and NE3. For details, see 9.2.1 Configuring
Channelized STM-1 Ports.
Step 5 Configure the CES service between NE1 and NE3. For details, see 9.13.3 Creating a CES
Service in End-to-End Mode.
1. Choose Service > PWE3 Service > Create PWE3 Service from the Main Menu.
2. Set the basic attributes.
Parameter Value
Service Type CES
Service ID 1
Service Name CES1
Protection Type No Protection

3. Click Configure Source And Sink. Then, the Configure Source And Sink dialog box is
displayed.
4. Select NE1 as the source NE from Physical Topology on the left. Set the associated
parameters and then click OK.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 7 Configuring CES Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
286
Parameter Value
Board 19-MD75
Port -
High TimeSlot -
Low TimeSlot 1
Channelized Deselected

5. Select NE3 as the sink NE from Physical Topology on the left. Set the associated
parameters and then click OK.
Parameter Value
Board 21-CQ1
Port 1
High TimeSlot 1
Low TimeSlot 1
Channelized Deselected
64K Timeslot 1-31

6. Under PW, set the associated parameters.
Parameter Value
Forward Tunnel NE1-NE3
Reverse Tunnel NE3-NE1
PW ID 1
Forward Label 16
Reverse Label 16

7. Click Detail and then set the Advanced PW Parameters.
Parameter Value
Control Word Use
Control Channel Type CW
VCCV Verification Mode Ping
RTP Header Disabled
Jitter Compensation Buffering Time(us) 8000
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 7 Configuring CES Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
287
Parameter Value
Packet Loading Time(us) 1000
Sequence Number Mode Huawei Mode

Step 6 Configure the CES service between NE2 and NE3. For details, see 9.13.3 Creating a CES
Service in End-to-End Mode.
1. Choose Service > PWE3 Service > Create PWE3 Service from the Main Menu.
2. Set the basic attributes.
Parameter Value
Service Type CES
Service ID 2
Service Name CES2
Protection Type Unprotected

3. Click Configure Source And Sink. Then, the Configure Source And Sink dialog box is
displayed.
4. Select NE2 as the source NE from Physical Topology on the left. Set the associated
parameters and then click OK.
Parameter Value
Board 19-MD75
Port -
High TimeSlot -
Low TimeSlot 1
Channelized Selected

5. Select NE3 as the sink NE from Physical Topology on the left. Set the associated
parameters and then click OK.
Parameter Value
Board 21-CQ1
Port 2
High TimeSlot 1
Low TimeSlot 1
Channelized Selected
64K Timeslot 1-31
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 7 Configuring CES Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
288

6. Under PW, set the associated parameters.
Parameter Value
Forward Tunnel NE2-NE3
Reverse Tunnel NE3-NE2
PW ID 1
Forward Label 17
Reverse Label 17

7. Click Detail and then set the Advanced PW Parameters.
Parameter Value
Control Character Use
Control Channel Type CW
VCCV Verification Mode Ping
RTP Header Disabled
Jitter Compensation Buffering Time(us) 8000
Packet Loading Time(us) 1000
Sequence Number Mode Huawei Mode

----End
7.5 Verifying CES Service Configuration
After configuring a CES service, you need to verify whether the service configuration is correct.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l CES services must be configured as required. For details, see 7 Configuring CES
Services in the Configuration Guide.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
BER tester or SDH analyzer, the U2000
Test Connection Diagram
Figure 7-7 shows the connection diagram for testing connectivity of CES service. You can
replace the SDH analyzer with a BER tester.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 7 Configuring CES Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
289
Figure 7-7 Connection diagram for testing connectivity of CES services
SDH
analyzer
Tx
Rx
Inloop
NE1 NE2
Packet
domain
DDF

WARNING
l Only commissioning engineers are present during the test.
l Do not touch the cable, unless necessary.
Procedure
Step 1 As shown in Figure 7-7, connect the CES service interface on NE1 to the BER tester.
Step 2 Perform an inloop for the UNI that receives CES services on NE2 on the U2000.
1. In the Main Topology of the U2000, right-click the required NE and then choose NE
Explorer from the shortcut menu. The NE Explorer window is displayed.
2. Select the board that provides CES services.
3. In the Function Tree, select the type of the interface that receives the CES services.
If an E1 interface receives the CES services, choose Configuration > Packet
Configuration > Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree.
If an SDH interface receives the CES services, choose Configuration > Packet
Configuration > Interface Management > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.
4. Click the Advanced Attributes tab and then select the interface to perform a loopback.
5. Right-click the Loopback Mode field, and then choose Inloop from the shortcut menu.
6. Click Apply.
Step 3 Perform a 24-hour bit error test.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 7 Configuring CES Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
290
NOTE
Set the coding to HDB3 and pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) to 2
15
-1 for the signals transmitted
by the BER tester.
Set the BER tester according to the encapsulation method that the CES services adopt and the frame format
that the E1 interface adopts. Set the timeslots on the BER tester consistently with the CES service timeslots.
l If the CES services adopt the SATop method, you need to enable the BER tester to transmit unframed
signals, double-frame signals, or CRC-4 multiframe signals.
l If the CES services adopt the CESoPSN method and the interface adopts the double-frame format, you
need to enable the BER tester to transmit double-frame signals.
l If the CES services adopt the CESoPSN method and the interface adopts the CRC-4 multiframe format,
you need to enable the BER tester to transmit CRC-4 multiframe signals.
Step 4 Test the performance of the CES services. That is, check whether bit errors occur in the CES
services in the 24-hour period.
Step 5 Check for the alarms associated with the CES services. If there is any, see the Alarms and
Performance Events Reference and Troubleshooting to clear the alarms.
Step 6 Repeat Step 3 to Step 4 to perform the 24-hour bit error test again.
Step 7 Release the inloop that is set on the interface on NE2. For details, see Step 2.
Step 8 Reconnect the cable to the CES service interface on NE1.
Step 9 Repeat Step 1 to Step 8 to test the CES services on all the other 2 Mbit/s interfaces on NE1 and
NE2.
Step 10 Repeat Step 1 to Step 9 to test connectivity of the CES services on the other NEs.
----End
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 7 Configuring CES Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
291
8 Configuring ATM Services
About This Chapter
This section describes how to configure ATM services.
NOTE
This section describes how to configure ATM services on the OptiX OSN 7500 II. Procedures for
configuring ATM services on other OptiX equipment are similar. The only difference lies in that associated
boards may be housed in different slots on different devices. For slots valid for the boards that a product
supports, see the Hardware Description of the product.
8.1 Introduction to ATM
This section provides the definition of ATM PWE3 and describes its purpose.
8.2 Configuration Flow for the ATM Services
This section describes the configuration flows for UNI-UNI ATM services and UNIs-NNI ATM
services.
8.3 Configuration Example (UNI-UNI ATM Services)
This section uses an example to describe how to plan and configure UNI-UNI ATM services
according to network conditions.
8.4 Configuration Example (UNIs-NNI ATM Services)
This section uses an example to describe how to plan and configure UNIs-NNI ATM services
according to network conditions.
8.5 Verifying ATM Service Configuration
Use the ATM OAM function to test the connectivity of UNIs-NNI ATM services to ensure that
the ATM services are transmitted normally. This section describes how to test the connectivity
of ATM services by performing a loopback (LB) test.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
292
8.1 Introduction to ATM
This section provides the definition of ATM PWE3 and describes its purpose.
Definition
The ATM PWE3 technology emulates the basic behaviors and characteristics of ATM services
on a packet switched network (PSN) by using the PWE3 mechanism, so that the emulated ATM
services can be transmitted on a PSN.
Purpose
Aided by the ATM PWE3 technology, conventional ATM networks can be connected by a PSN.
Specifically, ATM PWE3 allows transmitting conventional ATM services over a PSN by
emulating the ATM services.
The networking type of ATM PWE3 can be one-to-one, N-to-one or ATM-TRANS depending
on the encapsulation type of ATM PWE3 packets. It is obvious that ATM PWE3 helps to transmit
ATM services over the PSN, without adding ATM equipment or changing the configuration of
the ATM CE equipment.
Figure 8-1 Typical application of ATM PWE3 (in the one-to-one encapsulation mode)
PSN
PE1 PE2
Packet transmission equipment
1-to-1 ATM
PWE3
service
ATM PWE3
LSP
PW
AC
AC
CE2 CE1
NodeB
RNC
1-to-1 ATM
PWE3
service

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
293
Figure 8-2 Typical application of ATM PWE3 (in the N-to-one encapsulation mode)
PSN
PE1 PE2
Packet transmission equipment
N-to-1 ATM
PWE3
service
ATM PWE3
LSP
PW
AC
AC
CE4 CE2
CE1
CE3
NodeB
RNC
N-to-1 ATM
PWE3
service

NOTE
The cell encapsulation modes at both ends of a PW must be the same.
8.2 Configuration Flow for the ATM Services
This section describes the configuration flows for UNI-UNI ATM services and UNIs-NNI ATM
services.
8.2.1 Configuration Flow for UNI-UNI ATM Services
This section describes the operation tasks for configuring UNI-UNI ATM services and the
relationships between the operations tasks.
Figure 8-3 shows the flow for configuring UNI-UNI ATM services.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
294
Figure 8-3 Configuration flow for UNI-UNI ATM services
3. Configure ATM ports.
4. Configure UNI-UNI
ATM services.
Required
End
2. Configure ATM
policies.
Start
1. Create the network.

Table 8-1 Configuration flow for UNI-UNI ATM services
Step Operation Remarks
1 Creating the network Create NEs, configure NE data, and create optical
fibers.
2 Configuring ATM
policies
The ATM policies are configured for ATM traffic
management. For details, see Creating the ATM Policy.
3 Configuring ATM
ports
The ATM ports are configured for receiving services
from base stations. For details, see 9.15.1 Configuring
ATM Interfaces.
4 Configuring UNI-
UNI ATM services
Set the service ID, service name, and connection type,
and configure connections. For details, see 9.15.5
Creating ATM Services on a Per-NE Basis.

8.2.2 Configuration Flow for UNIs-NNI ATM Services
This section describes the operation tasks for configuring UNIs-NNI ATM services and the
relationships between the operations tasks.
Figure 8-4 shows the flow for configuring UNIs-NNI ATM services.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
295
Figure 8-4 Configuration flow for UNIs-NNI ATM services
1. Create the network.
6. Configure ATM
ports.
7. Configure UNIs-NNI
ATM services.
Start
Required
End
5. Configure ATM
policies.
4. Configure
MPLS tunnels.
3. Configure the NNI
ports.
2. Configure the LSR
ID.

Table 8-2 Configuration flow for UNIs-NNI ATM services
Step Operation Remarks
1 Creating the
network
Create NEs, configure NE data, and create optical fibers.
2 Configuring the
LSR ID
-
3 Configuring the
NNI ports
l Set the general attributes of Ethernet ports.
l Set the Layer 3 attributes of Ethernet ports, including the
tunnel enabled status and IP address.
4 Config
uring
MPLS
tunnel
s
Configu
ring an
MPLS
tunnel
(Required) The parameters need to be set according to the
service planning information. For details on how to manage
MPLS tunnels, see 9.5 Managing MPLS Tunnels.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
296
Step Operation Remarks
Configu
ring
MPLS
OAM
(Optional) The parameters are set as follows:
l OAM Status is set to Enabled.
l Detection Mode is set to Manual.
l Detection Packet Type is set to FFD.
l Detection Packet Period(ms) is set to 3.3.
Configu
ring
MPLS
tunnel
APS
(Optional) Set the MPLS tunnel APS parameters according to
the service planning information. For details on how to manage
MPLS tunnel APS protection groups, see 9.8 Managing MPLS
Tunnel APS Protection Groups.
5 Configuring
ATM policies
The ATM policies are configured for ATM traffic management.
l For details about configuring ATM policy in per-NE mode,
see Creating the ATM Policy.
l For details about configuring ATM policy profile in end-to-
end mode, see 9.15.2 Configuring an ATM Policy
Profile.
6 Configuring
ATM ports
The ATM ports are configured for receiving services from base
stations. For details, see 9.15.1 Configuring ATM Interfaces.
7 Configuring
UNIs-NNI ATM
services
1. Create CES services, that is, set the service ID, service name,
service type, and connection type.
2. Configure ATM connections, that is, set the source
information, PW ID, sink information, and policies.
3. Configure PWs, that is, set information such as the PW type,
PW label, and tunnel type.
4. Configure CoS mappings, that is, set the CoS policy for PWs.
l For details about configuring UNIs-NNI ATM services in
per-NE mode, see 9.15.5 Creating ATM Services on a Per-
NE Basis.
l For details about configuring UNIs-NNI ATM services in
end-to-end mode, see 9.15.4 Creating an ATM Service by
Using the Trail Function.

8.3 Configuration Example (UNI-UNI ATM Services)
This section uses an example to describe how to plan and configure UNI-UNI ATM services
according to network conditions.
8.3.1 Network Diagram
This section describes the networking information about the example where R99 services,
signaling services, and HSDPA services are transported between a NodeB and an RNC.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
297
Figure 8-5 shows a network diagram of UNI-UNI ATM services. ATM services are required
between the NodeB and the RNC. Connection 1 is used for transmitting R99 services, connection
2 is used for transmitting HSDPA services, and connection 3 is used for transmitting signaling
services. The NodeB transmits services to the RNC through NE1. NE1 uses the OptiX OSN
7500 II to receive the services from the NodeB, and transmits the services to the RNC through
STM-1.
Figure 8-5 Network diagram of UNI-UNI ATM services
UNI UNI
IMA 1
STM-1
VPI
1
VCI
100
1 101
Connection 1 R99
Connection 2 HSDPA
VPI
70
VCI
32
71 32
Node B NE 1 RNC
1 102 Connection 3 72 32 Signaling

Figure 8-6 NE planning diagram
UNI UNI
IMA 1 STM-1
Node B NE 1 RNC
35-N1D12E 32-N1AFO1

8.3.2 Service Planning
To transport the R99 services, signaling services, and HSDPA services between the NodeB and
the RNC, three ATM connections need to be created.
The NodeB receives the ATM services through IMA1, and then transmits the services to the
RNC. N:1 VCC ATM services containing three connections need to be created. Figure 8-5
shows VPI/VCI switching. The network shown in Figure 8-5 is taken as an example.
Table 8-3 lists the parameters planned for NE1.
Table 8-3 Parameters planned for NE1
Attribute Description
Base Station of Service NodeB
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
298
Attribute Description
IMA Group IMA1
Port Accessing the IMA Group at NodeB NE1-35-N1D12E-1
Port Connected to RNC NE1-32-N1AFO1-1
Conn
ection
1
Source VPI/VCI 1/100
Sink VPI/VCI 70/32
Conn
ection
2
Source VPI/VCI 1/101
Sink VPI/VCI 71/32
Conn
ection
3
Source VPI/VCI 1/102
Sink VPI/VCI 72/32

Table 8-4 lists the QoS policies planned for the ATM services.
Table 8-4 Service categories and QoS requirements
Service Category ATM Policy PW Bandwidth Tunnel
Bandwidth
Audio service, which
is carried by RT-
VBR
l Policy ID: 1
l Policy name: RT-
VBR
l Service category:
RT-VBR
l Traffic type:
ClpNoTag-
gingScrCdvt
l Clp01Pcr(cell/s):
4000
l Clp0Scr(cell/s):
1000
l MBS(cell): 100
l CDVT(us):
10000
l Enable Traffic
Frame
Discarding Flag:
Disable
l UPC/NPC:
Disable
4 Mbit/s 30 Mbit/s
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
299
Service Category ATM Policy PW Bandwidth Tunnel
Bandwidth
Signaling service,
which is carried by
CBR
l Policy ID: 2
l Policy name:
CBR
l Service category:
CBR
l Traffic type:
NoClpNoScr
l Clp01Pcr(cell/s):
800
l Enable Traffic
Frame
Discarding Flag:
Disable
l UPC/NPC:
Disable
1 Mbit/s
Data service, which
is carried by UBR
l Policy ID: 3
l Policy name:
UBR
l Service category:
UBR
l Traffic type:
NoTrafficDe-
scriptor
l Enable Traffic
Frame
Discarding Flag:
Disable
l UPC/NPC:
Disable
15 Mbit/s

8.3.3 Configuring an ATM Service on a Per-NE Basis
This section describes the process of configuring a UNI-UNI ATM service on a per-NE basis.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l You must understand the networking, requirements and service planning of the example.
l A network must be created.
Procedure
Step 1 Configure three ATM policies: CBR, RT-VBR, and UBR.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
300
1. Configure the CBR policy. For details, see QoS Configuration Example of the ATM
Service 2.
2. Configure the RT-VBR policy. For details, see QoS Configuration Example of the ATM
Service 1.
3. Configure the UBR policy. For details, see QoS Configuration Example of the ATM
Service 3.
Step 2 Configure ATM ports, including NodeB-side ATM ports and RNC-side ATM ports.
1. Configure NodeB-side ATM ports.
a. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and choose Configuration > Packet
Configuration > Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree
to configure NodeB-side ATM ports.
b. Select 35-N1D12E-1(PORT-1) and 35-N1D12E-2(PORT-2). Right-click the Port
Mode field, and select Layer 2. Set the parameters as required, and click Apply.
NOTE
Before setting the port mode, make sure that the port DCN is disabled.
Set relevant parameters as follows:
l Port: 35-N1D12E-1(PORT-1), 35-N1D12E-2(PORT-2)
l Name: NodeB ATM (Set the port name as required. The port name distinguishes
the port from other ports and helps to query the port.)
l Port Mode: Layer 2 (The port transmits IMA signals.)
l Encapsulation: ATM (default)
c. In the Advanced Attributes tab, set Frame Format and Frame Mode for ports 35-
N1D12E-1(PORT-1) and 35-N1D12E-2(PORT-2). Click Apply.
Set relevant parameters as follows:
l Port: 35-N1D12E-1(PORT-1) and 35-N1D12E-2(PORT-2)
l Frame Format: CRC-4 Multiframe (Set this parameter to the value same as that of
the NodeB.)
l Frame Mode: 31
d. Choose Configuration > Packet Configuration > Interface Management > ATM
IMA Management from the Function Tree. Then, click the Binding tab.
e. In the Binding tab, click Configuration and set the parameters such as Available
Boards and Configuration Ports. Then, click OK.
Set relevant parameters as follows:
l Available Boards: 35-N1D12E (Set this parameter according to the networking
plan.)
l Configuration Ports: 35-N1D12E-1(PORT-1) (Set this parameter according to the
networking plan.)
l Available Bound Paths
Level: E1 (Select E1 for an ATM E1 board.)
Direction: Bidirectional (default)
Optical Interface: - (This parameter need not be set for E1.)
l Available Resources: 35-N1D12E-1(PORT-1) and 35-N1D12E-2(PORT-2)
l Available Timeslots: - (This parameter need not be set for E1.)
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
301
f. In the IMA Group Management tab, double-click the IMA Protocol Enable
Status field and select Enabled. Set the other parameters as required. Then, click
Apply.
Set relevant parameters as follows:
Set the IMA Protocol Version, IMA Transmit Frame Length, IMA Symmetry
Mode, Maximum Delay Between Links, Minimum Number of Active
Transmitting Links, and Minimum Number of Active Receiving Links parameters
the same as those of the NodeB.
g. In the ATM Interface Management tab, set the parameters such as Max. VPI and
Max. VCI for the port. Then, click Apply.
Set relevant parameters as follows:
l Port Type: UNI (A UNI port is connected to the client-side equipment and an NNI
port is connected to the ATM equipment on a core network.)
l ATM Cell Payload Scrambling: Enabled
l Loopback: Non-Loopback
2. Configure RNC-side ATM ports.
a. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and choose Configuration > Packet
Configuration > Interface Management > SDH Interface from the Function Tree
to configure RNC-side ATM ports.
b. In the Layer 2 Attributes tab, select 32-N1AFO1-1(PORT-1), and set the parameters
such as Max. VPI and Max. VCI for the port. Then, click Apply.
Set relevant parameters as follows:
l Port Type: UNI
l ATM Cell Payload Scrambling: Enabled
l Max. VPI: 255
l Max. VCI: 127
l VCC-Supported VPI Count: 32
Step 3 Configure a UNI-UNI ATM service and add three connections.
1. Choose Configuration > Packet Configuration > ATM Service Management from the
Function Tree.
2. In the Connection tab, click New. The New ATM Service window is displayed. In the
window, configure a UNI-UNI service.
Set relevant parameters as follows:
l Service ID: 10
l Service Name: ATMService-10
l Service Type: UNI-UNI
l Connection Type: PVC (PVC indicates that the VPI and VCI of the ATM connection
can be changed; PVP indicates that only the VPI of the ATM connection can be
changed.)
3. Click the Connection tab and click Add to add connection 1, connection 2, and connection
3. Then, click OK.
Set relevant parameters as follows:
l Connection 1
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
302
Connection Name: Connection 1
Source Board: 35-N1D12E
Source Port: 1(PORT-1)
Source VPI: 1 (This parameter indicates the VPI information that is transmitted with
the service from the NodeB.)
Source VCI: 100 (This parameter indicates the VCI information that is transmitted
with the service from the NodeB.)
PW ID: -
Sink Board: 32-N1AFO1
Sink Port: 1(PORT-1)
Sink VPI: 70 (This parameter indicates the VPI information that is transmitted with
the service after VPI switching. The sink VPI ranges from 0 to Max. VPI.)
Sink VCI: 32 (This parameter indicates The VCI information that is transmitted with
the service after VCI switching. The sink VCI ranges from 32 to Max. VCI.)
Uplink Policy: RT-VBR (Select the RT-VBR policy, because connection 1 is an R99
service.)
Downlink Policy: RT-VBR (Select the RT-VBR policy, because connection 1 is an
R99 service.)
l Connection 2
Connection Name: Connection 2
Source Board: 35-N1D12E
Source Port: 1(PORT-1)
Source VPI: 1
Source VCI: 101
PW ID: -
Sink Board: 32-N1AFO1
Sink Port: 1(PORT-1)
Sink VPI: 71
Sink VCI: 32
Uplink Policy: UBR (Select the UBR policy, because connection 2 is an HSDPA
service.)
Downlink Policy: UBR (Select the UBR policy, because connection 2 is an HSDPA
service.)
l Connection 3
Connection Name: Connection 3
Source Board: 35-N1D12E
Source Port: 1(PORT-1)
Source VPI: 1
Source VCI: 102
PW ID: -
Sink Board: 32-N1AFO1
Sink Port: 1(PORT-1)
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
303
Sink VPI: 72
Sink VCI: 32
Uplink Policy: CBR (Select the CBR policy, because connection 3 is a signaling
service.)
Downlink Policy: CBR (Select the CBR policy, because connection 3 is a signaling
service.)
----End
8.4 Configuration Example (UNIs-NNI ATM Services)
This section uses an example to describe how to plan and configure UNIs-NNI ATM services
according to network conditions.
8.4.1 Network Diagram
This section describes the networking information about the example where R99 services,
signaling services, and HSDPA services are transported between NodeB1 and the RNC, and
between NodeB2 and the RNC.
Figure 8-7 shows a network diagram of UNIs-NNI ATM services. 3G R99 services, signaling
services, and HSDPA services are required between NodeB1/NodeB2 and the RNC. NE1
accesses the MPLS network formed by Hybrid MSTP equipment. NodeB1 is connected to NE1
through IMA1, and NodeB2 is connected to NE1 through IMA2. VPI/VCI switching is
performed on NE1, and VPI/VCI transparent transmission is performed on NE2 and NE3.
Between NE1 and NE3, three PWs are used to carry the R99 services, signaling services, and
HSDPA services, and one PW carries one category of service. At the remote end, to transparently
transmit the ATM services on the MPLS network, NE3 is connected to the RNC through STM-1.
NE1 and NE3 are OptiX OSN 7500 IIs, and NE2, NE4, NE5 and NE6 are OptiX OSN 3500s.
The ATM services are carried by the working tunnel. The protection tunnel can be created to
protect the services that have high real-time requirements.
The working tunnel is NE1-NE2-NE3, and the protection tunnel is NE1-NE6-NE5-NE4-NE3.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
304
Figure 8-7 Network diagram of UNIs-NNI ATM services
Working Tunnel
NodeB 1
RNC
NE1
NE2
NE3
NE4
NE5
NE6
GE ring on
access layer
10GE ring on
convergence
layer
NodeB 2
pw1
pw3
pw2
IMA1
IMA2
ATM
STM-1
UNI NNI
VPI
1
VCI
100
1 101
Connection 1 R99
Connection 2 HSDPA
VPI
50
VCI
32
51 32
Connection 3 Signalling 1 102
52 32
UNI
VPI
50
VCI
32
51 32
52 32
IMA1:
UNI NNI
VPI
1
VCI
100
1 101
VPI
60
VCI
32
61 32
1 102
62 32
UNI
VPI
60
VCI
32
61 32
62 32
IMA2:
NNI
VPI
50
VCI
32
51 32
52 32
NNI
VPI
60
VCI
32
61 32
62 32
PW
Protection Tunnel
Connection 1 R99
Connection 2 HSDPA
Connection 3 Signalling

Figure 8-8 shows the NE planning diagram.
Figure 8-8 NE planning diagram
Working Tunnel
Protection Tunnel
NE1
NE2
NE3
NE4
NE5
NE6
3-EG8-1(PORT-1)
10.0.0.1
3-PEG8-2(PORT-2)
10.0.0.2
3-EX2-2(PORT-2)
10.0.1.2
4-PEX2-1(PORT-1)
10.0.1.1
32-AFO1-1(PORT-1)
3-PEG8-2(PORT-2)
10.0.4.1
GE ring on
access layer
10GE ring on
convergence
layer
3-EX2-1(PORT-1)
10.0.2.1
3-PEX2-2(PORT-2)
10.0.2.2
3-PEX2-1(PORT-1)
10.0.3.1
4-PEX2-2(PORT-2)
10.0.3.2
3-PEG8-1(PORT-1)
10.0.4.2
3-PEG8-1(PORT-1)
10.0.5.2
3-EG8-2(PORT-2)
10.0.5.1
RNC
NodeB 1
NodeB 2
35-D12E

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
305
8.4.2 Service Planning
To transport the R99 services, signaling services, and HSDPA services between NodeB1 and
the RNC, between NodeB2 and the RNC, three ATM services need to be created.
Between NE1 and NE3, the R99 services are carried by PW1, the HSDPA services are carried
by PW2, and the signaling services are carried by PW3. Therefore, three ATM services need to
be created. At NodeB1 and NodeB2, the R99 services are aggregated, and the signaling services
and HSDPA services are received. Therefore, N:1 VCC ATM services containing two
connections need to be created. The network shown in Figure 8-7 is taken as an example.
Table 8-5 Parameters planned for the NEs
NE LSR ID Port Port IP Address IP Mask
NE1 130.0.0.1 3-EG8-1
(PORT-1)
10.0.0.1 255.255.255.252
3-EG8-2
(PORT-2)
10.0.5.1 255.255.255.252
NE2 130.0.0.2 4-PEX2-1
(PORT-1)
10.0.1.1 255.255.255.252
3-PEG8-2
(PORT-2)
10.0.0.2 255.255.255.252
NE3 130.0.0.3 3-EX2-1
(PORT-1)
10.0.2.1 255.255.255.252
3-EX2-2
(PORT-2)
10.0.1.2 255.255.255.252
NE4 130.0.0.4 3-PEX2-2
(PORT-2)
10.0.2.2 255.255.255.252
3-PEX2-1
(PORT-1)
10.0.3.1 255.255.255.252
NE5 130.0.0.5 4-PEX2-2
(PORT-2)
10.0.3.2 255.255.255.252
3-PEG8-1
(PORT-1)
10.0.4.2 255.255.255.252
NE6 130.0.0.6 3-PEG8-2
(PORT-2)
10.0.4.1 255.255.255.252
3-PEG8-1
(PORT-1)
10.0.5.2 255.255.255.252

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
306
Table 8-6 Parameters planned for tunnels
Parameter Working Tunnel Protection Tunnel
Tunnel ID 100 101 120 121
Name Working
Tunnel-Positive
Working
Tunnel-Reverse
Protection
Tunnel-Positive
Protection
Tunnel-Reverse
Signal Type Static Static Static Static
Scheduling
Type
E-LSP E-LSP E-LSP E-LSP
Bandwidth
(kbit/s)
No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit
Ingress Node NE1 NE3 NE1 NE3
Transit Node NE2 NE2 NE6, NE5, NE4 NE4, NE5, NE6
Egress Node NE3 NE1 NE3 NE1
Ingress Node
Route
Information
NE1
l Out Port: 3-
EG8-1
(PORT-1)
l Out Label:
20
NE3
l Out Port: 3-
EX2-2
(PORT-2)
l Out Label:
21
NE1
l Out Port: 3-
EG8-2
(PORT-2)
l Out Label:
22
NE3
l Out Port: 3-
EX2-1
(PORT-1)
l Out Label:
23
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
307
Parameter Working Tunnel Protection Tunnel
Transit Node
Route
Information
NE2
l In Port: 3-
PEG8-2
(PORT-2)
l In Label: 20
l Out Port: 4-
PEX2-1
(PORT-1)
l Out Label:
30
NE2
l In Port: 4-
PEX2-1
(PORT-1)
l In Label: 21
l Out Port: 3-
PEG8-2
(PORT-2)
l Out Label:
31
NE6
l In Port: 3-
PEG8-1
(PORT-1)
l In Label: 22
l Out Port: 3-
PEG8-2
(PORT-2)
l Out Label:
32
NE5
l In Port: 3-
PEG8-1
(PORT-1)
l In Label: 32
l Out Port: 4-
PEX2-2
(PORT-2)
l Out Label:
42
NE4
l In Port: 3-
PEX2-1
(PORT-1)
l In Label: 42
l Out Port: 3-
PEX2-2
(PORT-2)
l Out Label:
52
NE4
l In Port: 3-
PEX2-2
(PORT-2)
l In Label: 23
l Out Port: 3-
PEX2-1
(PORT-1)
l Out Label:
33
NE5
l In Port: 4-
PEX2-2
(PORT-2)
l In Label: 33
l Out Port: 3-
PEG8-1
(PORT-1)
l Out Label:
43
NE6
l In Port: 3-
PEG8-2
(PORT-2)
l In Label: 43
l Out Port: 3-
PEG8-1
(PORT-1)
l Out Label:
53
Egress Node
Route
Information
NE3
l In Port: 3-
EX2-2
(PORT-2)
l In Label: 30
NE1
l In Port: 3-
EG8-1
(PORT-1)
l In Label: 31
NE3
l In Port: 3-
EX2-1
(PORT-1)
l In Label: 52
NE1
l In Port: 3-
EG8-2
(PORT-2)
l In Label: 53

Table 8-7 lists the parameters planned for NE1.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
308
Table 8-7 Parameters planned for NE1
Attribute Description
Base
Station of
Service
NodeB1 NodeB2
IMA
Group
IMA1 IMA2
Source
Port
35-N1D12E-1(Port-1) 35-N1D12E-2(Port-2)
Service R99 HSDPA Signaling R99 HSDPA Signaling
Source
VPI/VCI
1/100 1/101 1/102 1/100 1/101 1/102
Sink VPI/
VCI
50/32 51/32 52/32 60/32 61/32 62/32
PW of
Service
PW1 PW2 PW3 PW1 PW2 PW3
PW ID 35 36 37 35 36 37

Table 8-8 lists the parameters planned for NE3.
Table 8-8 Parameters planned for NE3
Attribute Remarks Description
Service R99 HSDPA Signaling R99 HSDPA Signaling
Source
VPI/VCI
50/32 51/32 52/32 60/32 61/32 62/32
Sink VPI/
VCI
50/32 51/32 52/32 60/32 61/32 62/32
PW of
Service
PW1 PW2 PW3 PW1 PW2 PW3
PW ID 35 36 37 35 36 37
Sink Port 32-N1AFO1-1(PORT-1)

Table 8-9 lists the QoS policies planned for the ATM services.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
309
Table 8-9 Service categories and QoS requirements
Service Category ATM Policy
Audio service, which is carried by RT-VBR l Policy ID: 1
l Policy name: RT-VBR
l Service category: RT-VBR
l Traffic type: ClpNoTaggingScrCdvt
l Clp01Pcr(cell/s): 4000
l Clp0Scr(cell/s): 1000
l MBS(cell): 100
l CDVT(us): 10000
l Enable Traffic Frame Discarding Flag:
Disable
l UPC/NPC: Disable
Signaling service, which is carried by CBR l Policy ID: 2
l Policy name: CBR
l Service category: CBR
l Traffic type: NoClpNoScr
l Clp01Pcr(cell/s): 800
l Enable Traffic Frame Discarding Flag:
Disable
l UPC/NPC: Disable
Data service, which is carried by UBR l Policy ID: 3
l Policy name: UBR
l Service category: UBR
l Traffic type: NoTrafficDescriptor
l Enable Traffic Frame Discarding Flag:
Disable
l UPC/NPC: Disable

8.4.3 Configuration Process (in End-to-End Mode)
This section describes how to configure an ATM service in end-to-end mode.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l You must learn about the networking requirements and service plan described in the
example.
l A network must be created and the IP addresses of ports must be automatically allocated.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
310
Procedure
Step 1 Set LSR IDs.
1. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and choose Configuration > Packet Configuration >
MPLS Management > Basic Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Set LSR ID, Start of Global Label Space, and other parameters. Click Apply.
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
LSR ID NE1: 130.0.0.1 Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan. In
addition, this value is
unique on an entire
network.
Start of Global Label Space 0 Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.

3. Display the NE Explorers of NE2, NE3, NE4, NE5, and NE6 separately and perform the
preceding two steps to set the parameters such as LSR ID.
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
LSR ID NE2: 130.0.0.2
NE3: 130.0.0.3
NE4: 130.0.0.4
NE5: 130.0.0.5
NE6: 130.0.0.6
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan. In
addition, this value is
unique on an entire
network.
Start of Global Label Space 0 Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.

Step 2 Create the working tunnel.
1. Choose Service > Tunnel > Create Tunnel from the Main Menu.
2. Set the basic information about the working tunnel.
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
Tunnel Name Working Tunnel Set this parameter
according to the service
plan.
Protocol Type MPLS Set this parameter
according to the service
plan.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
311
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
Signaling Type Static CR Set this parameter
according to the service
plan.
Service Direction Unidirectional Set this parameter
according to the service
plan.
Create Reverse Tunnel Selected This parameter is selected
when a reverse tunnel needs
to be created.
Protection Type 1+1 Set this parameter
according to the service
plan.

3. Configure the NE list. On the physical topology, double-click NE1, NE2, and NE3 to add
them to the NE list and set the corresponding NE roles.
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
NE Role NE1: Ingress
NE2: Transit
NE3: Egress
An ingress is the incoming
node of a network. In this
example, NE1 is an ingress
node.
A transit is a pass-through
node. In this example, NE2
is a transit node.
An egress is the outgoing
node of a network. In this
example, NE3 is an egress
node.
Deploy Selected When this parameter is
selected, a tunnel is saved
on the U2000 and applied to
the corresponding NEs.

4. Click Details to set the advanced parameters of the reverse tunnel. Click OK.
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
Tunnel ID l Forward Tunnel: 100
l Reverse Tunnel: 101
Set this parameter
according to the service
plan.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
312
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
CIR(Kbit/s) Forward and Reverse
Tunnels: 10000
Set this parameter
according to the service
plan.
CBS(byte) Forward and Reverse
Tunnels: 10000
Set this parameter
according to the service
plan.
PIR(Kbit/s) Forward and Reverse
Tunnels: 20000
Set this parameter
according to the service
plan.
PBS(byte) Forward and Reverse
Tunnels: 20000
Set this parameter
according to the service
plan.
MTU (bytes) Forward and Reverse
Tunnels: 1620
Set this parameter
according to the service
plan.
LSP Type Forward and Reverse
Tunnels: E-LSP
Currently, this parameter
can be set to E-LSP only.
EXP Forward and Reverse
Tunnels: None
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Out Interface Forward Tunnel:
l NE1: 3-EG8-1
(PORT-1)
l NE2: 4-PEX2-1
(PORT-1)
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE3: 3-EX2-2
(PORT-2)
l NE2: 3-PEG8-2
(PORT-2)
Set this parameter
according to the service
plan. This parameter needs
to be set for only ingress
nodes and transit nodes.
Out Label Forward Tunnel:
l NE1: 20
l NE2: 30
Forward Tunnel:
l NE3: 21
l NE2: 31
Set this parameter
according to the service
plan.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
313
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
In Interface Forward Tunnel:
l NE2: 3-PEG8-2
(PORT-2)
l NE3: 3-EX2-2
(PORT-2)
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE2: 4-PEX2-1
(PORT-1)
l NE1: 3-EG8-1
(PORT-1)
Set this parameter
according to the service
plan. This parameter needs
to be set for only egress
nodes and transit nodes.
In Label Forward Tunnel:
l NE2: 20
l NE3: 30
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE2: 21
l NE1: 31
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Next Hop Forward Tunnel:
l NE1: 10.0.0.2
l NE2: 10.0.1.2
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE3: 10.0.1.1
l NE2: 10.0.0.1
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.

Step 3 Create the protection tunnel.
1. Create the protection tunnel by referring toStep 2
Set the basic Information as follows:
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
Tunnel Name Protection Tunnel Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Protocol Type MPLS Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Signaling Type Static CR Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
314
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
Service Direction Unidirectional Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Create Reverse Tunnel Selected This parameter is selected
when a reverse tunnel needs
to be created.

Set the node information as follows:
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
NE Role NE1: Ingress
NE6, NE5, NE4: Transit
NE3: Egress
An ingress is the incoming
node of a network. In this
example, NE1 is an ingress
node.
A transit is a pass-through
node. In this example, NE6,
NE5, and NE4 are transit
nodes.
An egress is the outgoing
node of a network. In this
example, NE3 is an egress
node.
Deploy Selected When this parameter is
selected, a tunnel is saved
on the U2000 and applied to
the corresponding NEs.

Set the route information as follows:
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
Tunnel ID l Forward Tunnel: 120
l Reverse Tunnel: 121
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
CIR(Kbit/s) Forward and Reverse
Tunnels: 10000
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
315
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
CBS(byte) Forward and Reverse
Tunnels: 10000
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
PIR(Kbit/s) Forward and Reverse
Tunnels: 20000
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
PBS(byte) Forward and Reverse
Tunnels: 20000
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
MTU (bytes) Forward and Reverse
Tunnels: 1620
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
LSP Type Forward and Reverse
Tunnels: E-LSP
Currently, this parameter
can be set to E-LSP only.
EXP Forward and Reverse
Tunnels: None
Set this parameter
according to the service
plan.
Out Interface Forward Tunnel:
l NE1: 3-EG8-2
(PORT-2)
l NE6: 3-PEG8-2
(PORT-2)
l NE5: 4-PEX2-2
(PORT-2)
l NE4: 3-PEX2-2
(PORT-2)
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE3: 3-EX2-1
(PORT-1)
l NE4: 3-PEX2-1
(PORT-1)
l NE5: 3-PEG8-1
(PORT-1)
l NE6: 3-PEG8-1
(PORT-1)
Set this parameter
according to the service
plan. This parameter needs
to be set for only ingress
nodes and transit nodes.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
316
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
Out Label Forward Tunnel:
l NE1: 22
l NE6: 32
l NE5: 42
l NE4: 52
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE3: 23
l NE4: 33
l NE5: 43
l NE6: 53
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
In Interface Forward Tunnel:
l NE6: 3-PEG8-1
(PORT-1)
l NE5: 3-PEG8-1
(PORT-1)
l NE4: 3-PEX2-1
(PORT-1)
l NE3: 3-EX2-1
(PORT-1)
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE4: 3-PEX2-2
(PORT-2)
l NE5: 4-PEX2-2
(PORT-2)
l NE6: 3-PEG8-2
(PORT-2)
l NE1: 3-EG8-2
(PORT-2)
Set this parameter
according to the service
plan. This parameter needs
to be set for only egress
nodes and transit nodes.
In Label Forward Tunnel:
l NE6: 22
l NE5: 32
l NE4: 42
l NE3: 52
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE4: 23
l NE5: 33
l NE6: 43
l NE1: 53
Set this parameter
according to the service
plan.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
317
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
Next Hop Forward Tunnel:
l NE1: 10.0.5.2
l NE6: 10.0.4.2
l NE5: 10.0.3.1
l NE4: 10.0.2.1
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE3: 10.0.2.2
l NE4: 10.0.3.2
l NE5: 10.0.4.1
l NE6: 10.0.2.1
Set this parameter
according to the service
plan.

Step 4 Configure ports, including NodeB-side ATM ports and RNC-side ATM ports.
1. Configure NodeB-side ATM ports.
a. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and choose Configuration > Packet
Configuration > Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree
to configure NodeB-side ports.
b. Select the ports from 35-N1D12E-1(PORT-1) to 35-N1D12E-8(PORT-8), Right-click
the Port Mode field, and select Layer 2. Set the parameters as required, and click
Apply.
NOTE
Before setting the port mode, make sure that the port DCN is disabled.
Set relevant parameters as follows:
l Port: ports from 35-N1D12E-1(PORT-1) to 35-N1D12E-8(PORT-8)
l Name: NodeB ATM (Set the port name as required. The port name distinguishes
the port from other ports and helps to query the port.)
l Port Mode: Layer 2 (The port transmits IMA signals.)
l Encapsulation Type: ATM
c. In the Advanced tab, set Frame Format and Frame Mode for the ports from 35-
N1D12E-1(PORT-1) to 35-N1D12E-8(PORT-8). Click Apply.
Set relevant parameters as follows:
l Port: ports from 35-N1D12E-1(PORT-1) to 35-N1D12E-8(PORT-8)
l Frame Format: CRC-4 Multiframe (Set this parameter to the value same as that of
the NodeB.)
l Frame Mode: 31
d. Choose Configuration > Packet Configuration > Interface Management > ATM
IMA Management from the Function Tree. Then, click the Binding tab.
e. In the Binding tab, click Configuration and set bound ports for 35-N1D12E-1
(PORT-1) and 35-N1D12E-2(PORT-2). Then, click OK.
Set the parameters relevant to 35-N1D12E-1(PORT-1) as follows:
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
318
l Available Boards: 35-N1D12E (Set this parameter according to the networking
plan.)
l Configurable Ports: 35-N1D12E-1(PORT-1) (Set this parameter according to the
networking plan.)
l Available Bound Paths
Level: E1 (Select E1 for an ATM E1 board and VC12-xv for an ATM STM-1
board. For this example, the board is an ATM E1 board.)
Direction: Bidirectional (default)
Optical Interface: - (This parameter need not be set for E1, but need be set for
VC12-xv. For this example, the path level is E1.)
l Available Resources: ports from 35-N1D12E-1(PORT-1) to 35-N1D12E-4
(PORT-4)
l Available Timeslots: - (This parameter need not be set for E1, but need be set for
VC12-xv.)
Set the parameters relevant to 35-N1D12E-2(PORT-2) as follows:
l Available Boards: 35-N1D12E (Set this parameter according to the networking
plan.)
l Configurable Ports: 35-N1D12E-2(PORT-2) (Set this parameter according to the
networking plan.)
l Available Bound Paths
Level: E1 (Select E1 for an ATM E1 board and VC12-xv for an ATM STM-1
board. For this example, the board is an ATM E1 board.)
Direction: Bidirectional (default)
Optical Interface: - (This parameter need not be set for E1, but need be set for
VC12-xv. For this example, the path level is E1.)
l Available Resources: ports from 35-N1D12E-1(PORT-5) to 35-N1D12E-4
(PORT-8)
l Available Timeslots: - (This parameter need not be set for E1, but need be set for
VC12-xv.)
f. In the IMA Group Management tab, double-click the IMA Protocol Enable
Status field and select Enabled. Set the other parameters as required. Then, click
Apply.
The settings of parameters need to be the same as those on the NodeB.
g. In the ATM Interface Management tab, set the parameters such as Max. VPI and
Max. VCI. Then, click Apply.
Set relevant parameters as follows:
l Port Type: UNI (A UNI port is connected to the client-side equipment and an NNI
port is connected to the ATM equipment on a core network.)
l ATM Cell Payload Scrambling: Enabled
l Loopback: No Loopback
2. Configure RNC-side ATM ports.
a. In the NE Explorer, select NE3 and choose Configuration > Packet
Configuration > Interface Management > SDH Interface from the Function Tree
to configure RNC-side ATM ports.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
319
b. In the Layer 2 Attributes tab, select 32-N1AFO1-1(PORT-1) and set the parameters
such as Max. VPI and Max. VCI for the port. Then, click Apply.
Set relevant parameters as follows:
l Port Type: UNI (A UNI port is connected to the client-side equipment and an NNI
port is connected to the ATM equipment on a core network.)
l ATM Cell Payload Scrambling: Enabled
l Max. VPI: 255 (Set this parameter according to the networking plan. Set Max.
VPI to specify the value range of VPI. The VPI ranges from 0 to Max. VPI.)
l Max. VCI: 127 (Set this parameter according to the networking plan. Set Max.
VCI to specify the value range of VCI. The VCI ranges from 0 to Max. VCI.)
l VCC-Supported VPI Count: 32 (Set this parameter according to the networking
plan.)
Step 5 Create three UNIs-NNI ATM services.
1. Choose Service > PWE3 Service > Create PWE3 Service from the Main Menu. Create
an R99 service from NE1 to NE3.
Table 8-10 Parameters of general attributes
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
Service Type ATM Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Service ID 1 A service ID uniquely
identifies a service on an
entire network.
Service Name ATMService-R99 Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Protection Type Protection-free Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Link Type ATM N-to-1 VCC Cell
Transport
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.

2. Click Configure Source And Sink. A window is displayed. On the Physical Topology in
the upper left portion of the window, set NE1 as the source NE and NE3 as the sink NE.
Set relevant parameters and click OK.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
320
Table 8-11 Parameters of the source node
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
SAI Type ATM Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.

Table 8-12 Parameters of the sink node
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
SAI Type ATM Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.

3. In PW in the lower left portion of the window, set relevant parameters.
Table 8-13 PW parameters
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
Forward Type Static Binding l If you set Forward
Type to Static
Binding, you need to
manually specify a
tunnel in the Forward
Tunnel area.
l If you set Reverse
Type to Select Policy,
you need to set a tunnel
priority in the Reverse
Tunnel area so that the
system selects a tunnel
according to the
priority.
Forward Tunnel Tunnel-001 Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
321
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
Reverse Type Static Binding l If you set Reverse
Type to Static
Binding, you need to
manually specify a
tunnel in the Reverse
Tunnel area.
l If you set Reverse
Type to Select Policy,
you need to set a tunnel
priority in the Reverse
Tunnel area so that the
system selects a tunnel
according to the
priority.
Reverse Tunnel Tunnel-001_Reverse Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
PW ID 35 A PW ID uniquely
identifies a PW on an entire
network.
Signaling Type Static For a static PW, you need to
set Forward Label and
Reverse Label.
Encapsulation Type MPLS Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.

4. Click ATM Link. In the dialog box that is displayed, set the parameters relevant to the
connection.
Table 8-14 Parameters for configuring an ATM connection
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
Connection Name Connection1 and
Connection2
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Role Working Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
322
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
Source SAI Connection1: 35-
N1D12E-1(PORT-1)
Connection2: 35-
N1D12E-2(PORT-2)
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Source VPI Connection1: 1
Connection2: 1
This parameter specifies
the VPI information carried
by the service from a base
station.
Source VCI Connection1: 100
Connection2: 100
This parameter specifies
the VCI information carried
by the service from a base
station.
Source ATM Policy Connection1: RT-VBR
Connection2: RT-VBR
Connection1 is an R99
service and you need to
select the RT-VBR policy
for it.
Connection2 is an R99
service and you need to
select the RT-VBR policy
for it.
Sink SAI Connection1: 32-
N1AFO1-1(PORT-1)
Connection2: 32-
N1AFO1-1(PORT-1)
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Sink VPI Connection1: 50
Connection2: 60
This parameter specifies
the VPI information carried
by the service after VPI
switching. Max. VPI of an
ATM port is 255 according
to the plan and therefore the
value of the VPI on the sink
ranges from 0 to 255.
Sink VCI Connection1: 32
Connection2: 32
This parameter specifies
the VCI information carried
by the service after VCI
switching. Max. VCI of an
ATM port is 127 according
to the plan and therefore the
value of the VPI on the sink
ranges from 32 to 127.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
323
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
Sink ATM Policy Connection1: RT-VBR
Connection2: RT-VBR
Connection1 is an R99
service and you need to
select the RT-VBR policy
for it.
Connection2 is an R99
service and you need to
select the RT-VBR policy
for it.
Transit VPI - Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Transit VCI - Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.

5. Click Advanced and set PW QoS and Advanced PW Attribute.
Table 8-15 Parameters of advanced attributes
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
Control Word Must use On an MPLS PSN, a control
word carries the packet
information. A control
word is the encapsulation
packet header that consists
of four bytes. A control
word can be used to identify
the packet sequence or used
for bit stuffing.
Control Channel Type CW A CW control word is used
to detect the connectivity of
a PW.
VCCV Verification Mode Ping The VCCV verification
mode is used to detect the
connectivity of a PW.
Source ATM CoS Map 1(mapping1) Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Sink ATM CoS Map 1(mapping1) Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
324
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
Max. Concatenated Cells
Count
10 This parameter specifies
the maximum number of
ATM cells that can be
encapsulated into a packet.
Packet Loading Time (us) 1000 Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.

Table 8-16 PW QoS parameters
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
EXP 1 Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Bandwidth Limited Enabled Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
CIR (kbit/s) 10000 Set the bandwidth based on
the service traffic.
PIR (kbit/s) 30000 Set the bandwidth based on
the service traffic.

6. Click OK. The ATMService-R99 service is created successfully.
7. Create an ATMService-HSDPA service. For details, refer to the preceding steps.
Table 8-17 Parameters of general attributes
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
Service Type ATM Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Service ID 2 A service ID uniquely
identifies a service on an
entire network.
Service Name ATMService-HSDPA Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
325
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
Protection Type Protection-free Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Link Type ATM N-to-1 VCC Cell
Transport
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.

Table 8-18 Parameters of the source node
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
SAI Type ATM Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.

Table 8-19 Parameters of the sink node
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
SAI Type ATM Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.

Table 8-20 PW parameters
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
Forward Type Static Binding l If you set Forward
Type to Static
Binding, you need to
manually specify a
tunnel in the Forward
Tunnel area.
l If you set Forward
Type, you need to set a
tunnel priority in the
Forward Tunnel area
so that the system
selects a tunnel
according to the
priority.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
326
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
Forward Tunnel Tunnel-001 Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Reverse Type Static Binding l If you set Reverse
Type to Static
Binding, you need to
manually specify a
tunnel in the Reverse
Tunnel area.
l If you set Reverse
Type to Select Policy,
you need to set a tunnel
priority in the Reverse
Tunnel area so that the
system selects a tunnel
according to the
priority.
Reverse Tunnel Tunnel-001_Reverse Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
PW ID 36 A PW ID uniquely
identifies a PW on an entire
network.
Signaling Type Static For a static PW, you need to
set Forward Label and
Reverse Label.
Encapsulation Type MPLS Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.

Table 8-21 Parameters for configuring an ATM connection
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
Connection Name Connection1 and
Connection2
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Role Working Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
327
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
Source SAI Connection1: 35-
N1D12E-1(PORT-1)
Connection2: 35-
N1D12E-2(PORT-2)
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Source VPI Connection1: 1
Connection2: 1
This parameter specifies
the VPI information carried
by the service from a base
station.
Source VCI Connection1: 101
Connection2: 101
This parameter specifies
the VCI information carried
by the service from a base
station.
Source ATM Policy Connection1: UBR
Connection2: UBR
Connection1 is an HSDPA
service and you need to
select the UBR policy for it.
Connection2 is an HSDPA
service and you need to
select the UBR policy for it.
Sink SAI Connection1: 32-
N1AFO1-1(PORT-1)
Connection2: 32-
N1AFO1-1(PORT-1)
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Sink VPI Connection1: 51
Connection2: 61
This parameter specifies
the VPI information carried
by the service after VPI
switching. Max. VPI of an
ATM port is 255 according
to the plan and therefore the
value of the VPI on the sink
ranges from 0 to 255.
Sink VCI Connection1: 32
Connection2: 32
This parameter specifies
the VCI information carried
by the service after VCI
switching. Max. VCI of an
ATM port is 127 according
to the plan and therefore the
value of the VPI on the sink
ranges from 32 to 127.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
328
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
Sink ATM Policy Connection1: UBR
Connection2: UBR
Connection1 is an HSDPA
service and you need to
select the UBR policy for it.
Connection2 is an HSDPA
service and you need to
select the UBR policy for it.
Transit VPI - Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Transit VCI - Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.

Table 8-22 Parameters of advanced attributes
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
Control Word Must use On an MPLS PSN, a control
word carries the packet
information. A control
word is the encapsulation
packet header that consists
of four bytes. A control
word can be used to identify
the packet sequence or used
for bit stuffing.
Control Channel Type CW A CW control word is used
to detect the connectivity of
a PW.
VCCV Verification Mode Ping The VCCV verification
mode is used to detect the
connectivity of a PW.
Source ATM CoS Map 1(mapping1) Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Sink ATM CoS Map 1(mapping1) Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Max. Concatenated Cells
Count
20 This parameter specifies
the maximum number of
ATM cells that can be
encapsulated into a packet.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
329
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
Packet Loading Time (us) 1000 Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.

Table 8-23 PW QoS parameters
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
EXP 3 Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Bandwidth Limited Enabled Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
CIR (kbit/s) 10000 Set the bandwidth based on
the volume of service
traffic.
PIR (kbit/s) 30000 Set the bandwidth based on
the volume of service
traffic.

8. Create an ATMService-Signaling service. For details, refer to the preceding steps.
Table 8-24 Parameters of general attributes
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
Service Type ATM Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Service ID 3 A service ID uniquely
identifies a service on an
entire network.
Service Name ATMService-Signaling Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Protection Type Protection-free Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
330
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
Link Type ATM N-to-1 VCC Cell
Transport
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.

Table 8-25 Parameters of the source node
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
SAI Type ATM Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.

Table 8-26 Parameters of the sink node
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
SAI Type ATM Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.

Table 8-27 PW parameters
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
Forward Type Static Binding l If you set Forward
Type to Static
Binding, you need to
manually specify a
tunnel in the Forward
Tunnel area.
l If you set Forward
Type, you need to set a
tunnel priority in the
Forward Tunnel area
so that the system
selects a tunnel
according to the
priority.
Forward Tunnel Tunnel-001 Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
331
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
Reverse Type Static Binding l If you set Reverse
Type to Static
Binding, you need to
manually specify a
tunnel in the Reverse
Tunnel area.
l If you set Reverse
Type to Select Policy,
you need to set a tunnel
priority in the Reverse
Tunnel area so that the
system selects a tunnel
according to the
priority.
Reverse Tunnel Tunnel-001_Reverse Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
PW ID 37 A PW ID uniquely
identifies a PW on an entire
network.
Signaling Type Static For a static PW, you need to
set Forward Label and
Reverse Label.
Encapsulation Type MPLS Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.

Table 8-28 Parameters for configuring an ATM connection
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
Connection Name Connection1 and
Connection2
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Role Working Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Source SAI Connection1: 35-
N1D12E-1(PORT-1)
Connection2: 35-
N1D12E-2(PORT-2)
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
332
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
Source VPI Connection1: 1
Connection2: 1
This parameter specifies
the VPI information carried
by the service from a base
station.
Source VCI Connection1: 102
Connection2: 102
This parameter specifies
the VCI information carried
by the service from a base
station.
Source ATM Policy Connection1: CBR
Connection2: CBR
Connection1 is a signaling
service and you need to
select the CBR policy for it.
Connection2 is a signaling
service and you need to
select the CBR policy for it.
Sink SAI Connection1: 32-
N1AFO1-1(PORT-1)
Connection2: 32-
N1AFO1-1(PORT-1)
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Sink VPI Connection1: 52
Connection2: 62
This parameter specifies
the VPI information carried
by the service after VPI
switching. Max. VPI of an
ATM port is 255 according
to the plan and therefore the
value of the VPI on the sink
ranges from 0 to 255.
Sink VCI Connection1: 32
Connection2: 32
This parameter specifies
the VCI information carried
by the service after VCI
switching. Max. VCI of an
ATM port is 127 according
to the plan and therefore the
value of the VPI on the sink
ranges from 32 to 127.
Sink ATM Policy Connection1: CBR
Connection2: CBR
Connection1 is a signaling
service and you need to
select the CBR policy for it.
Connection2 is a signaling
service and you need to
select the CBR policy for it.
Transit VPI - Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
333
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
Transit VCI - Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.

Table 8-29 Parameters of advanced attributes
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
Control Word Must use On an MPLS PSN, a control
word carries the packet
information. A control
word is the encapsulation
packet header that consists
of four bytes. A control
word can be used to identify
the packet sequence or used
for bit stuffing.
Control Channel Type CW A CW control word is used
to detect the connectivity of
a PW.
VCCV Verification Mode Ping The VCCV verification
mode is used to detect the
connectivity of a PW.
Source ATM CoS Map 1(mapping1) Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Sink ATM CoS Map 1(mapping1) Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Max. Concatenated Cells
Count
20 This parameter specifies
the maximum number of
ATM cells that can be
encapsulated into a packet.
Packet Loading Time (us) 1000 Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
334
Table 8-30 PW QoS parameters
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
EXP 3 Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Bandwidth Limited Enabled Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
CIR (kbit/s) 10000 Set the bandwidth based on
the volume of service
traffic.
PIR (kbit/s) 30000 Set the bandwidth based on
the volume of service
traffic.

----End
8.4.4 Configuration Process (Configuration on a Per-NE Basis)
This section describes the process of configuring a UNIs-NNI ATM service on a per-NE basis.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l You must learn about the networking requirements and service plan described in the
example.
l A network must be created.
Procedure
Step 1 Set LSR IDs.
1. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and choose Configuration > Packet Configuration >
MPLS Management > Basic Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Set LSR ID, Start of Global Label Space, and other parameters. Click Apply.
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
LSR ID NE1: 130.0.0.1 Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan. In
addition, this value is
unique on an entire
network.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
335
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
Start of Global Label Space 0 Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.

3. Display the NE Explorers of NE2, NE3, NE4, NE5, and NE6 separately and perform the
preceding two steps to set the parameters such as LSR ID.
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
LSR ID NE2: 130.0.0.2
NE3: 130.0.0.3
NE4: 130.0.0.4
NE5: 130.0.0.5
NE6: 130.0.0.6
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan. In
addition, this value is
unique on an entire
network.
Start of Global Label Space 0 Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.

Step 2 Configure NNI ports.
1. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and choose Configuration > Packet Configuration >
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree to configure NNI
ports.
2. In the General Attributes tab, select ports 3-EG8-1(PORT-1) and 3-EG8-2(PORT-2).
Right-click the Port Mode filed, and select Layer 3. Set the parameters as required, and
click Apply.
Set relevant parameters as follows:
l Enable Port: Enabled
l Port Mode: Layer 3 (The port carries a tunnel.)
l Working Mode: Auto-Negotiation (Set the working modes of the local port and opposite
port to the same.)
l Max Frame Length (byte): 1620 (Set this parameter according to the length of data
packets. All packets with a length greater than the maximum frame length are
discarded.)
3. Select the 3-EG8-1(PORT-1) and 3-EG8-2(PORT-2) in the Layer 3 Attributes tab. Right-
click the Enable Tunnel field and select Enabled. Right-click the Specify IP Address
field and choose Manually. Then, set the parameters such as IP Address and IP Mask.
Click Apply.
Set relevant parameters as follows:
l Enable Tunnel: Enabled
l Specify IP Address: Manually (Manually indicates that you can set the IP address of
the port.)
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
336
l 3-EG8-1(PORT-1) IP Address: 10.0.0.1
l 3-EG8-2(PORT-2) IP Address: 10.0.5.1
l IP Mask: 255.255.255.252
4. Display the NE Explorers of NE2, NE3, NE4, NE5, and NE6 separately. Perform 2.1
through 2.3 to set parameters for each port.
Set relevant parameters as follows:
Set parameters for each port the same as for NE1-3-EG8-1(PORT-1).
The layer 3 attributes of each port are as follows:
NE Port IP Address IP Mask
NE2 4-PEX2-1(PORT-1) 10.0.1.1 255.255.255.252
3-PEG8-2(PORT-2) 10.0.0.2 255.255.255.252
NE3 3-EX2-1(PORT-1) 10.0.2.1 255.255.255.252
3-EX2-2(PORT-2) 10.0.1.2 255.255.255.252
NE4 3-PEX2-2(PORT-2) 10.0.2.2 255.255.255.252
3-PEX2-1(PORT-1) 10.0.3.1 255.255.255.252
NE5 4-PEX2-2(PORT-2) 10.0.3.2 255.255.255.252
3-PEG8-1(PORT-1) 10.0.4.2 255.255.255.252
NE6 3-PEG8-2(PORT-2) 10.0.4.1 255.255.255.252
3-PEG8-1(PORT-1) 10.0.5.2 255.255.255.252

Step 3 Create the working tunnel.
1. Choose Service > Tunnel > Create Tunnel from the Main Menu.
2. Set the basic information about the working tunnel.
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
Tunnel Name Working Tunnel Set this parameter
according to the service
plan.
Protocol Type MPLS Set this parameter
according to the service
plan.
Signaling Type Static CR Set this parameter
according to the service
plan.
Service Direction Unidirectional Set this parameter
according to the service
plan.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
337
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
Create Reverse Tunnel Selected This parameter is selected
when a reverse tunnel needs
to be created.
Protection Type 1+1 Set this parameter
according to the service
plan.

3. Configure the NE list. On the physical topology, double-click NE1, NE2, and NE3 to add
them to the NE list and set the corresponding NE roles.
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
NE Role NE1: Ingress
NE2: Transit
NE3: Egress
An ingress is the incoming
node of a network. In this
example, NE1 is an ingress
node.
A transit is a pass-through
node. In this example, NE2
is a transit node.
An egress is the outgoing
node of a network. In this
example, NE3 is an egress
node.
Deploy Selected When this parameter is
selected, a tunnel is saved
on the U2000 and applied to
the corresponding NEs.

4. Click Details to set the advanced parameters of the reverse tunnel. Click OK.
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
Tunnel ID l Forward Tunnel: 100
l Reverse Tunnel: 101
Set this parameter
according to the service
plan.
CIR(Kbit/s) Forward and Reverse
Tunnels: 10000
Set this parameter
according to the service
plan.
CBS(byte) Forward and Reverse
Tunnels: 10000
Set this parameter
according to the service
plan.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
338
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
PIR(Kbit/s) Forward and Reverse
Tunnels: 20000
Set this parameter
according to the service
plan.
PBS(byte) Forward and Reverse
Tunnels: 20000
Set this parameter
according to the service
plan.
MTU (bytes) Forward and Reverse
Tunnels: 1620
Set this parameter
according to the service
plan.
LSP Type Forward and Reverse
Tunnels: E-LSP
Currently, this parameter
can be set to E-LSP only.
EXP Forward and Reverse
Tunnels: None
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Out Interface Forward Tunnel:
l NE1: 3-EG8-1
(PORT-1)
l NE2: 4-PEX2-1
(PORT-1)
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE3: 3-EX2-2
(PORT-2)
l NE2: 3-PEG8-2
(PORT-2)
Set this parameter
according to the service
plan. This parameter needs
to be set for only ingress
nodes and transit nodes.
Out Label Forward Tunnel:
l NE1: 20
l NE2: 30
Forward Tunnel:
l NE3: 21
l NE2: 31
Set this parameter
according to the service
plan.
In Interface Forward Tunnel:
l NE2: 3-PEG8-2
(PORT-2)
l NE3: 3-EX2-2
(PORT-2)
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE2: 4-PEX2-1
(PORT-1)
l NE1: 3-EG8-1
(PORT-1)
Set this parameter
according to the service
plan. This parameter needs
to be set for only egress
nodes and transit nodes.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
339
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
In Label Forward Tunnel:
l NE2: 20
l NE3: 30
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE2: 21
l NE1: 31
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Next Hop Forward Tunnel:
l NE1: 10.0.0.2
l NE2: 10.0.1.2
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE3: 10.0.1.1
l NE2: 10.0.0.1
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.

Step 4 Create the protection tunnel.
1. Create the protection tunnel by referring toStep 3.
Set the basic Information as follows:
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
Tunnel Name Protection Tunnel Set this parameter
according to the service
plan.
Protocol Type MPLS Set this parameter
according to the service
plan.
Signaling Type Static CR Set this parameter
according to the service
plan.
Service Direction Unidirectional Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Create Reverse Tunnel Selected This parameter is selected
when a reverse tunnel needs
to be created.

Set the node information as follows:
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
340
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
NE Role NE1: Ingress
NE6, NE5, NE4: Transit
NE3: Egress
An ingress is the incoming
node of a network. In this
example, NE1 is an ingress
node.
A transit is a pass-through
node. In this example, NE6,
NE5, and NE4 are transit
nodes.
An egress is the outgoing
node of a network. In this
example, NE3 is an egress
node.
Deploy Selected When this parameter is
selected, a tunnel is saved
on the U2000 and applied to
the corresponding NEs.

Set the route information as follows:
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
Tunnel ID l Forward Tunnel: 120
l Reverse Tunnel: 121
Set this parameter
according to the service
plan.
CIR(Kbit/s) Forward and Reverse
Tunnels: 10000
Set this parameter
according to the service
plan.
CBS(byte) Forward and Reverse
Tunnels: 10000
Set this parameter
according to the service
plan.
PIR(Kbit/s) Forward and Reverse
Tunnels: 20000
Set this parameter
according to the service
plan.
PBS(byte) Forward and Reverse
Tunnels: 20000
Set this parameter
according to the service
plan.
MTU (bytes) Forward and Reverse
Tunnels: 1620
Set this parameter
according to the service
plan.
LSP Type Forward and Reverse
Tunnels: E-LSP
Currently, this parameter
can be set to E-LSP only.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
341
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
EXP Forward and Reverse
Tunnels: None
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Out Interface Forward Tunnel:
l NE1: 3-EG8-2
(PORT-2)
l NE6: 3-PEG8-2
(PORT-2)
l NE5: 4-PEX2-2
(PORT-2)
l NE4: 3-PEX2-2
(PORT-2)
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE3: 3-EX2-1
(PORT-1)
l NE4: 3-PEX2-1
(PORT-1)
l NE5: 3-PEG8-1
(PORT-1)
l NE6: 3-PEG8-1
(PORT-1)
Set this parameter
according to the service
plan. This parameter needs
to be set for only ingress
nodes and transit nodes.
Out Label Forward Tunnel:
l NE1: 22
l NE6: 32
l NE5: 42
l NE4: 52
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE3: 23
l NE4: 33
l NE5: 43
l NE6: 53
Set this parameter
according to the service
plan.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
342
Parameter Example Value Principle for Value
Selection
In Interface Forward Tunnel:
l NE6: 3-PEG8-1
(PORT-1)
l NE5: 3-PEG8-1
(PORT-1)
l NE4: 3-PEX2-1
(PORT-1)
l NE3: 3-EX2-1
(PORT-1)
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE4: 3-PEX2-2
(PORT-2)
l NE5: 4-PEX2-2
(PORT-2)
l NE6: 3-PEG8-2
(PORT-2)
l NE1: 3-EG8-2
(PORT-2)
Set this parameter
according to the service
plan. This parameter needs
to be set for only egress
nodes and transit nodes.
In Label Forward Tunnel:
l NE6: 22
l NE5: 32
l NE4: 42
l NE3: 52
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE4: 23
l NE5: 33
l NE6: 43
l NE1: 53
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.
Next Hop Forward Tunnel:
l NE1: 10.0.5.2
l NE6: 10.0.4.2
l NE5: 10.0.3.1
l NE4: 10.0.2.1
Reverse Tunnel:
l NE3: 10.0.2.2
l NE4: 10.0.3.2
l NE5: 10.0.4.1
l NE6: 10.0.2.1
Set this parameter
according to the
networking plan.

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
343
Step 5 Configure ports, including NodeB-side ATM ports and RNC-side ATM ports.
1. Configure NodeB-side ATM ports.
a. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and choose Configuration > Packet
Configuration > Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree
to configure NodeB-side ports.
b. Select the ports from 35-N1D12E-1(PORT-1) to 35-N1D12E-8(PORT-8), Right-click
the Port Mode field, and select Layer 2. Set the parameters as required, and click
Apply.
NOTE
Before setting the port mode, make sure that the port DCN is disabled.
Set relevant parameters as follows:
l Port: ports from 35-N1D12E-1(PORT-1) to 35-N1D12E-8(PORT-8)
l Name: NodeB ATM (Set the port name as required. The port name distinguishes
the port from other ports and helps to query the port.)
l Port Mode: Layer 2 (The port transmits IMA signals.)
l Encapsulation Type: ATM
c. In the Advanced tab, set Frame Format and Frame Mode for the ports from 35-
N1D12E-1(PORT-1) to 35-N1D12E-8(PORT-8). Click Apply.
Set relevant parameters as follows:
l Port: ports from 35-N1D12E-1(PORT-1) to 35-N1D12E-8(PORT-8)
l Frame Format: CRC-4 multiframe (Set this parameter to the value same as that of
the NodeB.)
l Frame Mode: 31
d. Choose Configuration > Packet Configuration > Interface Management > ATM
IMA Management from the Function Tree. Then, click the Binding tab.
e. In the Binding tab, click Configuration and set bound ports for ports 35-N1D12E-1
(PORT-1) and 35-N1D12E-2(PORT-2). Then, click OK.
Set the parameters relevant to 35-N1D12E-1(PORT-1) as follows:
l Available Boards: 35-N1D12E (Set this parameter according to the networking
plan.)
l Configurable Ports: 35-N1D12E-1(PORT-1) (Set this parameter according to the
networking plan.)
l Available Bound Paths
Level: E1 (Select E1 for an ATM E1 board and VC12-xv for an ATM STM-1
board. For this example, the board is an ATM E1 board.)
Direction: Bidirectional (default)
Optical Interface: - (This parameter need not be set for E1, but need be set for
VC12-xv. For this example, the path level is E1.)
l Available Resources: ports from 35-N1D12E-1(PORT-1) to 35-N1D12E-4
(PORT-4)
l Available Timeslots: - (This parameter need not be set for E1, but need be set for
VC12-xv.)
Set the parameters relevant to 35-N1D12E-2(PORT-2) as follows:
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
344
l Available Boards: 35-N1D12E (Set this parameter according to the networking
plan.)
l Configurable Ports: 35-N1D12E-2(PORT-2) (Set this parameter according to the
networking plan.)
l Available Bound Paths
Level: E1 (Select E1 for an ATM E1 board and VC12-xv for an ATM STM-1
board. For this example, the board is an ATM E1 board.)
Direction: Bidirectional (default)
Optical Interface: - (This parameter need not be set for E1, but need be set for
VC12-xv. For this example, the path level is E1.)
l Available Resources: ports from 35-N1D12E-1(PORT-5) to 35-N1D12E-4
(PORT-8)
l Available Timeslots: - (This parameter need not be set for E1, but need be set for
VC12-xv.)
f. In the IMA Group Management tab, double-click the IMA Protocol Enable
Status field and select Enabled. Set the other parameters as required. Then, click
Apply.
The settings of parameters need to be the same as those on the NodeB.
g. In the ATM Interface Management tab, set the parameters such as Max. VPI and
Max. VCI. Then, click Apply.
Set relevant parameters as follows:
l Port Type: UNI (A UNI port is connected to the client-side equipment and an NNI
port is connected to the ATM equipment on a core network.)
l ATM Cell Payload Scrambling: Enabled
l Loopback: No Loopback
2. Configure RNC-side ATM ports.
a. In the NE Explorer, select NE3 and choose Configuration > Packet
Configuration > Interface Management > SDH Interface from the Function Tree
to configure RNC-side ATM ports.
b. In the Layer 2 Attributes tab, select 32-N1AFO1-1(PORT-1) and set the parameters
such as Max. VPI and Max. VCI for the port. Then, click Apply.
Set relevant parameters as follows:
l Port Type: UNI (A UNI port is connected to the client-side equipment and an NNI
port is connected to the ATM equipment on a core network.)
l ATM Cell Payload Scrambling: Enabled
l Max. VPI: 255 (Set this parameter according to the networking plan. Set Max.
VPI to specify the value range of VPI. The VPI ranges from 0 to Max. VPI.)
l Max. VCI: 127 (Set this parameter according to the networking plan. Set Max.
VCI to specify the value range of VCI. The VCI ranges from 0 to Max. VCI.)
l VCC-Supported VPI Count: 32 (Set this parameter according to the networking
plan.)
Step 6 Create three UNIs-NNI ATM services.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
345
1. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and choose Configuration > Packet Configuration >
ATM Service Management from the Function Tree. Then, create an R99 service from
NE1 to NE3.
2. Click New. The New ATM Service window is displayed. Then, set Service ID, Service
Name, Service Type, and Connection Type.
Set relevant parameters as follows:
l Service ID: 1
l Service Name: ATMService-R99
l Service Type: UNIs-NNI
l Connection Type: PVC (PVC indicates that the VPI and VCI of the ATM connection
can be changed; PVP indicates that only the VPI of the ATM connection can be
changed.)
3. Click the Connection tab and click Add. The Configure Connection window is displayed.
Add connection 1 and connection 2.
Set relevant parameters as follows:
l Connection 1
Connection Name: Connection 1
Source Board: 35-N1D12E
Source Port: 35-N1D12E-1(PORT-1)
Source VPI: 1 (This parameter indicates the VPI information that is transmitted with
the service from the NodeB.)
Source VCI: 100 (This parameter indicates the VCI information that is transmitted
with the service from the NodeB.)
PW ID: 35
Sink Board: -
Sink Port: -
Sink VPI: 50 (This parameter indicates the VPI information that is transmitted with
the service after VPI switching. Max. VPI of the ATM port is planned to be 255,
and therefore the Sink VPI ranges from 0 to 255.)
Sink VCI: 32 (This parameter indicates The VCI information that is transmitted with
the service after VCI switching. Max. VCI of the ATM port is planned to be 127,
and therefore the Sink VCI ranges from 32 to 127.)
Uplink Policy: RT-VBR (Select the RT-VBR policy, because connection 1 is an R99
service.)
Downlink Policy: RT-VBR (Select the RT-VBR policy, because connection 1 is an
R99 service.)
l Connection 2
Connection Name: Connection 2
Source Board: 35-N1D12E
Source Port: 35-N1D12E-2(PORT-2)
Source VPI: 1
Source VCI: 100
PW ID: 35
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
346
Sink Board: -
Sink Port: -
Sink VPI: 60
Sink VCI: 32
Uplink Policy: RT-VBR (Select the RT-VBR policy, because connection 2 is an R99
service.)
Downlink Policy: RT-VBR (Select the RT-VBR policy, because connection 2 is an
R99 service.)
4. Click the PW tab and click Add. The Configure PW window is displayed. In the window,
set attributes for the PW.
Set the parameters related to PW1 as follows:
l Basic attributes
PW ID: 35
PW Signaling Type: Static (Static indicates that ingress and egress labels are
manually added.)
PW Type: ATM n to one VCC cell transport (Select ATM n-to-one VCC cell
transport if multiple ATM connections are mapped to one PW; select ATM one-to-
one VCC Cell Mode if one ATM connection is mapped to one PW. For this example,
two ATM connections are mapped are mapped to one PW.)
PW Direction: Bidirectional
PW Incoming Label: 33
PW Outgoing Label: 32
Tunnel Type: MPLS
Tunnel No. : 1 (Tunnel-0001)
Peer LSR ID: 1.0.0.3 (This parameter specifies the LSR ID of the NE terminating
the PW.)
l Advanced attributes
Control Word: Must use
Control Channel Type: CW (A CW control word is used to detect the connectivity
of a PW.)
VCCV Verification Mode: Ping (The VCCV verification mode is used to detect the
connectivity of a PW.)
Max. Concatenated Cell Count: 10 (This parameter specifies the maximum number
of ATM cells that can be encapsulated into a packet.)
Packet Loading Time (us): 1000
l QoS
Ingress
EXP: 1
5. Click the CoS Mapping tab and set QoS attributes for PW1.
Set CoS mapping for PW1 as follows:
l PW ID: 35
l CoS Mapping: 1 (Default AtmCosMap)
6. In the NE Explorer, select NE3. Then, create an ATMService-R99 service by following
6.1 to 6.5.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
347
l Set general attributes for the ATM service as follows:
Service ID: 1
Service Name: ATMService-R99
Service Type: UNIs-NNI
Connection Type: PVC
l Configure ATM connections as follows:
Connection 1
Connection Name: Connection 1
Source Board: 32-N1AFO1
Source Port: 32-N1AFO1-1(PORT-1)
Source VPI: 50
Source VCI: 32
PW ID: 35
Sink Board: -
Sink Port: -
Sink VPI: 50
Sink VCI: 32
Uplink Policy: RT-VBR
Downlink Policy: RT-VBR
Connection 2
Connection Name: Connection 2
Source Board: 32-N1AFO1
Source Port: 32-N1AFO1-1(PORT-1)
Source VPI: 60
Source VCI: 32
PW ID: 35
Sink Board: -
Sink Port: -
Sink VPI: 60
Sink VCI: 32
Uplink Policy: RT-VBR
Downlink Policy: RT-VBR
l Set the parameters related to PW1 as follows:
Basic attributes
PW ID: 35
PW Signaling Type: Static
PW Type: ATM n to one VCC cell transport
PW Direction: Bidirectional
PW Incoming Label: 33
PW Outgoing Label: 32
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
348
Tunnel Type: MPLS
Tunnel No. : 2 (Tunnel-0002)
Peer LSR ID: 1.0.0.1
Advanced attributes
Control Word: Must use
Control Channel Type: CW
VCCV Verification Mode: Ping
Max. Concatenated Cell Count: 10
Packet Loading Time (us): 1000
QoS
Ingress
EXP: 1
l Set CoS mapping for PW1 as follows:
PW ID: 35
CoS Mapping: 1 (Default AtmCosMap)
7. Create an ATMService-HSDPA service by following 6.1 to 6.6.
Set the parameters related to NE1 as follows:
l Set general attributes for the ATM service as follows:
Service ID: 2
Service Name: ATMService-HSDPA
Service Type: UNIs-NNI
Connection Type: PVC
l Configure ATM connections as follows:
Connection 1
Connection Name: Connection 1
Source Board: 35-N1D12E
Source Port: 35-N1D12E-1(PORT-1)
Source VPI: 1
Source VCI: 101
PW ID: 36
Sink Board: -
Sink Port: -
Sink VPI: 51
Sink VCI: 32
Uplink Policy: UBR
Downlink Policy: UBR
Connection 2
Connection Name: Connection 2
Source Board: 35-N1D12E
Source Port: 35-N1D12E-2(PORT-2)
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
349
Source VPI: 1
Source VCI: 101
PW ID: 36
Sink Board: -
Sink Port: -
Sink VPI: 61
Sink VCI: 32
Uplink Policy: UBR
Downlink Policy: UBR
l Set the parameters related to PW2 as follows:
Basic attributes
PW ID: 36
PW Signaling Type: Static
PW Type: ATM n to one VCC cell transport
PW Direction: Bidirectional
PW Incoming Label: 33
PW Outgoing Label: 32
Tunnel Type: MPLS
Tunnel No. : 1 (Tunnel-0001)
Peer LSR ID: 1.0.0.3
Advanced attributes
Control Word: Must use
Control Channel Type: CW
VCCV Verification Mode: Ping
Max. Concatenated Cell Count: 10
Packet Loading Time (us): 1000
QoS
Ingress
EXP: 3
l Set CoS mapping for PW2 as follows:
PW ID: 36
CoS Mapping: 1 (Default AtmCosMap)
Set the parameters related to NE3 as follows:
l Set general attributes for the ATM service as follows:
Service ID: 2
Service Name: ATMService-HSDPA
Service Type: UNIs-NNI
Connection Type: PVC
l Configure ATM connections as follows:
Connection 1
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
350
Connection Name: Connection 1
Source Board: 32-N1AFO1
Source Port: 32-N1AFO1-1(PORT-1)
Source VPI: 51
Source VCI: 32
PW ID: 36
Sink Board: -
Sink Port: -
Sink VPI: 51
Sink VCI: 32
Uplink Policy: UBR
Downlink Policy: UBR
Connection 2
Connection Name: Connection 2
Source Board: 32-N1AFO1
Source Port: 32-N1AFO1-1(PORT-1)
Source VPI: 61
Source VCI: 32
PW ID: 36
Sink Board: -
Sink Port: -
Sink VPI: 61
Sink VCI: 32
Uplink Policy: UBR
Downlink Policy: UBR
l Set the parameters related to PW2 as follows:
Basic attributes
PW ID: 36
PW Signaling Type: Static
PW Type: ATM n to one VCC cell transport
PW Direction: Bidirectional
PW Incoming Label: 33
PW Outgoing Label: 32
Tunnel Type: MPLS
Tunnel No. : 2 (Tunnel-0002)
Peer LSR ID: 1.0.0.1
Advanced attributes
Control Word: Must use
Control Channel Type: CW
VCCV Verification Mode: Ping
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
351
Max. Concatenated Cell Count: 10
Packet Loading Time (us): 1000
QoS
Ingress
EXP: 3
l Set CoS mapping for PW2 as follows:
PW ID: 36
CoS Mapping: 1 (Default AtmCosMap)
8. Create an ATMService-Signaling service by following 6.1 to 6.6.
Set the parameters related to NE1 as follows:
l Set general attributes for the ATM service as follows:
Service ID: 3
Service Name: ATMService-Signaling
Service Type: UNIs-NNI
Connection Type: PVC
l Configure ATM connections as follows:
Connection 1
Connection Name: Connection 1
Source Board: 35-N1D12E
Source Port: 35-N1D12E-1(PORT-1)
Source VPI: 1
Source VCI: 102
PW ID: 37
Sink Board: -
Sink Port: -
Sink VPI: 52
Sink VCI: 32
Uplink Policy: CBR
Downlink Policy: CBR
Connection 2
Connection Name: Connection 2
Source Board: 35-N1D12E
Source Port: 35-N1D12E-2(PORT-2)
Source VPI: 1
Source VCI: 102
PW ID: 37
Sink Board: -
Sink Port: -
Sink VPI: 62
Sink VCI: 32
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
352
Uplink Policy: CBR
Downlink Policy: CBR
l Set the parameters related to PW2 as follows:
Basic attributes
PW ID: 37
PW Signaling Type: Static
PW Type: ATM n to one VCC cell transport
PW Direction: Bidirectional
PW Incoming Label: 33
PW Outgoing Label: 32
Tunnel Type: MPLS
Tunnel No. : 1 (Tunnel-0001)
Peer LSR ID: 1.0.0.3
Advanced attributes
Control Word: Must use
Control Channel Type: CW
VCCV Verification Mode: Ping
Max. Concatenated Cell Count: 10
Packet Loading Time (us): 1000
QoS
Ingress
EXP: 0
l Set CoS mapping for PW2 as follows:
PW ID: 37
CoS Mapping: 1 (Default AtmCosMap)
Set the parameters related to NE3 as follows:
l Set general attributes for the ATM service as follows:
Service ID: 3
Service Name: ATMService-Signaling
Service Type: UNIs-NNI
Connection Type: PVC
l Configure ATM connections as follows:
Connection 1
Connection Name: Connection 1
Source Board: 32-N1AFO1
Source Port: 32-N1AFO1-1(PORT-1)
Source VPI: 52
Source VCI: 32
PW ID: 37
Sink Board: -
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
353
Sink Port: -
Sink VPI: 52
Sink VCI: 32
Uplink Policy: CBR
Downlink Policy: CBR
Connection 2
Connection Name: Connection 2
Source Board: 32-N1AFO1
Source Port: 32-N1AFO1-1(PORT-1)
Source VPI: 62
Source VCI: 32
PW ID: 37
Sink Board: -
Sink Port: -
Sink VPI: 62
Sink VCI: 32
Uplink Policy: CBR
Downlink Policy: CBR
l Set the parameters related to PW2 as follows:
Basic attributes
PW ID: 37
PW Signaling Type: Static
PW Type: ATM n to one VCC cell transport
PW Direction: Bidirectional
PW Incoming Label: 33
PW Outgoing Label: 32
Tunnel Type: MPLS
Tunnel No. : 2 (Tunnel-0002)
Peer LSR ID: 1.0.0.1
Advanced attributes
Control Word: Must use
Control Channel Type: CW
VCCV Verification Mode: Ping
Max. Concatenated Cell Count: 10
Packet Loading Time (us): 1000
QoS
Ingress
EXP: 0
l Set CoS mapping for PW2 as follows:
PW ID: 37
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
354
CoS Mapping: 1 (Default AtmCosMap)
----End
8.5 Verifying ATM Service Configuration
Use the ATM OAM function to test the connectivity of UNIs-NNI ATM services to ensure that
the ATM services are transmitted normally. This section describes how to test the connectivity
of ATM services by performing a loopback (LB) test.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l An ATM service must be configured. For information on how to configure an ATM service,
refer to section 8 Configuring ATM Services in the Configuration Guide.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
Test Connection Diagram
Figure 8-9 shows the connection for testing the connectivity of ATM services.
Figure 8-9 Connection diagram for testing the connectivity of ATM services
Inloop
NE1 NE2
PSN
Inloop

Procedure
Step 1 Set the automatic loopback release function to Disabled for the UNI ports receiving the tested
ATM service on NE1 and NE2.
1. Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Automatic Disabling of NE
Function from the Main Menu.
2. Select NE1 and NE2 from Physical Root and click .
3. Set Auto Disabling to Disabled for SDH Optical/Electrical Interface Loopback of NE1
and NE2.
NOTE
When Auto Disabling of SDH Optical/Electrical Interface Loopback on an NE is set to Disabled, the
automatic loopback release function is disabled for all SDH optical ports, PDH electrical ports, and ATM
IMA groups on the NE.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
355
Step 2 Set an inloop for the UNI port (to be tested) receiving the ATM service on NE1 by using the
U2000.
l If the UNI port receiving the ATM service is an IMA group, do as follows:
1. On the Main Topology of the U2000, right-click NE1 and choose NE Explorer from the
shortcut menu to display the NE Explorer window.
2. In the NE Explorer window, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > Packet
Configuration > Interface Management > ATM IMA Management from the Function
Tree.
3. Click the ATM Interface Management tab and then select the IMA group carrying the
tested ATM service.
4. Set Loopback to Inloop for the IMA group.
5. Click Apply.
l If the UNI port receiving the ATM service is an AFO1 port, do as follows:
1. On the Main Topology of the U2000, right-click NE1 and choose NE Explorer from the
shortcut menu to display the NE Explorer window.
2. In the NE Explorer window, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > Packet
Configuration > Interface Management > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.
3. Click the Advanced Attributes tab and then select the AFO1 port carrying the tested ATM
service.
4. Set Loopback to Inloop for the AFO1 port.
5. Click Apply.
Step 3 Set an inloop for the UNI port (to be tested) receiving the ATM service on NE2 with reference
to Step 2.
Step 4 In the NE Explorer window, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > ATM OAM
Management from the Function Tree.
Step 5 Click the Remote Loopback Test tab, and set Segment and End Attribute to Endpoint for
the ATM service to be tested whose Connection Direction is Source.
NOTE
Segment and End Attribute of an ATM service specifies the type of ATM OAM cells transmitted during
an LB test.
l If Segment and End Attribute is set to Segment point, seg_LB cells are transmitted.
l If Segment and End Attribute is set to Endpoint, e-t-e_LB cells are transmitted.
Step 6 Set Loopback Point NE of the tested ATM service to NE2.
Step 7 Click Test. After the test is completed, click to check the LB test information.
NOTE
In Browse Event Logs, check Reporting of LB status information. If Test Result is Succeeded, the
tested ATM service is normal. If Test Result is Failed, rectify faults with reference to Troubleshooting.
Step 8 Release the inloops for the UNI ports receiving the ATM service on NE1 and NE2 with reference
to Step 2.
Step 9 Set Automatic Disabling to Enabled for SDH Optical/Electrical Interface Loopback on NE1
and NE2 with reference to Step 1.
----End
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 8 Configuring ATM Services
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
356
9 Configuration Task Collection
About This Chapter
This topic lists the relevant configuration tasks.
9.1 Configuring an Ethernet Port
This topic describes how to set the attributes of an Ethernet port. An Ethernet port can be used
to carry Ethernet packets or tunnels, depending on different settings of the port attributes. The
attributes of an Ethernet port include the general attributes, Layer 2 attributes, Layer 3 attributes,
advanced attributes, and flow control.
9.2 Configuring CES Ports
This topic describes how to configure channelized STM-1 ports and E1 ports to support access
of CES services.
9.3 Configuring the NNIs
Configuring the NNIs is the basis of configuring the packet Ethernet services.
9.4 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel
On a PSN network, the multi-protocol label switching (MPLS) tunnel carries PWs where various
services are encapsulated. In this manner, data packets can be transparently transmitted between
NEs. One MPLS tunnel can carry several PWs. Before configuring a service, you need to
configure the MPLS tunnel that carries the service.
9.5 Managing MPLS Tunnels
MPLS tunnels are used to transmit PWE3 services and their quality determines transmission
stability of PWE3 services. Therefore, it is crucial to properly manage MPLS tunnels. Managing
MPLS tunnels involves checking the MPLS tunnel topology, deploying MPLS tunnels, deleting
MPLS tunnels, and managing discrete MPLS tunnels.
9.6 Configuring MPLS OAM
MPLS OAM effectively detects, confirms, and locates the internal defects of an MPLS network,
and thus monitors the network performance.
9.7 Configuring MPLS Tunnel APS
MPLS tunnel APS protection is implemented based on the APS protocol. If MPLS tunnel APS
is configured, the services are switched from the working tunnel to the protection tunnel after
the working tunnel is faulty.
9.8 Managing MPLS Tunnel APS Protection Groups
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
357
MPLS tunnels are used to transmit PWE3 services and their quality determines transmission
stability of PWE3 services. MPLS tunnel APS provides protection for MPLS tunnels. Therefore,
it is crucial to properly manage MPLS tunnel APS protection groups. Managing MPLS tunnel
APS protection groups involves automatically discovering, deploying, modifying, and deleting
MPLS tunnel APS protection groups.
9.9 Operation Tasks for Configuring E-Line Services
This topic describes how to configure E-Line services, including UNI-UNI E-Line services, E-
Line services carried by ports, E-Line services carried by PWs, and E-Line services carried by
QinQ links.
9.10 Operation Task for Configuring E-LAN Services
This topic describes how to configure E-LAN services, including E-LAN services carried by
ports, E-LAN services carried by PWs, and E-LAN services carried by QinQ links.
9.11 Configuring E-AGGR Services
This topic describes how to configure E-AGGR services, including E-AGGR services carried
by ports and E-AGGR services carried by PWs.
9.12 Configuring Transit Nodes for Ethernet Services
On a live data network, an Ethernet service is added to its source NE, passed through on its
transit NEs, and dropped from its sink NE. This section describes how to configure transit NEs
for an Ethernet service.
9.13 Operation Tasks for Configuring CES Services
This topic describes the operation tasks for configuring CES services in per-NE mode and end-
to-end mode on the NMS.
9.14 Configuring Transit NEs for CES Services
On a live data network, an Ethernet service is added to its source NE, passed through on its
transit NEs, and dropped from its sink NE. This section describes how to configure transit NEs
for a CES service.
9.15 Configuring ATM PWE3 Services
This section describes the operation tasks for configuring ATM PWE3 services in per-NE mode
and end-to-end mode on the NMS.
9.16 Managing PWE3 Services
Quality of PWE3 services has significant impacts on customer revenues; stable PWE3 services
increase customer revenues. Therefore, it is crucial to properly manage PWE3 services.
Managing PWE3 services involves deploying, modifying, and deleting PWE3 services,
checking the PWE3 service topology, and managing discrete PWE3 services.
9.17 Managing Composite Services
Managing composite services includes automatically discovering and deploying composite
services.
9.18 Configuring Address Resolution
Dynamic Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) learning is implemented by the dynamic ARP. It
automatically maps IP addresses and MAC address, requiring no manual configuration of an
ARP table. Generally, dynamic ARP learning is applicable to networks with many NEs.
Dynamic ARP protocol packets, however, may significantly affect NE operating. For static ARP
configuration, the ARP table, namely, mapping between IP addresses and MAC addresses, is
configured manually, but NE operating is not affected by static ARP protocol packets. Static
ARP configuration is applicable to small networks with specific NEs and NE ports used.
9.19 Configuring the NE-Level TPID
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
358
When the request VLAN function is enabled, PW-carried Ethernet services function properly
only if the TPIDs in the request VLAN tags of the Ethernet services are the same at both ends
of a PW.
9.20 Creating a QinQ Link
In the case of the QinQ link, a layer of VLAN tag is added to the packets that are accessed over
a port, through QinQ encapsulation. Hence, the packets from different VLANs on the user-side
network can be encapsulated and then transmitted to the same VLAN on the transport network.
In this manner, the VLAN resources on the transport network are saved. Both the E-Line service
and E-LAN service can be carried by the QinQ links on the network side.
9.21 Creating a V-UNI Group
Creating a V-UNI group involves selecting the V-UNI group members and setting the overall
bandwidth of V-UNI members. The overall bandwidth in the V-UNI group can be restrained by
creating the V-UNI group.
9.22 Managing the Blacklist
The blacklist is used to discard the data frame that contains the specified destination MAC
address. Managing a blacklist involves configuring disabled MAC addresses.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
359
9.1 Configuring an Ethernet Port
This topic describes how to set the attributes of an Ethernet port. An Ethernet port can be used
to carry Ethernet packets or tunnels, depending on different settings of the port attributes. The
attributes of an Ethernet port include the general attributes, Layer 2 attributes, Layer 3 attributes,
advanced attributes, and flow control.
The application scenario of an Ethernet port depends on the settings of the port attributes. For
details, refer to Table 9-1.
Table 9-1 Application scenario of an Ethernet port
Application Scenario Port Type Required Port Attribute
Accessing the Ethernet
service
Ethernet port General attributes, Layer 2
attributes
Carrying the QinQ Link Ethernet port General attributes, Layer 2
attributes
Carrying the tunnel Ethernet port General attributes, Layer 3
attributes

NOTE
When the Ethernet port is used to carry the QinQ Link, the configuration procedure is similar to the
configuration procedure when the Ethernet port is used to carry the Ethernet service. In this case, however,
the encapsulation types are different. For details, see 9.1.2 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of Ethernet
Ports.
Follow the procedure shown in Figure 9-1 to set the attributes of an Ethernet port.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
360
Figure 9-1 Procedure for configuring an Ethernet port
Carry Ethernet packets
Carry tunnels
Set general attributes
Start
Set general attributes
Start
Configure the flow control
End
Set Layer 3
attributes
Required
Optional
Configure the flow control
End
Set Layer 2
attributes
Set advanced attributes Set advanced attributes

9.1.1 Setting the General Attributes of Ethernet Interfaces
Before you set the Layer 2 and Layer 3 attributes of an Ethernet port, you need to set the general
attributes of the corresponding Ethernet port. The general attributes of an Ethernet port define
the physical-layer information, such as the port mode, encapsulation type, and maximum frame
length.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Packet Configuration >
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
361
Step 2 Click the General Attributes tab.
Step 3 Select the board and set the parameters as required. For details about the parameters, see 10.1.1
General Attributes.
NOTE
l When Port Mode is set to Layer 2, Encapsulation Type can be set to Null, 802.1Q, or QinQ.
l When Port Mode is set to Layer 3, Encapsulation Type can be set to 802.1Q only. In this case, the
port can be used to carry the tunnel.
Step 4 Click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation
is successful.
Step 5 Click Close.
----End
9.1.2 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of Ethernet Ports
After the Layer 2 attributes of an Ethernet port are set, the port can be used for connecting to
the client-side equipment at the edge of an SDH network or for forwarding Ethernet packets
within the SDH network. The Layer 2 attributes of an Ethernet port define the related information
about the data link layer.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l In General Attributes, Port Mode must be set to Layer 2.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Packet Configuration >
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the Layer 2 Attributes tab.
Step 3 Select the port and set the parameters as required. For details about the parameters, see 10.1.3
Layer 2 Attributes.
NOTE
l QinQ Type Domain can be set only when Encapsulation Type is QinQ.
l TAG can be set only when Encapsulation Type is 802.1Q.
l Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority can be set only when Encapsulation Type is 802.1Q.
Step 4 Click Apply. Click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that
the operation is successful.
Step 5 Click Close.
----End
9.1.3 Setting the Layer 3 Attributes of Ethernet Ports
When an Ethernet port is used to carry a tunnel, you need to set the Layer 3 attributes of the
Ethernet port. The Layer 3 attributes of an Ethernet port define the related attributes of the
network layer.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
362
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l In General Attributes, Port Mode must be set to Layer 3.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Packet Configuration >
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the Layer 3 Attributes tab.
Step 3 Select the board and set the parameters as required. For details about the parameters, see 10.1.4
Layer 3 Attributes.
NOTE
When changing the IP address of an port, ensure that the IP address of the port and the IP addresses of the
other ports configured with services are not in the same subnet.
Step 4 Click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation
is successful.
Step 5 Click Close.
----End
9.1.4 Setting the Advanced Attributes of Ethernet Ports
You can set the routine maintenance parameters by setting the advanced attributes of Ethernet
ports.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Packet Configuration >
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
Step 3 Select the board and set the parameters as required. For details about the parameters, see 10.1.5
Advanced Attributes.
Step 4 Click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation
is successful.
Step 5 Click Close.
----End
9.1.5 Configuring the Flow Control
When the flow control function is enabled, the Ethernet port sends a PAUSE frame to the
opposite end and then the opposite end stops transmitting Ethernet packets, if a congestion occurs
on the link. As a result, the congestion is prevented.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
363
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Packet Configuration >
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the Flow Control tab.
Step 3 Select the board and set the parameters as required.
Step 4 Click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation
is successful.
Step 5 Click Close.
----End
9.2 Configuring CES Ports
This topic describes how to configure channelized STM-1 ports and E1 ports to support access
of CES services.
9.2.1 Configuring Channelized STM-1 Ports
When configuring CES services carried by channelized STM-1 ports, you need to set basic
attributes and the frame format in the advanced attributes to ensure that the frame format of the
channelized STM-1 ports is the same as the service encapsulation format.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE, and then choose Configuration > Packet Configuration >
Interface Management > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the General Attributes tab and set the parameters according to the actual requirements.
For details about the parameters, see 10.6.1 Channelized STM-1 Port.
NOTE
In the case of the OptiX OSN equipment, Port Mode can be set to Layer 1 only. In this case, the OptiX
OSN equipment supports access of channelized STM-1 services.
Step 3 After setting the parameters, click Apply.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
364
Step 4 Optional: Select a port and then check its associated services and logical port in the lower
window.
Step 5 Click the Advanced Attributes tab and set the parameters according to the actual requirements.
For details about the parameters, see 10.6.1 Channelized STM-1 Port.
Step 6 After setting the parameters, click Apply.
Step 7 In the NE Explorer, select the CQ1 and choose Configuration > Interface Management >
Path Configuration from the Function Tree. Set the parameters according to the actual
requirements.
Step 8 After setting the parameters, click Apply.
----End
9.2.2 Configuring E1 Ports
When configuring CES services carried by E1 ports, you need to set basic attributes and the
frame format in the advanced attributes to ensure that the frame format of the E1 ports is the
same as the service encapsulation format.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE, and then choose Configuration > Packet Configuration >
Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Select a CES board.
Step 3 Click the General Attributes tab and set the parameters according to the actual requirements.
For details about the parameters, see 10.6.2 E1 Port.
NOTE
In the case of the OptiX OSN equipment, Port Mode can be set to Layer 1 only. In this case, the OptiX
OSN equipment supports access of E1 services.
Step 4 After setting the parameters, click Apply.
Step 5 Optional: Select a port and then check its associated services and logical port in the lower
window.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
365
Step 6 After setting the parameters, click Apply.
Step 7 Click the Advanced Attributes tab and set the parameters according to the actual requirements.
For details about the parameters, see 10.6.2 E1 Port.
NOTE
If an E1 port carries a CESoPSN CES service, set Frame Format of the E1 port to Double Frame or
CRC-4 Multiframe (recommended value). If an E1 port carries an SAToP CES service, set Frame
Format of the E1 port to Unframe.
In the case of the OptiX OSN equipment, the CES ACR clock mode can be configured on the NMS. Set
CES Encapsulation Clock Mode of an E1 port to Line Clock.
----End
9.3 Configuring the NNIs
Configuring the NNIs is the basis of configuring the packet Ethernet services.
9.3.1 Configuring the NNIs for Ethernet Services Carried by Ports
Before configuring the Ethernet services that are carried by ports, you need to set basic attributes
of the corresponding Ethernet port. The general attributes of an Ethernet port define the physical-
layer information, such as the port mode, encapsulation type, and maximum frame length.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Packet Configuration >
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the General Attributes tab.
Step 3 Select the board and set the parameters as required.
NOTE
l When Port Mode is set to Layer 2, Encapsulation Type can be set to 802.1Q, QinQ or Null.
l When Encapsulation Type is set to QinQ, the port identifies the QinQ packets.
l When Encapsulation Type is set to 802.1Q, the port identifies the 802.1Q packets.
l When Encapsulation Type is set to Null, The port transparently transmits the accessed packets.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
366
Step 4 Click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation
is successful.
Step 5 Click the Layer 2 Attributes tab.
Step 6 Select the board and set the parameters as required. For details about the parameters, see 10.1.3
Layer 2 Attributes.
NOTE
l Tag Aware: The port transparently transmits the data packet with a VLAN ID (that is, the data packet
is tagged). If a data packet does not have a VLAN ID (that is, the data packet is untagged), the port
discards the data packet. In this case, the Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority are meaningless.
l Access: The port adds the default VLAN ID to the data packet without any VLAN ID (that is, the data
packet is untagged). If the data packet has a VLAN ID (that is, the data packet is tagged), the port
discards the data packet.
l Hybrid: The port adds the default VLAN ID to the data packet without any VLAN ID (that is, the data
packet is untagged). If the data packet has a VLAN ID (that is, the data packet is tagged), the port
transparently transmits the data packet.
Step 7 Click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation
is successful.
Step 8 Click Close.
----End
9.3.2 Configuring the NNIs for Ethernet Services Carried by Static
MPLS Tunnels
To configure the Ethernet services that are carried by static MPLS tunnels, you need to set the
attributes related to the port of the static MPLS tunnels.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Packet Configuration >
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the General Attributes tab.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
367
Set the general attributes of the port as follows:
l Enable Port: Enabled
l Port Mode: Layer 3
Set the other parameters as required.
Step 3 Click Apply.
Step 4 Click the Layer 3 Attributes tab.
Step 5 Select the desired port and set Enable Tunnel as Enabled. Set Specify IP to Manually. Set IP
Address and IP Mask according to the service planning information. For details about the
parameters, see 10.1.4 Layer 3 Attributes.
NOTE
l When changing the IP address of the port, ensure that the IP address of this port and the IP addresses
of the other ports configured with services are not in the same subnet.
Step 6 Click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation
is successful.
Step 7 Click Close.
----End
9.3.3 Configuring the NNIs for Ethernet Services Carried by QinQ
Links
Before configuring Ethernet services that are carried by QinQ links, you need to set the general
attributes of the corresponding Ethernet port. The general attributes of an Ethernet port define
the physical-layer information, such as the port mode, encapsulation type, and maximum frame
length.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Packet Configuration >
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the General Attributes tab.
Step 3 Select the board and set the parameters as required.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
368
NOTE
l When Port Mode is set to Layer 2, Encapsulation Type can be set to QinQ. When Encapsulation
Type is set to QinQ, he port identifies the QinQ packets.
l In the case of an NNI port, Max Data Packet Size(byte) must be more than 1020. A DCN packet
contains a maximum of 1020 bytes. If Max Data Packet Size(byte) is less than 1020, the DCN packets
in the receive direction may be lost.
Step 4 Click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation
is successful.
Step 5 Click Close.
----End
9.4 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel
On a PSN network, the multi-protocol label switching (MPLS) tunnel carries PWs where various
services are encapsulated. In this manner, data packets can be transparently transmitted between
NEs. One MPLS tunnel can carry several PWs. Before configuring a service, you need to
configure the MPLS tunnel that carries the service.
NOTE
During configuration of unidirectional MPLS tunnels, forward MPLS tunnel and reverse MPLS tunnel are
created separately. For a unidirectional forward MPLS tunnel, either its mapping reverse MPLS tunnel or
another tunnel can be configured to transmit BDI packets during MPLS OAM configuration; either its
mapping reverse MPLS tunnel or another reverse MPLS tunnel can be configured as the protection reverse
tunnel during configuration of MPLS tunnel APS.
For bidirectional MPLS tunnels, a forward MPLS tunnel is bound with a specific reverse MPLS tunnel.
During configuration of MPLS OAM, BDI packets are configured to be transmitted by the reverse MPLS
tunnel bound with the forward MPLS tunnel. In addition, only the reverse MPLS tunnel that is bound with
the forward MPLS tunnel can be configured as the protection reverse tunnel during configuration of MPLS
tunnel APS.
Before configuring MPLS tunnels, refer to the number of MPLS tunnels recorded in "Functions and
Features" under "Packet Boards" in the Hardware Description.
9.4.1 Configuring LSR ID
In the Basic Configuration interface, you can set LSR (Label Switch Router) ID.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
369
Precautions
NOTE
When planning LSR IDs, adhere to the following principles:
l when ASON and packet services coexist, LSR IDs of packet services and node IDs of ASON services
must be the same.
l An LSR ID can be an IP address of standard class A, B, or C, that is, an IP address within the range
from 1.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254. An LSR ID cannot be a broadcast address (*.*.*.255), multicast
address (224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255), reserved address (240.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255), network
address (*.*.*.0), zero address (0.*.*.*), or loopback address (127.*.*.*).
l The address of the network segment used with priority: 172.16.0.0-172.31.255.255. In this network
segment, the number of the available IP address is 1048574 (the 172.16.0.0 and 172.31.255.255 are
exceptional).
l If the previous network segment address conflicts with the network segment address of the management
plane or the DCN network address, use the following network segment address with priority:
10.0.0.0-10.255.255.255. In this network segment, the number of the available IP address is 16777214
(the 10.0.0.0 and 10.255.255.255 are exceptional).
l If the previous network segment address is still conflicting, use the following network segment address:
192.168.0.0-192.168.255.255. In this network segment, the number of the available IP address is 65534
(the 192.168.0.0 and 192.168.255.255 are exceptional).
l Each NE must have an independent and globally unique LSR ID on a network.
l The LSR ID and IP address of an NE must be different from each other and must belong to different
network segments.
l The LSR ID of an NE and the IP addresses of service ports on the NE must belong to different network
segments.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Packet Configuration > MPLS
Management > Basic Configuration from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Set LSR ID.
For details about LSR ID, see 10.2.1 Basic Configuration.
NOTE
l When the LSR ID is specified for the first time, no warm-reset occurs on the NE. If the specified LSR
ID is then changed, a warm-reset occurs on the NE but does not affect services.
l If any tunnel exists, do not change the LSR ID.
----End
9.4.2 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel on a Per-NE Basis
This topic describes how to configure an MPLS tunnel on a per-NE basis by using the U2000.
9.4.2.1 Configuring a Unidirectional Static MPLS Tunnel on a Per-NE Basis
You can configure an end-to-end unicast MPLS tunnel on a per-NE basis. You need to configure
the MPLS tunnel on each node that the MPLS tunnel traverses.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
370
l You must complete the correct configuration of the port attributes.
l You must complete the correct setting of the LSR ID for each NE.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the source NE of the MPLS tunnel and choose Configuration >
Packet Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from Function
Tree.
Step 2 Click the Static Tunnel tab and click New > Unidirectional Tunnel. Then, the New Unicast
Tunnel dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set the parameters of the forward and reverse MPLS tunnels. For details about the parameters,
see 10.2.2 Parameters for Configuring a Static Tunnel (on a Per-NE Basis).
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
371
NOTE
When Node Type is set to Egress, Bandwidth(kbit/s) is the same as the tunnel bandwidth in the
Ingress direction and cannot be changed manually.
Set Next Hop Address to be the IP address of the port of the next node.
Step 4 Click OK to complete the configuration of the static MPLS tunnel.
Step 5 Refer to Steps 1 - 4 to configure the static MPLS tunnels on the intermediate NEs and sink NE.
----End
9.4.2.2 Configuring a Bidirectional Static MPLS Tunnel on a Per-NE Basis
You can configure an end-to-end bidirectional MPLS tunnel on a per-NE basis. You need to
configure the MPLS tunnel on each node that the MPLS tunnel traverses.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l You must complete the correct configuration of the port attributes.
l You must complete the correct setting of the LSR ID for each NE.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the source NE of the MPLS tunnel and choose Configuration >
Packet Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from Function
Tree.
Step 2 Click the Static Tunnel tab and click New > Bidirectional Tunnel. Then, the New Unicast
Bidirectional Tunnel dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set the parameters of the bidirectional MPLS tunnels. For details about the parameters, see
10.2.2 Parameters for Configuring a Static Tunnel (on a Per-NE Basis).
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
372
NOTE
l When Node Type is set to Transit, the In port, Out port, Forward In Label, Forward Out Label,
Reverse In Label, Reverse Out Label, Forward Next Hop Address, Reverse Next Hop Address,
Source Node and Sink Node parameters need to be set for the tunnel.
l When Node Type is set to Egress, the In port, Forward In Label, Reverse Out Label, Reverse Next
Hop Address and Source Node parameters need to be set for the tunnel.
Step 4 Click OK to complete the configuration of the static MPLS tunnel.
Step 5 Refer to Steps 1 - 4 to configure the static MPLS tunnels on the intermediate NEs and sink NE.
----End
9.4.3 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel in an End-to-End Mode
This topic describes how to configure an MPLS tunnel in end-to-end mode by using the NMS.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
373
9.4.3.1 Configuring a Static and Unidirectional MPLS Tunnel in End-to-End Mode
When creating a static and unidirectional MPLS tunnel in end-to-end mode, you select the source
NE, sink NE, or transit NE directly in the physical topology and then complete creation of the
unidirectional MPLS tunnel on the NMS.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l The port attributes must be set correctly.
l The LSR ID of each NE must be set correctly.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > Tunnel > Create Tunnel from the Main Menu. Then, the Create Tunnel
window is displayed.
Step 2 Set the basic information about the MPLS tunnel. For details about the parameters, see 10.2.3
Parameters for Configuring a Static Tunnel (End-to-End Mode).
l Protocol Type: MPLS
l Signaling Type: Static CR
l Select Create Reverse Tunnel.
Step 3 Set the information in NE List of the MPLS tunnel. For details about the parameters, see 10.2.3
Parameters for Configuring a Static Tunnel (End-to-End Mode).
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
374
NOTE
Before configuring MPLS tunnels by means of automatic route computation, create the Layer 2 links.
1. Select the source NE, sink NE, and transit NE, and adjust the position of the NE on the
entire MPLS tunnel.
Three methods can be used to select the source, sink, and transit NEs:
l Method 1: In Physical Topology at the upper right, right-click an NE and choose
Add.
l Method 2: In Physical Topology at the upper right, double-click an NE.
l Method 3:
a. Click the Add button and then choose NE from the drop-down menu.
b. Select an NE from the window that is displayed and then click OK.
NOTE
l You can specify the position of an NE on the entire tunnel by setting NE Role or adjust the
position of an NE on the entire tunnel by clicking Up or Down.
l Select Deploy to deliver the tunnel configuration data to the NEs.
Step 4 Click the Details button and set the information about the tunnel. For details about the
parameters, see 10.2.3 Parameters for Configuring a Static Tunnel (End-to-End Mode).
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
375
NOTE
l Click Auto-Assign following the Tunnel ID field box. Then, Tunnel ID is automatically allocated.
l Click the blank cell under Out Interface of an Ingress node and then click . Select the output
port of the ingress node in the list box that is displayed. Use the same method to select the input and
output ports of the transit node and the input port of the egress node.
l After the output port label is added at the ingress node and transit node, the next-hop address is generated
automatically.
l Click Auto-Assign Label at lower right of the window. Then, Out Label of the ingress node, Out
Label and In Label of the transit node, and In Label of the egress node are allocated automatically.
l After you set the parameters of the forward tunnel, the parameters of the reverse tunnel are generated
automatically. Therefore, you need not set the parameters of the reverse tunnel manually.
----End
9.4.3.2 Configuring a Static and Bidirectional MPLS Tunnel in End-to-End Mode
When creating a static and bidirectional MPLS tunnel in end-to-end mode, you select the source
NE, sink NE, or transit NE directly in the physical topology and then complete creation of the
unidirectional MPLS tunnel on the NMS.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l You must complete the correct configuration of the port attributes.
l You must complete the correct setting of the LSR ID for each NE.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > Tunnel > Create Tunnel from the Main Menu. Then, the Create Tunnel
window is displayed.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
376
Step 2 Set the basic information about the MPLS tunnel. For details about the parameters, see 10.2.3
Parameters for Configuring a Static Tunnel (End-to-End Mode).
l Protocol Type: MPLS
l Signaling Type: Static CR
l Select Create Bidirectional Tunnel.
Step 3 Set the information in NE List of the MPLS tunnel. For details about the parameters, see 10.2.3
Parameters for Configuring a Static Tunnel (End-to-End Mode).
NOTE
Before configuring MPLS tunnels by means of automatic route computation, create the Layer 2 links.
1. Select the source NE, sink NE, and transit NE, and adjust the position of the NE on the
entire MPLS tunnel.
Three methods can be used to select the source, sink, and transit NEs:
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
377
l Method 1: In Physical Topology at the upper right, right-click an NE and choose
Add.
l Method 2: In Physical Topology at the upper right, double-click an NE.
l Method 3:
a. Click the Add button and then choose NE from the drop-down menu.
b. Select an NE from the window that is displayed and then click OK.
NOTE
l You can specify the position of an NE on the entire tunnel by setting NE Role or adjust the
position of an NE on the entire tunnel by clicking Up or Down.
l Select Deploy to deliver the tunnel configuration data to the NEs.
Step 4 Click the Details button and set the information about the tunnel. For details about the
parameters, see 10.2.3 Parameters for Configuring a Static Tunnel (End-to-End Mode).
NOTE
l Click Auto-Assign following the Tunnel ID field box. Then, Tunnel ID is automatically allocated.
l Click the blank cell under Out Interface of an Ingress node and then click . Select the output
port of the ingress node in the list box that is displayed. Use the same method to select the input and
output ports of the transit node and the input port of the egress node.
l After the output port is added at the ingress node and transit node, the next-hop address is generated
automatically.
l After the input port is added at the egress node and transit node, the reverse next-hop address is
generated automatically.
l Click Auto-Assign Label at lower right of the window. Then, Out Label and Reverse In Label of
the ingress node, In Label, Out Label, Reverse In Label and Reverse Out Label of the transit node,
and In Label and Reverse Out Label of the egress node are allocated automatically.
----End
9.5 Managing MPLS Tunnels
MPLS tunnels are used to transmit PWE3 services and their quality determines transmission
stability of PWE3 services. Therefore, it is crucial to properly manage MPLS tunnels. Managing
MPLS tunnels involves checking the MPLS tunnel topology, deploying MPLS tunnels, deleting
MPLS tunnels, and managing discrete MPLS tunnels.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
378
9.5.1 Searching for MPLS Tunnels
A complete MPLS tunnel has its source and sink NEs. An MPLS tunnel that is created on a per-
NE basis, however, is displayed as a discrete tunnel on the NMS. The tunnel search function on
the NMS helps convert a discrete MPLS tunnel to a complete tunnel, therefore facilitating tunnel
management. This section describes how to search for MPLS tunnels on the NMS.
Prerequisites
l MPLS tunnels have been created on a per-NE basis. For details on how to create an MPLS
tunnel on a per-NE basis, see 9.4.2 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel on a Per-NE Basis.
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > Search for IP Service from the main menu.
Step 2 In the dialog box that is displayed, set the tunnel discovery policy.
Step 3 Click Start.
Step 4 Click Close.
----End
9.5.2 Checking the MPLS Tunnel Topology
MPLS tunnels are used to transmit PWE3 services and their quality determines transmission
stability of PWE3 services. This section describes how to check the MPLS tunnel topology to
learn configuration information about MPLS tunnels, facilitating tunnel management.
Prerequisites
l MPLS tunnels have been created. For details on how to create an MPLS tunnel, see 9.4
Configuring an MPLS Tunnel.
NOTE
Before managing an MPLS tunnel that is created on a per-NE basis, you need to search for the MPLS
tunnel. For details on how to search for an MPLS tunnel, see 9.5.1 Searching for MPLS Tunnels.
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
379
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > Tunnel > Manage Tunnel from the main menu.
Step 2 In the dialog box that is displayed, set filter conditions; for example, set Protocol Type to
MPLS and set Signaling Type to Static CR. Then, click Filter. Query all MPLS tunnels that
meet the filter conditions.
Step 3 Select the MPLS tunnel whose topology information you need to check and click the
Topology tab.
Step 4 In the MPLS tunnel topology view, right-click the NE and choose View Real-Time
Performance from the shortcut menu to check the real-time running status of the MPLS tunnel.
----End
9.5.3 Duplicating MPLS Tunnels
This section describes how to quickly create MPLS tunnels by using the tunnel duplication
function of the NMS.
Prerequisites
l MPLS tunnels have been created. For details on how to create an MPLS tunnel, see 9.4
Configuring an MPLS Tunnel.
NOTE
Before managing an MPLS tunnel that is created on a per-NE basis, you need to search for the MPLS
tunnel. For details on how to search for an MPLS tunnel, see 9.5.1 Searching for MPLS Tunnels.
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > Tunnel > Manage Tunnel from the main menu.
Step 2 In the dialog box that is displayed, set filter conditions; for example, set Protocol Type to
MPLS and set Signaling Type to Static CR. Then, click Filter. Query all MPLS tunnels that
meet the filter conditions.
Step 3 Select an MPLS tunnel to copy, right-click the tunnel, and choose Copy from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 In the Copy Tunnel dialog box that is displayed, set parameters for the duplicated MPLS tunnel.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
380
Step 5 Click OK.
----End
9.5.4 Deploying MPLS Tunnels
After being created on the NMS, MPLS tunnels are stored on the NMS but not immediately
deployed to the corresponding NEs. This section describes how to deploy MPLS tunnels from
the NMS to the corresponding NEs.
Prerequisites
l MPLS tunnels have been created. For details on how to create an MPLS tunnel, see 9.4
Configuring an MPLS Tunnel.
NOTE
Before managing an MPLS tunnel that is created on a per-NE basis, you need to search for the MPLS
tunnel. For details on how to search for an MPLS tunnel, see 9.5.1 Searching for MPLS Tunnels.
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > Tunnel > Manage Tunnel from the main menu.
Step 2 In the dialog box that is displayed, set Deployment Status to Undeployed. Click Filter to check
all undeployed MSPLS tunnels.
Step 3 Select one or more MPLS tunnels to be deployed, right-click the MPLS tunnels, and choose
Deploy from the shortcut menu.
NOTE
After an MPLS tunnel is successfully deployed, its Deployment Status is Deployed.
----End
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
381
9.5.5 Deleting MPLS Tunnels
After being deployed, MPLS tunnels are stored on the NMS and the corresponding NEs. This
section describes how to delete MPLS tunnels from the NMS and corresponding NEs.
Prerequisites
l MPLS tunnels have been created. For details on how to create an MPLS tunnel, see 9.4
Configuring an MPLS Tunnel.
NOTE
Before managing an MPLS tunnel that is created on a per-NE basis, you need to search for the MPLS
tunnel. For details on how to search for an MPLS tunnel, see 9.5.1 Searching for MPLS Tunnels.
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
Background Information
l After being deleted from the network side, MPLS tunnels are deleted from the NMS only
but still stored on the corresponding NEs. In addition, after being deleted from the network
side, MPLS tunnels are displayed as discrete tunnels on the NMS.
l After being deleted from the NE side, MPLS tunnels are deleted from the corresponding
NEs only but still stored on the NMS. In addition, after being deleted from the NE side,
MPLS tunnels are displayed as undeployed.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > Tunnel > Manage Tunnel from the main menu.
Step 2 In the dialog box that is displayed, set filter conditions; for example, set Protocol Type to
MPLS and set Signaling Type to Static CR. Then, click Filter. Query all MPLS tunnels that
meet the filter conditions.
Step 3 Select one or more MPLS tunnels that you need to delete, right-click the tunnels.
l Choose Delete from the shortcut menu.
l Choose Delete from Network Side from the shortcut menu.
l Choose Undeploy from the shortcut menu.
NOTE
l After an MPLS tunnel is successfully deleted from the NE side, its Deployment Status is
Undeployed.
l If an MPLS tunnel has been configured in an MPLS tunnel APS protection group or has been configured
with PWE3 services, you need to delete the MPLS tunnel APS protection group or PWE3 services
before deleting the MPLS tunnel.
----End
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
382
9.5.6 Managing Discrete MPLS Tunnels
MPLS tunnels without source or sink NEs and MPLS tunnels that are deleted from the network
side are displayed as discrete tunnels on the NMS. This section describes how to check discrete
MPLS tunnels, facilitating tunnel management.
Prerequisites
l MPLS tunnels have been created. For details on how to create an MPLS tunnel, see 9.4
Configuring an MPLS Tunnel.
NOTE
Before managing an MPLS tunnel that is created on a per-NE basis, you need to search for the MPLS
tunnel. For details on how to search for an MPLS tunnel, see 9.5.1 Searching for MPLS Tunnels.
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > Tunnel > Manage Discrete Tunnel from the main menu.
Step 2 In the dialog box that is displayed, set filter conditions; for example, set Protocol Type to
MPLS and set Signaling Type to Static CR. Then, click Filter. Query all MPLS tunnels that
meet the filter conditions.
Step 3 Select an MPLS tunnel and click the Hops Information tab. In the tab page, check the port
information and label information about the MPLS tunnel.
Step 4 Optional: Select one or more MPLS tunnels and click Delete.
----End
9.6 Configuring MPLS OAM
MPLS OAM effectively detects, confirms, and locates the internal defects of an MPLS network,
and thus monitors the network performance.
9.6.1 Configuring the MPLS OAM on a Per-NE Basis
Configuring MPLS OAM involves the following operations: enabling the OAM status of the
MPLS tunnel, setting the MPLS OAM parameters for the MPLS tunnel, enabling the tunnel CV/
FFD detection function, performing an MPLS Tunnel Ping test, and performing an MPLS Tunnel
Traceroute test.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
383
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
An MPLS tunnel must be created.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Packet Configuration > MPLS
Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the OAM Parameters tab. Select Enabled from the drop-down list of OAM Status.
Step 3 Set the parameters. For the details about the parameters, see Tunnel OAM Parameters.
NOTE
l Detection Packet Period: When Detection Packet Type is set to CV, Detection Packet Period is
1 s and cannot be changed manually. When Detection Packet Type is set to FFD, Detection Packet
Period can be set manually.
l Reverse Tunnel: After detecting defects, the egress node sends the BDI packets that carry the defect
information over the reverse tunnel to the ingress node, so that the ingress node can learn the defect
status in time.
l When the Node Type of the Unidirectional tunnel is Egress, you can set the SD Threshold and SF
Threshold.
Step 4 Click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation
is successful.
Step 5 Click Close.
Step 6 Optional: Perform the CV/FFD. Click the OAM Parameters tab and select a tunnel. Click
OAM Operation and choose Start CV/FFD from the drop-down menu. Then, the Operation
Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful.
NOTE
When the Node Type of the Unidirectional tunnel is Ingress, the CV/FFD can be enabled.
Step 7 Optional: Perform a ping test.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
384
1. Click the OAM Parameters tab and select a tunnel. Click OAM Operation and choose
Ping Test from the drop-down menu. Then, the Ping Test dialog box is displayed.
NOTE
When the Node Type of the tunnel is Ingress, you can perform the ping test.
2. Set the parameters. For details about the parameters, see Ping Test.
3. Click Start Test to check the ping test result.
Step 8 Optional: Perform an LSP Traceroute test.
1. Click the OAM Parameters tab and select a tunnel. Click OAM Operation and choose
Traceroute Test from the drop-down menu. Then, the Traceroute Test dialog box is
displayed.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
385
NOTE
To support the Traceroute test, the Tunnel Type of the tunnel must be Ingress.
2. Set the parameters. For details about the parameters, see Traceroute Test.
3. Click Start Test to check the Traceroute test result.
----End
9.6.2 Configuring MPLS OAM in End-to-End Mode
Configuring MPLS OAM involves enabling the OAM status of the tunnel, setting the MPLS
OAM parameters of the tunnel, enabling the tunnel CV/FFD check, performing MPLS Tunnel
ping test, and performing the MPLS Tunnel Traceroute test.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l The MPLS tunnel must be created.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > Tunnel > Manage Tunnel from the Main Menu.
Step 2 In the Set Filter Criteria dialog box that is displayed, set the filter conditions and then click
Filter.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
386
NOTE
l You can perform filtering by Tunnel Name, Destination IP Address, or Tunnel IP.
l You can also perform filtering by other conditions.
Step 3 In Manage Tunnel, select the MPLS tunnel for which the MPLS OAM needs to be configured.
Step 4 Right-click the MPLS tunnel and then choose OAM > Enable OAM from the shortcut menu.
Step 5 Right-click the MPLS tunnel and then choose OAM > Configure OAM from the shortcut menu.
For details about the parameters, see Tunnel OAM Parameters.
Figure 9-2 Unidirectional Tunnel

OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
387
Figure 9-3 Bidirectional Tunnel

NOTE
When you set these parameters, pay attention the following points:
l Detection Packet Period(ms): Detection Packet Period(ms) can only be set to 1000ms when
Detection Packet Type is CV.
l Detection Packet Period(ms) can be set to several values when Detection Packet Type is FFD. To
ensure that the MPLS tunnel APS switching time is shorter than 50 ms, set Detection Packet Period
(ms) to 3.3 in this example.
l Reverse Tunnel: When the egress node detects a defect, it transmits the BDI packet that carries the
defect information to the ingress node through the reverse tunnel. Therefore, the ingress node can learn
the defect status in time.
l When the Node Type of the Unidirectional tunnel is Egress, you can set the SD Threshold and SF
Threshold.
Step 6 Click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation
is successful.
Step 7 Click Close.
----End
9.7 Configuring MPLS Tunnel APS
MPLS tunnel APS protection is implemented based on the APS protocol. If MPLS tunnel APS
is configured, the services are switched from the working tunnel to the protection tunnel after
the working tunnel is faulty.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
388
9.7.1 Configuring MPLS Tunnel APS on a Per-NE Basis
You can configure MPLS tunnel APS to protect MPLS tunnels. You can configure a 1+1 or 1:1
MPLS tunnel APS protection group. You need to configure MPLS tunnel APS on the source
and sink NEs of the MPLS tunnel.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l The working and protection MPLS tunnels must be created.
l The MPLS OAM of each MPLS tunnel in the protection group must be enabled.
NOTE
The protection MPLS tunnel cannot carry any extra services.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the source NE of the MPLS tunnel and choose Configuration >
Packet Configuration > APS Protection Management from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click New. Then, the New Tunnel Protection Group dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set the parameters for the MPLS tunnel protection group. Select the working and protection
MPLS tunnels. For details about the parameters, see 10.10.1 Parameters for Configuring
MPLS Tunnel APS (on a Per-NE Basis).
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
389
l Protection Type: You can set Protection Type to 1+1 or 1:1.
l Switching Mode: You can set Switching Mode to Single-Ended or Dual-Ended. When
Protection Type is set to 1:1, Switching Mode can be set to Dual-Ended only.
l Revertive Mode: You can set Revertive Mode to Non-Revertive or Revertive. If you set
Revertive Mode to Revertive, you can specify the WTR time.
l Hold-off Time(100ms): The unit is 100 ms. You can set Hold-off Time(100ms) to be an
integer from 0 to 100, namely, 0 to 10 seconds.
CAUTION
When creating an APS protection group, you need to set Protocol Status to Disabled. Enable
the protocol only after the configuration of the APS protection group is complete on the source
and sink NEs.
Step 4 Click OK. The MPLS tunnel protection group is configured successfully.
NOTE
The bandwidth of the protection MPLS tunnel must be higher than the bandwidth of the working MPLS
tunnel. To increase the bandwidth of the working MPLS tunnel after the protection group is created, increase
the bandwidth of the protection MPLS tunnel first.
Step 5 Refer to Steps 1-4 to configure the protection group on the sink NE.
Step 6 Enable the protocol of the MPLS APS protection group.
1. IN the NE Explorer, select the source NE of the MPLS tunnel and choose Configuration
> Packet Configuration > APS Protection Management from the Function Tree.
2. Right-click a created APS protection group and choose Start Protocol from the shortcut
menu.
3. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Protocol Status of
the APS protection group changes to Enabled.
----End
9.7.2 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel APS in End-to-End Mode
You can configure MPLS tunnel APS to protect the MPLS tunnel. MPLS tunnel APS can be
configured as the 1+1 or 1:1 mode. When configuring MPLS tunnel APS, you need to configure
MPLS tunnel APS on both the source NE and the sink NE of the MPLS tunnel.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l The MPLS working and protection tunnels must be created.
l The MPLS OAM of each MPLS tunnel in the protection group must be enabled.
NOTE
The protection tunnel should not carry any extra services.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
390
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > Tunnel > Create Protection Group from the Main Menu.
Step 2 In Create Protection Group, set Basic Information of the protection group.
Step 3 Click Add at the lower left of the Create Protection Group window. Select the tunnel in Select
Tunnel dialog box that is displayed.
NOTE
l When configuring MPLS tunnel APS for unidirectional tunnels, you need to select four tunnels, which
function as the Forward Working tunnel, Forward Protection tunnel, Backward Working tunnel,
and Backward Protection tunnel.
l When configuring MPLS tunnel APS for bidirectional tunnels, you need to select two tunnels, which
function as the Working tunnel, and Protection tunnel.
Step 4 In the Tunnels field box, specify the tunnel type. For details about the parameters, see 10.10.2
Parameters for Configuring MPLS Tunnel APS (in End-to-End Mode).
NOTE
l Set four unidirectional tunnels to be the Forward Working tunnel, Forward Protection tunnel,
Backward Working tunnel, and Backward Protection tunnel.
l Set two bidirectional tunnels to be the Working tunnel, and Protection tunnel.
Step 5 Set the MPLS tunnel APS attributes at the lower right of the window. For details about the
parameters, see 10.10.2 Parameters for Configuring MPLS Tunnel APS (in End-to-End
Mode).
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
391
NOTE
l When configuring MPLS tunnel APS on a per-NE mode, set Protocol Status to Disabled. Start the
protocol only when MPLS tunnel APS is successfully configured at both ends of the MPLS tunnel.
l When configuring MPLS tunnel APS in end-to-end mode, set Protocol Status to Enabled.
Step 6 Click OK. The configuration for MPLS tunnel APS is complete.
----End
9.8 Managing MPLS Tunnel APS Protection Groups
MPLS tunnels are used to transmit PWE3 services and their quality determines transmission
stability of PWE3 services. MPLS tunnel APS provides protection for MPLS tunnels. Therefore,
it is crucial to properly manage MPLS tunnel APS protection groups. Managing MPLS tunnel
APS protection groups involves automatically discovering, deploying, modifying, and deleting
MPLS tunnel APS protection groups.
9.8.1 Automatically Discovering Protection Groups
MPLS tunnels are used to transmit PWE3 services and their quality determines transmission
stability of PWE3 services. This section describes how to find MPLS tunnel APS protection
groups by using the automatic discovery function of the NMS, facilitating protection group
management.
Prerequisites
l MPLS tunnel APS protection groups have been created. For details on how to create an
MPLS tunnel APS protection group, see 9.7 Configuring MPLS Tunnel APS.
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > Tunnel > Search for Protection Group from the main menu.
Step 2 In the dialog box that is displayed, click Add. In the dialog box that is displayed, select the NE
for which you need to configure an MPLS tunnel APS protection group and then click OK.
Step 3 Click OK.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
392
NOTE
After protection groups are automatically discovered, the NMS displays a dialog box showing the number
of found protection groups.
----End
9.8.2 Deploying MPLS Tunnel APS Protection Groups
After being created on the NMS, MPLS tunnel APS protection groups are stored on the NMS
but not immediately deployed to the corresponding NEs. This section describes how to deploy
MPLS tunnel APS protection groups from the NMS to the corresponding NEs.
Prerequisites
l MPLS tunnel APS protection groups have been created. For details on how to create an
MPLS tunnel APS protection group, see 9.7 Configuring MPLS Tunnel APS.
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > Tunnel > Manage Protection Group from the main menu.
Step 2 In the dialog box that is displayed, set Deployment Status to Undeployed. Click Filter to check
all undeployed MPLS tunnel APS protection groups.
Step 3 Select one or more MPLS tunnel APS protection groups to be deployed, right-click the protection
groups, and choose Deploy from the shortcut menu.
NOTE
After an MPLS tunnel APS protection group is successfully deployed, its Deployment Status is
Deployed.
----End
9.8.3 Ranaming an MPLS Tunnel APS Protection Group
Basic information about an MPLS tunnel APS protection group can be represented by an
appropriate protection group name. This section describes how to change the name of an MPLS
tunnel APS protection group.
Prerequisites
l MPLS tunnel APS protection groups have been created. For details on how to create an
MPLS tunnel APS protection group, see 9.7 Configuring MPLS Tunnel APS.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
393
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > Tunnel > Manage Protection Group from the main menu.
Step 2 In the dialog box that is displayed, set filter conditions; for example, set Protocol Type to 1
+1. Then, click Filter. Query all MPLS tunnel APS protection groups that meet the filter
conditions.
Step 3 Select an MPLS tunnel APS protection group whose name you need to change, and then click
Modify.
----End
9.8.4 Deleting MPLS Tunnel APS Protection Groups
After being deployed, MPLS tunnel APS protection groups are stored on the NMS and the
corresponding NEs. This section describes how to delete MPLS tunnel APS protection groups
from the NMS and corresponding NEs.
Prerequisites
l MPLS tunnel APS protection groups have been created. For details on how to create an
MPLS tunnel APS protection group, see 9.7 Configuring MPLS Tunnel APS.
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
Background Information
l After being deleted from the network side, MPLS tunnel APS protection groups are deleted
from the NMS only but still stored on the corresponding NEs.
l After being deleted from the NE side, MPLS tunnel APS protection groups are deleted from
the corresponding NEs only but still stored on the NMS.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > Tunnel > Manage Protection Group from the main menu.
Step 2 In the dialog box that is displayed, set filter conditions; for example, set Protocol Type to 1
+1. Then, click Filter. Query all MPLS tunnel APS protection groups that meet the filter
conditions.
Step 3 Select one or more MPLS tunnel APS protection groups that you need to delete, right-click the
protection groups.
l Choose Delete from the shortcut menu.
l Choose Delete from Network Side from the shortcut menu.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
394
l Choose Undeploy from the shortcut menu.
NOTE
After an MPLS tunnel APS protection group is successfully deleted from the NE side, its Deployment
Status is Undeployed.
----End
9.9 Operation Tasks for Configuring E-Line Services
This topic describes how to configure E-Line services, including UNI-UNI E-Line services, E-
Line services carried by ports, E-Line services carried by PWs, and E-Line services carried by
QinQ links.
9.9.1 Configuring UNI-UNI E-Line Services
In the case of the UNI-UNI E-Line services, different users communicate with each other through
the equipment. The Ethernet data packets do not pass the network side, but are transparently
transmitted on the user side.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l If a port needs to be occupied exclusively, disable the DCN function of the port. For details,
see Configuring the DCN Function of a Port.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Packet Configuration >
Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from Function Tree.
Step 2 Click New. Then, the New E-Line Service dialog box is displayed.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
395
Step 3 Set the parameters in the dialog box. For details about the parameters, see 10.3.1 E-Line Service
Parameters (Configuration on a Per-NE Basis).
NOTE
Set Direction to UNI-UNI.
You can set several VLAN values in VLANs. Separate consecutive values with "-" and separate
inconsecutive values with ",". For example, The VLAN values may be "1,3,5,8-10".
The OptiX OSN 1500 does not support the setting of MTU (bytes).
Step 4 Optional: Click Configure QoS. Then, the Configure QoS dialog box is displayed.
Step 5 Optional: Click the UNI tab. Set Default Forwarding Priority and Default Packet Relabeling
Color for ports. Click OK. Then, the New E-Line Service dialog box is displayed.
NOTE
If you set Bandwidth Limit to Enabled, you can set Committed Information Rate(kbit/s) and Peak
Information Rate(kbit/s). Alternatively, you can select the QoS policy directly in Policy.
Step 6 Click OK. Then, the Confirm dialog box is displayed.
Step 7 Optional: Click the Maintenance Association tab and the MEP Point tab separately to set the
OAM-related parameters.
NOTE
Before setting the OAM-related parameters, you need to configure the MD first.
----End
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
396
9.9.2 Configuring UNI-NNI E-Line Services Carried by Ports
In the case of the UNI-NNI E-Line services carried by ports, the user data is accessed from a
UNI and is then sent to an NNI, which the user data occupies exclusively. In this manner, the
point-to-point transparent transmission of the user data is realized.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l If a port needs to be occupied exclusively, disable the DCN function of the port. For details,
see Configuring the DCN Function of a Port.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Packet Configuration >
Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the UNI tab and click New. Then, the New E-Line Service dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set the parameters in the dialog box. For details about the parameters, see 10.3.1 E-Line Service
Parameters (Configuration on a Per-NE Basis).
NOTE
l Set Direction to UNI-NNI.
l Set Bearer Type to Port.
l You can set several VLAN values in VLANs. Separate consecutive values with "-" and separate
inconsecutive values with ",". For example, The VLAN values may be "1,3,5,8-10".
Step 4 Optional: Click Configure QoS. Then, the Configure QoS dialog box is displayed.
Step 5 Optional: Click the UNI tab. Set Default Forwarding Priority and Default Packet Relabeling
Color for ports. Click OK. Then, the New E-Line Service dialog box is displayed.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
397
NOTE
If you set Bandwidth Limit to Enabled, you can set Committed Information Rate(kbit/s) and Peak
Information Rate(kbit/s). You can also select the QoS policy directly in Policy.
Step 6 Click OK. Then, the Confirm dialog box is displayed.
Step 7 Optional: Click the Maintenance Association tab and the MEP Point tab separately to set the
OAM-related parameters.
NOTE
Before setting the OAM-related parameters, you need to configure the MD first.
----End
9.9.3 Configuring UNI-NNI E-Line Services Carried by PWs on a
Per-NE Basis
In the case of the UNI-NNI E-Line services carried by PWs, the user data is accessed from a
UNI and is then sent to an NNI where the user data is carried by a PW. In this manner, the point-
to-point transparent transmission of the user data is realized.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l The MPLS tunnel that carries the PWs must be configured.
l If a port needs to be occupied exclusively, disable the DCN function of the port. For details,
see Configuring the DCN Function of a Port.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Packet Configuration >
Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from Function Tree.
Step 2 Click New. Then, the New E-Line Service dialog box is displayed.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
398
Step 3 Set the parameters in the dialog box. For details, see 10.3.1 E-Line Service Parameters
(Configuration on a Per-NE Basis).
NOTE
l Set Direction to UNI-NNI.
l Set Bearer Type to PW.
l You can set several VLAN values in VLANs. Separate consecutive values with "-" and separate
inconsecutive values with ",". For example, The VLAN values may be "1,3,5,8-10".
l PRI is optional. If packets need to be forwarded based on Port+VLAN+VLAN PRI, set PRI to an
integer ranging from 0 to 7. Value 7 represents the highest priority.
l Service Tag Role can be set to User or Service.
l User: C-VLAN/S-VLAN tags of packets are used as user VLAN tags, and are processed when the
packets are forwarded.
l Service: C-VLAN/S-VLAN tags of packets are used as service VLAN tags, and are not processed
when the packets are forwarded.
l If the MPLS tunnel carrying the PWs is not configured with MPLS tunnel APS, you can set Protection
Type to PW APS. In this case, you need to configure both the service PW and protection PW to
implement MPLS PW APS protection.
Step 4 Click Configure PW. Then, the Configure PW dialog box is displayed. In the dialog box, set
the PW-related parameters.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
399
NOTE
l You can configure the protection PW only if Protection Type is set to PW APS.
l PW Type can be set to Ethernet or Ethernet Tagged Mode.
l Ethernet: C-VLAN/S-VLAN tags of packets are encapsulated into PWs without changes, and
transparently transmitted to downstream sites.
l Ethernet Tagged Mode: A VLAN tag specified by Request VLAN is added to packets.
l Set other PW-related parameters according to the planning information.
Step 5 Click OK to close the Configure PW dialog box.
Step 6 Click Configure QoS. Then, the Configure QoS dialog box is displayed.
Step 7 In the UNI tab, set Policy, Default Forwarding Priority, and Default Packet Relabeling
Color for the ingress direction.
Step 8 Click OK. Then, the Confirm dialog box is displayed.
Step 9 Optional: Click the Maintenance Association tab and the MEP Point tab separately to set the
OAM-related parameters.
NOTE
Before setting the OAM-related parameters, you need to configure the MD first.
----End
9.9.4 Configuring E-Line Services Carried by PWs in End-to-End
Mode
In the case of a UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by PWs, the user data is received by a UNI and
is then sent to a PW over an NNI. In this manner, point-to-point transparent transmission of the
user data is achieved. This topic describes how to configure the source node, sink node, and PW
attributes of UNI-NNI E-Line services carried by PWs on a GUI of the NMS, therefore quickly
completing the E-Line service configuration.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
400
l The MPLS tunnel that carries the PWs must be configured.
l If a port needs to be occupied exclusively, you need to disable the DCN function of the
port. For details, see Configuring the DCN Function of a Port.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > PWE3 Service > Create PWE3 Service from the Main Menu.
Step 2 Set the attributes. For details about the parameters, see 10.3.2 E-Line Service Parameters
(Configuration in End-to-End Mode).
NOTE
l You can configure the E-Line service according to the service template. That is, you can select a
template or create a service template in the Service Template field.
l Set Service Type to ETH.
l For rules of setting Protection Type, refer to descriptions about PW protection.
Step 3 Configure the source NE and sink NE of the PWE3 service. For details about the parameters,
see 10.3.2 E-Line Service Parameters (Configuration in End-to-End Mode).
NOTE
The configuration method is the same for the sink NE and source NE. Therefore, only the example for
configuring the source NE is provided as follows.
1. Under Node List, click Configure Source and Sink. Then, a dialog box is displayed.
2. Select a source NE from Physical Topology on the left. Select the service access port in
the pane on the right and set the associated parameters.
NOTE
l Priority Type is optional. If packets need to be forwarded based on Port+VLAN+VLAN
PRI, set Priority Type to 802.1Q.
l Priority field is optional. If packets need to be forwarded based on Port+VLAN+VLAN PRI,
set Priority field to an integer ranging from 0 to 7. Value 7 represents the highest priority.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
401
3. After setting the parameters, click Add Node.
4. Refer to Step b and Step c and configure the sink NE.
5. Click OK.
NOTE
l To configure the source and sink NEs of the PWE3 service, you can also double-click the source and
sink NEs in Physical Topology and then set the SAI attributes in the dialog box that is displayed.
l When the request VLAN function is enabled for Ethernet services carried by PWs, the TPIDs in the
request VLAN tags of the Ethernet services are the same on the source and sink NEs.
l When Service Tag is Service and PW Type is Ethernet Tagged Mode, the TPID of the port is the
same as the TPID of the NE. Set the TPID of the port first and then the TPID of the NE.
Step 4 Optional: Under Node List, click Configure PW Switch Node to add the switching NE
between the source and sink NE.
Step 5 Optional: Click Service Topology to check the configured service topology at upper right.
Step 6 Under PW, set the basic attributes of the PWs.
NOTE
l Double-click the blank box under Forward Tunnel and Reverse Tunnel, click , and then select
the tunnel that carries the PWs from the list.
l The PW ID can be Auto-Assign.
Step 7 Click Detail and then set the advanced attributes of the E-Line service carried by the PW. For
details about the parameters, see 10.3.2 E-Line Service Parameters (Configuration in End-
to-End Mode).
Step 8 Optional: Click the SAI QoS tab and set the QoS of the service access port.
Step 9 Optional: Click the PW QoS tab and set the QoS of the PW.
Step 10 Optional: Click the Advanced PW Attribute tab and set the parameters associated with the
PW.
Step 11 Click OK.
----End
9.9.5 Creating UNI-NNI E-Line Services Carried by QinQ Links
In the case of the UNI-NNI E-Line services carried by the QinQ link, the user data is accessed
from a UNI and is then sent to an NNI where the user data is carried by a QinQ link. Multiple
VLANs on the user network are encapsulated in QinQ mode into one VLAN on the transport
network. In this manner, the VLAN resources on the transport network are saved.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l The QinQ link must be created for the NNIs.
l The services carried by the QinQ link do not support the creation of any maintenance point
(MP).
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
402
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Packet Configuration >
Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the UNI tab and then click New. Then, the New E-Line Service dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set the parameters in the dialog box. For details of the parameters, see 10.3.1 E-Line Service
Parameters (Configuration on a Per-NE Basis).
NOTE
l Set Direction to UNI-NNI.
l Set Bearer Type to QinQ Link.
l Select a created QinQ link in QinQ Link ID.
Step 4 Click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is
successful. Click Close.
Step 5 Click the QoS tab and click the QinQ Link tab.
Step 6 Select the QoS policy for the ingress and egress directions of the QinQ link. Click Apply. Then,
the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful.
NOTE
Before selecting the policy, ensure that the policy is already created. If you set Bandwidth Limit to
Enabled, you can set Committed Information Rate(kbit/s) and Peak Information Rate(kbit/s).
Step 7 Click Close,
----End
9.10 Operation Task for Configuring E-LAN Services
This topic describes how to configure E-LAN services, including E-LAN services carried by
ports, E-LAN services carried by PWs, and E-LAN services carried by QinQ links.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
403
9.10.1 Configuring E-LAN Services Carried by Ports
You can configure various types of E-LAN services by configuring the UNIs and NNIs on the
NMS. You can configure the services on the NNI to be carried by ports on the NMS.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l The port attributes must be set correctly.
l If a port needs to be occupied exclusively, disable the DCN function of the port. For details,
see Configuring the DCN Function of a Port.
l If a QoS policy is required for configuring the QoS, you must create the QoS policy first.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Packet Configuration >
Ethernet Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click New. Then, the New E-LAN Service dialog box is displayed. Set Service ID, Service
Name, and MTU (bytes) in the dialog box. For details about the parameters, see 10.4.1 E-LAN
Service Parameters (Configuration on a Per-NE Basis).
NOTE
l Self-Learning MAC Address can be set to Enabled or Disabled. When Self-Learning MAC
Address is set to Enabled, the bridge supports MAC address self-learning and the forwarding table
items are generated through MAC address self-learning. You can also configure the static MAC address
forwarding table items manually. When Self-Learning MAC Address is set to Disabled, the bridge
does not support MAC address self-learning, and you can configure the static MAC address forwarding
table items only manually.
l MAC Address Learning Mode can be set to SVL or IVL. SVL indicates shared VLAN learning. All
VLANs share a MAC address forwarding table. Each MAC address is unique in the forwarding table.
IVL indicates independent VLAN learning. The forwarding tables for different VLANs are
independent from each other. The MAC address forwarding tables for different VLANs, however, are
permitted to contain the same MAC addresses.
l Tag Type can be set to C-Awared, S-Awared, or Tag Transparent. C-Awared corresponds to the
accessed service packets with one C-VLAN tag. S-Awared corresponds to the accessed service packets
with one C-VLAN tag and one S-VLAN tag. Tag Transparent corresponds to the accessed service
packets without any VLAN tags.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
404
Step 3 Click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is
successful. Then, click Close.
Step 4 Click the UNI tab and click Configuration. Then, the Configure Port dialog box is displayed.
For details about the parameters, see 10.4.3 UNI Parameters.
Step 5 In the Available Ports list, select the port. Then, click to add the port to the Selected
Ports list.
Step 6 In the Selected Ports list, set VLANs of the port, and then click OK.
Step 7 Optional: Click the NNI tab. Click the Port tab. Refer to Steps Step 4- Step 6 to add and
configure the NNI port. Then, click OK. For details about the parameters, see 10.3.4 NNI
Parameters.
Step 8 Click the Split Horizon Group tab and click New. Then, the New Split Horizon Group dialog
box is displayed. For details about the parameters, see 10.4.5 Split Horizon Group.
Step 9 Set the split horizon group ID and add the port that needs to be added into the split horizon group
to the Selected Interfaces area box. Click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is
displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Then, click Close.
Step 10 Click the MAC Address Learning Parameters tab. Set Aging Ability, Aging Time(min),
Address Table Specified Capacity, Address Detection Upper Threshold(%), and Address
Detection Lower Threshold(%). For details about the parameters, see 10.4.6 MAC Address
Learning Parameters.
NOTE
Address Detection Upper Threshold(%) and Address Detection Lower Threshold(%) indicate the
upper threshold and lower threshold of the self-learning capacity. If the upper threshold is crossed, the
equipment reports an alarm. If the lower threshold is crossed, the alarm is cleared.
Step 11 Click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation
is successful. Click Close.
Step 12 Click the Unknown Frame Processing tab. Set the processing modes for the unicast frames
and multicast frames. The default value is broadcast. For details about the parameters, see
10.4.7 Unknown Frame Processing.
Step 13 Click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation
is successful. Click Close.
Step 14 Optional: Click the QoS tab. Set the QoS parameters.
Step 15 Click the UNI tab. Set Default Forwarding Priority and Default Packet Relabeling Color of
the port. Click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the
operation is successful. Then, click Close.
Step 16 Optional: Click the Static MAC Address tab. You can set VLAN ID, MAC Address, and
Egress Interface. For details about the parameters, see 10.4.8 Static MAC Address.
NOTE
The VLAN ID can be set only when MAC Address Learning Mode is set to IVL.
Step 17 Optional: Click the Maintenance Association tab and the MEP Point tab separately to set the
OAM-related parameters. For details about the parameters, see 10.3.5 Maintenance
Association and 10.3.6 MEP Point.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
405
NOTE
Before setting the OAM-related parameters, you need to configure the MD first.
----End
9.10.2 Creating E-LAN Services Carried by PWs on a Per-NE Basis
You can configure various types of E-LAN services by configuring the UNIs and NNIs on the
NMS. You can configure the services on the NNI to be carried by PWs on the NMS.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l The port attributes must be set correctly.
l The MPLS tunnel that carries the PWs must be created.
l If a port needs to be occupied exclusively, disable the DCN function of the port. For details,
see Configuring the DCN Function of a Port.
l If a QoS policy is required for configuring the QoS, you must create the QoS policy first.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Packet Configuration >
Ethernet Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click New. Then, the New E-LAN Service dialog box is displayed. Set Service ID, Service
Name and MTU (bytes) in the dialog box. For details about the parameters, see 10.4.1 E-LAN
Service Parameters (Configuration on a Per-NE Basis).
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
406
NOTE
l Self-Learning MAC Address can be set to Enabled or Disabled. When Self-Learning MAC
Address is set to Enabled, the bridge supports MAC address self-learning and the forwarding table
items are generated through MAC address self-learning. You can also configure the static MAC address
forwarding table items manually. When Self-Learning MAC Address is set to Disabled, the bridge
does not support MAC address self-learning, and you can configure the static MAC address forwarding
table items only manually.
l MAC Address Learning Mode can be set to SVL or IVL. SVL indicates shared VLAN learning. All
VLANs share a MAC address forwarding table. Each MAC address is unique in the forwarding table.
IVL indicates independent VLAN learning. The forwarding tables for different VLANs are
independent from each other. The MAC address forwarding tables for different VLANs, however, are
permitted to contain the same MAC addresses.
l Tag Type can be set to C-Awared, S-Awared, or Tag Transparent. C-Awared corresponds to the
accessed service packets with one C-VLAN tag. S-Awared corresponds to the accessed service packets
with one C-VLAN tag and one S-VLAN tag. Tag Transparent corresponds to the accessed service
packets without any VLAN tags. Currently, S-Awared is not supported.
l If the MPLS tunnel carrying the PWs is not configured with MPLS tunnel APS, you can set Protection
Type to PW APS. In this case, you need to configure both the service PW and protection PW to
implement MPLS PW APS protection.
l When MAC Address Withdrawal is set to Disabled, MAC Address Withdrawal cannot be
performed for E-LAN services carried by static PWs.
Step 3 Click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is
successful. Click Close.
Step 4 Click the UNI tab and click Configuration. Then, the Configure Port dialog box is displayed.
For details about the parameters, see 10.4.3 UNI Parameters.
Step 5 In the Available Ports list, select the port. Then, click to add the port to the Selected
Ports list.
Step 6 In the Selected Ports list, set VLANs of the port, and then click OK.
Step 7 Click the NNI tab. Click the PW tab. Click New and set the parameters related to the PW. Then,
click OK. For details about the parameters, see 10.3.4 NNI Parameters.
Step 8 Click the Split Horizon Group tab. Click New. Then, the New Split Horizon Group dialog
box is displayed. For details about the parameters, see 10.4.5 Split Horizon Group.
Step 9 Set the split horizon group ID, and add the port that needs to be added into the split horizon
group to the Selected Interfaces area box. Click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog box
is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
Step 10 Click the MAC Address Learning Parameters tab. Set Aging Ability, Aging Time(min),
Address Table Specified Capacity, Address Detection Upper Threshold(%), and Address
Detection Lower Threshold(%). For details about the parameters, see 10.4.6 MAC Address
Learning Parameters.
NOTE
Address Detection Upper Threshold(%) and Address Detection Lower Threshold(%) indicate the
upper threshold and lower threshold of the self-learning capacity. If the upper threshold is crossed, the
equipment reports an alarm. If the lower threshold is crossed, the alarm is cleared.
Step 11 Click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation
is successful. Click Close.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
407
Step 12 Click the Unknown Frame Processing tab. Set the processing modes for the unicast frames
and multicast frames. The default value is broadcast. For details about the parameters, see
10.4.7 Unknown Frame Processing.
Step 13 Click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation
is successful. Click Close.
Step 14 Optional: Click the QoS tab. Set the QoS parameters.
Step 15 Optional: In the QoS tab, click the PW. Set EXP and LSP Mode. Click Apply. Then, the
Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click
Close.
NOTE
If you set Bandwidth Limit to Enabled, you can set Committed Information Rate(kbit/s) and Peak
Information Rate(kbit/s). You can also select the QoS policy directly in Policy. Before selecting a policy,
you need to create the policy first.
Step 16 Optional: Click the Static MAC Address tab. You can set VLAN ID, MAC Address, and
Egress Interface. For details about the parameters, see 10.4.8 Static MAC Address.
NOTE
The VLAN ID can be set only when MAC Address Learning Mode is set to IVL.
Step 17 Optional: Click the Maintenance Association tab and the MEP Point tab separately to set the
OAM-related parameters. For details about the parameters, see 10.3.5 Maintenance
Association and 10.3.6 MEP Point.
NOTE
Before setting the OAM-related parameters, you need to configure the MD first.
----End
9.10.3 Configuring E-LAN Services Carried by PWs in End-to-End
Mode
This section describes how to create E-LAN services carried by PWs in end-to-end mode.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l The MPLS tunnel that carries the PWs must be configured.
l If the E-LAN services carried by PWs need to occupy the UNIs exclusively, disable the
DCN function of the UNIs. For the method of disabling the DCN function of a port, see
Configuring the DCN Function of a Port.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > VPLS Service > Create VPLS Service from the Main Menu.
Step 2 Set the parameters in the Basic Attribute tab. For details about the parameters, see 10.4.2 E-
LAN Service Parameters (Configuration in End-to-End Mode).
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
408
Step 3 Select the VPLS service nodes.
l Method 1:
1. In "Node List", choose Add > NPE.
2. In the dialog box that is displayed, select the NEs on which you need to create the VPLS
services.
l Method 2:
1. In Physical Topology, right-click the NEs on which you need to create the VPLS
services and choose NPE from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 In "Node List", select an NE and click Detail. Click the VSI Configuration tab and set the VSI
parameters in the tab. For details about the parameters, see 10.4.2 E-LAN Service Parameters
(Configuration in End-to-End Mode).
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
409
NOTE
You need to set VSI attributes for all the NEs in "Node List".
Step 5 Click the PW Configuration tab and configure the PWs for carrying the services in the tab.
NOTE
l If you set Networking Mode to Full-Mesh VPLS, the NMS automatically creates the PWs between
NEs but you need to create the tunnel for carrying the PWs.
l If you set Networking Mode to Customized, select all the NEs in "Node List". Then, click Create,
and select Bidirectional PW or Unterminated PW as required. In the dialog box that is displayed,
set the PW information.
Step 6 Configure the service access ports.
1. In "Node List", select an NE and click the SAI Configuration tab.
2. Click Create. In the dialog box that is displayed, select the ports to be added, set the relevant
parameters, and click OK.
3. Click the SAI QoS tab. Select a port. Click Configure and select Global QoS policy
Template or QoS CAR Template. In the dialog box that is displayed, set the QoS
parameters.
NOTE
l Before you set Global QoS policy Template, specify Global QoS Policy.
l When setting the QoS parameters of a service access port, you can directly select the service port
and set the global QoS policy or QoS CAR parameter.
Step 7 Select Deploy and then click OK.
NOTE
l If you deselect Deploy, the service configuration is saved only on the NMS. If you select Deploy, the
service configuration is saved on the NMS and deployed to the NEs. By default, Deploy is selected.
l If Deploy and Enable are selected, services on the NE side are available only after the services are
activated.
----End
9.10.4 Configuring E-LAN Services Carried by QinQ Links
You can configure various types of E-LAN services by configuring the UNIs and NNIs on the
NMS. You can configure the services on the NNI to be carried by QinQ links on the NMS.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l The port attributes must be set correctly.
l If a port needs to be occupied exclusively, disable the DCN function of the port. For details,
see Configuring the DCN Function of a Port.
l If the services need to be carried by a QinQ link, you must configure a QinQ link first.
l If a QoS policy is required for configuring the QoS, you must create the QoS policy first.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Packet Configuration >
Ethernet Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
410
Step 2 Click New. Then, the New E-LAN Service dialog box is displayed. Set Service ID, Service
Name, and MTU (bytes) in the dialog box. For details about the parameters, see 10.3.1 E-Line
Service Parameters (Configuration on a Per-NE Basis).
NOTE
l Self-Learning MAC Address can be set to Enabled or Disabled. When Self-Learning MAC
Address is set to Enabled, the bridge supports MAC address self-learning and the forwarding table
items are generated through MAC address self-learning. You can also configure the static MAC address
forwarding table items manually. When Self-Learning MAC Address is set to Disabled, the bridge
does not support MAC address self-learning, and you can configure the static MAC address forwarding
table items only manually.
l MAC Address Learning Mode can be set to SVL or IVL. SVL indicates shared VLAN learning. All
VLANs share a MAC address forwarding table. Each MAC address is unique in the forwarding table.
IVL indicates independent VLAN learning. The forwarding tables for different VLANs are
independent from each other. The MAC address forwarding tables for different VLANs, however, are
permitted to contain the same MAC addresses.
l Tag Type can be set to C-Awared, S-Awared, or Tag Transparent. C-Awared corresponds to the
accessed service packets with one C-VLAN tag. S-Awared corresponds to the accessed service packets
with one C-VLAN tag and one S-VLAN tag. Tag Transparent corresponds to the accessed service
packets without any VLAN tags. Currently, S-Awared is not supported.
Step 3 Click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is
successful. Click Close.
Step 4 Click the UNI tab and click Configuration. Then, the Configure Port dialog box is displayed.
For details about the parameters, see 10.4.1 E-LAN Service Parameters (Configuration on a
Per-NE Basis).
Step 5 In the Available Ports list, select the port. Then, click to add the port to the Selected
Ports list.
Step 6 In the Selected Ports list, set VLANs of the port, and then click OK.
Step 7 Click the NNI tab.
Step 8 Click the QinQ Link tab. For details about the parameters, see 10.3.4 NNI Parameters.
Step 9 Click Add. Then, the QinQ Link Management window is displayed.
Step 10 Select a QinQ link ID and click OK.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
411
Step 11 Click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation
is successful. Click Close,
Step 12 Click the Split Horizon Group tab and click New. Then, the New Split Horizon Group dialog
box is displayed.
Step 13 Set the split horizon group ID, and add the port that needs to be added into the split horizon
group to the Selected Interfaces area box. Click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog box
is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
Step 14 Click the MAC Address Learning Parameters tab. Set Aging Ability, Aging Time(min),
Address Table Specified Capacity, Address Detection Upper Threshold(%), and Address
Detection Lower Threshold(%). For details about the parameters, see 10.4.6 MAC Address
Learning Parameters.
NOTE
Address Detection Upper Threshold(%) and Address Detection Lower Threshold(%) indicate the
upper threshold and lower threshold of the self-learning capacity. If the upper threshold is crossed, the
equipment reports an alarm. If the lower threshold is crossed, the alarm is cleared.
Step 15 Click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation
is successful. Click Close.
Step 16 Click the Unknown Frame Processing tab. Set the processing modes for the unicast frames
and multicast frames. The default value is broadcast. For details about the parameters, see
10.4.7 Unknown Frame Processing.
Step 17 Click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation
is successful. Click Close.
Step 18 Optional: Click the QoS tab. Set the QoS parameters.
Step 19 Click the QinQ Link tab. Enable the bandwidth limit and select the QoS policy for the ingress
and egress directions of the QinQ link. Click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is
displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close,
NOTE
Before selecting a policy, you need to create the policy first. If you set Bandwidth Limit to Enabled, you
can set Committed Information Rate(kbit/s) and Peak Information Rate(kbit/s).
Step 20 Optional: Click the Static MAC Address tab. You can set VLAN ID, MAC Address, and
Egress Interface. For details about the parameters, see 10.4.8 Static MAC Address.
NOTE
The VLAN ID can be set only when MAC Address Learning Mode is set to IVL.
Step 21 Optional: Click the Maintenance Association tab and the MEP Point tab separately to set the
OAM-related parameters. For details about the parameters, see 10.3.5 Maintenance
Association and 10.3.6 MEP Point.
NOTE
Before setting the OAM-related parameters, you need to configure the MD first.
----End
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
412
9.11 Configuring E-AGGR Services
This topic describes how to configure E-AGGR services, including E-AGGR services carried
by ports and E-AGGR services carried by PWs.
9.11.1 Configuring E-AGGR Services Carried by Ports
The creation of an E-AGGR service can be complete in one interface of the NMS. The equipment
supports aggregation of services from multiple ports to one port and aggregation of services
carried by multiple PWs on one NNI to one UNI.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l The port attributes must be set correctly.
l If a port needs to be occupied exclusively, disable the DCN function of the port. For details,
see Configuring the DCN Function of a Port.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Packet Configuration >
Ethernet Service Management > E-AGGR Service from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click New. Then, the New E-AGGR Service dialog box is displayed, Set Service ID, Service
Name and MTU (bytes). For details about the parameters, see 10.5.1 E-AGGR Service
Parameters (on a Per-NE Basis).
Step 3 Click the UNI tab and click Configuration. Then, the Configure Port dialog box is displayed.
For details about the parameters, see 10.5.3 UNI Parameters.
Step 4 In the Available Port list, select the port. Then, click to add the port to the Selected
Port list.
NOTE
The port where the E-AGGR service is configured does not support the S-Aware attribute.
Step 5 In the Selected Port list, set Location and VLANs of the port, and then click OK.
NOTE
Location can be set to the source end or the sink end. Multiple source ends can be set, but only one sink
end can be set. Otherwise, the E-AGGR service cannot be correctly configured.
Step 6 Click the NNI tab. Click the Port tab. Refer to Steps Step 3-Step 5 to add and the NNIs. Then,
click OK. For details about the parameters, see 10.5.4 NNI Parameters.
Step 7 Select VLAN Forwarding Table Item. Click New. Then, the New VLAN Forwarding Table
Item dialog box is displayed. Set the VLAN forwarding attributes. Then, click OK. For details
about the parameters, see 10.5.5 VLAN Forwarding Table Item.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
413
NOTE
The service is forwarded based on VLAN, and thus the forwarding attributes should be set in VLAN
Forwarding Table Item from each source port to sink port.
Step 8 Click OK. Then, the Confirm dialog box is displayed. Close the dialog box.
Step 9 Optional: Click the QoS tab. Set the QoS parameters.
Step 10 Click the UNI tab. Set Default Forwarding Priority and Default Packet Relabeling Color of
the port.
NOTE
If you set Bandwidth Limit to Enabled, you can set Committed Information Rate(kbit/s) and Peak
Information Rate(kbit/s). You can also select the QoS policy directly in Policy.
Step 11 Optional: Click the Maintenance Association tab and the MEP Point tab separately to set the
OAM-related parameters. For details about the parameters, see 10.3.5 Maintenance
Association and 10.3.6 MEP Point.
NOTE
Before setting the OAM-related parameters, you need to configure the MD first.
----End
9.11.2 Creating E-AGGR Services Carried by PWs on a Per-NE Basis
On the NMS, the creation of an E-AGGR service can be complete in one interface. The
equipment supports the multipoint-to-point service aggregation, and supports the service
aggregation from the NNI carried by multiple PWs to one UNI port.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l The port attributes must be set correctly.
l The MPLS tunnel that carries the PWs must be created.
l If a port needs to be exclusively used, disable the DCN function of the port. For details,
see Configuring the DCN Function of a Port.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
414
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Packet Configuration >
Ethernet Service Management > E-AGGR Service from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click New. Then, the New E-AGGR Service dialog box is displayed. Set Service ID, Service
Name and MTU (bytes). For details about the parameters, see 10.5.1 E-AGGR Service
Parameters (on a Per-NE Basis).
Step 3 Click the UNI tab and click Configuration. Then, the Configure Port dialog box is displayed.
For details about the parameters, see 10.5.3 UNI Parameters.
Step 4 In the Available Port list, select the port and click to add the port to the Selected
Port list.
NOTE
The port of the E-AGGR service does not support the S-Aware attribute.
Step 5 In the Selected Port list, set Location and VLANs of the port, and then click OK.
NOTE
Location can be set to one or multiple source ends or one sink end. The E-AGGR service cannot be correctly
configured if Location is set to multiple sink ends.
Step 6 Click the NNI tab. Click the PW tab. Click New and set the related parameters of the PW. Then,
click OK. For details about the parameters, see 10.5.4 NNI Parameters.
NOTE
l Set PW Signaling Type to Static.
l Set PW Type to Ethernet or Ethernet Tagged Mode.
l If the MPLS tunnel carrying the PWs is not configured with MPLS tunnel APS, you can set Protection
Type to PW APS. In this case, you need to configure both the service PW and protection PW to
implement MPLS PW APS protection.
Step 7 Optional: Select VLAN Forwarding Table Item and click New. Then, the New VLAN
Forwarding Table Item dialog box is displayed. Set the VLAN forwarding attributes in the
dialog box. Then, click OK. For details about the parameters, see 10.5.5 VLAN Forwarding
Table Item.
NOTE
The services are forwarded based on VLAN tags. Hence, the VLAN forwarding attributes need to be set
for the source and sink ports in VLAN Forwarding Table Item.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
415
Step 8 Click OK. Then, the Confirm dialog box is displayed. Close the dialog box.
Step 9 Optional: Click the QoS tab. Set the QoS parameters.
Step 10 Optional: In the QoS tab, click the PW and set EXP and LSP Mode.
NOTE
If you set Bandwidth Limit to Enabled, you can set Committed Information Rate(kbit/s) and Peak
Information Rate(kbit/s). You can also select the QoS policy directly in Policy.
Step 11 Optional: Click the Maintenance Association tab and the MEP Point tab separately to set the
OAM-related parameters. For details about the parameters, see 10.3.5 Maintenance
Association and 10.3.6 MEP Point.
NOTE
Before setting the OAM-related parameters, you need to configure the MD first.
----End
9.11.3 Creating E-AGGR Services Carried by PWs in End-to-End
Mode
This topic describes how to create an E-AGGR service carried by PWs in end-to-end mode.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l The MPLS tunnel that carries the PWs must be created.
l If a port needs to be exclusively used, disable the DCN function of the port. For details,
see Configuring the DCN Function of a Port.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > E-AGGR Service > Create E-AGGR Service from the Main Menu.
Step 2 Set basic attributes for the E-AGGR service. For details about the parameters, see 10.5.2
Parameters for Configuring E-AGGR Services (End-to-End Mode).
Step 3 Configure source/sink NEs and ports that receive services for the E-AGGR service. For details
about the parameters, see 10.5.2 Parameters for Configuring E-AGGR Services (End-to-
End Mode).
1. Click the Node List tab, and choose Add > Source or Add > Sink. Then, a dialog box is
displayed.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
416
NOTE
l Location can be set to Source or Sink. You can set multiple source ports but only one sink port.
If multiple sink ports are set, the configuration of the E-AGGR service will fail.
l For an unterminated E-AGGR service (for example, the PE at one end is not managed by the
U2000), choose Add > Unterminated to create source and sink NEs.
2. Select source and sink NEs in Physical Topology on the left.
3. Configure boards and ports that receive services, and set attributes for the ports in SAI
Configuration. Then, click OK.
Step 4 Set basic attributes for the PWs that carry the E-AGGR services. For details about the parameters,
see 10.5.2 Parameters for Configuring E-AGGR Services (End-to-End Mode).
Click the PW tab, and set basic attributes for the PWs.
Step 5 Optional: Configure the VLAN forwarding table. For details about the parameters, see 10.5.2
Parameters for Configuring E-AGGR Services (End-to-End Mode).
1. Click the VLAN Forwarding Table tab.
2. Click Add to set parameters.
Step 6 Optional: Configure bandwidths for the E-AGGR service.
In Service Bandwidth, configure bandwidths for the E-AGGR service.
Step 7 Optional: Set advanced attributes for the E-AGGR service.
1. Click Advanced.
2. In SAI QoS on the right, set QoS parameters for the ports that receive services.
3. In PW QoS on the right, set QoS parameters for the PWs.
4. In Advanced PW Attribute on the right, set advanced attributes for the PWs.
Step 8 Select Deploy and Enable in the lower left corner.
NOTE
After Deploy is selected, the service configuration data is saved on the NMS side and deployed to the NE
side. If you do not select Deploy, the service configuration data is saved on the NMS side but is not deployed
to the NE side.
Step 9 Click OK.
----End
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
417
9.12 Configuring Transit Nodes for Ethernet Services
On a live data network, an Ethernet service is added to its source NE, passed through on its
transit NEs, and dropped from its sink NE. This section describes how to configure transit NEs
for an Ethernet service.
9.12.1 Configuring Transit NEs for Ethernet Services Carried by
Ports
On a live data network, an Ethernet service is added to its source NE, passed through on its
transit NEs, and dropped from its sink NE. This section describes how to configure transit NEs
for an Ethernet service carried by ports.
Prerequisites
l For the Ethernet service carried by ports, Port Mode is set to Later 2 and Encapsulation
Type is set to 802.1Q.
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l The Ethernet service carried by ports exclusively occupies the NNI ports on its transit NEs.
The DCN function is disabled for the NNI ports. For the method of disabling the DCN
function for a port carrying Ethernet services, see Configuring the DCN Function of a Port.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the root list, and choose Configuration >
Packet Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function
Tree.
Step 2 Click New. Then, the New E-Line Service dialog box is displayed.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
418
Step 3 Set parameters of transit NEs for an Ethernet service. For details about the parameters, see 10.3.1
E-Line Service Parameters (Configuration on a Per-NE Basis).
NOTE
l For transit NEs for an Ethernet service, set Direction to UNI-UNI.
l For transit NEs for an Ethernet service, you do not need to set QoS parameters.
Step 4 Click OK.
Step 5 Click Query to check the configured Ethernet service.
----End
9.12.2 Configuring Transit NEs for Ethernet Services Carried by
PWs
On a live data network, an Ethernet service is added to its source NE, passed through on its
transit NEs, and dropped from its sink NE. This section describes how to configure transit NEs
for an Ethernet service carried by PWs.
Background Information
For transit NEs of an Ethernet service carried by PWs, you only need to configure MPLS tunnels
whose Node Type is Transit. For details on how to configure an MPLS tunnel, see 9.4
Configuring an MPLS Tunnel.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
419
9.12.3 Configuring Transit NEs for Ethernet Services Carried by
QinQ Links
On a live data network, an Ethernet service is added to its source NE, passed through on its
transit NEs, and dropped from its sink NE. This section describes how to configure transit NEs
for an Ethernet service carried by QinQ links.
Prerequisites
l For the Ethernet service carried by QinQ links, Port Mode is set to Later 2 and
Encapsulation Type is set to QinQ.
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l The Ethernet service carried by QinQ links exclusively occupies the NNI ports on its transit
NEs. The DCN function is disabled for the NNI ports. For the method of disabling the DCN
function for a port carrying Ethernet services, see Configuring the DCN Function of a Port.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the root list, and choose Configuration >
Packet Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function
Tree.
Step 2 Click New. Then, the New E-Line Service dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set parameters of transit NEs for an Ethernet service. For details about the parameters, see 10.3.1
E-Line Service Parameters (Configuration on a Per-NE Basis).
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
420
NOTE
l For transit NEs for an Ethernet service, set Direction to UNI-UNI.
l For transit NEs for an Ethernet service, you do not need to set QoS parameters.
Step 4 Click OK.
Step 5 Click Query to check the configured Ethernet service.
----End
9.13 Operation Tasks for Configuring CES Services
This topic describes the operation tasks for configuring CES services in per-NE mode and end-
to-end mode on the NMS.
9.13.1 Creating UNI-UNI CES Services on a Per-NE Basis
When creating a CES service on a per-NE basis, you need to set associated service attributes for
the source node and the sink node separately.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l The CES ports must be configured correctly.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE, and then choose Configuration > Packet Configuration >
CES Service Configuration from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click New. Set the CES service parameters in the Create CES Service dialog box that is
displayed. For details about the parameters, see 10.7.1 Basic Configuration Parameters (UNI-
UNI).
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
421
NOTE
l Set Mode to UNI-UNI.
l When the CES service mode is UNI-UNI, Configure PW is unavailable.
l Set the other parameters according to the network planning information.
Step 3 After the setting, click OK.
----End
9.13.2 Creating UNI-NNI CES Services on a Per-NE Basis
If you create a CES service on a per-NE basis, you need to create relevant attributes of the service
separately on the source and sink nodes of the service. After the CES service is created, the
corresponding PW is automatically created.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l The CES port must be configured. The port mode must set to Layer 1. The frame format
must be set if the CES port is a PDH port.
l The MPLS tunnel must be created.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE, and then choose Configuration > Packet Configuration >
CES Service Configuration from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click New. Set the CES service parameters in the Create CES Service dialog box that is
displayed. For details about the parameters, see 10.7.2 Basic Configuration Parameters (UNI-
NNI).
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
422
NOTE
l Set Mode to UNI-NNI.
l Set the other parameters according to the network planning information.
Step 3 Click Configure PW. Set the PW parameters in the Create PW dialog box that is displayed.
Step 4 Click the General Attributes tab and set the PW parameters of the CES service. For details
about the parameters, see 10.7.2 Basic Configuration Parameters (UNI-NNI).
NOTE
l Set PW Signaling Type to Static.
l Set the other parameters according to the network planning information.
Step 5 Click the Advanced Attributes tab and set the advanced attributes of the CES service. For
details about the parameters, see 10.7.4 Advanced Attributes (UNI-NNI).
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
423
NOTE
l The packet loading time needs to be set to the same value for the NEs at both ends.
l The jitter compensation buffering time needs to be more than two times of the packet loading time.
Step 6 After setting the parameters, click OK.
Step 7 Click OK in the Create CES Service dialog box that is displayed.
Step 8 Navigate to the NE Explorer of the opposite NE and configure the reverse service according to
Step 1 to Step 9.
----End
9.13.3 Creating a CES Service in End-to-End Mode
This topic describes how to create CES service channels for transmitting TDM signals in end-
to-end mode. You can configure the source node, sink node, and PW attributes of a CES service
on a GUI of the NMS, therefore quickly completing the CES service configuration.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l The CES service port must be configured. The port mode must set to Layer 1. The frame
format and frame mode must be set.
l The MPLS tunnel must be created.
Context
You need to set the frame format for the UNI port that carries the CES service to be the same
as the service encapsulation format. If the encapsulation format of the CES service is CESoPSN,
you can set the frame format of the UNI port to CRC-4 multiframe (recommended value) or
Double frame. If the encapsulation format of the CES service is SAToP, set frame format of the
UNI port to unframed.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > PWE3 Service > Create PWE3 Service from the Main Menu.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
424
Step 2 Set the parameters on the General Attributes tab page. For details about the parameters, see
10.7.5 Parameters for Configuring CES Services (End-to-End Mode).
NOTE
l You can configure the CES service according to the service template. That is, you can select a service
template or create a service template in the Service Template field.
l Set Service Type to CES.
l Set Protection Type to Protection-Free.
Step 3 Select the source and sink NEs of the service.
NOTE
The configuration method is the same for the sink NE, source NE, and transit NE. Therefore, only the example
for configuring a source NE is provided as follows.
1. Click Configure Source And Sink. Then, the Configure Source And Sink dialog box is
displayed.
2. Select a source NE from Physical Topology on the left. Then, the selected NE is displayed
in the upper right pane.
3. All slots and available boards on the NE are displayed in Basic Slot pane. Select the
appropriate board according to the service type.
4. In SAI Configuration, set High TimeSlot and Low TimeSlot.
5. In SAI Configuration, set the SAI attribute of the CES access port. Click Add Node. Then,
the added source and sink NEs are displayed at the bottom of the pane. Then, click OK.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
425
Step 4 Optional: Click Configure Source And Sink and then select Unterminated on the left. Set
the LSR ID of the unterminated node and click Add Node. Then, the added unterminated source
and sink nodes are displayed at the bottom. Then, click OK.
NOTE
Unterminated: On a network, if the equipment at one end of a service can be managed by the U2000, and the
equipment at the other end of the service is from another vendor and cannot be managed by the U2000, select
Unterminated to set the LSR ID of the opposite end of the service.
Step 5 Optional: Click Configure PW Switch Node to add working and protection switching NEs
between the source NE and the sink NE.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
426
Step 6 Set parameters of the source and sink NEs that are displayed in Node List. To view the topology
of a configured service, click the Service Topology tab in the upper-right area.
Step 7 Click the PW tab at lower left to set basic attributes of the PW. For details about the parameters,
see 10.7.5 Parameters for Configuring CES Services (End-to-End Mode).
NOTE
l The PW ID can be automatically allocated.
l Signaling Type can be set to Static automatically or manually.
l Forward Label and Reverse Label can be allocated automatically and manually.
l Forward Type and Reverse Type support Static Binding. Forward Tunnel needs to be specified
manually.
l You can also set Forward Tunnel and Reverse Tunnel in Service Topology at upper right. Select the
tunnel service between the source NE and the sink NE, select Select Forward Tunnel or Select Reverse
Tunnel, and select the tunnel for static binding.
Step 8 Optional: Click Detail. Then, associated information is displayed in the pane at lower right.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
427
Step 9 Optional: Click the Advanced PW Attribute tab and set the parameters associated with the
PW. For details about the parameters, see 10.7.5 Parameters for Configuring CES Services
(End-to-End Mode).
NOTE
l The packet loading time needs to be set to the same value for the NEs at both ends.
l The jitter compensation buffering time needs to be more than two times of the packet loading time.
Step 10 Select Deploy and then click OK.
NOTE
l In this case, If you select Enable, the service configuration is saved on the NMS and deployed to the NEs.
If you deselect Deploy, the service configured is saved only on the NMS but not deployed to NEs. By default,
Deploy is selected.
l When Deploy and Enable are selected, the NE-side tunnel is available only after the tunnel is enabled.
----End
Subsequent Operation
After the service is created successfully, the service is displayed in the PWE3 service
management window.
9.14 Configuring Transit NEs for CES Services
On a live data network, an Ethernet service is added to its source NE, passed through on its
transit NEs, and dropped from its sink NE. This section describes how to configure transit NEs
for a CES service.
Background Information
For transit NEs of a CES service, you only need to configure MPLS tunnels whose Node
Type is Transit. For details on how to configure an MPLS tunnel, see 9.4 Configuring an
MPLS Tunnel.
9.15 Configuring ATM PWE3 Services
This section describes the operation tasks for configuring ATM PWE3 services in per-NE mode
and end-to-end mode on the NMS.
9.15.1 Configuring ATM Interfaces
By using the E1 board or STM-1 ATM board, the OptiX OSN equipments can receive ATM
services on the E1/VC-12, fractional E1, or STM-1 level. Specifically, one E1 channel can carry
multiple fractional E1 services. Certain timeslots of the 32 timeslots in an E1 channel can be
allocated for the CES services and the others for the ATM services. In this manner, resources
are saved and expenditure is cut.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
428
l The DCN function of the port that carries ATM IMA services is disabled.
Background Information
For the OptiX OSN equipments, Frame Mode of the packets at the PDH interface or SDH
interfaces can be 30-timeslot or 31-timeslot.
l When Frame Mode is set to 30, timeslots 1-15 and 17-31 of an E1 frame are used to
transport service data.
l When Frame Mode is set to 31, timeslots 1-31 of an E1 frame are used to transport service
data.
When creating an IMA group of the fractional E1 level, create a serial port of the 64K
Timeslot level. An IMA group of the E1/VC12 level can be directly created.
Procedure
l Use an E1 board to carry ATM IMA services.
Configure an interface at the Fractional E1 level.
1. In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Packet
Configuration > Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function
Tree.
2. In the General Attributes tab, select E1 board. Set the Port Mode to Layer 1,
and click Apply.
3. Click Advanced Attributes tab, set Frame Format and Frame Mode according
to networking planning. Then, click Apply.
4. Choose Configuration > Packet Configuration > Interface Management >
Serial Interface from the Function Tree. Click New in the General Attributes
tab, and the New Serial Interface dialog box is displayed.
5. In the New Serial Interface dialog box, set the Level, Used Board, Used Port,
and 64K Timeslot fields, and then click OK. Create serial interfaces of E1 board.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
429
6. Select the created serial interfaces, set Port Mode to Layer 2, and then click
Apply.
7. Choose Configuration > Packet Configuration > Interface Management >
ATM IMA Management from the Function Tree. Then, click Configuration in
the Binding tab, and the Bound Path dialog box is displayed.
8. Select the bound board and port, select Fractional E1 for the Level field, and select
Available Resources. Then, click to add the bound board and port to
Selected Bound Paths.
9. Click Apply.
10. In the IMA Group Management tab, select the IMA group. Set the parameters
such as IMA Transmit Frame Length and IMA Symmetry Mode according to
the network planning. Then, set IMA Protocol Enable Status to Enabled. Click
Apply.
11. On the ATM Interface Management tab, click the IMA group. Then, set the
parameters such as Port Type, ATM Cell Payload Scrambling for the ports
according to the network planning. Click Apply.
Configure an interface at the E1 level.
1. In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Packet
Configuration > Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function
Tree.
2. In General Attributes tab, select E1 port. Set Port Mode to Layer 2, and click
Apply.
3. In Advanced Attributes tab, set Frame Format and Frame Mode according to
networking planning. Then, click Apply.
4. Choose Configuration > Packet Configuration > Interface Management >
ATM IMA Management from the Function Tree. Then, click Configuration in
the Binding tab, and the Bound Path dialog box is displayed.
5. Select E1 for the Level field for the available bound path, and select ports in
Available Resources. Then, click to add the bound board and port to
Selected Bound Paths
6. Click Apply.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
430
7. On the IMA Group Management tab, select the IMA group. Set the parameters
such as IMA Transmit Frame Length and IMA Symmetry Mode according to
the network planning. Then, set IMA Protocol Enable Status to Enabled. Click
Apply.
8. On the ATM Interface Management tab, click the IMA group. Then, set the
parameters such as Port Type, ATM Cell Payload Scrambling for the ports
according to the network planning. Click Apply.
l Use the STM-1 ATM board to carry the ATM services.
1. In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Packet
Configuration > Interface Management > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.
2. In Layer 2 Attributes, select STM-1 port and set the parameters such as VPI/VCI
range for the ports according to the network planning. Click Apply.
----End
Result
When creating the IMA groups at both ends of the interconnected equipment is complete, you
can query the IMA group status on the U2000 to check whether the IMA groups are in proper
status.
1. In the NE Explorer, click an NE and choose Configuration > Packet Configuration >
Interface Management > ATM IMA Management from the Function Tree.
2. In the IMA Group States tab, click Query. Check Near-End Group Status, Far-End
Group Status, Number of Transmit Links, and Number of Receive Links.
l If Near-End Group Status and Far-End Group Status are displayed as
Operational, the negotiation of the IMA groups succeeded.
l If Near-End Group Status and Far-End Group Status are displayed as other status,
handle the anomaly with reference to Table 9-2.
3. In the IMA Link Status tab, click Query. Check Near-End Receiving Status, Near-End
Transmitting Status, Far-End Receiving Status, and Far-End Transmitting Status.
l If Near-End Receiving Status, Near-End Transmitting Status, Far-End Receiving
Status, and Far-End Transmitting Status are displayed as Active, it indicates that the
IMA link is normal.
l If Near-End Receiving Status, Near-End Transmitting Status, Far-End Receiving
Status, and Far-End Transmitting Status are displayed as Unusable, it indicates that
the IMA link is faulty. For details on the IMA link status parameters, see Table 9-3.
Table 9-2 lists the IMA group status parameters.
Table 9-2 IMA group status parameters
Near-End/Far-End Group
Status
Description Suggestion
Not Configured Displays this state if the IMA
group does not exist.
-
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
431
Near-End/Far-End Group
Status
Description Suggestion
Start-Up This end is in the Start-Up
status and is waiting to be
indicated that the far-end is
also in the Start-Up status.
Start the IMA protocol for the
opposite IMA group and
check whether the IMA
groups are normal.
Start-Up-ACK This is a transitional state.
When both the near-end and
far-end groups start-up, they
move to this state.
The IMA groups are in the
progress of negotiation. Wait
for 500 ms and then check
whether the IMA groups are
normal.
Config-Aborted This state is entered when the
far-end tries to apply
unacceptable configuration
parameters.
Check whether the parameter
settings are consistent for the
IMA groups at both ends. If
not, re-set the inconsistent
parameters to ensure that all
the parameter settings are
consistent for the IMA
groups at both ends.
Insufficient-Links The status is displayed when
the parameter settings for the
IMA groups at both ends are
consistent but the link
resources are insufficient. In
this case, the number of
activated links is less than the
minimum number of
activated links for an IMA
group.
When the fault of the IMA
link is rectified, check
whether the IMA groups are
in proper status.
Blocked The group is blocked. The
group can be blocked for
maintenance purposes while
sufficient links are Active in
both transmitting and
receiving directions.
-
Operational The group is not inhibited
and has sufficient links in
both transmitting and
receiving directions.
-

Table 9-3 lists the IMA link status parameters.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
432
Table 9-3 IMA link status parameters
Receive/Transmit Status Description Suggestion
Not In Group This state is displayed if a
link is not included in an IMA
group.
-
Unusable The status is displayed when
an IMA link is added to an
IMA group but the IMA link
is not available because of
fault-caused or manual
suppression.
When the fault of the IMA
link is rectified, check
whether the IMA links are in
proper status.
Usable This status indicates that the
link is availably and it is
displayed when you are
waiting for the remote
receive link to be activated.
In this case, this link is not
added to the cyclical
transmitting process of the
IMA group.
-
Active This status indicates that the
link is activated. If service
cells accessed, they can be
transmitted. This link is
added to the cyclical
transmitting process of the
IMA group.
-

9.15.2 Configuring an ATM Policy Profile
This section describes how to configure a traffic management policy, which can be selected as
the traffic management profile for ATM services configured in an end-to-end mode.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > PTN QoS Profile > ATM Profile from the Main Menu.
Step 2 Right-click in ATM Profile and choose Add Global Profile from the shortcut menu.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
433
The Create ATM Profile dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set the ATM policy profile according to network planning information so that it is available for
traffic management policy selection during ATM connection creation.
Step 4 Click OK.
Step 5 Check and manage the global ATM policy profile in the Details, NE Reference, and NE
Unreference tabs.
----End
9.15.3 Configuring an ATM CoS Mapping Profile
This section describes how to configure an ATM CoS mapping profile, which can be selected
as the ATM CoS mapping for ATM services configured in an end-to-end mode.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > PTN QoS Profile > ATM CoS Mapping Profile from the Main Menu.
Step 2 Select appropriate steps based on the requirement.
If... Then...
You need to change the default global ATM CoS mapping
profile
Perform Step 3 and Step 5
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
434
If... Then...
You need to create a global ATM CoS mapping profile Perform Step 6 and Step 8
Step 3 Double-click the Default ATMCosMap profile.
The Modify ATM CoS Mapping Profile dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Modify the global ATM CoS mapping profile according to network planning information.
NOTE
l Eight PHB service classes are available: BE, AF1, AF2, AF3, AF4, EF, CS6, and CS7.
l CS6 to CS7: highest service classes, mainly applicable to signaling transmission.
l EF: fast forwarding, applicable to services of low transmission delays and low packet loss rates.
l AF1 to AF4: assured forwarding, applicable to services that require an assured transmission rate rather
than delay or jitter limits.
NOTE
The AF1 class includes three subclasses: AF11, AF12, and AF13. Only one of these subclasses
can take effect for one queue. It is the same case with AF2, AF3, and AF4.
l BE: best effort, applicable to services that do not require special processing.
Step 5 Click OK.
Step 6 Right-click in ATM CoS Mapping Profile and choose Add Global Profile from the shortcut
menu.
The Create ATM CoS Mapping Profile dialog box is displayed.
Step 7 Create a global ATM CoS mapping profile according to network planning information.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
435
NOTE
l Eight PHB service classes are available: BE, AF1, AF2, AF3, AF4, EF, CS6, and CS7.
l CS6 to CS7: highest service classes, mainly applicable to signaling transmission.
l EF: fast forwarding, applicable to services of low transmission delays and low packet loss rates.
l AF1 to AF4: assured forwarding, applicable to services that require an assured transmission rate rather
than delay or jitter limits.
NOTE
The AF1 class includes three subclasses: AF11, AF12, and AF13. Only one of these subclasses
can take effect for one queue. It is the same case with AF2, AF3, and AF4.
l BE: best effort, applicable to services that do not require special processing.
Step 8 Click OK.
----End
9.15.4 Creating an ATM Service by Using the Trail Function
This topic describes how to use the trail function to create an ATM PWE3 service tunnel for
ATM signal transmission. The trail function allows you to fast configure the source and sink
nodes of an ATM service and PW attributes.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l ATM interfaces are configured. If IMA services are transmitted, an IMA group is
configured.
l An ATM policy is configured.
l An MPLS tunnel is used.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > PWE3 Service > Create PWE3 Service from the main menu.
Step 2 Set the parameters on the Attributes tab.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
436
NOTE
l Use a template to configure a service. Specifically, select a template in the Service Template field or
personally create another template.
l Set Service Type to ATM.
l If you set Protection Type to PW APS Protection, select Single Source and Dual Sink or Dual Source
and Single Sink on the Node List. You need to configure one source node and two sink nodes for Single
Source and Dual Sink, and two source nodes and one sink node for Dual Source and Single Sink. The
two PWs are the working PW and protection PW. In addition, PW APS Protection can be set to Single
Source and Single Sink.
Step 3 Select the source and sink NEs for a service.
1. Click Configure Source And Sink. A dialog box is displayed.
2. Select a source NE from Physical Root on the left. Then, the selected NE is displayed in
the upper right pane.
3. In the right portion of NE Panel, all slots and available boards of an NE are displayed.
According to the required service type, select an appropriate board.
4. Select an interface.
5. Set the service access interface attributes. Then, click Add Node. In the lower portion of
the window, the new source and sink NEs are displayed, click OK.
6. Configure the sink NE, protection NE and transit NE with the same method to align with
different protection types.
7. To configure multiple ATM connections for an ATM service at the same time, select
multiple ports for an NE in the same way.
NOTE
The same configuration method is applicable to the sink NE, transit NE, and source NE. This topic considers
the configuration of a source NE as an example.
Step 4 Optional: Click Configure Source And Sink, select the Unterminated in the left, specify the
LSR ID of an unterminated node, and click Add Node. In the lower portion of the window, the
unterminated source and sink NEs are displayed. Then, click OK.
NOTE
On a network, if the equipment at one end of a service can be managed by the U2000, and the equipment at the
other end of the service is from another vendor and therefore cannot be managed by the U2000, select
Unterminated to set the LSR ID at the opposite end of the service.
Currently, the OptiX OSN equipment in the same management domain can be used to configure unterminated
trails.
If Protection Type is PW APS Protection, the unterminated node cannot be set.
Step 5 Optional: Click Configure PW Switch Node to add working and protection transit NEs
between the source NE and sink NE.
Step 6 Set parameters for the source and sink NEs that are displayed in Node List. To view the topology
of a configured service, click the Service Topology tab in the upper-right area.
Step 7 Set parameters in the PW pane in the lower left portion of the window.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
437
NOTE
PW ID can be automatically allocated.
Signaling Type can only be set to Static. Forward Label and Reverse Label can be assigned automatically
or manually.
Forward Type and Reverse Type can be set to Static Binding. In this case, manually specify a tunnel in the
Forward Tunnel field.
You may also set the forward tunnel and reverse tunnel by clicking the Service Topology tab in the upper right
area. Right-click a tunnel between the source NE and sink NE, and choose Select Forward Tunnel or Select
Reverse Tunnel from the shortcut menu. In the dialog box that is displayed, select the tunnel for static binding.
Step 8 Click ATM Link. In the dialog box that is displayed, add the ATM connection, and set relevant
parameters of the ATM connection.
NOTE
After you configure VPI/VCI of the source and sink, the U2000 assigns the transit VPI/VCI automatically. On
a network consisting of OptiX OSN 7500 II equipment, the transit VPI/VCI can be set to a value different from
the VPI/VCI of the source and sink.
Step 9 Optional: Click Detail. A pane is displayed in the lower right area.
Step 10 Optional: Click the PW QoS tab to configure the global template of a PW. Alternatively, select
one of the templates that are configured in the Global QoS Policy Template field, and set
parameters.
Step 11 Optional: Click the Advanced PW Attribute tab to set parameters for a PW.
Step 12 Optional: If the Protection Type is PW APS Protection, click Protection Parameter to set
the protection parameters.
Step 13 Select the Deploy check box, and click OK.
NOTE
If you clear the Deploy check box, the configuration data information is saved only on the U2000. If you select
the Deploy check box, the configuration data information is saved on the U2000 and applied to NEs. By default,
the Deploy check box is selected.
When you select the Deploy and Enable check boxes, a service is available on NEs only when enabled.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After the service is created successful, the service is displayed in the PWE3 service management
window.
9.15.5 Creating ATM Services on a Per-NE Basis
This section describes how to create an ATM PWE3 service channel that transports ATM signals
on a per-NE basis. The per-NE basis means configuring service attributes at both source and
sink ends.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l ATM interfaces are configured. If IMA services are transmitted, configure an IMA group.
l ATM policies are configured.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
438
l MPLS tunnels are created.
Background Information
l The OptiX OSN equipments transmits services at the E1 level or 64 kbit/s timeslot level.
If the services are at the E1 level, all the available timeslots of E1 channels are used to
transport services. If the services are at the 64 kbit/s timeslot level, one E1 channel can be
used to simultaneously transport ATM services and CES services (certain timeslots
allocated for ATM services and others for CES services). In this manner, E1 channels are
used flexibly.
l If the volume of the accessed ATM services is small, one E1 port or several 64 kbit/s
timeslots (less than 30 timeslots) can meet access capacity demand. In this case, bind an
E1 port or 64 kbit/s timeslots into an IMA group, but do not enable the IMA protocol.
Therefore, the IMA group serves as a service access interface.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Packet Configuration > ATM
Service Management from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click New. The New ATM Service dialog box is displayed. In the dialog box, configure a
UNIs-NNI or UNI-UNI service.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
439
NOTE
l For the UNIs-NNI service, set the attributes in the Connection, PW, and CoS Mapping tabs.
l For the UNI-UNI service, set only the attributes in the Connection tab.
Step 3 To create a UNI-UNI service, go to Step 4. To create a UNIs-NNI service, go to Step 5.
Step 4 Optional: Create a UNI-UNI service.
1. Set ATM-related general attributes.
NOTE
Select UNI-UNI for the service type.
Set the connection type as follows.
l For a UNI-UNI service, do not set Connection to Port Transparent.
l PVP: Only the VPI value of an ATM connection can be changed.
l PVC: The VPI and VCI values of an ATM connection can be changed.
2. Click the Connection tab, and click Add. The Configure Connection dialog box is
displayed. In the dialog box, set connection attributes.
NOTE
The Sink VPI value ranges from 0 to Max.VPI, and the Sink VCI value ranges from 32 to Max.VCI.
3. Click OK.
Step 5 Optional: Create a UNIs-NNI service.
1. Set ATM-related general attributes.
NOTE
Select UNIs-NNI for the service type.
Set the connection type as follows.
l When Service Type is set to Port Transparent, only one ATM connection can be created and VPI
or VCI of the ATM connection cannot be changed. To transparently transmit an ATM service, user
ATM cells are encapsulated into PWs as payload without interpretation of ATM cell headers, and are
transported to the other end over a transport network.
l PVP: Only the VPI value of an ATM connection can be changed.
l PVC: The VPI and VCI values of an ATM connection can be changed.
2. Click the Connection tab, and click Add. The Configure Connection dialog box is
displayed. In the dialog box, set connection attributes.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
440
NOTE
For a service to be transparently transmitted, configure only PW attributes, but not VPI/VCI or ATM
policy.
3. Click the PW tab, and click Add. The Configure PW window is displayed. In the window,
set attributes of the PW.
4. Click the Basic Attributes tab, and set the general attributes of PW.
5. Optional: Click the QoS tab, and set the QoS attribute of PW.
6. Optional: Click the Advanced Attributes tab, and set the advanced attributes of PW.
NOTE
l When PW Type is set to ATM n:1, Control Word can be set to either Used required or Not in
use. When Control Word is set to Used required, a PW ping test is feasible.
l When PW Type is set to ATM 1:1, Control Word must be set to Used required.
7. Select the CoS Mapping tab, and then the applied CoS mapping policy is displayed by
default.
NOTE
Configure CoS mapping only after configuring the parameters in the PW tab.
8. Optional: To change the CoS mapping policy for the service, click CoS Mapping, and
click the button. In the CoS Mapping dialog box, select ATM CoS mapping.
9. Click OK.
Step 6 In the New ATM Service dialog box, click OK. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the
operation succeeded. Click Close.
----End
9.16 Managing PWE3 Services
Quality of PWE3 services has significant impacts on customer revenues; stable PWE3 services
increase customer revenues. Therefore, it is crucial to properly manage PWE3 services.
Managing PWE3 services involves deploying, modifying, and deleting PWE3 services,
checking the PWE3 service topology, and managing discrete PWE3 services.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
441
9.16.1 Searching for PWE3 Services
A complete PWE3 service contains its source and end. If being created on a per-NE basis, PWE3
services are displayed as discrete services on the NMS. After you search for the PWE3 services
on the NMS, the discrete PWE3 services are converted to complete PWE3 services. This
facilitates future PWE3 service management.
Prerequisites
l PWE3 services have been created on a per-NE basis. For details on how to create PWE3
services on a per-NE basis, see 9.9.3 Configuring UNI-NNI E-Line Services Carried by
PWs on a Per-NE Basis.
l When PWE3 services are created on a per-NE basis, ensure that the PW types are the same;
Peer IP of a local NE equals the LSR ID of the opposite NE; the PW outgoing label of a
local NE equals the PW incoming label of the opposite NE.
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > Search for IP Service from the main menu.
Step 2 In the dialog box that is displayed, set the tunnel discovery policy.
Step 3 Click Start.
Step 4 Click Close.
----End
9.16.2 Checking the PWE3 Service Status
Quality of PWE3 services has significant impacts on customer revenues; stable PWE3 services
increase customer revenues. This section describes how to check the topology information and
running status of a PWE3 service, facilitating PWE3 service management.
Prerequisites
l The PWE3 service has been created.
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
442
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > PWE3 Service > Manage PWE3 Service from the main menu.
Step 2 In the dialog box that is displayed, set filter conditions; for example, set Protocol Type to PW
APS. Then, click Filter. Query all PWE3 services that meet the filter conditions.
Step 3 Select the PWE3 service whose topology information you need to check and click the
Topology tab.
Step 4 In the PWE3 service topology view, right-click the link, and choose View Real-Time
Performance from the shortcut menu to check the real-time running status of the PWE3 service.
Step 5 In the PWE3 service topology view, right-click the link, and choose View Tunnel from the
shortcut menu to check the running status of the tunnel.
----End
9.16.3 Deploying PWE3 Services
After being created on the NMS, PWE3 services are stored on the NMS but not immediately
deployed to the corresponding NEs. This section describes how to deploy PWE3 services from
the NMS to the corresponding NEs.
Prerequisites
l The PWE3 service has been created.
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > PWE3 Service > Manage PWE3 Service from the main menu.
Step 2 In the dialog box that is displayed, set Deployment Status to Undeployed. Click Filter to check
all undeployed PWE3 services.
Step 3 Select one or more PWE3 services to be deployed, right-click the PWE3 services, and choose
Deploy from the shortcut menu.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
443
NOTE
After a PWE3 service is successfully deployed, its Deployment Status is Deployed.
----End
9.16.4 Modifying PWE3 Services
This section describes how to change values of PWE3 service parameters, such as the service
name.
Prerequisites
l The PWE3 service has been created.
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > PWE3 Service > Manage PWE3 Service from the main menu.
Step 2 In the dialog box that is displayed, set filter conditions; for example, set Protocol Type to PW
APS. Then, click Filter. Query all PWE3 services that meet the filter conditions.
Step 3 Select the PWE3 service whose parameters you need to modify and click Details. In the dialog
box that is displayed, change the values of the PWE3 services parameters as required.
----End
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
444
9.16.5 Deleting PWE3 Services
After being deployed, PWE3 services are stored on the NMS and the corresponding NEs. This
section describes how to delete PWE3 services from the NMS and corresponding NEs.
Prerequisites
l The PWE3 service has been created.
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
Background Information
l After being deleted from the network side, PWE3 services are deleted from the NMS only
but still stored on the corresponding NEs. In addition, after being deleted from the network
side, PWE3 services are displayed as discrete services on the NMS.
l After being deleted from the NE side, PWE3 services are deleted from the corresponding
NEs only but still stored on the NMS. In addition, after being deleted from the NE side,
PWE3 services are displayed as undeployed.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > PWE3 Service > Manage PWE3 Service from the main menu.
Step 2 In the dialog box that is displayed, set filter conditions; for example, set Protocol Type to PW
APS. Then, click Filter. Query all PWE3 services that meet the filter conditions.
Step 3 Select one or more PWE3 services that you need to delete, right-click the services.
l Choose Delete from the shortcut menu.
l Choose Delete from Network Side from the shortcut menu.
l Choose Undeploy from the shortcut menu.
NOTE
After a PWE3 service is successfully deleted from the NE side, its Deployment Status is Undeployed.
----End
9.16.6 Managing Discrete PWE3 Services
This section describes how to find discrete PWE3 services, convert discrete PWE3 services to
unterminated services, and delete discrete PWE3 services.
Prerequisites
l The PWE3 service has been created.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
445
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > PWE3 Service > Manage PWE3 Discrete Service from the main menu.
Step 2 In the dialog box that is displayed, set filter conditions and click Filter. Query all PWE3 services
that meet the filter conditions.
Step 3 Optional: Convert a PWE3 service to an unterminated service.
1. Select a PWE3 service and click Convert to Unterminated.
2. In the dialog box that is displayed, set attributes of the PWE3 service, such as the service
name.
NOTE
After a PWE3 service is converted to an unterminated service, its service information is displayed
in Manage PWE3 Service.
Step 4 Optional: Select one or more PWE3 services and click Delete Discrete Service.
----End
9.17 Managing Composite Services
Managing composite services includes automatically discovering and deploying composite
services.
9.17.1 Automatically Discovering Composite Services
With the automatically discovering composite service function, you can discover composite
services and save them to the NMS. The composite service is composed of services associated
with interface connection points or PW connection points.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
446
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > Composite Service > Search for Composite Service from the Main Menu.
Step 2 In the dialog box that is displayed, set the tunnel discovery policy and click Start.
Step 3 After the composite service search is complete, click Close.
----End
9.17.2 Deploying Composite Services
After being created on the NMS, Composite services are stored on the NMS but not immediately
deployed to the corresponding NEs. This section describes how to deploy Composite services
from the NMS to the corresponding NEs.
Prerequisites
l The composite service has been created.
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > Composite Service > Manage Composite Service from the main menu.
Step 2 In the dialog box that is displayed, set Deployment Statusto Undeployed. Click Filter to check
all undeployed Composite services.
Step 3 Select one or more Composite services to be deployed, right-click the Composite services, and
choose Deploy from the shortcut menu.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
447
NOTE
After a Composite service is successfully deployed, its Deployment Status is Deployed.
----End
9.18 Configuring Address Resolution
Dynamic Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) learning is implemented by the dynamic ARP. It
automatically maps IP addresses and MAC address, requiring no manual configuration of an
ARP table. Generally, dynamic ARP learning is applicable to networks with many NEs.
Dynamic ARP protocol packets, however, may significantly affect NE operating. For static ARP
configuration, the ARP table, namely, mapping between IP addresses and MAC addresses, is
configured manually, but NE operating is not affected by static ARP protocol packets. Static
ARP configuration is applicable to small networks with specific NEs and NE ports used.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Packet Configuration > Control
Plane Configuration > Address Parse from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click Create. Then, the Add Address Parse dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set the IP address and MAC address for each ARP table item, and then click Apply. For details
about the parameters, see 10.13 Parameter Description: Address Parse.
WARNING
When configuring the MAC address of each ARP table item, ensure that the first digit of the
address is an even number.
Step 4 After the setting is complete, click OK.
WARNING
Configuring the address resolution refers to creating the static ARP table items. To delete the
dynamic ARP table items, click Clear. This operation, however, clears all the contents in the
ARP table items and interrupts the services. Hence, exercise caution when performing this
operation.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
448
NOTE
Click Delete to delete the contents of the static ARP table items.
----End
9.19 Configuring the NE-Level TPID
When the request VLAN function is enabled, PW-carried Ethernet services function properly
only if the TPIDs in the request VLAN tags of the Ethernet services are the same at both ends
of a PW.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the required NE and then choose Configuration > Packet
Configuration > TPID Configuration from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Set TPID(Hexadecimal).
Step 3 Click Apply.
----End
9.20 Creating a QinQ Link
In the case of the QinQ link, a layer of VLAN tag is added to the packets that are accessed over
a port, through QinQ encapsulation. Hence, the packets from different VLANs on the user-side
network can be encapsulated and then transmitted to the same VLAN on the transport network.
In this manner, the VLAN resources on the transport network are saved. Both the E-Line service
and E-LAN service can be carried by the QinQ links on the network side.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l The Layer 2 attributes of the port on the QinQ link must be set and the encapsulation mode
must be the QinQ mode.
l If the QoS parameters of the QinQ link need to be set, the QinQ policy must be configured
first.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Packet Configuration >
Ethernet Service Management > QinQ Link from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click New. Then, the New QinQ Link window is displayed.
Step 3 Click the General Attributes tab. Set QinQ Link ID, Board, Port and S-Vlan ID.
Step 4 Click the QoS tab and set the QoS-related parameters. For details about the parameters, see
10.12 Parameter Description: QinQ Link Configuration Parameters.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
449
NOTE
If Bandwidth Limit is set to Enabled, you can set Committed Information Rate(kbit/s) and Peak
Information Rate(kbit/s) for the QinQ link. Alternatively, you can select a QoS policy directly in
Policy. Before selecting a policy, you need to create the policy first.
Step 5 Click OK.
----End
9.21 Creating a V-UNI Group
Creating a V-UNI group involves selecting the V-UNI group members and setting the overall
bandwidth of V-UNI members. The overall bandwidth in the V-UNI group can be restrained by
creating the V-UNI group.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l Multiple Ethernet services must be created.
l The PIR value of the V-UNI group must be set to a value that is higher than or equal to the
sum of the CIR values of the V-UNI members.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Packet Configuration >
Ethernet Service Management > V-UNI Group from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click New. Then, the NEW V-UNI Group dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set V-UNI Group ID, V-UNI Group Type, PIR(kbit/s), and PBS(byte).
Step 4 Select the port to be added. Click to add the port to the Selected Interface list. For
details about the parameters, see 10.4.11 V-UNI Group.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
450
NOTE
l The ports on an interface board can be configured into the same V-UNI group.
l The ports of a V-UNI group must be on the same board.
Step 5 Click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is
successful. Click Close.
----End
9.22 Managing the Blacklist
The blacklist is used to discard the data frame that contains the specified destination MAC
address. Managing a blacklist involves configuring disabled MAC addresses.
Prerequisites
l E-LAN services are configured.
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the created E-LAN service and click the Disabled MAC Address tab.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
451
Step 2 Click New.
Step 3 In the dialog box that is displayed, set VLAN ID and MAC Address.
Step 4 Click OK.
----End
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 9 Configuration Task Collection
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
452
10 Parameter Description
About This Chapter
This topic describes the parameters related to the Ethernet services.
10.1 Parameter Description: Attributes of Ethernet Interface
The attributes of the Ethernet interface include the general attributes, Layer 2 attributes, Layer
3 attributes, advanced attributes and flow control.
10.2 Parameter Description: MPLS
This section describes the parameters related to the MPLS management.
10.3 Parameter Description: E-Line Service
This topic describes the parameters related to the ELine service configuration.
10.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service
This topic describes the parameters related to the E-LAN Service configuration.
10.5 Parameter Description: E-AGGR Service
This topic describes the parameters related to the E-AGGR service configuration.
10.6 Parameter Description: CES Port
Before configuring a CES service, you must configure the CES port.
10.7 Parameter Description: CES Services
This section describes parameters for CES services.
10.8 Parameter Description: ATM/IMA Services
This section describes parameters for ATM/IMA services.
10.9 Parameter Description: MPLS OAM
The MPLS OAM mechanism can be used to effectively detect, confirm, and locate internal
defects that occur on the MPLS layer network, and monitor the network performance.
10.10 Parameter Description: MPLS Tunnel APS
This topic describes the parameters related to the MPLS Tunnel APS.
10.11 Parameter Description: Inband DCN
In this interface, you can manage DCN.
10.12 Parameter Description: QinQ Link Configuration Parameters
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 10 Parameter Description
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
453
This topic describes the parameters related to QinQ links.
10.13 Parameter Description: Address Parse
This topic describes the parameters, such as ARP List IP, ARP List MAC, and ARP List
Type, for configuring the address parse function.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 10 Parameter Description
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
454
10.1 Parameter Description: Attributes of Ethernet Interface
The attributes of the Ethernet interface include the general attributes, Layer 2 attributes, Layer
3 attributes, advanced attributes and flow control.
10.1.1 General Attributes
This topic describes the parameters for configuring the general attributes of an Ethernet port.
The parameters include Port Mode, Enable Port, and Encapsulation Type.
Table 10-1 lists the parameters for configuring the general attributes of an Ethernet port.
Table 10-1 Parameters for configuring the general attributes of an Ethernet port
Field Value Description
Port For example, 21-N1PETF8-1
(Port-1)
Indicates the port name.
Name For example, Port1 User-defines a port name.
Enable Port Enabled, Disabled.
Default: Enabled
The Enable Port parameter
sets whether the Ethernet port
is usable.
Click A.1.3 Enable Port
(Ethernet Interface) for
more information.
Port Mode Layer 2, Layer 3 Selects the working mode of
the Ethernet port.
Layer 2: The port can access
the user-side equipment or
carry Ethernet services that
use the port exclusively.
Layer 3: The port can carry
tunnels.
Encapsulation Type Null, 802.1Q, QinQ
Default: For details, see
configuration guidelines.
The Encapsulation Type
parameter sets the link layer
encapsulation type of the
port, and specifies the link
layer encapsulation type that
can be identified by this port.
Click A.1.4 Encapsulation
Type(Ethernet Interface)
for more information.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 10 Parameter Description
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
455
Field Value Description
Working Mode 10M Half-Duplex, 10M Full-
Duplex, Auto-Negotiation,
100M Half-Duplex, 100M
Full-Duplex, 1000M Full-
Duplex, 10G Full-Duplex
LAN, 10G Full-Duplex
WAN
Default: Auto-Negotiation
Set the Working Mode
parameter to set the working
mode of the Ethernet port on
the board. The Working
Mode parameter indicates
the maximum transmission
rate and communication
mode of a port.
CAUTION
When configuring a service, set
Working Mode to the same
value if possible for the port and
its interconnected port.
Otherwise, the service may fail.
Click A.1.5 Working Mode
(Ethernet Interface) for
more information.
Max Frame Length (byte) For OptiX OSN 3500/7500:
960 to 9600
For other products: 960 to
9000
Default: 1620
The maximum frame length
is also the maximum
transport unit (MTU).
Click A.1.6 Max Frame
Length(byte) for an
Ethernet Port for more
information.

10.1.2 Flow Control
This topic describes the parameters, such as autonegotiation and non-autonegotiation, which are
used for configuring flow control function of a Packet Ethernet port.
Table 10-2 lists the parameters for configuring flow control of a Packet Ethernet port.
Table 10-2 Parameters for configuring flow control of a Packet Ethernet port
Field Value Range Description
Port For example: 2-N1PEG8-1
(PORT-1)
Display the port name.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 10 Parameter Description
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
456
Field Value Range Description
Non-Autonegotiation
Flow Control Mode
Disabled, Enable Symmetric
Flow Control, Send Only,
Receive Only
If the working mode of the port
is Non-Autosensing, you can
only choose the Non-
Autonegotiation Flow
Control Mode.
l Disabled: The port disables
the flow control function
(in both the transmit and
receive directions).
l Enable Symmetric Flow
Control: The port
transmits flow control
frames and also responds to
flow control frames.
l Send Only: The port only
transmits flow control
frames.
l Receive Only: The port
only responds to flow
control frames.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 10 Parameter Description
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
457
Field Value Range Description
Auto-Negotiation Flow
Control Mode
Disabled, Enable
Dissymmetric Flow Control,
Enable Symmetric Flow
Control, Enable Symmetric/
Dissymmetric Flow Control
If the working mode of the port
is Auto-Negotiation, you can
only choose the Auto-
Negotiation Flow Control
Mode.
l Disabled: Indicates that the
flow control function of the
port is disabled. (The flow
control function at both the
transmit and receive
directions is disabled.)
l Enable Dissymmetric
Flow Control: Indicates
that the dissymmetric flow
control function is enabled
in the auto-negotiation
state. (The flow control
frames can be transmitted,
but the received flow
control frames are not
responded. The flow
control mode used is
determined by auto-
negotiation.)
l Enable Symmetric Flow
Control: Indicates that the
symmetric flow control
function is enabled in the
auto-negotiation state. (The
flow control frames can be
transmitted, and the
received flow control
frames are responded. The
flow control mode used is
determined by auto-
negotiation.)
l Enable Symmetric/
Dissymmetric Flow
Control: Indicates that the
symmetric/dissymmetric
flow control function is
enabled in the auto-
negotiation state. (The flow
control mode used is
determined by auto-
negotiation.)
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 10 Parameter Description
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
458
Field Value Range Description
NOTE
The GE ports on packet Ethernet
boards support the setting of
Auto-Negotiation Flow Control
Mode, but only receive flow
control frames. The ETMC board
and the 10GE ports on packet
Ethernet boards do not support
the setting of Auto-Negotiation
Flow Control Mode.

10.1.3 Layer 2 Attributes
This topic describes the parameters for configuring the Layer 2 attributes of an Ethernet port.
The parameters include QinQ Type Domain, Tag, Default VLAN ID, and VLAN Priority
Table 10-3 lists the parameters for configuring the Layer 2 attributes of an Ethernet port.
Table 10-3 Parameters for configuring the Layer 2 attributes of an Ethernet port
Field Value Description
Port For example, 21-N1PETF8-1
(Port-1)
Displays the port name.
QinQ Type Domain 0x0600 to 0xFFFE
NOTE
For the PEG8, PEX2, PEX1,
and EDQ41, this parameter can
be set only to 0x88A8.
Sets the QinQ type domain.
This parameter is available
only when you set
Encapsulation Type in
General Attributes to
QinQ.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 10 Parameter Description
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
459
Field Value Description
Tag Tag Aware, Access, Hybrid Indicates which type of
packets can be processed.
Tag Aware: The port
transparently transmits the
packet with a VLAN ID
(tagged). If a packet does not
have a VLAN ID (untagged),
the port discards this packet.
In this case, Default VLAN
ID and VLAN Priority are
meaningless.
Access: The port adds the
default VLAN ID to the
packet without any VLAN ID
(untagged). If the packet has
a VLAN ID (tagged), the port
discards this packet.
Hybrid: The port adds the
default VLAN ID to the
packet without any VLAN ID
(untagged). If the packet has
a VLAN ID (tagged), the port
transparently transmits the
packet.
This parameter is unavailable
when you set Encapsulation
Type in General Attributes
to QinQ.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 10 Parameter Description
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
460
Field Value Description
Default VLAN ID 1 to 4094 Sets the default VLAN ID of
packets that passes through
the port.
When you set Tag to
Access, packets that have a
VLAN ID the same as the
default VLAN ID are
discarded, and packets
without a VLAN are tagged
with the default VLAN ID
and then pass the port.
When you set Tag to
Hybrid, tagged packets are
allowed to pass, and
untagged packets are tagged
with the default VLAN ID
and then pass the port.
NOTE
If an MPLS tunnel needs to
traverse a Layer 2 network, set
the VLAN IDs for the tunnels
connected to the NNI ports at
both ends to the same value
according to the VLAN
planning requirements on the
Layer 2 network.
VLAN Priority 0 to 7 Sets the QoS level. When the
network is busy, packets of a
higher VLAN priority are
processed first and those of a
lower VLAN priority may be
discarded. 0 indicates the
lowest priority and 7 the
highest.

10.1.4 Layer 3 Attributes
This topic describes the parameters for configuring the Layer 3 attributes of an Ethernet port.
The parameters include Enable Tunnel, Specify IP, IP Address, and IP Mask
Table 10-4 lists the parameters for configuring the Layer 3 attributes of an Ethernet port.
Table 10-4 Parameters for configuring the Layer 3 attributes of an Ethernet port
Field Value Description
Port For example, 21-N1PETF8-1
(Port-1)
Displays the port name.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 10 Parameter Description
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
461
Field Value Description
Enable Tunnel Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
The Enable Tunnel
(Ethernet Interface)
parameter sets the MPLS
enabling state of the port.
When Enable Tunnel is set
to Enabled, it indicates that
the port can identify and
process the MPLS label.
Click A.1.7 Enable Tunnel
(Ethernet Interface)for
more information.
Specify IP Manually, Unspecified
Default: Unspecified
The Specify IP parameter,
set by port, indicates the
method of specifying the IP
address parameter of a
specified port.
Click A.1.8 Specify IP
(Ethernet Interface) for
more information.
IP Address For example, 192.168.0.1 Sets the IP address for the
port.
IP Mask For example, 255.255.255.0 Sets the subnet mask of the
port.

10.1.5 Advanced Attributes
This topic describes the parameters for configuring the advanced attributes of an Ethernet port.
The parameters include Port Physical parameters, MAC Loopback, and Loopback Check
Table 10-5 lists the parameters for configuring the advanced attributes of an Ethernet port.
Table 10-5 Parameters for configuring the advanced attributes of an Ethernet port
Field Value Description
Port For example, 21-N1PETF8-1
(Port-1)
Displays the port name.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 10 Parameter Description
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
462
Field Value Description
Port Physical parameters For example:
l Port Enable: Enabled
l Working Mode: Auto-
Negotiation
l Non-Autonegotiation
Flow Control Mode:
Disabled
l MAC Loopback: Non-
Loopback
l PHY Loopback: Non-
Loopback
Displays physical parameters
of the port.
MAC Loopback Non-Loopback, Inloop,
Outloop
Sets the loopback state of the
MAC layer.
PHY Loopback Non-Loopback, Inloop,
Outloop
Default: Non-Loopback
The PHY Loopback
parameter indicates the
loopback status of the
physical layer of an Ethernet
port. This parameter is an
advanced attribute of the
Ethernet port.
Click A.1.2 PHY Loopback
(Ethernet Interface) for
more information.
MAC Address For example,
00-5A-3D-03-4C-1B
Default: FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-
FF
Displays the MAC address of
the port.
Transmitting Rate(kbit/s) For example, 1024 Displays the rate at which
packets are transmitted.
Receiving Rate(kbit/s) For example, 1024 Displays the rate at which
packets are received.
Loopback Check Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Sets loop detection.
When this function is
enabled, the equipment
automatically checks
whether a loop is generated
on the link. If a loop is
generated, the related alarm
is reported.
Currently, the OptiX OSN
equipment does not support
this function.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 10 Parameter Description
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
463
Field Value Description
Loopback Port Block Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Sets the automatic shutdown
of the port.
When Loopback Check is
set to Enabled and
Loopback Port Block is set
to Enabled, the equipment
automatically checks
whether a loop is generated
on the link. If a loop is
generated, the port is
automatically shut down to
release the loop.

10.2 Parameter Description: MPLS
This section describes the parameters related to the MPLS management.
10.2.1 Basic Configuration
This topic describe the parameter for basic MPLS configuration.
Table 10-6 lists the parameter for basic MPLS configuration.
Table 10-6 Parameter for the basic configuration
Field Value Description
LSR ID For example, 10.70.73.156 In a PSN network, each NE is
allocated with a unique LSR
ID.

10.2.2 Parameters for Configuring a Static Tunnel (on a Per-NE
Basis)
A static tunnel may be unidirectional or bidirectional.
Table 10-7 lists the parameters for configuring a static tunnel.
Table 10-7 Parameters for configuring a static tunnel
Field Value Range Description
Tunnel ID For example, 1 Displays or specifies the
tunnel ID.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 10 Parameter Description
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
464
Field Value Range Description
Tunnel Name For example, name1
NOTE
The tunnel name contains a
maximum of 64 bytes.
Displays or specifies the
name of the tunnel.
Node Type Ingress, Egress, Transit Displays the type of a node.
l Ingress: ingress node
l Egress: egress node
l Transit: pass-through
node
Direction Unidirectional, Bidirectional Displays the direction of the
tunnel.
For a unidirectional tunnel,
Direction is Unidirectional
by default. For a bidirectional
tunnel, Direction is
Bidirectional by default.
Committed Information Rate
(Kbit/s)
1024-10000000, Unlimited
Default: 4294967295
(FFFFFFFFFF is invalid)
The Committed
Information Rate (Kbit/s)
parameter specifies the CIR
of the queue. The packets
whose rates are less than the
CIR can be forwarded. When
the rate of the packets is not
more than the CIR, all
messages can be forwarded.
If the rate of the packets is
more than the CIR, some
packets are discarded
according to a certain packet
discarding policy.
Click A.10.26 Committed
Information Rate (Kbit/s)
for more information.
CBS(bytes) - The CBS(byte) parameter
specifies the committed burst
size.
NOTE
This parameter is currently not
applicable to a static tunnel
configured on a per-NE basis.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 10 Parameter Description
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
465
Field Value Range Description
PIR(kbit/s) - The PIR(Kbit/s) parameter
specifies the maximum rate
of services allowed, also
called the peak information
rate (PIR).
NOTE
This parameter is currently not
applicable to a static tunnel
configured on a per-NE basis.
PBS(bytes) - The PBS(byte) parameter
specifies the peak burst size
(PBS).
NOTE
This parameter is currently not
applicable to a static tunnel
configured on a per-NE basis.
In Board/Logic Interface
Type
Slot ID-Board name Displays or specifies the
ingress board or the logic
interface type.
In Port For example, 2(PORT-2) Displays or specifies the
ingress port of the tunnel.
This parameter can be set for
only the egress node and the
transit node.
In Label For example, 17
NOTE
The value ranges from 16 to
32768.
For the OptiX OSN 1500, the
maximum value is 2048. For the
OptiX OSN 3500/7500, the
maximum value is 32768.
Displays and specifies the
ingress label of the tunnel.
The ingress label must be
unique on the entire network.
This parameter can be set for
only the egress node and the
transit node.
Ingress label is supported
only when the equipment is
configured with a
unidirectional tunnel.
Forward In Label For example, 17
NOTE
The value ranges from 16 to
32768.
For the OptiX OSN 1500, the
maximum value is 2048. For the
OptiX OSN 3500/7500, the
maximum value is 32768.
Displays or specifies the
ingress label of the tunnel.
NOTE
If the OptiX OSN equipment is
configured with a bidirectional
tunnel, Forward Out Label
can be set but Forward In
Label cannot be set.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 10 Parameter Description
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
466
Field Value Range Description
Reverse Out Label For example, 18
NOTE
The value ranges from 16 to
32768.
For the OptiX OSN 1500, the
maximum value is 2048. For the
OptiX OSN 3500/7500, the
maximum value is 32768.
Displays or specifies the
egress label of the tunnel.
NOTE
If the OptiX OSN equipment is
configured with a bidirectional
tunnel, Reverse In Label can
be set but Reverse Out Label
cannot be set.
Out Board/Logic Interface
Type
Slot ID-Board name Displays or specifies the
egress board or the logic
interface type.
Out Port For example, 2(PORT-2) Displays or specifies the
egress port of the tunnel.
This parameter can be set for
only the egress node and the
transit node.
Out Label For example, 19
NOTE
The value ranges from 16 to
32768.
For the OptiX OSN 1500, the
maximum value is 2048. For the
OptiX OSN 3500/7500, the
maximum value is 32768.
Displays and specifies the
egress label of the tunnel. The
egress label must be unique
on the entire network.
This parameter can be set for
only the egress node and the
transit node.
Egress label is supported
only when the equipment is
configured with a
unidirectional tunnel.
Forward Out Label For example, 20
NOTE
The value ranges from 16 to
32768.
For the OptiX OSN 1500, the
maximum value is 2048. For the
OptiX OSN 3500/7500, the
maximum value is 32768.
Displays or specifies the
egress label of the tunnel.
This function is supported
only when the equipment is
configured with a
bidirectional tunnel.
Reverse In Label For example, 70
NOTE
The value ranges from 16 to
32768.
For the OptiX OSN 1500, the
maximum value is 2048. For the
OptiX OSN 3500/7500, the
maximum value is 32768.
Displays or specifies the
ingress label of the tunnel.
Ingress label is supported
only when the equipment is
configured with a
bidirectional tunnel.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 10 Parameter Description
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
467
Field Value Range Description
Next Hop Address For example, 192.168.0.2 Displays or specifies the
address of the next hop of the
tunnel.
This parameter can be set
only for the ingress node and
transit node.
This function is supported
only when the equipment is
configured with a
unidirectional tunnel.
Forward Next Hop Address For example, 192.168.0.3 Displays or specifies the
address of the next hop of the
tunnel.
This function is supported
only when the equipment is
configured with a
bidirectional tunnel.
Reverse Next Hop Address For example, 192.168.0.4 Displays or specifies the
address of the next hop of the
tunnel.
NOTE
If the OptiX OSN equipment is
configured with a bidirectional
tunnel, Forward Next Hop
Address can be set but Reverse
Next Hop Address cannot be
set.
Source Node For example, 192.168.0.5 Displays or specifies the
source node of the tunnel.
A source node can be
specified only for the egress
node and transit node.
Sink Node For example, 192.168.0.6 Displays or specifies the sink
node of the tunnel.
A sink node can be specified
only for the ingress node and
transit node.
Tunnel Type E-LSP Displays the tunnel type.
EXP 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, None
Default: None
The EXP parameter specifies
the field in the MPLS packets
for identifying the priority of
these MPLS packets.
Click A.10.30 EXP for more
information.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 10 Parameter Description
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
468
Field Value Range Description
LSP Mode Pipe, Uniform
Default: Uniform
The LSP Mode parameter
specifies the mode in which
the MPLS network processes
packet priorities.
Click A.10.31 LSP Mode for
more information.
MTU(bytes) - Specifies the MTU value of
MPLS packets. When MTU
is 0, there is no restriction on
the MPLS MTU. If the MPLS
MTU needs to be restricted,
the MPLS MTU must be set
larger than the MTU of the
physical ports where the
tunnel is located.
NOTE
This parameter is currently not
applicable to a static tunnel
configured on a per-NE basis.

10.2.3 Parameters for Configuring a Static Tunnel (End-to-End
Mode)
This topic describes the parameters, such as the enabling status, label and type, for configuring
a static tunnel.
Table 10-8 Parameters for configuring a static tunnel
Field Value Range Description
Tunnel Name For example, Tunnel 1 Specifies the name of the
tunnel.
Reverse Tunnel Name For example, Tunnel1_RVS Specifies the name of the
Reverse tunnel.
Protocol Type MPLS Specifies the protocol type
used by the tunnel.
Signaling Type Static Specifies the signaling type
of the tunnel.
This parameter is
configurable only when you
set Protocol Type to MPLS.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 10 Parameter Description
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
469
Field Value Range Description
Remarks For example, NE(9-7032)-
NE(9-7037)
Specifies the remarks.
Remarks for a specific tunnel
facilitate management and
maintenance of the tunnel.
Create Reverse Tunnel Checked, Unchecked If Create Reverse Tunnel is
checked, a reverse tunnel is
created when a forward
tunnel is created. If Create
Reverse Tunnel is
unchecked, only a forward
tunnel is created.
Create Bidirectional Tunnel Sets the value by clicking the
check box.
Checked, Unchecked
Specifies the tunnel as a
bidirectional tunnel.
If Create Bidirectional
Tunnel is checked, a tunnel
contains a forward path and a
reverse path. No extra port
configurations are required.
Create Protection Group Sets the value by clicking the
check box.
Checked, Unchecked
If Create Protection
Group is checked, a
corresponding tunnel
protection group is created
when tunnel 1 is created.
Auto Calculate Route Sets the value by clicking the
check box.
Checked, Unchecked
Default: Checked
If Auto Calculate Route is
checked, the system
automatically computes the
route after you select the
source node and sink node
and specify the NEs as
explicit/inexplicit nodes in
the physical topology.
NOTE
This function is supported only
by the OptiX OSN 1500 and the
single-slot boards on the OptiX
OSN 3500/7500.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 10 Parameter Description
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
470
Field Value Range Description
Restriction Bandwidth (Kbit/
s)
1024-1024000, No Limit
Default: No Limit
Specifies the upper
bandwidth limit.
When automatically
computing a route, the NMS
checks whether the computed
route meets the requirement
of Restriction Bandwidth
(Kbit/s).
This parameter is available
only when Auto Calculate
Route is checked.
Deploy Sets the value by clicking the
check box.
Checked, Unchecked
Default: Checked
Saves the tunnel
configuration on the NMS
and delivers the
configuration to NEs during
tunnel deployment.
Enable Sets the value by clicking the
check box.
Checked, Unchecked
Default: Checked
Automatically enables the
tunnel during tunnel
deployment.

Table 10-9 Parameters for configuring a static tunnel
Field Value Range Description
Tunnel ID For example, 1 Displays or specifies the
tunnel ID.
Tunnel Name For example, name1
NOTE
The tunnel name contains a
maximum of 64 bytes.
Displays or specifies the
name of the tunnel.
Node Type Ingress, Egress, Transit Displays the type of a node.
l Ingress: ingress node
l Egress: egress node
l Transit: pass-through
node
Direction Unidirectional, Bidirectional Displays the direction of the
tunnel.
For a unidirectional tunnel,
Direction is Unidirectional
by default. For a bidirectional
tunnel, Direction is
Bidirectional by default.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 10 Parameter Description
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
471
Field Value Range Description
Committed Information Rate
(Kbit/s)
1024-10000000, Unlimited
Default: 4294967295
(FFFFFFFFFF is invalid)
The Committed
Information Rate (Kbit/s)
parameter specifies the CIR
of the queue. The packets
whose rates are less than the
CIR can be forwarded. When
the rate of the packets is not
more than the CIR, all
messages can be forwarded.
If the rate of the packets is
more than the CIR, some
packets are discarded
according to a certain packet
discarding policy.
Click A.10.26 Committed
Information Rate (Kbit/s)
for more information.
CBS(bytes) - The CBS(byte) parameter
specifies the committed burst
size.
NOTE
This parameter is currently not
applicable to a static tunnel
configured on a per-NE basis.
PIR(kbit/s) - The PIR(Kbit/s) parameter
specifies the maximum rate
of services allowed, also
called the peak information
rate (PIR).
NOTE
This parameter is currently not
applicable to a static tunnel
configured on a per-NE basis.
PBS(bytes) - The PBS(byte) parameter
specifies the peak burst size
(PBS).
NOTE
This parameter is currently not
applicable to a static tunnel
configured on a per-NE basis.
In Board/Logic Interface
Type
Slot ID-Board name Displays or specifies the
ingress board or the logic
interface type.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 10 Parameter Description
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
472
Field Value Range Description
In Port For example, 2(PORT-2) Displays or specifies the
ingress port of the tunnel.
This parameter can be set for
only the egress node and the
transit node.
In Label For example, 17
NOTE
The value ranges from 16 to
32768.
For the OptiX OSN 1500, the
maximum value is 2048. For the
OptiX OSN 3500/7500, the
maximum value is 32768.
Displays and specifies the
ingress label of the tunnel.
The ingress label must be
unique on the entire network.
This parameter can be set for
only the egress node and the
transit node.
Ingress label is supported
only when the equipment is
configured with a
unidirectional tunnel.
Forward In Label For example, 17
NOTE
The value ranges from 16 to
32768.
For the OptiX OSN 1500, the
maximum value is 2048. For the
OptiX OSN 3500/7500, the
maximum value is 32768.
Displays or specifies the
ingress label of the tunnel.
NOTE
If the OptiX OSN equipment is
configured with a bidirectional
tunnel, Forward Out Label
can be set but Forward In
Label cannot be set.
Reverse Out Label For example, 18
NOTE
The value ranges from 16 to
32768.
For the OptiX OSN 1500, the
maximum value is 2048. For the
OptiX OSN 3500/7500, the
maximum value is 32768.
Displays or specifies the
egress label of the tunnel.
NOTE
If the OptiX OSN equipment is
configured with a bidirectional
tunnel, Reverse In Label can
be set but Reverse Out Label
cannot be set.
Out Board/Logic Interface
Type
Slot ID-Board name Displays or specifies the
egress board or the logic
interface type.
Out Port For example, 2(PORT-2) Displays or specifies the
egress port of the tunnel.
This parameter can be set for
only the egress node and the
transit node.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 10 Parameter Description
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
473
Field Value Range Description
Out Label For example, 19
NOTE
The value ranges from 16 to
32768.
For the OptiX OSN 1500, the
maximum value is 2048. For the
OptiX OSN 3500/7500, the
maximum value is 32768.
Displays and specifies the
egress label of the tunnel. The
egress label must be unique
on the entire network.
This parameter can be set for
only the egress node and the
transit node.
Egress label is supported
only when the equipment is
configured with a
unidirectional tunnel.
Forward Out Label For example, 20
NOTE
The value ranges from 16 to
32768.
For the OptiX OSN 1500, the
maximum value is 2048. For the
OptiX OSN 3500/7500, the
maximum value is 32768.
Displays or specifies the
egress label of the tunnel.
This function is supported
only when the equipment is
configured with a
bidirectional tunnel.
Reverse In Label For example, 70
NOTE
The value ranges from 16 to
32768.
For the OptiX OSN 1500, the
maximum value is 2048. For the
OptiX OSN 3500/7500, the
maximum value is 32768.
Displays or specifies the
ingress label of the tunnel.
Ingress label is supported
only when the equipment is
configured with a
bidirectional tunnel.
Next Hop Address For example, 192.168.0.2 Displays or specifies the
address of the next hop of the
tunnel.
This parameter can be set
only for the ingress node and
transit node.
This function is supported
only when the equipment is
configured with a
unidirectional tunnel.
Forward Next Hop Address For example, 192.168.0.3 Displays or specifies the
address of the next hop of the
tunnel.
This function is supported
only when the equipment is
configured with a
bidirectional tunnel.
OptiX OSN 7500 II/7500/3500/1500
Configuration Guide (Packet Transport Domain) 10 Parameter Description
Issue 03 (2013-02-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
474
Field Value Range Description
Reverse Next Hop Address For example, 192.168.0.4 Displays or specifies the
address of the next hop of the
tunnel.
NOTE
If the OptiX OSN equipment is
configured with a bidirectional
tunnel, Forward Next Hop
Address can be set but Reverse
Next Hop Address cannot be
set.
Source Node For example, 192.1